diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderIdConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderIdConfig.md index a48fe97c5b..81bcb35fbc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderIdConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderIdConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the Sender ID configuration on t ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderReputationConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderReputationConfig.md index 8bec50233b..e4512448d3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderReputationConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SenderReputationConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the sender reputation configurat ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerComponentState.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerComponentState.md index 357deadb5d..8f7f96e303 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerComponentState.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerComponentState.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the component state of the Unified ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to view the configuration settings. You can use the following values: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Component -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Component parameter specifies the component or endpoint for which you want to retrieve the state. To see the available values, run the following command: `Get-ServerComponentState `. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerHealth.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerHealth.md index 19532a3368..5b71ddbc7c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerHealth.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerHealth.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example returns the server health for server Server01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HaImpactingOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HaImpactingOnly switch specifies whether the cmdlet must roll up only the monitors that have HaImpacting set to True. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HealthSet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HealthSet parameter returns the health state of a group of monitors. Monitors that are similar or are tied to a component's architecture are grouped to form a health set. You can determine the collection of monitors (and associated probes and responders) in a given health set by using the Get-MonitoringItemIdentity cmdlet. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerMonitoringOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerMonitoringOverride.md index afcf7555af..720886c80d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerMonitoringOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ServerMonitoringOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example retrieves all monitoring overrides for the Exch01 server. ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SettingOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SettingOverride.md index 3a53168c56..017e066e64 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SettingOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SettingOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example displays a detailed information for the setting override object nam ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the setting override that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the override. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SharingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SharingPolicy.md index 8f7acb12f7..86326ea869 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SharingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SharingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves the full information for the sharing policy Fabrikam. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the sharing policy that you want to view. You can use one of the following values: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailbox.md index 72d4c05408..e6cecbe607 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example queries for site mailboxes that are marked for deletion and removes ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the site mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassOwnerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassOwnerCheck parameter is used when the account that's running the command isn't a member or owner of the site mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeletedSiteMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeletedSiteMailbox switch returns site mailboxes that have been marked for pending deletion. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxDiagnostics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxDiagnostics.md index 89878ddd9b..d1fc25520b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxDiagnostics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxDiagnostics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example returns the event information for the Marketing Events 2015 site ma ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the site mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the site mailbox. For example: @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassOwnerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassOwnerCheck parameter is used when the account that's running the command isn't a member or owner of the site mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendMeEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendMeEmail switch specifies that the diagnostic information is sent to the primary SMTP email address of the user account that's running the command. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md index aa2e7109d2..5f5dcbe69b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example returns detailed information about the site mailbox provisioning po ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the site mailbox provisioning policy that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SmimeConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SmimeConfig.md index 248d152e27..ba46b91d68 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SmimeConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SmimeConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This example shows the S/MIME configuration that's used with Outlook on the web. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-StoreUsageStatistics.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-StoreUsageStatistics.md index df48bbb8a6..8fb4dd1461 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-StoreUsageStatistics.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-StoreUsageStatistics.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This example retrieves store usage statistics for database DB1 and sorts the out ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox to get usage statistics from. You can use one of the following values to identify the mailbox: @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter specifies the name of the mailbox database to get usage statistics from (the top 25 largest mailboxes on the specified mailbox database). You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox database. For example: @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Mailbox server to get usage statistics from (the top 25 mailboxes on all active databases on the specified server). You can use one of the following values to identify the server: @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyOnServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CopyOnServer parameter specifies the mailbox database copy to get usage statistics from. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox database. For example: @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludePassive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludePassive switch specifies whether to include usage statistics from active and passive copies of mailbox databases on the Mailbox server you specified with the Server parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SweepRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SweepRule.md index 55817a5d14..da057d7310 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SweepRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SweepRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the Sweep rule with the specified ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Sweep rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassScopeCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassScopeCheck switch specifies whether to bypass the scope check for the user that's running the command. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter filters the results by the specified mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Provider -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Provider parameter filters the results by the specified provider. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SystemMessage.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SystemMessage.md index f04bf393c2..e1fe24a3eb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SystemMessage.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-SystemMessage.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ You should output the list to a file, because the list is very long, and you get ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the custom system message that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the system message. For example: @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Original -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Original switch filters the results by the default system messages that are included with Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TextMessagingAccount.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TextMessagingAccount.md index 929df3f676..6991b2a2b4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TextMessagingAccount.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TextMessagingAccount.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example finds all user mailboxes where text messaging notifications are ena ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicy.md index 43844b9234..3425dedb68 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example displays the parameters and values for throttling policy Throttling ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter identifies the name of the throttling policy that you want to return settings for. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Diagnostics -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Diagnostics switch specifies whether you want the output to include the diagnostics string. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Explicit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Explicit switch specifies whether to return only the policy settings that have been directly assigned using this policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicyScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThrottlingPolicyScope parameter specifies the scope of the throttling policy. You can use the following values: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md index 8ba0ee4aea..96ab8b7745 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This example returns detailed information for the throttling policy association ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the throttling policy association that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the throttling policy association. For example: @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThrottlingPolicy parameter filters the results by throttling policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the throttling policy. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportAgent.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportAgent.md index 1be1f2f60b..6d15812ff3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportAgent.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportAgent.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example displays detailed information about the Transport Rule agent that's ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the display name of the transport agent to be displayed. The length of the name can't exceed 64 characters. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportService -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportService parameter specifies the transport service that you want to view or modify. Valid values for this parameter are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportConfig.md index ffef43d5a4..aae5714bfc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example lists all delivery status notification-related (DSN) configuration ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportPipeline.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportPipeline.md index 31d4c51174..75dccf9a86 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportPipeline.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportPipeline.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example returns a list of agents registered in the transport pipeline, with ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRule.md index 00a45e85c7..8a2eecaadb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example returns a summary list of all rules that e ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -State -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The State parameter specifies filters the results by enabled or disabled rules. Valid values are: @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DlpPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter filters the results by using an OPATH. This parameter searches the Description property, which includes the conditions, exceptions, actions and the associated values of a transport rule. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRuleAction.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRuleAction.md index 5d266e9ba2..e68c4223b8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRuleAction.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRuleAction.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ For more information about pipelining, see [About Pipelines](https://learn.micro ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the action that you want to view. To see the list of available names, run the command Get-TransportRuleAction. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRulePredicate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRulePredicate.md index 0a039b0a93..bf8df73ee2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRulePredicate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportRulePredicate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ For more information about how to work with the output of a command, see [Workin ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the predicate that you want to view. To see the list of available names, run the command Get-TransportRulePredicate. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportServer.md index c4e3d2faa6..03fbc9ba82 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example retrieves the detailed transport configuration information for the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Transport server that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportService.md index 2f68807ab2..dde404dc0d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-TransportService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example retrieves the detailed transport configuration information for the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Mailbox server that hosts the Transport service configuration you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Trust.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Trust.md index a188003b37..0ebb762b37 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Trust.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-Trust.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example enumerates all trusts for the domain Contoso.com. ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies that trusts returned are restricted to the domain name specified. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-User.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-User.md index 1c78f20404..6d70b49b80 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-User.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-User.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -104,9 +104,9 @@ This example uses the Filter parameter to retrieve information about all users t ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection -The Identity parameter the user that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: +The Identity parameter specifies the user that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: - Name - User principal name (UPN) @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuxAuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance The PublicFolder switch is required to return public folder mailboxes in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientTypeDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientTypeDetails parameter filters the results by the specified user subtype. Valid values are: @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Sortby -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SupervisoryReviewPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPhoto.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPhoto.md index fe70eb0bcf..14e09ae227 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPhoto.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPhoto.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ This example displays information about the user photo that was uploaded to Pila ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the user account. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user account. For example: @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Anr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Anr parameter specifies a string on which to perform an ambiguous name resolution (ANR) search. You can specify a partial string and search for objects with an attribute that matches that string. The default attributes searched are: @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Credential parameter specifies the username and password that's used to run this command. Typically, you use this parameter in scripts or when you need to provide different credentials that have the required permissions. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter uses OPATH syntax to filter the results by the specified properties and values. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GroupMailbox switch is required to return Microsoft 365 Groups in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhotoType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Preview -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Preview switch filters the results by preview photos. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadFromDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReadFromDomainController switch specifies that information should be read from a domain controller in the user's domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SortBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SortBy parameter specifies the property to sort the results by. You can sort by only one property at a time. The results are sorted in ascending order. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPrincipalNamesSuffix.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPrincipalNamesSuffix.md index a33308cebd..6430bf259d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPrincipalNamesSuffix.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-UserPrincipalNamesSuffix.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example returns all UPN suffixes for the Active Directory forest. ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrganizationalUnit parameter filters the results based on the object's location in Active Directory. Only objects that exist in the specified location are returned. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md index da0f74a7e0..9d9c09075b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This example returns a summary list of all virtual directories in the client acc ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the EWS virtual directory that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADPropertiesOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ADPropertiesOnly switch specifies whether to return only the virtual directory properties that are stored in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowMailboxVirtualDirectories switch shows information about backend virtual directories on Mailbox servers. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md index a16c7bb305..c236807d50 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Get-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ This example displays detailed information about the X.400 authoritative domain ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies a string value for the X.400 authoritative domain. Enter either the GUID or the name of the remote domain. @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyCollection.md index 52656dd2d1..bbfb2641f2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example imports the DLP policy collection in the file C:\\My Documents\\DLP ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DLP policy you want to import. The DLP policy must exist in the XML file you specify with the FileData parameter. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the DLP policy collection file you want to import. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyTemplate.md index 812c878550..1399990e4d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-DlpPolicyTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example imports the DLP policy template file C:\\My Documents\\External DLP ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileData parameter specifies the DLP policy template file you want to import. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-ExchangeCertificate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-ExchangeCertificate.md index 506ea14827..69bbc1e97c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-ExchangeCertificate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-ExchangeCertificate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ This example imports a chain of certificates from the PKCS #7 file C:\\Certifica ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileData parameter specifies the contents of the certificate file that you want to import. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Instance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FriendlyName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FriendlyName parameter specifies a friendly name for the certificate. The value must be less than 64 characters. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Password parameter specifies the password that's required to import the certificate. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateKeyExportable -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PrivateKeyExportable parameter specifies whether the certificate has an exportable private key and controls whether you can export the certificate from this server. Valid values are: @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-JournalRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-JournalRuleCollection.md index 66936d5797..103cbbca56 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-JournalRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-JournalRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example imports journal rules from the XML file named ExportedJournalRules. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of a journal rule to be imported. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileData parameter specifies the XML file that contains the exported journal rule collection from the Export-JournalRuleCollection cmdlet. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-RecipientDataProperty.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-RecipientDataProperty.md index 772de76e50..abff75dbab 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-RecipientDataProperty.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-RecipientDataProperty.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example imports the picture file for Ayla Kol. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox or contact that you're adding the picture or spoken name file to. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the picture or spoken name file that you want to import. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Picture -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Picture switch specifies that you're importing the user's picture file. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SpokenName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SpokenName switch specifies that you're importing the user's spoken name file. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-TransportRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-TransportRuleCollection.md index cb5499437f..8da3bcf345 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-TransportRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Import-TransportRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example imports a transport rule collection from the XML file named Exporte ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FileData parameter specifies the XML file that contains the exported transport rule collection from the Export-TransportRuleCollection cmdlet. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Install-TransportAgent.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Install-TransportAgent.md index b05098dde5..cabaefff7e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Install-TransportAgent.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Install-TransportAgent.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example shows how a fictitious application named Test App is installed in t ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the display name of the transport agent to be installed. The length of the name can't exceed 64 characters. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssemblyPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AssemblyPath parameter specifies the location of the transport agent Microsoft.NET assembly. Universal Naming Convention (UNC) file paths can't be used. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportAgentFactory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportAgentFactory parameter specifies the Microsoft.NET class type of the transport agent factory. The developer of the transport agent being installed provides the transport agent factory and related information. For more information, see the documentation provided by the developer of the transport agent. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportService -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportService parameter specifies the transport service that you want to view or modify. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-ComplianceSearchActionStep.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-ComplianceSearchActionStep.md index 815fd65f2d..e32f56a522 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-ComplianceSearchActionStep.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-ComplianceSearchActionStep.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ This cmdlet is reserved for internal Microsoft use. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance This cmdlet is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance This cmdlet is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Step -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance This cmdlet is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-MonitoringProbe.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-MonitoringProbe.md index 62068c483c..62251f7198 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-MonitoringProbe.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Invoke-MonitoringProbe.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example creates an Exchange ActiveSync monitoring probe on the EX1 server. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the monitoring probe to run. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Account -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Account parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or user account that's used to run the monitoring probe. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Endpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Endpoint parameter specifies the name of the monitoring probe endpoint to connect to, for example, contoso.mail.com. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemTargetExtension -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ItemTargetExtension parameter specifies cmdlet extension data that you can pass to the monitoring probe. The probe that runs on the server might require specific data for its execution. This data is presented to the probe on execution in an XML format. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Password parameter specifies the password of the mailbox or user account that's used to run the monitoring probe. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PropertyOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PropertyOverride parameter specifies a property that you want to override, for example, to set the time-out value to be extended beyond the default value. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SecondaryAccount parameter specifies the identity of the delegate mailbox or user account that's used to run the monitoring probe. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SecondaryEndpoint parameter specifies the name of the secondary monitoring probe endpoint to connect to, for example, contoso.mail.fabrikam.com. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SecondaryPassword parameter specifies the password of the delegate mailbox or user account that's used to run the monitoring probe. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeOutSeconds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TimeOutSeconds parameter specifies the monitoring operation time-out period. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Mount-Database.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Mount-Database.md index 041d064d31..ab7bc9a6e9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Mount-Database.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Mount-Database.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example mounts the database MyDatabase. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies mailbox database that you want to mount. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptDataLoss switch specifies that you accept the data loss caused by missing committed transaction log files without asking for confirmation. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewCapacity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NewCapacity switch specifies that you want to trigger the forced creation of a database only if all copies of the database don't have an .edb file. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-ActiveMailboxDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-ActiveMailboxDatabase.md index 34ab7820b4..f5020e52c7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-ActiveMailboxDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-ActiveMailboxDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ This example performs a server switchover for the Mailbox server MBX1. All activ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox database that you want to activate. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the server that you want to move all active mailbox databases from. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivatePreferredOnServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActivatePreferredOnServer parameter specifies the Mailbox server where you want to activate all mailbox databases that have copies with an ActivationPreference value of 1. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivateOnServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActivateOnServer parameter specifies the name of the Mailbox server on which the mailbox database copy should be activated. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipAllChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipAllChecks switch specifies whether to skip all checks. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MountDialOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MountDialOverride parameter is used to override the auto database mount dial (AutoDatabaseMountDial) setting for the target server and specify an alternate setting. Valid value are: @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveAllDatabasesOrNone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MoveAllDatabasesOrNone switch specifies whether to prevent any databases from moving if a single active database on the server can't be moved. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MoveComment parameter specifies an optional administrative reason for the move operation. The comment is recorded in the Event log. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipActiveCopyChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipActiveCopyChecks switch specifies whether to skip checking the current active copy to see if it's currently a seeding source for any passive databases. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipClientExperienceChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipClientExperienceChecks switch specifies whether to skip the search catalog (content index) state check to see if the search catalog is healthy and up to date. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipCpuChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipCpuChecks switch specifies whether to skip the high CPU utilization checks. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipHealthChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipHealthChecks switch specifies whether to bypass passive copy health checks. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipLagChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipLagChecks switch specifies whether to allow a copy to be activated that has replay and copy queues outside of the configured criteria. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMaximumActiveDatabasesChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMaximumActiveDatabasesChecks switch specifies whether to skip checking the value of MaximumPreferredActiveDatabases during the best copy and server selection (BCSS) process. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoveSuppressionChecks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMoveSuppressionChecks switch specifies whether to skip the move suppression checks. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TerminateOnWarning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TerminateOnWarning switch specifies whether to terminate the task and output an error message if a warning is encountered during the switchover operation. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-AddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-AddressList.md index fa8ea18b19..9892cff13c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-AddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-AddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example moves the address list with GUID c3fffd8e-026b-41b9-88c4-8c21697ac8 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the address list that you want to move. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Target -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Container parameter specifies where to move the address list. Valid input for this parameter is under the root "\\" (also known as All Address Lists) or under an existing address list. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-DatabasePath.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-DatabasePath.md index 529019505c..bd0bd4b690 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-DatabasePath.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-DatabasePath.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example sets a new path for the mailbox database specified by the mailbox d ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the database that you want to move. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationOnly switch specifies whether to change the configuration of the database without moving any files. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EDBFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdbFilePath parameter specifies a new file path for the database. All current database files are moved to this location. The default location is `%ExchangeInstallPath%Mailbox\LocalCopies\MBDatabase.edb`. This file path can't be the same as the path for the backup copy of the database. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFolderPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFolderPath parameter specifies the folder where log files are stored. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EDBFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdbFilePath parameter specifies a new file path for the database. All current database files are moved to this location. The default location is ``%ExchangeInstallPath%Mailbox\LocalCopies\MBDatabase.edb`. This file path can't be the same as the path for the backup copy of the database. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-OfflineAddressBook.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-OfflineAddressBook.md index a9ca973abe..68e4449b9b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-OfflineAddressBook.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Move-OfflineAddressBook.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example moves OAB generation in Exchange 2010 to the server named Server1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID, distinguished name (DN), or OAB name that represents a specific OAB. You can also include the path by using the format Server\\OfflineAddressBookName. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AcceptedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AcceptedDomain.md index bd520684c0..06426431a7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AcceptedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AcceptedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example creates the new authoritative accepted domain Contoso. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the accepted domain object. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies the SMTP domain that you want to establish as an accepted domain. Valid input for the DomainName parameter is an SMTP domain. You can use a wildcard character to specify all subdomains of a specified domain, as shown in the following example: \*.contoso.com. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainType parameter specifies the type of accepted domain that you want to configure. Valid values are Authoritative, InternalRelay or ExternalRelay. You must set at least one value. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md index 831cfa333c..f8372ace21 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example creates a device access rule that uses the UserAgent characteristic ### -AccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccessLevel parameter specifies the access level of devices that are defined by the rule. Valid values for this parameter are Allow, Block and Quarantine. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Characteristic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Characteristic parameter specifies the device characteristic or category that's used by the rule. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueryString -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The QueryString parameter specifies the device identifier that's used by the rule. This parameter uses a text value that's used with Characteristic parameter value to define the device. Wildcards or partial matches aren't allowed. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md index 2b7ff6ccd4..139dad571a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ This example creates the Mobile Device mailbox policy Contoso that has several p ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the policy. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBluetooth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBluetooth parameter specifies whether the Bluetooth capabilities of the mobile phone are allowed. The available options are Disable, HandsfreeOnly, and Allow. The default value is Allow. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBrowser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBrowser parameter specifies whether Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer is allowed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't affect non-Microsoft browsers. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCamera -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowCamera parameter specifies whether the mobile phone's camera is allowed. The default value is $true. @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConsumerEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConsumerEmail parameter specifies whether the mobile phone user can configure a personal email account on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowDesktopSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowDesktopSync parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can synchronize with a desktop computer through a cable. The default value is $true. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowExternalDeviceManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowExternalDeviceManagement parameter specifies whether an external device management program is allowed to manage the device. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowHTMLEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowHTMLEmail parameter specifies whether HTML email is enabled on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowInternetSharing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowInternetSharing parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can be used as a modem to connect a computer to the Internet. The default value is $true. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIrDA -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowIrDA parameter specifies whether infrared connections are allowed to the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowMobileOTAUpdate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowMobileOTAUpdate parameter specifies whether certain updates are seen by devices that implemented support for this restricting functionality. Further control can be specified via the MobileOTAUpdateMode parameter. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNonProvisionableDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online When set to $true, the AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter enables all devices to synchronize with the computer running Exchange, regardless of whether the device can enforce all the specific settings established in the Mobile Device mailbox policy. This also includes devices managed by a separate device management system. When set to $false, this parameter blocks these devices that aren't provisioned from synchronizing with the server running Exchange. The default value is $false. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowPOPIMAPEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowPOPIMAPEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a POP3 or IMAP4 email account on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRemoteDesktop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRemoteDesktop parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can initiate a remote desktop connection. The default value is $true. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSimpleDevicePassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSimpleDevicePassword parameter specifies whether a simple device password is allowed. A simple device password is a password that has a specific pattern, such as 1111 or 1234. The default value is $true. @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation parameter specifies whether the messaging application on the device can negotiate the encryption algorithm in case a recipient's certificate doesn't support the specified encryption algorithm. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMESoftCerts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMESoftCerts parameter specifies whether S/MIME software certificates are allowed. The default value is $true. @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowStorageCard -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowStorageCard parameter specifies whether the device can access information stored on a storage card. The default value is $true. @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowTextMessaging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowTextMessaging parameter specifies whether text messaging is allowed from the device. The default value is $true. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedApplications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedApplications parameter specifies whether unsigned applications can be installed on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages parameter specifies whether unsigned installation packages can be run on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowWiFi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowWiFi parameter specifies whether wireless Internet access is allowed on the device. The default value is $true. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlphanumericDevicePasswordRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlphanumericDevicePasswordRequired parameter specifies whether the device password must be alphanumeric. The default value is $false. @@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApprovedApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApprovedApplicationList parameter specifies a list of approved applications for the device. @@ -570,7 +570,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether the user can download attachments. When set to $false, the user is blocked from downloading attachments. The default value is $true. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeviceEncryptionEnabled parameter, when set to $true, enables device encryption on the mobile phone. The default value is $false. Currently, only the storage card can be encrypted on devices running Windows Mobile 6.0 or later. We recommend that you don't use this setting and use the RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter instead. @@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online When set to $true, the DevicePasswordEnabled parameter specifies that the user set a password for the device. The default value is $false. @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordExpiration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordExpiration parameter specifies the length of time, in days, that a password can be used. After this length of time, a new password must be created. The format of the parameter is dd.hh.mm:ss, for example, 24.00:00 = 24 hours. @@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordHistory parameter specifies the number of previously used passwords to store. When a user creates a password, the user can't reuse a stored password that was previously used. @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePolicyRefreshInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePolicyRefreshInterval parameter specifies how often the policy is sent from the server to the mobile phone @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IrmEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) is enabled for the mailbox policy. @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default Mobile Device mailbox policy. The default value is $false. If another policy is currently set as the default, setting this parameter replaces the old default policy with this policy. @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefaultPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default Mobile Device mailbox policy. The default value is $false. If another policy is currently set as the default, setting this parameter replaces the old default policy with this policy. @@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAttachmentSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxAttachmentSize parameter specifies the maximum size of attachments that can be downloaded to the mobile phone. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -791,7 +791,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCalendarAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxCalendarAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum range of calendar days that can be synchronized to the device. Valid values are: @@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxDevicePasswordFailedAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxDevicePasswordFailedAttempts parameter specifies the number of attempts a user can make to enter the correct password for the device. You can enter any number from 4 through 16. The default value is 8. @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum number of days of email items to synchronize to the device. @@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which email messages are truncated when synchronized to the device. The value is specified in kilobytes (KB). @@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which HTML-formatted email messages are synchronized to the device. The value is specified in KB. @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock parameter specifies the length of time that the device can be inactive before the password is required to reactivate the device. You can enter any interval between 30 seconds and 1 hour. The default value is 15 minutes. The format of the parameter is hh.mm:ss, for example, 15:00 = 15 minutes. @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinDevicePasswordComplexCharacters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinDevicePasswordComplexCharacters parameter specifies the minimum number of complex characters required in a device password. A complex character isn't a letter. @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinDevicePasswordLength -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinDevicePasswordLength parameter specifies the minimum number of characters in the device password. You can enter any number from 1 through 16. The maximum length a password can be is 16 characters. The default value is 4. @@ -952,7 +952,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether you can store the recovery password for the device on an Exchange server. When set to $true, you can store the recovery password for the device on an Exchange server. The default value is $false. The recovery password can be viewed from either Outlook on the web or the Exchange admin center. @@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireDeviceEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireDeviceEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption is required on the device. The default value is $false. @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether you must encrypt S/MIME messages. The default value is $false. @@ -1006,7 +1006,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies what required algorithm must be used when encrypting a message. @@ -1024,7 +1024,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming parameter specifies whether the device must synchronize manually while roaming. The default value is $false. @@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies what required algorithm must be used when signing a message. @@ -1060,7 +1060,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the device must send signed S/MIME messages. @@ -1078,7 +1078,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireStorageCardEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption of a storage card is required. The default value is $true. @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnapprovedInROMApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UnapprovedInROMApplicationList parameter specifies a list of applications that can't be run in ROM. @@ -1114,7 +1114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UNCAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows file shares is enabled. Access to specific shares is configured on the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1150,7 +1150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WSSAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services is enabled. Access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md index ff2968558b..57c9747043 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example creates an Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory for the company Fo ### -ApplicationRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationRoot parameter specifies the metabase path of the virtual directory. By default, this path is the same as the website in which the virtual directory is created. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter specifies the IIS application pool in which the virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAuthenticationMethods parameter restricts the authentication methods that can be used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. Valid values are: @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstallProxySubDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InstallProxySubDirectory parameter was used to create an subdirectory that was required for proxying ActiveSync connections with Exchange 2007. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalAuthenticationMethods parameter restricts the authentication methods that can be used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. Valid values are: @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter specifies the file system path of the virtual directory. We recommend using this parameter only when you need to use a custom location for the virtual directory files. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates the default location is used. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressBookPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressBookPolicy.md index 36f586f9a4..f9491f7295 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressBookPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressBookPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example creates an address book policy with the following settings: ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the address book policy. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressLists -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressLists parameter specifies the address lists for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalAddressList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GlobalAddressList parameter specifies the GAL for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the GAL. For example: @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OfflineAddressBook parameter specifies the OAB for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OAB. For example: @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RoomList parameter specifies an address list that used for location experiences for mailbox users who have this address book policy assigned to them. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressList.md index 8c147fdbe2..a87dfe3fdd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ This example creates the address list AL\_AgencyB that includes mailboxes that h ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the new address list. The maximum length is 64 characters, and it can't include a carriage return or a backslash (\\). If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Container -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Container parameter specifies where to create the address list. Valid input for this parameter is under the root "\\" (also known as All Address Lists) or under an existing address list. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the address list. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressRewriteEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressRewriteEntry.md index 0d8d06f58d..6512dfd601 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressRewriteEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AddressRewriteEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example creates an address rewrite entry that rewrites all email addresses ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for this address rewrite entry. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAddress parameter specifies the final email addresses that you want. If the InternalAddress parameter specifies a single email address (chris@contoso.com), the ExternalAddress parameter must also specify a single email address (support@contoso.com). If the InternalAddress parameter specifies a single domain (contoso.com) or a domain and all subdomains (\*.contoso.com), the ExternalAddress parameter must specify a single domain (fabrikam.com). @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalAddress parameter specifies the original email addresses that you want to change. You can use the following values: @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptionList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExceptionList parameter specifies the email address domains that shouldn't be rewritten when the InternalAddress parameter contains the wildcard character to rewrite addresses in a domain and all subdomains (\*.contoso.com). You can enter multiple domain values in the ExceptionList parameter separated by commas. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutboundOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutboundOnly parameter enables or disables outbound-only address rewriting. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The value $true means address rewriting occurs in outbound mail only. The value $false means address rewriting occurs on outbound mail and also on inbound mail (rewritten email addresses are changed back to the original email addresses in inbound mail). The default value is $false. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AdminAuditLogSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AdminAuditLogSearch.md index 18a80d3e96..19b0cf5723 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AdminAuditLogSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AdminAuditLogSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example returns entries in the administrator audit log of an Exchange Onlin ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The StatusMailRecipients parameter specifies the recipients that should receive the administrator audit log report. The recipient must be a valid SMTP address. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Cmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Cmdlets parameter specifies the cmdlets you want to search for in the administrator audit log. Only the log entries that contain the cmdlets you specify are returned. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalAccess parameter returns only audit log entries for cmdlets that were run by a user outside of your organization. In Exchange Online, use this parameter to return audit log entries for cmdlets run by Microsoft datacenter administrators. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the administrator audit log search. The name is shown in the subject line of the audit log report email message. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ObjectIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ObjectIds parameter specifies that only administrator audit log entries that contain the specified changed objects should be returned. This parameter accepts a variety of objects, such as mailboxes, aliases, Send connector names and so on. @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Parameters parameter specifies the parameters you want to search for in the administrator audit log. Only the log entries that contain the parameters you specify are returned. You can only use this parameter if you use the Cmdlets parameter. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The UserIds parameter specifies that only the administrator audit log entries that contain the specified ID of the user who ran the cmdlet should be returned. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-App.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-App.md index 89e31054bb..30d95ae4f1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-App.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-App.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowReadWriteMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowReadWriteMailbox switch specifies whether the app allows read/write mailbox permission. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultStateForUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultStateForUser parameter specifies the default initial state of an organization app. Valid values are: @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DownloadOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DownloadOnly switch specifies whether to get the app manifest file and prompt the user for confirmation before committing to actual installation. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the app is available to users in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Etoken -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the location of the app manifest file. You need to specify only one source location for the app manifest file. You can specify the app manifest file by using the MarketplaceServicesUrl, Url, or FileData parameter. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileStream -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileStream parameter is used only by the Exchange admin center to support the app file uploader. Don't use this parameter to specify the app manifest file. You can specify the app manifest file by using the MarketplaceServicesUrl, Url or FileData parameter. @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox where you want to install the app. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceAssetID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceAssetID parameter specifies the Office Store identifier for the app. You need to use this parameter if you use theMarketplaceServicesUrl parameter. @@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceCorrelationID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceCorrelationID parameter specifies the Office Store correlation identifier for the app. @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceQueryMarket -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceQueryMarket parameter specifies the locale that an app is filed under at the office marketplace. For example, an app for the United States market in English uses the value en-US. The default value is en-US. @@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceServicesUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceServicesUrl parameter specifies the full services URL for the app. You need to specify only one source location for the app manifest file. You can specify the app manifest file by using the MarketplaceServicesUrl, Url or FileData parameter. @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarketplaceUserProfileType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MarketplaceUserProfileType parameter specifies the user profile type for the Office Store. @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationApp -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationApp switch specifies that the scope of the app is organizational (not bound to a specific user). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrivateCatalog switch specifies whether the app is located in a private catalog. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProvidedTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProvidedTo parameter specifies the availability of the app in your organization. Valid values are: @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Url -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Url parameter specifies the full URL location of the app manifest file that you want to install. You need to specify only one source location for the app manifest file. You can specify the app manifest file by using the MarketplaceServicesUrl, Url or FileData parameter. @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserList parameter specifies who can use an organizational app. This parameter is limited to 1000 users. In the cloud-based service, this value is less relevant as Office Add-in management is moving to [Centralized Deployment](https://learn.microsoft.com/office/dev/add-ins/publish/centralized-deployment). @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthRedirect.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthRedirect.md index 4b5e2d74af..d1e633e1c3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthRedirect.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthRedirect.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example creates an OAuth redirection object with the following settings: ### -AuthScheme -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthScheme parameter specifies the authentication scheme that's used by the authentication redirection object. Typically, this value is Bearer. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetUrl parameter specifies the FQDN of the Exchange Client Access Server that's responsible for processing the redirected OAuth authentication requests. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthServer.md index 7b361bd869..5099979d85 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This command creates an authorization server object with the specified settings. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the authorization server object. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthMetadataUrl parameter specifies the URL for the Microsoft 365 authorization server for your cloud-based organization. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Type parameter specifies the type of authorization tokens that are issued by the authorization server. Valid values are: @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available in the April 18, 2025 Hotfix update (HU) for Exchange 2019 CU15 and Exchange 2016 CU23. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in Exchange Server 2016 (CU18 or higher) and Exchange Server 2019 (CU7 or higher). @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the authorization server is enabled. Valid values are: @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustAnySSLCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TrustAnySSLCertificate switch allows Exchange to accept certificates from untrusted certification authorities (CAs). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthenticationPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthenticationPolicy.md index a0774f7214..7859c4f25f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthenticationPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AuthenticationPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ In Exchange 2019, this example creates a new authentication policy named Researc ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the authentication policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthAutodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthImap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthMapi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthOfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthPop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthRpc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthWebServices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthAutodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthImap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthMapi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthOfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthPop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthRpc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthWebServices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md index 044ee90f33..b1efe2e9ee 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example creates the virtual directory autodiscover under the website autodi ### -ApplicationRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationRoot parameter specifies the metabase path of the virtual directory. By default, this path is the same as the website in which the virtual directory is created. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter specifies the IIS application pool in which the virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OAuthAuthentication parameter specifies whether OAuth authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter specifies the file system path of the virtual directory. We recommend using this parameter only when you need to use a custom location for the virtual directory files. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates the default location is used. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSecurityAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WSSecurityAuthentication parameter specifies whether WS-Security (Web Services Security) authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClassificationRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClassificationRuleCollection.md index 3c89147d16..66d655e57c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClassificationRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClassificationRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example imports the classification rule collection file C:\\My Documents\\E ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the classification rule collection file you want to import. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClientAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClientAccessRule.md index ee0bc3376f..23ba2b0095 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClientAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ClientAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ This example creates a new client access rule named Block ActiveSync that blocks ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the client access rule. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Action parameter specifies the action for the client access rule. Valid values for this parameter are AllowAccess and DenyAccess. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges parameter specifies a condition for the client access rule that's based on the client's IPv4 or IPv6 address. Valid values are: @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfProtocols -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AnyOfProtocols parameter specifies a condition for the client access rule that's based on the client's protocol. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the client access rule is enabled or disabled. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptAnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptAnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges parameter specifies an exception for the client access rule that's based on the client's IPv4 or IPv6 address. Valid values are: @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptUsernameMatchesAnyOfPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, the value 0 is the highest priority, and rules can't have the same priority value. @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Scope parameter specifies the scope of the client access rule. Valid values are: @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsernameMatchesAnyOfPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: True ### -UserRecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearch.md index d3311f357a..1d65d88cca 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example creates a new compliance search named AnnBeebe-InactiveMailbox that ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Name parameter specifies the name of the compliance search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNotFoundExchangeLocationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The AllowNotFoundExchangeLocationsEnabled parameter specifies whether to include mailboxes other than regular user mailboxes in the compliance search. Valid values are: @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentMatchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ContentMatchQuery parameter specifies a content search filter. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Description parameter specifies an optional description for the compliance search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ExchangeLocation parameter specifies the mailboxes to include. Valid values are: @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeLocationExclusion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Language parameter specifies the language for the compliance search. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearchAction.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearchAction.md index bb12c6f155..e8e407d23b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearchAction.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSearchAction.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ This example exports the results returned by the content search named "Case 321 ### -SearchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The SearchName parameter specifies the name of the existing content search to associate with the content search action. You can specify multiple content searches separated by commas. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeArchiveFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Export -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileTypeExclusionsForUnindexedItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Format -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this parameter requires the Export role. By default, this role is assigned only to the eDiscovery Manager role group. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The IncludeCredential switch specifies whether to include the credential in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JobOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotifyEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotifyEmailCC -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Preview -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this parameter requires the Preview role. By default, this role is assigned only to the eDiscovery Manager role group. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Purge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this switch is available only in the Search and Purge role. By default, this role is assigned only to the Organization Management and Data Investigator role groups. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PurgeType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this parameter is available only in the Search and Purge role. By default, this role is assigned only to the Organization Management and Data Investigator role groups. @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReferenceActionName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Region -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Report -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetryOnError -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The RetryOnError switch specifies whether to retry the action on any items that failed without re-running the entire action all over again. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scenario -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance In Security & Compliance PowerShell, this parameter requires the Preview role. By default, this role is assigned only to the eDiscovery Manager role group. @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharePointArchiveFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance **Note**: After May 26, 2025, this parameter is no longer functional. For more information, see [Upcoming changes to Microsoft Purview eDiscovery](https://techcommunity.microsoft.com/blog/microsoft-security-blog/upcoming-changes-to-microsoft-purview-ediscovery/4405084). @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShareRootPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Version -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md index fb2266e405..f5a9a1faf0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ This example prevents the user from performing any compliance search actions on ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Action parameter specifies that type of search action that the filter is applied to. Valid values are: @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The FilterName parameter specifies the name for the compliance security filter. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Users -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Users parameter specifies the user who gets this filter applied to their searches. Valid values are: @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Description parameter specifies a description for the compliance security filter. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Filters parameter specifies the search criteria for the compliance security filter. The filters are applied to the users specified by the Users parameter. You can create three different types of filters: @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Region -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Region parameter specifies the satellite location for multi-geo tenants to conduct eDiscovery searches in. Valid values are: @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DataClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DataClassification.md index 4fd215d87d..814dda3ec9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DataClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DataClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example creates a new data classification rule named "Contoso Employee-Cust ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the data classification rule. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fingerprints -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Fingerprints parameter specifies the byte-encoded files to use as document fingerprints. You can use multiple document fingerprints separated by commas. For instructions on how to import documents to use as templates for fingerprints, see [New-Fingerprint](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/exchangepowershell/new-fingerprint) or the Examples section. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the data classification rule. The value must be less than 256 characters. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClassificationRuleCollectionIdentity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Locale parameter specifies the language that's associated with the data classification rule. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index dbe1a8d9f5..ef1b7794e4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example creates a DAG named DAG3. DAG3 is configured to use SERVER1 for the ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the new DAG of up to 15 characters. The name you use must not conflict with any computer name in the organization. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityState -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DagConfiguration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter specifies one or more static IPv4 addresses to the DAG when a Mailbox server is added to a DAG. If you specify the value Any or 0.0.0.0, the system attempts to lease one or more IPv4 addresses from a DHCP server to assign to the DAG. If you don't use this parameter, or if you specify the value 255.255.255.255 or None, the DAG is created without a cluster administrative access point. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileSystem -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileSystem parameter specifies the file system that's used for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThirdPartyReplication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThirdPartyReplication parameter specifies to configure and enable a DAG to use non-Microsoft replication that leverages the Exchange Third Party Replication API instead of the built-in continuous replication. Valid values are Enabled and Disabled. After this mode is enabled, it can't be changed. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WitnessDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WitnessDirectory parameter specifies the name of the directory on the witness server used to store file share witness data. The directory and share should be hosted on an Exchange server other than any of the Mailbox servers in the DAG. This allows an Exchange administrator to maintain operational control over the directory. The specified directory can't be used by any other DAGs, or used for any purpose other than for the witness server. If you don't use this parameter, the default witness directory is used. @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WitnessServer parameter specifies the name of a server used as a quorum witness when the DAG contains an even number of members. The specified server can't be a member of the DAG that's configured to use it. A stand-alone Mailbox server, or a Mailbox server in another DAG is recommended. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md index 002a7d6101..03792b5b80 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example creates the DAG network DAG1Repl in the DAG DAG1. A subnet of 10.0. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the DAG network being created. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseAvailabilityGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseAvailabilityGroup parameter specifies the name of the DAG that'll use the network being created. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Description parameter specifies an optional description of up to 256 characters for the DAG network being created. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreNetwork -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreNetwork parameter excludes the DAG network from use by the DAG. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplicationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplicationEnabled parameter specifies whether the DAG network being created is enabled for continuous replication. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Subnets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Subnets parameter specifies the subnets for the DAG network being created. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DeliveryAgentConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DeliveryAgentConnector.md index 3320d9ce11..40b22a450d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DeliveryAgentConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DeliveryAgentConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ The address space for the connector is c=US;a=Fabrikam;p=Contoso. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of this delivery agent connector. The value for the Name parameter can't exceed 64 characters. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names that the delivery agent connector is responsible for. The complete syntax for entering an address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. Enclose each address space in quotation marks ("). @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryProtocol -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeliveryProtocol parameter specifies the communication protocol that determines which delivery agents are responsible for servicing the connector. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the delivery agent connector is enabled. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers. If the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in your organization. If the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can only be used by Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. The default value is $false. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections this connector accepts from a specific IP address. The default value is 5. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that's allowed to pass through this connector. When you enter a value, qualify the value with one of the following units: @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessagesPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessagesPerConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of messages this connector accepts per connection. The connector terminates the connection after this limit is reached, and the sending server has to initiate a new connection to send more messages. The default value is 20. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the list of Mailbox servers that host this connector. You can specify more than one server by separating their names with commas. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DistributionGroup.md index a8e5f0ae79..d42dea38c6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ This example creates a distribution group named ITDepartment and specifies the m ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassNestedModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ByPassNestedModerationEnabled parameter specifies how to handle message approval when a moderated group contains other moderated groups as members. Valid values are: @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyOwnerToMember -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CopyOwnerToMember switch specifies whether group owners specified by the ManagedBy parameter are also members of the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreNamingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IgnoreNamingPolicy switch specifies whether to prevent this group from being affected by your organization's group naming policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies an owner for the group. A group must have at least one owner. If you don't use this parameter to specify the owner when you create the group, the user account that created the group is the owner. The group owner is able to: @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MemberDepartRestriction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MemberDepartRestriction parameter specifies the restrictions that you put on requests to leave the group. Valid values are: @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MemberJoinRestriction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MemberJoinRestriction parameter specifies the restrictions that you put on requests to join the group. Valid values are: @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Members -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Members parameter specifies the recipients (mail-enabled objects) that are members of the group. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this group. A moderator approves messages sent to the group before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Notes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Notes parameters specifies additional information about the object. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the location in Active Directory where the group is created. @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RoomList switch specifies that all members of this distribution group are room mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Type parameter specifies the type of group that you want to create. Valid values are: @@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DlpPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DlpPolicy.md index e366f86920..fb92390c12 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DlpPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DlpPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example creates a new DLP policy named Contoso PII with the following value ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the DLP policy. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies an optional description for the DLP policy. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mode parameter specifies the action and notification level of the DLP policy. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Parameters parameter specifies the parameter values that are required by the DLP policy template that you specify using the Template or TemplateData parameters. DLP policy templates might contain parameters that need to be populated with values from your organization. For example, a DLP policy template might include an exception group that defines users who are exempt from the DLP policy. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -State -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The State parameter enables or disables the DLP policy. Valid input for this parameter is Enabled or Disabled. By default, a new DLP policy that you create is enabled. If you want to create a disabled DLP policy, specify the value Disabled for this parameter. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Template -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Template parameter specifies the existing DLP policy template from which you can create a new DLP policy. You can't use the Template and TemplateData parameters in the same command. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TemplateData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TemplateData parameter specifies an external DLP policy template file from which you can create a new DLP policy. You can't use the TemplateData and Template parameters in the same command. @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DynamicDistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DynamicDistributionGroup.md index 97a2f8867f..4cf94192f6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DynamicDistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-DynamicDistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ This example creates a dynamic distribution group named Washington Management Te ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the dynamic distribution group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the dynamic distribution group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -712,7 +712,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) where the dynamic distribution group is created. @@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientContainer parameter specifies a filter that's based on the recipient's location in Active Directory. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EcpVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EcpVirtualDirectory.md index d7db96a683..825155ed1e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EcpVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EcpVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example creates the ECP virtual directory on the Exchange server named Serv ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter sets the IIS application pool where the ECP virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter sets the file system path of the ECP virtual directory. This parameter should be used with care and only when you must use a different file system path than the default. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website where the ECP virtual directory is created. @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSubscription.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSubscription.md index 0f3c1a24b3..4732c31488 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSubscription.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSubscription.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ This example also imports the Edge Subscription file generated in Example 1 to t ### -AccountExpiryDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AccountExpiryDuration parameter specifies how soon the EdgeSync bootstrap replication account (ESBRA) created by this command expires. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateInboundSendConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CreateInboundSendConnector parameter specifies whether to create the Send connector to connect the Edge Transport server and the Hub Transport servers. The default value is $true. The Send connector address space is set to "--", the smart hosts are set to "--", the Edge Transport server is set as the source server and Domain Name System (DNS) routing is disabled. This parameter is only used when you run the command on the Hub Transport server. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateInternetSendConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CreateInternetSendConnector parameter specifies whether to create the Send connector to connect to the Internet. The default value is $true. The Send connector address space is set to all domains (\*), the Edge Transport server is set as the source server, and DNS routing is enabled. This parameter is only used when you run the command on the Hub Transport server. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileData parameter specifies the byte-encoded data object that contains the Edge Subscription file information. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileName parameter specifies the full path of the Edge Subscription file. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Site -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Site parameter specifies the name of the Active Directory site that contains the Mailbox servers with which the Edge Transport servers are associated. This parameter is used and required only when you run the command on a Mailbox server. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md index c64ac8e72c..3558c79196 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ This example creates EdgeSync service settings with the following configuration: ### -ConfigurationSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationSyncInterval parameter specifies how frequently the EdgeSync service synchronizes configuration data. The default value is 3 minutes. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CookieValidDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CookieValidDuration parameter specifies how long a cookie record is valid. The default value is 21 days. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FailoverDCInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FailoverDCInterval parameter specifies how long EdgeSync waits before failing over to another domain controller if it can't read configuration data from Active Directory. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LockDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LockDuration parameter specifies how long an instance of the EdgeSync service can maintain an exclusive lock on the synchronization rights. While an EdgeSync service maintains an exclusive lock on synchronization rights, no other EdgeSync service can take over synchronization. The default value is 6 minutes. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LockRenewalDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LockRenewalDuration parameter specifies how long before the expiry of an exclusive lock an EdgeSync service can renew the lock. The default value is 4 minutes. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogEnabled parameter enables or disables the EdgeSync log. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogLevel parameter specifies the EdgeSync logging level. Valid values are: @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum duration in days to keep the EdgeSyncLog files. Log files older than the specified value can be overwritten. The default value is 30 days. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum amount of disk space the EdgeSyncLog directory can use. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum log file size for the EdgeSyncLog files. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogPath parameter specifies the default location for the EdgeSyncLog files. The default value is TransportRoles\\Logs\\EdgeSync\\. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OptionDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OptionDuration parameter specifies how long an instance of the EdgeSync service can maintain an optional lock on synchronization rights. While an EdgeSync service maintains an optional lock on synchronization rights, another EdgeSync service can take over synchronization after the optional lock has expired if it's initiated using the Start-EdgeSynchronization command. The default value is 30 minutes. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientSyncInterval parameter specifies how frequently the EdgeSync service synchronizes recipient data from the global catalog. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Site -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Site parameter specifies the Active Directory site that EdgeSync connects to for synchronizing configuration and recipient data. @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EmailAddressPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EmailAddressPolicy.md index aaa242cc86..47015880ec 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EmailAddressPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-EmailAddressPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ This example creates an email address policy in an on-premises Exchange organiza ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the email address policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledEmailAddressTemplates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EnabledEmailAddressTemplates parameter specifies the rules in the email address policy that are used to generate email addresses for recipients. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledPrimarySMTPAddressTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EnabledPrimarySMTPAddressTemplate parameter specifies the rule in the email address policy that's used to generate the primary SMTP email addresses for recipients. You can use this parameter instead of the EnabledEmailAddressTemplates if the policy only applies the primary email address and no additional proxy addresses. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -644,7 +644,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisabledEmailAddressTemplates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies the order that the email address policies are evaluated. By default, every time that you add a new email address policy, the policy is assigned a priority of N+1, where N is the number of email address policies that you've created. @@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeCertificate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeCertificate.md index 9c2195d866..34bd153ff5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeCertificate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeCertificate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ This example creates a new DER encoded (binary) certificate renewal request file ### -BinaryEncoded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BinaryEncoded switch specifies whether to encode the new certificate request by using Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies one or more FQDNs or server names for theSubject Alternative Name field (also known as the Subject Alt Name or SAN field) of the certificate request or self-signed certificate. @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FriendlyName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FriendlyName parameter specifies a friendly name for the certificate request or self-signed certificate. The value must be less than 64 characters. @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenerateRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GenerateRequest switch specifies that you're creating a certificate request for a certification authority (CA). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeAcceptedDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeAcceptedDomains switch specifies that all accepted domains in the Exchange organization are included in the Subject Alternative Name field of the certificate request or self-signed certificate. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeAutoDiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeAutoDiscover switch specifies whether to add a Subject Alternative Namevalue with the prefix autodiscover for each accepted domain in the Exchange organization. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeServerFQDN -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeServerFQDN switch specifies that the FQDN of the Exchange server is included in the Subject Alternative Name field of the new certificate request or self-signed certificate. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeServerNetBIOSName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeServerNetBIOSName switch specifies that the NetBIOS name of the Exchange server is included in the Subject Alternative Name field of the new certificate request or self-signed certificate. You don't need to specify a value with this switch @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Instance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -KeySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The KeySize parameter specifies the size (in bits) of the RSA public key that's associated with the new certificate request or self-signed certificate. Valid values are: @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateKeyExportable -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PrivateKeyExportable parameter specifies whether the certificate has an exportable private key, and controls whether you can export the certificate from the server (and import the certificate on other servers). Valid values are: @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Services -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Services parameter specifies the Exchange services that the new self-signed certificate is enabled for. Valid values are: @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectKeyIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SubjectKeyIdentifier parameter specifies the unique subject key identifier for a newself-signed certificate. For example, run the command: $ski = [System.Guid]::NewGuid().ToString("N"), and use the value $ski for this parameter. @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SubjectName parameter specifies the Subject field of the certificate request or self-signed certificate. @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeSettings.md index 230a474641..8341371024 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ExchangeSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example creates a new Exchange settings object for the Audit configuration ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of a valid Exchange configuration schema that you want to create an Exchange settings object for. Valid values are @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-FederationTrust.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-FederationTrust.md index 15c47b377e..3068107b6d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-FederationTrust.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-FederationTrust.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example creates the federation trust Microsoft Federation Gateway with a ce ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a friendly name for the federation trust. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationUri parameter specifies the primary domain used for the federated organization identifier. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipNamespaceProviderProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipNamespaceProviderProvisioning switch specifies that the trust and federated organization identifier are provisioned externally without using federation functionality in Microsoft Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Thumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Thumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint of a certificate issued by a public certification authority (CA) trusted by the Microsoft Federation Gateway. For more details, see [Federation](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/federation-exchange-2013-help). @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdministratorProvisioningId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdministratorProvisioningId parameter specifies the provisioning key returned by the Microsoft Federation Gateway when an organization has already registered a SiteID or ApplicationID. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationIdentifier parameter specifies the SiteID or ApplicationID when an organization has already registered a SiteID or ApplicationID. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MetadataUrl parameter specifies the URL where WS-FederationMetadata is published by the Microsoft Federation Gateway. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseLegacyProvisioningService -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseLegacyProvisioningService switch specifies that the legacy interface on the Microsoft Federation Gateway is used for managing the federation trust, including federated domains, certificates, and federation metadata. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Fingerprint.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Fingerprint.md index 223d295bfa..1e126802d1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Fingerprint.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Fingerprint.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example creates a new document fingerprint based on the file C:\\My Documen ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the file to use as a document fingerprint. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the document fingerprint. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ForeignConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ForeignConnector.md index 4dc46016af..7903f6f0e9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ForeignConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ForeignConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example creates a Foreign connector with the following properties: ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name for the Foreign connector. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names to which the Foreign connector sends messages. The complete syntax for entering each address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers. When the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in the Exchange organization. When the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can be used only by Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. The default value is $false. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the names of the Mailbox servers that use this Foreign connector. Having a single Foreign connector homed on multiple servers provides fault tolerance and high availability if one of the Mailbox servers fails. The default value of this parameter is the name of the server on which this Foreign connector is first installed. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-GlobalAddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-GlobalAddressList.md index e642369e00..2bdd854f7b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-GlobalAddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-GlobalAddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ This example creates the GAL named GAL\_AgencyB by using the RecipientFilter par ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the global address list. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-HybridConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-HybridConfiguration.md index 8ba792670c..2d22f8387f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-HybridConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-HybridConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Domains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Domains parameter specifies the domain namespaces used in the hybrid deployment. These domains must be configured as accepted domains in either on-premises Exchange or Exchange Online. The domains are used in configuring the organization relationships and Send and Receive connectors used by the hybrid configuration. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EdgeTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdgeTransportServers parameter specifies the Edge Transport servers that are configured to support the hybrid deployment features. The Edge Transport server must be accessible from the internet on port 25. Valid values are: @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalIPAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalIPAddresses parameter is a legacy parameter that specifies the publicly accessible inbound IP address of Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Hub Transport servers. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Features -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Features parameter specifies the features that are enabled for the hybrid configuration. Valid values are: @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesSmartHost -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OnPremisesSmartHost parameter specifies the FQDN of the on-premises Exchange Mailbox server used for secure mail transport between on-premises Exchange and Exchange Online. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivingTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceivingTransportServers parameter specifies the Mailbox servers defined in the outbound connector configuration in Exchange Online. Valid values are: @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendingTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendingTransportServers parameter specifies the Mailbox servers defined in the inbound connector configuration in Exchange Online. Valid values are: @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServiceInstance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is meaningful only in Office 365 operated by 21Vianet in China. @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. Valid syntax for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`: @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-InboxRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-InboxRule.md index 7afb9dee03..435d789401 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-InboxRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-InboxRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ This example raises the message importance to High if the mailbox owner is in th ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the Inbox rule. The maximum length is 512 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromMessageId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromMessageId parameter specifies the message that's used to create the Inbox rule. The rule is based on the properties of the message. You identify the message by its Base64-encoded StoreObjectId property value. For example: @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ValidateOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ValidateOnly switch specifies whether to evaluate the potential success or failure of the command without making changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob switch hides a warning message when you use Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App) or Exchange PowerShell to modify Inbox rules. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that applies the specified category to messages. A valid value is any text value that you want to define as a category. You can specify multiple categories separated by commas. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplySystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplySystemCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that applies the specified system category to messages. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BodyContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the body of messages. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyToFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CopyToFolder parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that copies messages to the specified mailbox folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteMessage parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that sends messages to the Deleted Items folder. Valid values are: @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteSystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteSystemCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that deletes the specified system category from messages. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfBodyContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the body of messages. @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFlaggedForAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFlaggedForAction parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks messages with the specified message flag. Valid values are: @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFrom parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in the sender's email address. @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasAttachment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfHasAttachment parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with attachments. Valid values are: @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfHasClassification parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message classification. You can find message classifications by using the Get-MessageClassification cmdlet. You can specify multiple message classifications separated by commas. @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HeaderContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the header fields of messages. @@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages of the specified type. Valid values are: @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInCcBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the Cc field. Valid values are: @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInToBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInToOrCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInToOrCcBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To or Cc fields Valid values are. @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameNotInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameNotInToBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner isn't in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfReceivedAfterDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfReceivedAfterDate parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received after the specified date. @@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfReceivedBeforeDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfReceivedBeforeDate parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received before the specified date. @@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in recipient email addresses. @@ -808,7 +808,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentOnlyToMe -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSentOnlyToMe parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the only recipient is the mailbox owner. Valid values are: @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSentTo parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field of messages. @@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field or body of messages. @@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithImportance parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified importance level. Valid values are: @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMaximum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMaximum parameter specifies part of an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that smaller than specified maximum size. @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMinimum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMinimum parameter specifies part of an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are larger than the specified minimum size. @@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithSensitivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithSensitivity parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified sensitivity level. Valid values are: @@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FlaggedForAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FlaggedForAction parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message flag. Valid values are: @@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardAsAttachmentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardAsAttachmentTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that forwards the message to the specified recipient as an attachment. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that forwards the message to the specified recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1125,7 +1125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -From -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The From parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromAddressContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in the sender's email address. @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasAttachment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasAttachment parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with attachments. Valid values are: @@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasClassification parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message classification. You can find message classifications by using the Get-MessageClassification cmdlet. You can specify multiple message classifications separated by commas. @@ -1221,7 +1221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HeaderContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the header fields of messages. @@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the Inbox rule. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarkAsRead -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MarkAsRead parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that marks messages as read. Valid values are: @@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarkImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MarkImportance parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that marks messages with the specified importance flag. Valid values are: @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTypeMatches parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages of the specified type. Valid values are: @@ -1349,7 +1349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveToFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveToFolder parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that moves messages to the specified mailbox folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInCcBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the Cc field. Valid values are: @@ -1405,7 +1405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInToBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInToOrCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInToOrCcBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To or Cc fields Valid values are. @@ -1451,7 +1451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameNotInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameNotInToBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner isn't in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PinMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PinMessage parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that pins messages to the top of the Inbox. Valid values are: @@ -1495,7 +1495,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies a priority for the Inbox rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, @@ -1513,7 +1513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivedAfterDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReceivedAfterDate parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received after the specified date. @@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivedBeforeDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReceivedBeforeDate parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received before the specified date. @@ -1557,7 +1557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientAddressContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in recipient email addresses. @@ -1579,7 +1579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RedirectTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RedirectTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that redirects the message to the specified recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1606,7 +1606,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendTextMessageNotificationTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1628,7 +1628,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentOnlyToMe -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentOnlyToMe parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the only recipient is the mailbox owner. Valid values are: @@ -1651,7 +1651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentTo parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified recipients. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1700,7 +1700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StopProcessingRules -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StopProcessingRules parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that stops processing additional rules if the conditions of this Inbox rule are met. Valid values are:If set to $true, the StopProcessingRules parameter instructs Exchange to stop processing additional rules if the conditions of this Inbox rule are met. @@ -1721,7 +1721,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field of messages. @@ -1745,7 +1745,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectOrBodyContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field or body of messages. @@ -1769,7 +1769,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1787,7 +1787,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithImportance parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified importance level. Valid values are: @@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithinSizeRangeMaximum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithinSizeRangeMaximum parameter specifies part of a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are smaller than specified maximum size. @@ -1843,7 +1843,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithinSizeRangeMinimum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithinSizeRangeMinimum parameter specifies part of a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are larger than the specified minimum size. @@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithSensitivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithSensitivity parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified sensitivity level. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-IntraOrganizationConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-IntraOrganizationConnector.md index 69e235ceee..20404af3e4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-IntraOrganizationConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-IntraOrganizationConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example creates an Intra-Organization connector named "MainCloudConnector" ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a friendly name for the Intra-Organization connector. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in double quotation marks. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DiscoveryEndpoint parameter specifies the externally-accessible URL that's used for the Autodiscover service for the domain that's configured in the Intra-Organization connector. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetAddressDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetAddressDomains parameter specifies the domain namespaces to use in the Intra-organization connector. These domains must have valid Autodiscover endpoints defined in their organizations. The domains and their associated Autodiscover endpoints are used by the Intra-Organization connector for feature and service connectivity. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter enables or disabled the Intra-organization connector. The valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-JournalRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-JournalRule.md index 97291cdb9b..86bcf47960 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-JournalRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-JournalRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example creates and enables a journal rule. The rule applies to all email m ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the journal rule. The name of the rule can be up to 64 characters long. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The JournalEmailAddress parameter specifies a recipient object to which journal reports are sent. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the journal rule is enabled or disabled. If the rule is disabled, it isn't applied to any email messages. The default value is $false. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipient parameter specifies the SMTP address of a mailbox, contact, or distribution group to journal. If you specify a distribution group, all recipients in that distribution group are journaled. All messages sent to or from a recipient are journaled. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Scope parameter specifies the scope of email messages to which the journal rule is applied. Valid values for this parameter are as follows: @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailContact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailContact.md index 38a1dafa95..e6db45960c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailContact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailContact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example creates a new mail contact named Chris Ashton. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail contact. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies the target email address of the mail contact or mail user. By default, this value is used as the primary email address of the mail contact or mail user. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail contact. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MacAttachmentFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MacAttachmentFormat parameter specifies the Apple Macintosh operating system attachment format to use for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageBodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this mail contact. A moderator approves messages sent to the mail contact before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the location in Active Directory where the new contact is created. @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePreferMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UsePreferMessageFormat specifies whether the message format settings configured for the mail user or mail contact override the global settings configured for the remote domain or configured by the message sender. Valid value are: @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailMessage.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailMessage.md index a2f50ad71e..c27f6e123b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailMessage.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailMessage.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ This example creates an email message in the Drafts folder with the subject and ### -Body -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Body parameter specifies the content of the body section of the new email message. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BodyFormat parameter specifies the format of the message body. The values can be PlainText, Rtf (Rich Text Format), or Html. By default, if the BodyFormat parameter isn't specified when the Body parameter is used, the message body is rendered in plain text. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Subject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Subject parameter specifies the content of the subject field of the new email message. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailUser.md index 3aa57b37d4..5f25229c09 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ This example creates a new mail user for Ed Meadows in the contoso.com cloud-bas ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail user. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies the target email address of the mail contact or mail user. By default, this value is used as the primary email address of the mail contact or mail user. @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Password parameter specifies the password for the user's account. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail user. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MacAttachmentFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MacAttachmentFormat parameter specifies the Apple Macintosh operating system attachment format to use for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageBodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageFormat parameter specifies the message format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the location in Active Directory where the new mail user is created. @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -804,7 +804,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemotePowerShellEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RemotePowerShellEnabled parameter specifies whether the user has access to Exchange PowerShell. Valid values are: @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePreferMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UsePreferMessageFormat specifies whether the message format settings configured for the mail user or mail contact override the global settings configured for the remote domain or configured by the message sender. Valid value are: @@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Mailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Mailbox.md index 28c5437879..a8af131a6d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Mailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-Mailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -810,7 +810,7 @@ This example assumes that you've already created a mail-enabled security group n ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mailbox. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -830,7 +830,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Discovery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Discovery switch is required to create Discovery mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableRoomMailboxAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -947,7 +947,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Equipment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Equipment switch is required to create equipment mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1007,7 +1007,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedMasterAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1054,7 +1054,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedRoom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Migration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Migration switch is required to create migration mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1114,7 +1114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Password parameter specifies the password for the mailbox (the user account that's associated with the mailbox). This parameter isn't required if you're creating a linked mailbox, resource mailbox, or shared mailbox, because the associated user accounts are disabled for these types of mailboxes. @@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolder switch is required to create public folder mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1180,7 +1180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Room -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Room switch is required to create room mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Shared -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Shared switch is required to create shared mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1224,7 +1224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1246,7 +1246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy parameter specifies the mobile device mailbox policy that's applied to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example:. @@ -1270,7 +1270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressBookPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1296,7 +1296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -1332,7 +1332,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Archive switch specifies that an archive mailbox is created for this mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1381,7 +1381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1405,7 +1405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1429,7 +1429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuxAuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1453,7 +1453,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1500,7 +1500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mailbox. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1520,7 +1520,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1540,7 +1540,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -1558,7 +1558,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1578,7 +1578,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HoldForMigration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HoldForMigration switch specifies whether to prevent any client or user, except the Microsoft Exchange Mailbox Replication service (MRS) process, from logging on to a public folder mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1600,7 +1600,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -1620,7 +1620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -1638,7 +1638,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy parameter prevents users from accessing the public folder hierarchy on this public folder mailbox. For load-balancing purposes, users are equally distributed across public folder mailboxes by default. When this parameter is set on a public folder mailbox, that mailbox isn't included in this automatic load-balancing and can't be accessed by users to retrieve the public folder hierarchy. However, if an administrator has set the DefaultPublicFolderMailbox property on a user mailbox to a specific public folder mailbox, the user can still access the specified public folder mailbox, even if the IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy parameter is set for that public folder mailbox. @@ -1656,7 +1656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -1674,7 +1674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1794,7 +1794,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1823,7 +1823,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1846,7 +1846,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Office -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Office parameter specifies the user's physical office name or number. @@ -1864,7 +1864,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the location in Active Directory where the new mailbox is created. @@ -1889,7 +1889,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Phone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Phone parameter specifies the user's telephone number. @@ -1907,7 +1907,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. @@ -1947,7 +1947,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1967,7 +1967,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemotePowerShellEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemotePowerShellEnabled parameter specifies whether the user has access to Exchange PowerShell. Valid values are: @@ -1992,7 +1992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResetPasswordOnNextLogon parameter specifies whether the user is required to change their password the next time they log on to their mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -2013,7 +2013,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceCapacity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResourceCapacity parameter specifies the capacity of the resource mailbox. For example, you can use this parameter to identify the number of seats in a conference room (room mailbox) or in a vehicle (equipment mailbox). A valid value is an integer. @@ -2031,7 +2031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2061,7 +2061,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoleAssignmentPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RoleAssignmentPolicy parameter specifies the role assignment policy that's applied to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the role assignment policy. For example: @@ -2087,7 +2087,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomMailboxPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2123,7 +2123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2143,7 +2143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -2167,7 +2167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2195,7 +2195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SupervisoryReviewPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2235,7 +2235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2263,7 +2263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxAuditLogSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxAuditLogSearch.md index 4aa8ca23e8..a23fd4ffa8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxAuditLogSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxAuditLogSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example returns entries from the mailbox audit logs of all users in organiz ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatusMailRecipients parameter specifies the email address where the search results are sent. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalAccess parameter specifies whether to return only audit log entries for mailbox access by users that are outside of your organization. In Exchange Online, this parameter returns audit log entries for mailbox access by Microsoft datacenter administrators. Valid values are: @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasAttachments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasAttachments parameter filters the search by messages that have attachments. Valid values are: @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogonTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LogonTypes parameter specifies the type of logons. Valid values are: @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailboxes parameter specifies the mailbox to retrieve mailbox audit log entries from. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the search. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Operations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Operations parameter filters the search results by the operations that are logged by mailbox audit logging. Valid values are: @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowDetails switch specifies that details of each log entry are retrieved. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxDatabase.md index 13b7f9cdaf..53a44cc183 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example creates the mailbox database DB1 on the Mailbox server named Server ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the new mailbox database. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recovery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Recovery switch specifies that the new database is designated as a recovery database. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagExcludeFromMonitoring -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagExcludeFromMonitoring parameter specifies that the database being created should not be monitored by managed availability. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EdbFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdbFilePath parameter specifies the path to the database files. The default location is `%ExchangeInstallPath%Mailbox\\.edb`. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromInitialProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromInitialProvisioning switch specifies that this database is temporarily not considered by the mailbox provisioning load balancer. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioning parameter specifies whether this database is considered by the mailbox provisioning load balancer. If the IsExcludedFromProvisioning parameter is set to $true, no new mailboxes are automatically added to this database. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsSuspendedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsSuspendedFromProvisioning parameter specifies whether this database is temporarily considered by the mailbox provisioning load balancer. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFolderPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFolderPath parameter specifies the folder location for log files.The default location is `%ExchangeInstallPath%Mailbox\` @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OfflineAddressBook parameter specifies the associated offline address book (OAB) for the new mailbox database. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PublicFolderDatabase parameter specifies the associated public folder database for the new mailbox database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the public folder database. For example: @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDatabaseLogFolderCreation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxExportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxExportRequest.md index a4d5b91ef0..2341ba1ddd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxExportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxExportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ComplianceStorePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FilePath parameter specifies the network share path of the .pst file to which data is exported, for example, \\\\SERVER01\\PST Files\\exported.pst. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssociatedMessagesCopyOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AssociatedMessagesCopyOption parameter specifies whether associated messages are copied when the request is processed. Associated messages are special messages that contain hidden data with information about rules, views, and forms. By default, associated messages are copied. This parameter accepts the following values: @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for exporting a batch of mailboxes. You can use the name in the BatchName parameter as a string search when you use the Get-MailboxExportRequest cmdlet. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after completion before it's automatically removed. The default value is 30 days. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConflictResolutionOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConflictResolutionOption parameter specifies what to do if there are multiple matching messages in the target. Valid values are: @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Important**: You can't use this parameter to export between two dates. You can export from a specific date, or export to a specific date, but not both. @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentFilterLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ContentFilterLanguage parameter specifies the language being used in the ContentFilter parameter for string searches. @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDumpster -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExcludeDumpster switch specifies whether to exclude the Recoverable Items folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExcludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to exclude during the export. @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to include during the export. @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsArchive switch specifies that you're exporting from the user's archive. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the specific request for tracking and display purposes. Because you can have multiple export requests per mailbox, Exchange precedes the name with the mailbox's alias. For example, if you create an export request for a user's mailbox that has the alias Kweku and specify the value of this parameter as PC1toArchive, the identity of this export request is Kweku\\PC1toArchive. @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferredMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMerging parameter specifies steps in the export that should be skipped. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceRootFolder parameter specifies the root folder of the mailbox from which data is exported. If this parameter isn't specified, the command exports all folders. @@ -820,7 +820,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetRootFolder parameter specifies the top-level folder in which to export data. If you don't specify this parameter, the command exports folders to the top of the folder structure in the target .pst file. Content is merged under existing folders, and new folders are created if they don't already exist in the target folder structure. @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxFolder.md index d7e9d64fe5..234aa513a8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example creates the folder named Personal in the root folder hierarchy of y ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the new folder. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Parent parameter specifies where to create the new mailbox folder. The syntax is `[MailboxID]:\[ParentFolder][\SubFolder]`. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxImportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxImportRequest.md index 3354f48df9..a97de519b4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxImportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxImportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssociatedMessagesCopyOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AssociatedMessagesCopyOption parameter specifies whether associated messages are copied when the request is processed. Associated messages are special messages that contain hidden data with information about rules, views, and forms. By default, associated messages are copied. This parameter accepts the following values: @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for importing a batch of mailboxes. You can use the name in the BatchName parameter as a string search when you use the Get-MailboxImportRequest cmdlet. @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after completion before being automatically removed. The default value is 30 days. @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConflictResolutionOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConflictResolutionOption parameter specifies what to do if there are multiple matching messages in the target. Valid values are: @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentCodePage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ContentCodePage parameter specifies the specific code page to use for an ANSI pst file. ANSI pst files are used in Outlook 97 to Outlook 2002. You can find the valid values in the [Code Page Identifiers](https://learn.microsoft.com/windows/win32/intl/code-page-identifiers) topic. @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDumpster -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeDumpster switch specifies whether to exclude the Recoverable Items folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to exclude during the import. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to include during the import. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsArchive switch specifies that you're importing the .pst file into the user's archive. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the specific request for tracking and display purposes. Because you can have multiple import requests per mailbox, Exchange precedes the name with the mailbox's alias. For example, if you create an import request for a user's mailbox that has the alias Kweku and specify the value of this parameter as PC1toArchive, the identity of this import request is Kweku\\PC1toArchive. @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -791,7 +791,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -836,7 +836,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies steps in the import that should be skipped. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceRootFolder parameter specifies the root folder of the .pst file from which data is imported. When specified, the folder hierarchy outside the value of the SourceRootFolder parameter isn't imported, and the SourceRootFolder parameter is mapped to the TargetRootFolder parameter. If this parameter isn't specified, the command imports all folders. @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetRootFolder parameter specifies the top-level mailbox folder that the imported content is placed in. If you don't specify this parameter, the command imports folders to the top of the folder structure in the target mailbox or archive. If the folder already exists, content is merged under existing folders, and new folders are created if they don't already exist in the target folder structure. @@ -946,7 +946,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRepairRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRepairRequest.md index 4342464833..0c6bc785d5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRepairRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRepairRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ This example creates a variable that identifies Ann Beebe's mailbox and then use ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter repairs or detects corruption in all mailboxes in the specified database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to repair or detect corruption in. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StoreMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StoreMailbox parameter specifies the mailbox GUID of the mailbox you want to repair or detect corruption in. Use this parameter with the Database parameter. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CorruptionType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CorruptionType parameter specifies the type of corruption that you want to detect and repair. You can use the following values: @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Archive switch specifies whether to repair or detect corruption the archive mailbox that's associated with the specified mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DetectOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DetectOnly switch specifies that you want to report errors, but not fix them. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRestoreRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRestoreRequest.md index 4df394dfdc..095d7d0fc6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRestoreRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxRestoreRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceMailbox parameter specifies the soft-deleted mailbox that you want to restore. The best way to identify the soft-deleted mailbox is by its GUID value. You can find the GUID value by running the following command: Get-Mailbox -SoftDeletedMailbox. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceStoreMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the GUID of the target mailbox or mail user where you want to restore content to. The target mailbox or mail user needs to exist before you can run this command successfully. @@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowLegacyDNMismatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowLegacyDNMismatch switch specifies that the operation should continue if the LegacyExchangeDN of the source physical mailbox and the target mailbox don't match. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssociatedMessagesCopyOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AssociatedMessagesCopyOption parameter specifies whether associated messages are copied when the request is processed. Associated messages are special messages that contain hidden data with information about rules, views, and forms. Valid values are: @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for restoring a batch of mailboxes. You can use the name in the BatchName parameter as a string search when you use the Get-MailboxRestoreRequest cmdlet. @@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the status of a completed restore request is set to Completed. If this parameter is set to a value of 0, the status is cleared immediately instead of being changed to Completed. @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConflictResolutionOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConflictResolutionOption parameter specifies what to do if there are multiple matching messages in the target. Valid values are: @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDumpster -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeDumpster switch specifies whether to exclude the Recoverable Items folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folders to exclude during the restore request. @@ -828,7 +828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeFolders parameter specifies the list of folder to include during the restore request. @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -943,7 +943,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the specific request for tracking and display purposes. Because you can have multiple restore requests per mailbox, Exchange precedes the name with the mailbox's alias. For example, if you create an export request for a user's mailbox that has the alias Kweku and specify the value of this parameter as RestoreFailedMoves, the identity of this export request is Kweku\\RestoreFailedMoves. @@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -992,7 +992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies folder-related items to skip when restoring the mailbox. Use one of the following values: @@ -1044,7 +1044,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceIsArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceIsArchive switch specifies that the source mailbox is an archive mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceRootFolder parameter specifies the root folder of the mailbox from which data is restored. If this parameter isn't specified, the command restores all folders. @@ -1082,7 +1082,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -1120,7 +1120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetIsArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetIsArchive switch specifies that the content is restored into the specified target mailbox's archive. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetRootFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetRootFolder parameter specifies the top-level folder in which to restore data. If you don't specify this parameter, the command restores folders to the top of the folder structure in the target mailbox or archive. Content is merged under existing folders, and new folders are created if they don't already exist in the target folder structure. @@ -1158,7 +1158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetType parameter specifies the type of mailbox that's the target for the restore operation. Valid values are: @@ -1180,7 +1180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1198,7 +1198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxSearch.md index 36cb459e8b..9a3283d0a7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MailboxSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example creates an In-Place Hold named Hold for al ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a friendly name for the search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllPublicFolderSources -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllPublicFolderSources parameter specifies whether to include all public folders in the organization in the search. Valid values are: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllSourceMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllSourceMailboxes parameter specifies whether to include all mailboxes in the search. Valid values are: @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the search. The description isn't displayed to users. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EstimateOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EstimateOnly switch specifies that only an estimate of the number of items to be returned is provided. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDuplicateMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeDuplicateMessages parameter eliminates duplication of messages in search results. Valid values are: @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeKeywordStatistics -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeKeywordStatistics switch returns keyword statistics (number of instances for each keyword) in search results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeUnsearchableItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeUnsearchableItems switch specifies that items that couldn't be indexed by Exchange Search should be included in the results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InPlaceHoldEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The InPlaceHoldEnabled parameter specifies whether to set an In-Place Hold on items in the search results. Valid values are: @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InPlaceHoldIdentity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemHoldPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ItemHoldPeriod parameter specifies the number of days for the In-Place Hold onthe mailbox items (all mailbox items or the items that are returned in the search query results). The duration is calculated from the time the item is received or created in the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Language parameter specifies a locale for the search. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LogLevel parameter specifies the logging level for the search. Valid values are: @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTypes parameter specifies the message types to include in the search query. Valid values are: @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipients parameter specifies one or more recipients to include in the search query. Messages that have the specified recipients in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields are returned in the search results. @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SearchQuery parameter specifies keywords for the search query by using the Keyword Query Language (KQL). For more information, see [Keyword Query Language (KQL) syntax reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/sharepoint/dev/general-development/keyword-query-language-kql-syntax-reference) and [Keyword queries and search conditions for eDiscovery](https://learn.microsoft.com/purview/ediscovery-keyword-queries-and-search-conditions). @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Senders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Senders parameter specifies one or more senders to include in the search query. Messages that have the specified sender are returned in the search results. Senders can include users, distribution groups (messages sent by members of the group), SMTP addresses, or domains. @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceMailboxes parameter specifies the identity of one or more mailboxes to be searched. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatusMailRecipients parameter specifies one or more recipients to receive a status email message upon completion of the search. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the destination mailbox where the search results are copied. You can use any value that uniquely identifies themailbox. For example: @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work on this cmdlet. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterPolicy.md index 952710db59..2e11030806 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example creates a new malware filter policy named Contoso Malware Filter Po ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the malware filter policy. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AdminDisplayName parameter specifies a description for the policy. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassInboundMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassOutboundMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAlertText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomExternalBody -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomExternalBody parameter specifies the custom body to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomExternalSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomExternalSubject parameter specifies the custom subject to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomFromAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomFromAddress parameter specifies the custom From address to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal or external senders. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomFromName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomFromName parameter specifies the custom From name to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal or external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomInternalBody -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomInternalBody parameter specifies the custom body to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomInternalSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomInternalSubject parameter specifies the custom subject to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomNotifications parameter enables or disables the customization of notification messages for malware detections. Valid values are: @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExternalSenderAdminNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnableExternalSenderAdminNotifications parameter enables or disables sending notification messages to an administrator for malware detections in messages from internal senders. Valid values are: @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExternalSenderNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableInternalSenderAdminNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnableInternalSenderAdminNotifications parameter enables or disables sending notification messages to an administrator for malware detections in messages from internal senders. Valid values are: @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableInternalSenderNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalSenderAdminAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalSenderAdminAddress parameter specifies the email address of the administrator who receives notifications messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalSenderAdminAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The InternalSenderAdminAddress parameter specifies the email address of the administrator who receives notifications messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterRule.md index 2b3a5a5742..cdd83af3d6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MalwareFilterRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example creates a new malware filter rule named Contoso Recipients with the ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the malware filter rule. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MalwareFilterPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MalwareFilterPolicy parameter specifies the malware filter policy that's associated with the malware filter rule. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Comments parameter specifies informative comments for the rule, such as what the rule is used for or how it has changed over time. The length of the comment can't exceed 1024 characters. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter enables or disables the malware filter rule. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients with email addresses in the specified domains. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfSentTo parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfSentToMemberOf parameter specifies an exception that looks for messages sent to members of distribution groups, mail-enabled security groups, or sent to Microsoft 365 Groups. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, the value 0 is the highest priority, and rules can't have the same priority value. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientDomainIs parameter specifies a condition that looks for recipients with email addresses in the specified domains. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SentTo parameter specifies a condition that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SentToMemberOf parameter specifies a condition that looks for messages sent to members of distribution groups, mail-enabled security groups, or sent to Microsoft 365 Groups. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRole.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRole.md index fa552a0a5e..8384bfbed8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRole.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRole.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example creates the unscoped management role In-ho ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the role. The maximum length of the name is 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Parent parameter specifies the identity of the role to copy. If the name of the role contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you specify the Parent parameter, you can't use the UnScopedTopLevel switch. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnScopedTopLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Description parameter specifies the description that's displayed when the management role is viewed using the Get-ManagementRole cmdlet. Enclose the description in quotation marks ("). @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnabledCmdlets parameter specifies the cmdlets that are copied from the parent role. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRoleAssignment.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRoleAssignment.md index 1e4c1d0ef6..6ba6506e29 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRoleAssignment.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementRoleAssignment.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ This example assigns the Mail Recipients role to the Contoso Sub - Seattle role ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a name for the new management role assignment. The maximum length of the name is 64 characters. If the management role assignment name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you don't specify a name, a name is created automatically. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Computer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Policy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Policy parameter specifies the name of the management role assignment policy to assign the management role to. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Role parameter specifies the existing role to assign. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the role. For example: @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecurityGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SecurityGroup parameter specifies the name of the management role group or mail-enabled universal security group to assign the management role to. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The User parameter specifies the user to assign the management role to. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the existing recipient-based management scope to associate with this management role assignment. If the management scope name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you use the CustomRecipientWriteScope parameter, you can't use the RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope or ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameters. @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Delegating -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Delegating switch specifies whether the user or USG assigned to the role can delegate the role to other users or groups. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the exclusive recipient-based management scope to associate with the new role assignment. If you use the ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameter, you can't use the CustomRecipientWriteScope or RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameters. If the scope name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAdministrativeUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameter specifies the OU to scope the new role assignment to. If you use the RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameter, you can't use the CustomRecipientWriteScope or ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameters. To specify an OU, use the syntax: domain/ou. If the OU name contains spaces, enclose the domain and OU in quotation marks ("). @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRelativeWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRelativeWriteScope parameter specifies the type of restriction to apply to a recipient scope. The available types are None, Organization, MyGAL, Self, and MyDistributionGroups. The RecipientRelativeWriteScope parameter is automatically set when the CustomRecipientWriteScope or RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameters are used. @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnScopedTopLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementScope.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementScope.md index 7689690822..3fea608e67 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementScope.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ManagementScope.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ This example creates the Seattle Databases scope and sets a database restriction ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the management scope. The name can be up to 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRestrictionFilter parameter uses OPATH filter syntax to specify the recipients that are included in the scope. The syntax is `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Exclusive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Exclusive switch specifies that the role should be an exclusive scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRoot parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) under which the filter specified with the RecipientRestrictionFilter parameter should be applied. Valid input for this parameter is an OU or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MapiVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MapiVirtualDirectory.md index 2e66284d4f..63de2bf232 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MapiVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MapiVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example creates a new MAPI virtual directory that has the following configu ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IISAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IISAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication methods that are enabled on the virtual directory in Internet Information Services (IIS). Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MessageClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MessageClassification.md index bf7fa10717..552bd2da44 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MessageClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MessageClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example creates a locale-specific (Spanish - Spain ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the message classification. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the title of the message classification that's displayed in Outlook and selected by users. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional on in on-premises Exchange. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderDescription -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SenderDescription parameter specifies the detailed text that's shown to Outlook senders when they select a message classification to apply to a message before they send the message. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClassificationID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ClassificationID parameter specifies the classification ID (GUID) of an existing message classification that you want to import and use in your Exchange organization. Use this parameter if you're configuring message classifications that span two Exchange forests in the same organization. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayPrecedence -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayPrecedence parameter specifies the relative precedence of the message classification to other message classifications that might be applied to a specified message. Valid values are: @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PermissionMenuVisible -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PermissionMenuVisible parameter specifies whether the values that you entered for the DisplayName and RecipientDescription parameters are displayed in Outlook as the user composes a message. Valid values are: @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDescription -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientDescription parameter specifies the detailed text that's shown to Outlook recipient when they receive a message that has the message classification applied. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainClassificationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetainClassificationEnabled parameter specifies whether the message classification should persist with the message if the message is forwarded or replied to. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationBatch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationBatch.md index e928c46162..c7ee0db4cd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationBatch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationBatch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ A Google Workspace migration batch is created that uses the CSV migration file g ### -UserIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserIds parameter specifies the users that you want to copy from an existing migration batch (for example, if a previous migration was partially successful). You identify a user by email address or by their Guid property value from the Get-MigrationUser cmdlet. You can specify multiple users separated by commas. @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Users -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Users parameter specifies the users that you want to copy from an existing migration batch (for example, if a previous migration was partially successful). You identify the users by using the Get-MigrationUser cmdlet. For example: @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies an unique name for the migration batch on each system (Exchange On-premises or Exchange Online). The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CSVData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CSVData parameter specifies the CSV file that contains information about the user mailboxes to be moved or migrated. The required attributes in the header row of the CSV file vary depending on the type of migration. For more information, see [CSV files for mailbox migration](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/csv-files-for-mailbox-migration-exchange-2013-help). @@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Local -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -735,7 +735,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourcePublicFolderDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -779,7 +779,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIncrementalSyncs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnknownColumnsInCsv -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnknownColumnsInCsv parameter specifies whether to allow extra columns in the CSV file that aren't used by migration. Valid values are: @@ -843,7 +843,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ArchiveOnly switch specifies that only archive mailboxes are migrated for the users in the migration batch (primary mailboxes aren't migrated). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -865,7 +865,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoComplete switch forces the finalization of the individual mailboxes as soon as the mailbox has completed initial synchronization. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoRetryCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -927,7 +927,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoStart -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoStart switch immediately starts the processing of the new migration batch. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -967,7 +967,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the migration request is ready to complete. @@ -989,7 +989,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompleteAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableOnCopy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisableOnCopy switch disables the original migration job item for a user if you're copying users from an existing batch to a new batch by using the UserIds or Users parameters. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1123,7 +1123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisallowExistingUsers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1145,7 +1145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1339,7 +1339,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -1366,7 +1366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1408,7 +1408,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveOptions parameter specifies the stages of the migration that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotificationEmails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NotificationEmails parameter specifies one or more email addresses that migration status reports are sent to. Specify the value as a string array, and separate multiple email addresses with commas. @@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimaryOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrimaryOnly switch specifies that only primary mailboxes are migrated for the users in the migration batch that also have archive mailboxes (archive mailboxes aren't migrated). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderToUnifiedGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReportInterval parameter specifies how frequently emailed reports should be sent to the email addresses listed within NotificationEmails. @@ -1712,7 +1712,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies the stages of the migration that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -1730,7 +1730,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoving -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is replaced by the MoveOptions parameter. @@ -1770,7 +1770,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipReports -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipReports switch specifies that you want to skip automatic reporting for the migration. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipSteps -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1833,7 +1833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceEndpoint parameter specifies the migration endpoint to use for the source of the migration batch. You create the migration endpoint by using the New-MigrationEndpoint cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the migration endpoint. For example: @@ -1876,7 +1876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartAfter parameter specifies a delay before the data migration for the users within the batch is started. The migration is prepared, but the actual data migration for the user doesn't start until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -1901,7 +1901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetArchiveDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetArchiveDatabases parameter specifies the database where the archive mailboxes specified in the migration batch are migrated to. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -1929,7 +1929,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetDatabases parameter specifies the identity of the database that you're moving mailboxes to. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -1959,7 +1959,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDeliveryDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetDeliveryDomain parameter specifies the FQDN of the external email address created in the source forest for the mail-enabled user when the migration batch is complete. @@ -1979,7 +1979,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetEndpoint parameter specifies the migration endpoint to use for the destination of the migration batch. You create the migration endpoint by using the New-MigrationEndpoint cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the migration endpoint. For example: @@ -2002,7 +2002,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeZone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TimeZone parameter specifies the time zone of the administrator who submits the migration batch. @@ -2030,7 +2030,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -2048,7 +2048,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkflowControlFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkflowControlFlags parameter specifies advanced controls for the steps that are performed in the migration. Valid values are: @@ -2072,7 +2072,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkflowTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkflowTemplate parameter specifies advanced controls for the steps that are performed in the migration. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -2090,7 +2090,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationEndpoint.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationEndpoint.md index 137f345d59..d71d215217 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationEndpoint.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MigrationEndpoint.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ This example creates an IMAP migration endpoint that supports 50 concurrent migr ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name you give to the new migration endpoint. You can use the Name parameter when you run the New-MigrationBatch cmdlet. @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Autodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online For an Exchange migration, the Autodiscover switch specifies whether to get other connection settings for the on-premises server from the Autodiscover service. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Compliance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Compliance switch specifies that the endpoint type is compliance. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credentials parameter specifies the credentials to connect to the source or target endpoint for all Exchange migration types. @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddress parameter specifies the email address used by the Autodiscover service or in some cases used to validate the endpoint when you specify the connection settings manually. @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeRemoteMove -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExchangeRemoteMove switch specifies the type of endpoint for cross-forest moves and remote move migrations in a hybrid deployment. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PSTImport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderToUnifiedGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolderToUnifiedGroup switch specifies that the endpoint type is public folders to Microsoft 365 Groups. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteServer parameter specifies the FQDN of the remote server, which depends on the protocol type for moves: @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -824,7 +824,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentIncrementalSyncs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxConcurrentIncrementalSyncs parameter specifies the maximum number of incremental syncs allowed per endpoint. The default value is 20. @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMigrations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxConcurrentMigrations parameter specifies the maximum number of mailboxes that are migrated during initial sync. This parameter is applicable for all migration types. The default value is 100. @@ -980,7 +980,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipVerification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipVerification switch specifies whether to skip verifying that the remote server is reachable when creating a migration endpoint. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md index 8d609417e7..863ff11d57 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ This example creates the mobile device mailbox policy Contoso Policy that has se ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the mobile device mailbox policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBluetooth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBluetooth parameter specifies whether the Bluetooth capabilities are allowed on the mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBrowser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBrowser parameter specifies whether Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer is allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't affect non-Microsoft browsers. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCamera -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowCamera parameter specifies whether the mobile device's camera is allowed. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConsumerEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConsumerEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a personal email account on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access to email accounts using non-Microsoft mobile device email programs. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowDesktopSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowDesktopSync parameter specifies whether the mobile device can synchronize with a desktop computer through a cable. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowExternalDeviceManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowExternalDeviceManagement parameter specifies whether an external device management program is allowed to manage the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowHTMLEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowHTMLEmail parameter specifies whether HTML-formatted email is enabled on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. If set to $false, all email is converted to plain text before synchronization occurs. @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowInternetSharing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowInternetSharing parameter specifies whether the mobile device can be used as a modem to connect a computer to the Internet. This process is also known as tethering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIrDA -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowIrDA parameter specifies whether infrared connections are allowed to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowMobileOTAUpdate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowMobileOTAUpdate parameter specifies whether the policy can be sent to the mobile device over a cellular data connection. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNonProvisionableDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter specifies whether all mobile devices can synchronize with Exchange. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowPOPIMAPEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowPOPIMAPEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a POP3 or IMAP4 email account on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access by non-Microsoft email programs. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRemoteDesktop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRemoteDesktop parameter specifies whether the mobile device can initiate a remote desktop connection. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSimplePassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSimplePassword parameter specifies whether a simple password is allowed on the mobile device. A simple password is a password that has a specific pattern, such as 1111 or 1234. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation parameter specifies whether the messaging application on the mobile device can negotiate the encryption algorithm if a recipient's certificate doesn't support the specified encryption algorithm. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMESoftCerts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMESoftCerts parameter specifies whether S/MIME software certificates are allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowStorageCard -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowStorageCard parameter specifies whether the mobile device can access information stored on a storage card. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowTextMessaging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowTextMessaging parameter specifies whether text messaging is allowed from the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedApplications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedApplications parameter specifies whether unsigned applications can be installed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages parameter specifies whether unsigned installation packages are allowed to run on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowWiFi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowWiFi parameter specifies whether wireless Internet access is allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlphanumericPasswordRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlphanumericPasswordRequired parameter specifies whether the password for the mobile device must be alphanumeric. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApprovedApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApprovedApplicationList parameter specifies a configured list of approved applications for the device. @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether attachments can be downloaded on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This setting is supported by Outlook for iOS and Android. @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePolicyRefreshInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePolicyRefreshInterval parameter specifies how often the policy is sent to the mobile device. @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IrmEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) is enabled for the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default mobile device mailbox policy. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value for the built-in mobile device mailbox policy named Default is $true. The default value for new mobile device mailbox policies that you create is $false. @@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAttachmentSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxAttachmentSize parameter specifies the maximum size of attachments that can be downloaded to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is a size value between 0 and 2147482624 bytes (approximately 2 GB), or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCalendarAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxCalendarAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum range of calendar days that can be synchronized to the mobile device. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -828,7 +828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum number of days of email items to synchronize to the mobile device. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 0 and 2147483647 (Int32) or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -875,7 +875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which HTML-formatted email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 0 and 2147483647 (Int32) or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -895,7 +895,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInactivityTimeLock -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxInactivityTimeLock parameter specifies the length of time that the mobile device can be inactive before the password is required to reactivate it. Valid values are: @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxPasswordFailedAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxPasswordFailedAttempts parameter specifies the number of attempts a user can make to enter the correct password for the mobile device. @@ -936,7 +936,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinPasswordComplexCharacters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinPasswordComplexCharacters parameter specifies the character sets that are required in the password of the mobile device. The character sets are: @@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinPasswordLength -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This setting is supported by Outlook for Android. @@ -992,7 +992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordEnabled parameter specifies whether a password is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordExpiration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordExpiration parameter specifies how long a password can be used on a mobile device before the user is forced to change the password. Valid values are: @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordHistory parameter specifies the number of unique new passwords that need to be created on the mobile device before an old password can be reused. @@ -1053,7 +1053,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether the recovery password for the mobile device is stored in Exchange. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1073,7 +1073,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireDeviceEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireDeviceEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile device must send encrypted S/MIME messages. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1109,7 +1109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that's required to encrypt S/MIME messages on a mobile device. The valid values for this parameter are: @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming parameter specifies whether the mobile device must synchronize manually while roaming. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1153,7 +1153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that's used to sign S/MIME messages on the mobile device. @@ -1173,7 +1173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile device must send signed S/MIME messages. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1191,7 +1191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireStorageCardEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter specifies whether storage card encryption is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1211,7 +1211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnapprovedInROMApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UnapprovedInROMApplicationList parameter specifies a list of applications that can't be run in ROM on the mobile device. @@ -1229,7 +1229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UNCAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows file shares is enabled from the mobile device. In on-premises Exchange organizations, access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -1247,7 +1247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1265,7 +1265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WSSAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services is enabled from the mobile device. In on-premises Exchange organizations, access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MoveRequest.md index f6067d134f..82a5bb8174 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-MoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ This example creates a batch move request for all mailboxes on the database DB01 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use the following values: @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Outbound -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Outbound switch specifies that this mailbox move is a cross-forest move and is being initiated from the source forest. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Remote -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Remote switch specifies that the move is outside of your organization and is being initiated from the target forest. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteCredential parameter specifies the username and password of an administrator who has permission to perform the mailbox move. @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteGlobalCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteGlobalCatalog parameter specifies the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the global catalog server for the remote forest. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteHostName parameter specifies the FQDN of the cross-forest organization from which you're moving the mailbox. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteLegacy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDeliveryDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetDeliveryDomain parameter specifies the FQDN of the external email address created in the source forest for the mail-enabled user when the move request is complete. This parameter is allowed only when performing remote moves with the Remote, RemoteLegacy, or Outbound parameter. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowLargeItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ArchiveDomain parameter specifies the FQDN of the external domain to which you're moving the archive. This parameter is used for moving the archive to a cloud-based service. @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ArchiveOnly switch specifies that you're moving only the personal archive associated with the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveTargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for moving a batch of mailboxes. You can then use the name in the BatchName parameter as a search string when you use the Get-MoveRequest cmdlet. @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompleteAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompleteAfter parameter specifies a delay before the request is completed. The request is started, but not completed until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request are kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DoNotPreserveMailboxSignature -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceOffline -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForceOffline switch forces the mailbox move to be performed in offline mode. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForcePull -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForcePush -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -787,7 +787,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncrementalSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncrementalSyncInterval parameter specifies the wait time between incremental syncs. Use this parameter with the CompleteAfter parameter to create a move request that does periodic incremental syncs after the initial sync is complete. @@ -809,7 +809,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveOptions parameter specifies the stages of the move that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreventCompletion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreventCompletion switch specifies whether to run the move request, but not allow it to complete. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimaryOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrimaryOnly switch specifies that the command should only move the primary mailbox (the personal archive isn't moved). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -940,7 +940,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -969,7 +969,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Protect -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1020,7 +1020,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteArchiveTargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteArchiveTargetDatabase parameter specifies the name of the target database in the remote forest to which you're moving the personal archive. Use this parameter when moving users with archives from the local forest to a remote forest. For moves from a remote forest to the local forest, use the ArchiveTargetDatabase parameter. @@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteTargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteTargetDatabase parameter specifies the name of the target database in the remote forest. Use this parameter when moving mailboxes from the local forest to a remote forest. For moves from a remote forest to the local forest, use the TargetDatabase parameter. @@ -1078,7 +1078,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoving -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is replaced by the MoveOptions parameter. @@ -1143,7 +1143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartAfter parameter specifies a delay before the request is started. The request isn't started until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -1170,7 +1170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1190,7 +1190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -1208,7 +1208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendWhenReadyToComplete switch specifies whether to suspend the move request before it reaches the status of CompletionInProgress. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1254,7 +1254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OabVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OabVirtualDirectory.md index e521394787..33a5604517 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OabVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OabVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example creates an OAB virtual directory on CASServer01 and configures the ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter specifies the file system path of the virtual directory. We recommend using this parameter only when you need to use a custom location for the virtual directory files. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates the default location is used. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PollInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PollInterval parameter specifies the time interval in minutes that the distribution service polls the offline address book generation server for updates. The default value is 480 minutes (8 hours). @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recovery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSSL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireSSL parameter specifies whether the client connection to the virtual directory requires Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption. Valid values are: @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OfflineAddressBook.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OfflineAddressBook.md index 02ba871661..b2ca657dd6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OfflineAddressBook.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OfflineAddressBook.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ If you configure OABs to use public folder distribution, but your organization d ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the OAB. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressLists -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressLists parameter specifies the address lists or global address lists that are included in the OAB. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiffRetentionPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DiffRetentionPeriod parameter specifies the number of days that the OAB difference files are stored on the server. Valid values are integers from 7 to 1825, or the value unlimited. The default value is 30. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GeneratingMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalWebDistributionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether the OAB is used by all mailboxes and mailbox databases that don't have an OAB specified. Valid values are: @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowMailboxDistributionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -VirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OrganizationRelationship.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OrganizationRelationship.md index 976f4da310..2bacdcf096 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OrganizationRelationship.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OrganizationRelationship.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The requesting organization only receives free/busy information with the time. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the organization relationship. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainNames -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DomainNames parameter specifies the SMTP domains of the external organization. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas (for example, "contoso.com","northamerica.contoso.com"), limited to 238 domains in one request. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ArchiveAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship is configured to provide remote archive access. Valid values are: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryReportEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DeliveryReportEnabled parameter specifies whether Delivery Reports should be shared over the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship should be used to retrieve free/busy information from the external organization. Valid values are: @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessLevel parameter specifies the maximum amount of detail returned to the requesting organization. Valid values are: @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessScope parameter specifies an internal mail-enabled security group where member free/busy information is accessible by the external organization. For best performance, the group should have less than 10,000 members. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxMoveEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailboxMoveEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship enables moving mailboxes to or from the external organization. Valid values are: @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips for users in this organization are returned over this organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessLevel parameter specifies the level of MailTips data that's externally shared over this organization relationship. This parameter can have the following values: @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessScope parameter specifies a mail-enabled security group in the internal organization that contains users whose free/busy information is accessible by an external organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationContact -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationContact parameter specifies the email address that can be used to contact the external organization (for example, administrator@fourthcoffee.com). @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhotosEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhotosEnabled parameter specifies whether photos for users in the internal organization are returned over the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetApplicationUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetApplicationUri parameter specifies the target Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of the external organization. The TargetApplicationUri parameter is specified by Exchange when requesting a delegated token for the external organization to fetch free and busy information, for example, mail.contoso.com. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetAutodiscoverEpr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetAutodiscoverEpr parameter specifies the Autodiscover URL of Exchange Web Services for the external organization, for example, `https://contoso.com/autodiscover/autodiscover.svc/wssecurity`. Exchange uses the Autodiscover service to automatically detect the correct Exchange server endpoint to use for external requests. @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetOwaURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetOwaURL parameter specifies the Outlook on the web (formerly Outlook Web App) URL of the external organization defined in the organization relationship. It's used for Outlook on the web redirection in a cross-premise Exchange scenario. Configuring this attribute enables users in the organization to use their current Outlook on the web URL to access Outlook on the web in the external organization. @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetSharingEpr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetSharingEpr parameter specifies the URL of the target Exchange Web Services for the external organization. @@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProtectionRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProtectionRule.md index 05485cdd9b..a315c1af86 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProtectionRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProtectionRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example applies the AD RMS template named Template-Contoso to messages sent ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the rule. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate parameter specifies the AD RMS template to apply to the message. An AD RMS template can be specified using the template name. Use the Get-RMSTemplate cmdlet to retrieve templates from your AD RMS server. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the Outlook protection rules are enabled. New Outlook protection rules are enabled by default. To create a rule without enabling it, set the Enabled parameter to $false. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromDepartment parameter specifies the sender's department as a condition. The user's department property is compared with the value specified. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies whether to set the order of processing of Outlook protection rules. Rules with a lower priority value are executed first. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentTo parameter specifies one or more recipients as a rule condition. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the internal recipient. For example: @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentToScope parameter specifies the message scope as a condition. You can use one of the following values: @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserCanOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserCanOverride parameter specifies whether users can override actions taken by Outlook protection rules. By default, users can override actions taken by Outlook protection rules. When set to $false, the UserCanOverride parameter prevents the user from overriding the rule when sending the message. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProvider.md index 9e7a811556..c3553a8334 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OutlookProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example creates the AutoDiscoverConfig object Autodiscover1 and the specifi ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter provides the common name of the AutoDiscoverConfig object. This can be a user-friendly name for identification. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaMailboxPolicy.md index c0311a932d..af02008a4c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example creates the Outlook on the web mailbox policy named Corporate. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the new policy. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaVirtualDirectory.md index e051fb1584..e8751f9b9f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-OwaVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationRoot parameter specifies the metabase path of the virtual directory. By default, this path is the same as the website in which the virtual directory is created. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter specifies the IIS application pool in which the virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAuthenticationMethods parameter restricts the authentication methods that can be used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. Valid values are: @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. This setting is important when Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is used. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. This setting is important when SSL is used. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter specifies the file system path of the virtual directory. We recommend using this parameter only when you need to use a custom location for the virtual directory files. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates the default location is used. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the IIS website under which the virtual directory is created. You don't need to use this parameter to create the virtual directory under the default website. @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PartnerApplication.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PartnerApplication.md index af5db2924b..272bdff3c4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PartnerApplication.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PartnerApplication.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example creates a new HRApp partner application named HRApp. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the partner application. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplicationIdentifier parameter specifies a unique application identifier for the partner application that uses an authorization server. When specifying a value for the ApplicationIdentifier parameter, you must also use the UseAuthServer parameter. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptSecurityIdentifierInformation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptSecurityIdentifierInformation parameter specifies whether Exchange should accept security identifiers (SIDs) from another trusted Active Directory forest for the partner application. By default, new partner applications are configured to not accept SIDs from another forest. If you're in deployment with a trusted forest, set the parameter to $true. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccountType parameter specifies the type of Microsoft account that's required for the partner application. Valid values are: @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the partner application is enabled. By default, new partner applications are enabled. Set the parameter to $false to create the application configuration in a disabled state. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LinkedAccount parameter specifies a linked Active Directory user account for the application. Exchange evaluates Role Based Access Control (RBAC) permissions for the linked account when authorizing a token used to perform a task. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Realm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustAnySSLCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PolicyTipConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PolicyTipConfig.md index 0eb6102ca0..8fbaed382c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PolicyTipConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PolicyTipConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example sets the informational URL in Policy Tips to the value `https://www ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the custom Policy Tip you want to modify. Valid input for this parameter is one of the following values: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Value -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Value parameter specifies the text that's displayed by the Policy Tip. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md index b79b93eb6b..e81c361881 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example creates a Windows PowerShell virtual directory and configures it to ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the new PowerShell virtual directory. The name you provide has the name of the website it's created under appended to it. If the name you provide contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the PowerShell virtual directory. The valid values are $true and $false. The default value is $true. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalUrl parameter specifies the external URL that the PowerShell virtual directory points to. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalUrl parameter specifies the internal URL that the PowerShell virtual directory points to. @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSSL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireSSL parameter specifies whether the PowerShell virtual directory should require that the client connection be made using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). The valid values are $true and $false. The default value is $true. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the PowerShell virtual directory. The valid values are $true and $false. The default value is $true. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolder.md index 77226a0eca..736e45e5a7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example creates the public folder Support in the North\_America hierarchy p ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name for the public folder. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EformsLocaleId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EformsLocaleId parameter specifies the locale-specific version of the e-forms library. The valid input for the EformsLocaleId parameter is the string names listed in the Culture Name column in the Microsoft .NET Class Library class reference available at [CultureInfo Class](https://learn.microsoft.com/dotnet/api/system.globalization.cultureinfo). @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the hierarchy public folder mailbox where you want this public folder created. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Path parameter specifies the location of the folder in the folder hierarchy, for example, \\Legal\\Cases. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md index e096e2cdf4..9aaa4ac222 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ This example creates a public folder migration request from the Exchange 2010 so ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the public folder migration request. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceDatabase parameter specifies the target database for the public folders. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for the public folder migration batch. You can use the BatchName parameter as a search string when you use the Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequest cmdlet. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CSVData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CSVData parameter specifies the mapping file output generated by the PublicFoldertoMailboxMapGenerator.ps1 script. Use this parameter for local migrations. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CSVStream -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CSVStream parameter specifies the mapping file output generated by the PublicFoldertoMailboxMapGenerator.ps1 script. Use this parameter for remote migrations. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMerging parameter specifies whether certain stages of a public folder migration are skipped for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless directed to do so by a Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md index 94bd9c8323..49ddc0d274 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ This example moves all public folders from public folder mailbox Pub1 to public ### -Folders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Folders parameter specifies the public folders that you want to move. If the public folder has child public folders, these child public folders aren't moved unless you explicitly state them in the command. You can move multiple public folders by separating them with a comma, for example, \\Dev\\CustomerEngagements,\\Dev\\RequestsforChange,\\Dev\\Usability. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the target public folder mailbox that you want to move the public folders to. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies that the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowLargeItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowLargeItems switch specifies that you can move large items only when they're encountered. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to be completed. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after completion before being automatically removed. The default value for this parameter is 30 days. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the public folder move request. If you don't specify a name, the default name is PublicFolderMove. @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Suspend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Suspend switch specifies whether to suspend the request. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendComment parameter specifies a description about why the request was suspended. You can only use this parameter if you specify the Suspend parameter. @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkloadType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkloadType parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ReceiveConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ReceiveConnector.md index 99f534f8f4..62c23c91b2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ReceiveConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ReceiveConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ It accepts incoming SMTP connections only from the IP range 192.168.0.1-192.168. ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the Receive connector. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Bindings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Bindings parameter specifies the local IP address and TCP port number that's used by the Receive connector. This parameter uses the syntax `"IPv4Address:TCPPort","IPv6Address:TCPPort"`. You can specify an IPv4 address and port, an IPv6 address and port, or both. The IP address values 0.0.0.0 or `[::]` indicate that the Receive connector uses all available local IPv4 or all IPv6 addresses. @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Client -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Client switch specifies the Client usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internal -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internal switch specifies the Internal usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internet switch specifies the Internet usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Partner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Partner switch specifies the Partner usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteIPRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteIPRanges parameter specifies the remote IP addresses that the Receive connector accepts messages from. Valid values are: @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Usage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Usage parameter specifies the default permission groups and authentication methods that are assigned to the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdvertiseClientSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdvertiseClientSettings parameter specifies whether the SMTP server name, port number, and authentication settings for the Receive connector are displayed to users in the options of Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMechanism -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthMechanism parameter specifies the advertised and accepted authentication mechanisms for the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthTarpitInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthTarpitInterval parameter specifies the period of time to delay responses to failed authentication attempts from remote servers that might be abusing the connection. The default value is 5 seconds. @@ -726,7 +726,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Banner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Banner parameter specifies a custom SMTP 220 banner that's displayed to remote messaging servers that connect to the Receive connector. When you specify a value, enclose the value in quotation marks, and start the value with 220 (the default "Service ready" SMTP response code). @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BinaryMimeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BinaryMimeEnabled parameter specifies whether the BINARYMIME Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ChunkingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ChunkingEnabled parameter specifies whether the CHUNKING Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -794,7 +794,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionInactivityTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectionInactivityTimeout parameter specifies the maximum amount of idle time before a connection to the Receive connector is closed. @@ -859,7 +859,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the maximum time that the connection to the Receive connector can remain open, even if the connection is actively transmitting data. @@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Custom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Custom switch specifies the Custom usage type for the Receive connector. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultDomain parameter specifies the default accepted domain to use for the Exchange organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the accepted domain. For example: @@ -942,7 +942,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryStatusNotificationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeliveryStatusNotificationEnabled parameter specifies whether the DSN (delivery status notification) Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -965,7 +965,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainSecureEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainSecureEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable mutual Transport Layer Security (TLS) authentication (also known as Domain Secure) for the domains that are serviced by the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EightBitMimeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EightBitMimeEnabled parameter specifies whether the 8BITMIME Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableAuthGSSAPI -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableAuthGSSAPI parameter enables or disables Kerberos when Integrated Windows authentication is available on the Receive connector (the AuthMechanism parameter contains the value Integrated). Valid values are: @@ -1060,7 +1060,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnhancedStatusCodesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnhancedStatusCodesEnabled parameter specifies whether the ENHANCEDSTATUSCODES Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1104,7 +1104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionPolicy parameter specifies how Extended Protection for Authentication is implemented on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1128,7 +1128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fqdn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Fqdn parameter specifies the destination FQDN that's shown to connected messaging servers. This value is used in the following locations: @@ -1153,7 +1153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LongAddressesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LongAddressesEnabled parameter specifies whether the Receive connector accepts long X.400 email addresses. The X.400 email addresses are encapsulated in SMTP email addresses by using the Internet Mail Connector Encapsulated Address (IMCEA) encapsulation method. Valid values are @@ -1182,7 +1182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAcknowledgementDelay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter isn't used by Exchange Server 2016. It's used only by Exchange 2010 servers in coexistence environments. @@ -1206,7 +1206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxHeaderSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxHeaderSize parameter specifies the maximum size of the SMTP message header before the Receive connector closes the connection. The default value is 256 kilobytes (262144 bytes). @@ -1235,7 +1235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxHopCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxHopCount parameter specifies the maximum number of hops that a message can take before the message is rejected by the Receive connector. The maximum number of hops is determined by the number of Received header fields that exist in a submitted message. @@ -1255,7 +1255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInboundConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxInboundConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of inbound connections that this Receive connector serves at the same time. @@ -1277,7 +1277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInboundConnectionPercentagePerSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxInboundConnectionPercentagePerSource parameter specifies the maximum number of connections that a Receive connector serves at the same time from a single IP address, expressed as the percentage of available remaining connections on a Receive connector. @@ -1297,7 +1297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInboundConnectionPerSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxInboundConnectionPerSource parameter specifies the maximum number of connections that this Receive connector serves at the same time from a single IP address. @@ -1319,7 +1319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxLocalHopCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxLocalHopCount parameter specifies the maximum number of local hops that a message can take before the message is rejected by the Receive connector. The maximum number of local hops is determined by the number of Received headers with local server addresses in a submitted message. @@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxLogonFailures -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxLogonFailures parameter specifies the number of logon failures that the Receive connector retries before it closes the connection. @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that's allowed through the Receive connector. The default value is 36 MB, which results in a realistic maximum message size of 25 MB. @@ -1394,7 +1394,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxProtocolErrors -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxProtocolErrors parameter specifies the maximum number of SMTP protocol errors that the Receive connector accepts before closing the connection. @@ -1416,7 +1416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxRecipientsPerMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxRecipientsPerMessage parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients per message that the Receive connector accepts before closing the connection. @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRateLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRateLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of messages that can be sent by a single client IP address per minute. @@ -1460,7 +1460,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRateSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRateSource parameter specifies how the message submission rate is calculated. Valid values are: @@ -1483,7 +1483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrarEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrarEnabled parameter enables or disables Originator Requested Alternate Recipient (ORAR) on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1506,7 +1506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PermissionGroups -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PermissionGroups parameter specifies the well-known security principals who are authorized to use the Receive connector, and the permissions that are assigned to them. Valid values are: @@ -1538,7 +1538,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipeliningEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipeliningEnabled parameter specifies whether the PIPELINING Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1561,7 +1561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProtocolLoggingLevel parameter specifies whether to enable or disable protocol logging for the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1584,7 +1584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectReservedSecondLevelRecipientDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectReservedSecondLevelRecipientDomains parameter specifies whether to reject connections that contain recipients in reserved second-level domains as specified in RFC 2606 (example.com, example.net, or example.org). Valid value are: @@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectReservedTopLevelRecipientDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectReservedTopLevelRecipientDomains parameter specifies whether to reject connections that contain recipients in reserved top-level domains (TLDs) as specified in RFC 2606 (.test, .example, .invalid, or .localhost). Valid value are: @@ -1626,7 +1626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectSingleLabelRecipientDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectSingleLabelRecipientDomains parameter specifies whether to reject connections that contain recipients in single-label domains (for example, chris@contoso instead of chris@contoso.com). Valid values are: @@ -1647,7 +1647,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEHLODomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireEHLODomain parameter specifies whether the client must provide a domain name in the EHLO handshake after the SMTP connection is established. Valid values are: @@ -1668,7 +1668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireTLS -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireTLS parameter specifies whether to require TLS transmission for inbound messages on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1689,7 +1689,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -1714,7 +1714,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServiceDiscoveryFqdn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ServiceDiscoveryFqdn parameter specifies the service discovery fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) for the Receive connector. @@ -1732,7 +1732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SizeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SizeEnabled parameter specifies how the SIZE Extended SMTP extension is used on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1756,7 +1756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuppressXAnonymousTls -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuppressXAnonymousTls parameter specifies whether the X-ANONYMOUSTLS Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1779,7 +1779,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TarpitInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TarpitInterval parameter specifies the amount of time to delay an SMTP response to a remote server that might be abusing the connection. The default value is 00:00:05 (5 seconds). @@ -1803,7 +1803,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. A valid value for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`. The X.500Issuer value is found in the certificate's Issuer field, and the X.500Subject value is found in the certificate's Subject field. You can find these values by running the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet. Or, after you run Get-ExchangeCertificate to find the thumbprint value of the certificate, run the command `$TLSCert = Get-ExchangeCertificate -Thumbprint `, run the command `$TLSCertName = "$($TLSCert.Issuer)$($TLSCert.Subject)"`, and then use the value $TLSCertName for this parameter. @@ -1821,7 +1821,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsDomainCapabilities -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsDomainCapabilities parameter specifies the capabilities that the Receive connector makes available to specific hosts outside of the organization. Remote hosts are authenticated with TLS with certificate validation before these capabilities are offered. @@ -1854,7 +1854,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportRole -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportRole parameter specifies the transport service on the Mailbox server where the Receive connector is created. Valid values are: @@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteDomain.md index 2b47aa2592..3a98055162 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example creates the remote domain named Contoso for the domain contoso.com ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the remote domain object. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DomainName parameter specifies the SMTP domain that you want to establish as a remote domain. A valid value is an SMTP domain (for example, contoso.com). The maximum length is 256 characters. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteMailbox.md index ad9e5e75d8..f6ce23c884 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RemoteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ As in Example 1, this example assumes that mail flow and directory synchronizati ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the on-premises mail user and the associated mailbox in the service. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AccountDisabled switch specifies whether to create the mail user in a disabled state. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Equipment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Equipment switch specifies that the mailbox in the service should be created as an equipment resource mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Password parameter specifies the password used by the mail user to secure his or her account and associated mailbox in the service. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Room -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Room switch specifies that the mailbox in the service should be created as a room resource mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Shared -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note**: This switch is available only in Exchange 2013 CU21 or later and Exchange 2016 CU10 or later. To use this switch, you also need to run setup.exe /PrepareAD. For more information, see [KB4133605](https://support.microsoft.com/help/4133605). @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UserPrincipalName parameter specifies the logon name for the user account. The UPN uses an email address format: `username@domain`. Typically, the domain value is the domain where the user account resides. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ACLableSyncedObjectEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ACLableSyncedObjectEnabled switch specifies whether the remote mailbox is an ACLableSyncedMailboxUser. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Archive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Archive switch specifies whether to also create an archive mailbox in the service. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail user and the associated mailbox in the service. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesOrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OnPremisesOrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) in the on-premises organization in which the new mailbox is added (for example, redmond.contoso.com/Users). @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemotePowerShellEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemotePowerShellEnabled parameter specifies whether the user has access to Exchange PowerShell. Valid values are: @@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteRoutingAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteRoutingAddress parameter specifies the SMTP address of the mailbox in the service that this user is associated with. This address is created automatically when the service is initially configured in the format of `.mail.onmicrosoft.com`. @@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResetPasswordOnNextLogon parameter specifies whether the user must change their password the next time they log on. Valid values are: @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SamAccountName parameter (also known as the pre-Windows 2000 user account or group name) specifies an object identifier that's compatible with older versions of Microsoft Windows client and server operating systems. The value can contain letters, numbers, spaces, periods (.), and the following characters: !, #, $, %, ^, &, -, \_, {, }, and ~. The last character can't be a period. Unicode characters are allowed, but accented characters might generate collisions (for example, o and ö match). The maximum length is 20 characters. @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicy.md index e52f0a2909..de98de144a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ The second retention tag, which is named Legal, is also enclosed in quotation ma ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the policy name. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionId parameter specifies the identity of the retention policy to ensure mailboxes moved from an on-premises Exchange deployment to the cloud continue to have the same retention policy applied to them. The RetentionId parameter is used in cross-premises deployments. You don't need to specify this parameter in on-premises-only deployments. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionPolicyTagLinks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionPolicyTagLinks parameter specifies the names of retention policy tags to be associated with this policy. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicyTag.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicyTag.md index cd0aad232e..3756a19d8b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicyTag.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RetentionPolicyTag.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ This example creates the retention tag Business Critical of type Personal. When ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the tag. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgeLimitForRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AgeLimitForRetention parameter specifies the age at which retention is enforced on an item. The age limit corresponds to the number of days from the date the item was delivered, or the date an item was created if it wasn't delivered. If this parameter isn't present and the RetentionEnabled parameter is set to $true, an error is returned. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Comment parameter specifies a comment for the tag. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LocalizedComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LocalizedComment parameter specifies localized comments and their languages. When the user's language setting matches a language specified for this parameter, Microsoft Outlook and Outlook on the web display the corresponding localized comment. Comments are specified in the form of ISO Language Code:Comment, for example, LocalizedComment EN-US:"This is a localized comment in U.S. English". @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LocalizedRetentionPolicyTagName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LocalizedRetentionPolicyTagName parameter specifies localized tag names and their languages. When the user's language setting matches a language specified for this parameter, Outlook and Outlook on the web display the corresponding localized tag name. Names are specified in the form of ISO Language Code:Name, for example, LocalizedRetentionPolicyTagName EN-US:"Business Critical". @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedFolderToUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageClass -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageClass parameter specifies the message type to which the tag applies. If not specified, the default value is set to \*. @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MustDisplayCommentEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MustDisplayCommentEnabled parameter specifies whether the comment can be hidden. The default value is $true. @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionAction parameter specifies the action for the retention policy. Valid values are: @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionEnabled parameter specifies whether the tag is enabled. When set to $false, the tag is disabled, and no retention action is taken on messages that have the tag applied. @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionId parameter specifies an alternate tag ID to make sure the retention tag found on mailbox items tagged in an on-premises deployment matches the tag when the mailbox is moved to the cloud, or mailbox items tagged in the cloud match the tag when the mailbox is moved to an on-premises Exchange server. The parameter is used in cross-premises deployments. You don't need to specify this parameter in on-premises-only deployments. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemTag -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SystemTag parameter specifies that the tag is created for internal Exchange functionality. @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Type parameter specifies the type of retention tag being created. Valid values include: @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md index fcd51b4f49..eef83073bd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Because setting the new role assignment as default applies only to new mailboxes ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the new assignment policy. If the assignment policy name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). The maximum length of the name is 64 characters. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Description parameter specifies the description that's displayed when the role assignment policy is viewed using the Get-RoleAssignmentPolicy cmdlet. Enclose the description in quotation marks ("). @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IsDefault switch makes the assignment policy the default assignment policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Roles -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Roles parameter specifies the management roles to assign to the role assignment policy when it's created. If a role name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you want to assign more that one role, separate the role names with commas. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleGroup.md index ac057d2934..35d6bdc6ef 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-RoleGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ This example removes the role assignment between the Distribution Groups managem ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the new role group. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedForeignGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the existing recipient-based management scope to associate with management role assignments created with this role group. If the management scope name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Description parameter specifies the description that's displayed when the role group is viewed using the Get-RoleGroup cmdlet. Enclose the description in quotation marks ("). @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the friendly name of the role group. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). This parameter has a maximum length of 256 characters. @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies the users or USGs who can modify the configuration of a role group or add and remove members to or from a role group. @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Members -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Members parameter specifies the mailboxes or mail-enabled USGs to add as a member of the role group. You can identify the user or group by the name, DN, or primary SMTP address value. You can specify multiple members separated by commas (`Value1,Value2,...ValueN`). If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks (`"Value 1","Value 2",..."Value N"`). @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Roles -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Roles parameter specifies the management roles to assign to the role group when it's created. If a role name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). If you want to assign more that one role, separate the role names with commas. @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SearchDocumentFormat.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SearchDocumentFormat.md index 4396c8006d..c8313cb96b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SearchDocumentFormat.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SearchDocumentFormat.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example creates a new search document format with an extension of .sct and ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter uniquely identifies the new search document format. For example, an identity of "PropSCT" might specify a proprietary document format which is supported by a custom IFilter. The Identity parameter must be unique within the search document formats. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Extension -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Extension parameter specifies the file type to be processed by the filter and is designated by the common file extension associated with the file type. Examples include .MP3, .JPG and .PNG. Note the leading period. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MimeType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MimeType parameter specifies the MIME type of the format. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name specifies a friendly name for the format, but does not need to be unique. For example, you might have several different formats (supported by custom IFilters) that are used to index output from a proprietary system called "My Business Output". You could use the Name parameter to create a category of formats called "My Business Output Formats" and uniquely identify each format within that group using the Identity parameter. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the new format is enabled at creation. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SendConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SendConnector.md index c200e2ff41..cf81fd379f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SendConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SendConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ To assign a specific authentication credential for the Send connector, you must ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the connector. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names to which the Send connector routes mail. The complete syntax for entering each address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthenticationCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthenticationCredential parameter specifies the username and password that's required to use the connector. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CloudServicesMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note**: We recommend that you don't use this parameter unless you are directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support, or by specific product documentation. Instead, use the Hybrid Configuration wizard to configure mail flow between your on-premises and cloud organizations. For more information, see [Hybrid Configuration wizard](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/hybrid-configuration-wizard). @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionInactivityTimeOut -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectionInactivityTimeOut parameter specifies the maximum time an idle connection can remain open. The default value is ten minutes. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectorType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectorType parameter specifies whether the connector is used in hybrid deployments to send messages to Microsoft 365. Valid values are: @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Custom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Custom switch specifies the Custom usage type. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DNSRoutingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DNSRoutingEnabled parameter specifies whether the Send connector uses Domain Name System (DNS) to route mail. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $true. If you specify a SmartHosts parameter, the DNSRoutingEnabled parameter must be $false. @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainSecureEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainSecureEnabled parameter enables mutual Transport Layer Security (TLS) authentication for the domains serviced by the Send connector when set to $true. Mutual TLS authentication functions correctly only if the following conditions are met: @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the Send connector to process email messages. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ErrorPolicies -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ErrorPolicies parameter specifies how communication errors are treated. Possible values are the following: @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceHELO -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceHELO parameter specifies whether HELO is sent instead of the default EHLO. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fqdn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Fqdn parameter specifies the FQDN used as the source server for connected messaging servers that use the Send connector to receive outgoing messages. The value of this parameter is displayed to connected messaging servers whenever a source server name is required, as in the following examples: @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FrontendProxyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FrontendProxyEnabled parameter routes outbound messages through the CAS server, where destination specific routing, such as DNS or IP address, is set, when the parameter is set to $true. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreSTARTTLS -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreSTARTTLS parameter specifies whether to ignore the StartTLS option offered by a remote sending server. This parameter is used with remote domains. This parameter must be set to $false if the RequireTLS parameter is set to $true. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internal -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internal switch specifies the Internal usage type. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internet switch specifies the Internet usage type. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers with the Transport service. When the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in the Exchange organization. When the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can only be used by Transport service on Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. The default value is $false. @@ -686,7 +686,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can pass through a connector. The default value is 25 MB. @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Partner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Partner switch specifies the Partner usage type. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Port -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Port parameter specifies the port number for smart host forwarding, if you specify a value in the SmartHosts parameter. The valid input range is an integer from 0 through 65535. The default value is 25. In most organizations, the port number is set to 25. @@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProtocolLoggingLevel parameter specifies whether to enable protocol logging. Verbose enables protocol logging. None disables protocol logging. The location of the Send connector protocol logs for all Send connectors configured in the Transport service on a Mailbox server or on an Edge server is specified with the SendProtocolLogPath parameter of the Set-TransportService cmdlet. @@ -779,7 +779,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireOorg -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireTLS -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireTLS parameter specifies whether all messages sent through this connector must be transmitted using TLS. The default value is $false. @@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmartHostAuthMechanism -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SmartHostAuthMechanism parameter specifies the smart host authentication mechanism to use for authentication with a remote server. Use this parameter only when a smart host is configured and the DNSRoutingEnabled parameter is set to $false. Valid values are None, BasicAuth, BasicAuthRequireTLS, ExchangeServer, and ExternalAuthoritative. All values are mutually exclusive. If you select BasicAuth or BasicAuthRequireTLS, you must use the AuthenticationCredential parameter to specify the authentication credential. @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmartHosts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SmartHosts parameter specifies the smart hosts the Send connector uses to route mail. This parameter is required if you set the DNSRoutingEnabled parameter to $false and it must be specified on the same command line. The SmartHosts parameter takes one or more FQDNs, such as server.contoso.com, or one or more IP addresses, or a combination of both FQDNs and IP addresses. If you enter an IP address, you must enter the IP address as a literal. For example, 10.10.1.1. The smart host identity can be the FQDN of a smart-host server, a mail exchanger (MX) record, or an address (A) record. If you configure an FQDN as the smart host identity, the source server for the Send connector must be able to use DNS name resolution to locate the smart host server. @@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of messages the server can send per connection. @@ -871,7 +871,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceIPAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceIPAddress parameter specifies the local IP address to use as the endpoint for an SMTP connection to a remote messaging server. The default IP address is 0.0.0.0. This value means that the server can use any available local IP address. This parameter is valid only for Send connectors configured on an Edge server. @@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the names of the Mailbox servers that can use this Send connector. This parameter isn't valid for Send connectors configured on an Edge server. @@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsAuthLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsAuthLevel parameter specifies the TLS authentication level that is used for outbound TLS connections established by this Send connector. Valid values are: @@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. A valid value for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`. The X.500Issuer value is found in the certificate's Issuer field, and the X.500Subject value is found in the certificate's Subject field. You can find these values by running the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet. Or, after you run Get-ExchangeCertificate to find the thumbprint value of the certificate, run the command `$TLSCert = Get-ExchangeCertificate -Thumbprint `, run the command `$TLSCertName = "$($TLSCert.Issuer)$($TLSCert.Subject)"`, and then use the value $TLSCertName for this parameter. @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsDomain parameter specifies the domain name that the Send connector uses to verify the FQDN of the target certificate when establishing a TLS secured connection. @@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Usage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Usage parameter specifies the default permissions and authentication methods assigned to the Send connector. The valid values are as follows: Custom, Internal, Internet, or Partner. The default is Custom. @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseExternalDNSServersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseExternalDNSServersEnabled parameter specifies whether this Send connector uses the external DNS list specified by the ExternalDNSServers parameter of the Set-TransportService cmdlet. The default value is $false. @@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SettingOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SettingOverride.md index cbecf3513b..1d19d09a98 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SettingOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SettingOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ For more information, see the topic [Change the offline address book generation ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the setting override. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Component -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Component parameter specifies the component that the setting override is applied to. For example: @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Parameters parameter specifies one or more parameters for the override that are available for the combination of the Component and Section parameter values. This parameter uses the syntax: `@("Parameter1=Value1","Parameter2=Value2"...)`. For example: @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Reason -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Reason parameter specifies why you are creating the setting override. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Section -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Section parameter specifies the name of the section for which the override is created. The available values for this parameter depend on the value of the Component parameter. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxVersion parameter specifies the latest version of Exchange 2016 that this override applies to (up to and including the specified value). @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MinVersion parameter specifies the earliest version of Exchange 2016 that this override applies to (up to and including the specified value). @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the name of the Exchange 2016 server where you want the override applied. You can specify a single Exchange 2016 server name, or an array of Exchange 2016 server name wildcards. For example, if you have three Exchange 2016 servers named Exchange01, Exchange02 and Exchange03, specify the value Exchange\* to apply the override to all of them. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SharingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SharingPolicy.md index fd98707686..ab74be08f1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SharingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SharingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example creates a default sharing policy, which is applied to all mailboxes ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the new sharing policy. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Domains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Domains parameter specifies the domains and the associated sharing options for those domains in the sharing policy. Values for this parameter use the basic syntax: `'Domain: SharingPolicyAction'`. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Default -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Default switch specifies that this sharing policy is the default sharing policy for all mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the new sharing policy. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default is $true. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailbox.md index 6d87b66bcf..16c70bd0be 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ You can't run this cmdlet from the Exchange Management Shell. Use SharePoint to ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name that displays in the user's global address list and on SharePoint. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharePointUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SharePointUrl parameter specifies the SharePoint URL where the site mailbox is hosted, for example, "https://myserver/teams/edu". @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Alias parameter specifies the alias of the site mailbox. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter specifies the mailbox database that holds the mailbox data for the site mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the site mailbox. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationalUnit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrganizationalUnit parameter specifies the organizational unit in which the site mailbox resides. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OverrideRecipientQuotas -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md index 78730144a7..34c86fc233 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This example creates the default provisioning policy named SM\_DefaultPolicy and ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the site mailbox provisioning policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AliasPrefix -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AliasPrefix parameter specifies the custom text prefix to add to the aliases of new site mailboxes. Valid values are: @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultAliasPrefixEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultAliasPrefixEnabled parameter specifies whether new site mailboxes have the default prefix text added to the alias. Valid values are: @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsDefault switch specifies that the site mailbox provisioning policy is the default policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the site mailbox. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProhibitSendReceiveQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send or receive new messages. Messages sent to the mailbox are returned to the sender with a descriptive error message. This value effectively determines the maximum size of the mailbox. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SweepRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SweepRule.md index a0e63f4d33..6de7b9487a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SweepRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SweepRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example creates a new Sweep rule named "From Jeff" in Felipe Apodaca's mail ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the Sweep rule. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Provider -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Provider parameter specifies the provider for the Sweep rule. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DestinationFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DestinationFolder parameter specifies an action for the Sweep rule that moves messages to the specified folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the Sweep rule is enabled or disabled. Valid values are: @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFlagged -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfPinned -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -KeepForDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The KeepForDays parameter specifies an action for the Sweep rule that specifies the number of days to keep messages that match the conditions of the rule. After the number of days have passed, the messages are moved to the location that's specified by the DestinationFolder parameter (by default, the Deleted Items folder). @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -KeepLatest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The KeepLatest parameter specifies an action for the Sweep rule that specifies the number of messages to keep that match the conditions of the rule. After the number of messages is exceeded, the oldest messages are moved to the location that's specified by the DestinationFolder parameter (by default, the Deleted Items folder). @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox where you want to create the Sweep rule. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Sender -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Sender parameter specifies a condition for the Sweep rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. For internal senders, you can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceFolder parameter specifies a condition for the Sweep rule that looks for messages in the specified folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SystemCategory parameter specifies a condition for the sweep rule that looks for messages with the specified system category. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SyncMailPublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SyncMailPublicFolder.md index 8c39847c58..26111affea 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SyncMailPublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SyncMailPublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ This cmdlet is only used by the Import-MailPublicFoldersForMigration.ps1 and Syn ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail-enabled public folder. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EntryId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Contacts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Contacts parameter specifies the contacts for the public folder. Contacts are persons about whom you can save several types of information, such as addresses, telephone numbers, and web page URLs. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliverToMailboxAndForward -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeliverToMailboxAndForward parameter specifies the message delivery behavior when a forwarding address is specified by the ForwardingAddress parameter. Valid values are: @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail-enabled public folder. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies an email address outside the organization. @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardingAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardingAddress parameter specifies a forwarding address for messages that are sent to this mail-enabled public folder. A valid value for this parameter is a recipient in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this mail-enabled public folder. Although messages send on behalf of the public folder clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the public folder, not the sender. @@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled switch specifies that this recipient is not visible in address lists. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the mail-enabled public folder. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxSendSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent by the mail-enabled public folder. @@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesObjectId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OnPremisesObjectId parameter specifies the GUID of the on-premises mail-enabled public folder that's used to create the mail-enabled public folder object in Exchange Online. @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OverrideRecipientQuotas -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -798,7 +798,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SystemMessage.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SystemMessage.md index 5f57d4f5d4..5adbdc6072 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SystemMessage.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-SystemMessage.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example creates a custom English quota message for mailboxes that exceed th ### -DsnCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DsnCode parameter specifies the enhanced status code for the custom system message. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Internal -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Internal parameter specifies whether the system message is displayed to internal or external users. Valid values are: @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Language parameter specifies the language of the message (for example, en for English or ja for Japanese). For the list of supported language codes, see [Supported languages for NDRs](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/non-delivery-reports-and-bounce-messages/ndr-procedures#supported-languages-for-ndrs). @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QuotaMessageType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QuotaMessageType parameter specifies the quota for the custom system message. Valid values are: @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Text -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Text parameter specifies the text in the custom system message. The text should explain why the system message was sent, and any actions that the user should take. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ThrottlingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ThrottlingPolicy.md index d98958dff8..4cdeb36baf 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ThrottlingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-ThrottlingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ This example creates a throttling policy that restricts a user to be able to onl ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the object in Active Directory. The default policy is named `DefaultThrottlingPolicy`. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an anonymous user before the user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an anonymous user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many anonymous connections can be made to a user's calendar data at the same time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If anonymous users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The AnonymousMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 1. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an anonymous user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ComplianceMaxExpansionDGRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ComplianceMaxExpansionDGRecipients parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients to expand in distribution groups when a discovery search is looking for a specified recipient. @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ComplianceMaxExpansionNestedDGs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ComplianceMaxExpansionNestedDGs parameter specifies the maximum number of nested distribution groups to expand when a discovery search is looking for a specified recipient. @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CpaCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a cross-premises user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CpaMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a cross-premises user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CPAMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections a cross-premises user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The CpaMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CpaRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which a cross premises user budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxConcurrency parameter specifies the number of concurrent discovery search executions that a user can have at the same time. To modify the discovery throttling parameters, create a new policy and name it "DiscoveryThrottlingPolicy". @@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxKeywords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxKeywords parameter specifies the maximum number of keywords that a user can include in a discovery search. For more information, see [Search-Mailbox](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/exchangepowershell/search-mailbox). @@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxKeywordsPerPage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxKeywordsPerPage parameter specifies the number of keywords for which to show statistics on a single page in the EAC. @@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxMailboxes parameter specifies the maximum number of source mailboxes that a user can include in a discovery search. @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxPreviewSearchMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxPreviewSearchMailboxes parameter specifies the maximum number of mailboxes that a user can include in eDiscovery Search Preview. @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxRefinerResults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -824,7 +824,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxSearchQueueDepth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxSearchQueueDepth parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent discovery search threads that can be active at the same time. @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxStatsSearchMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxStatsSearchMailboxes parameter specifies the maximum number of mailboxes that a user can search in an In-Place eDiscovery search without being able to view the statistics. When the number of mailboxes configured with the DiscoveryMaxStatsSearchMailboxes parameter is exceeded, the user must copy the search results to a discovery mailbox to view the statistics for the discovery search. For more information, see [In-Place eDiscovery in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/policy-and-compliance/ediscovery/ediscovery). @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryPreviewSearchResultsPageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryPreviewSearchResultsPageSize parameter specifies the number of messages displayed on a single page in eDiscovery Search Preview. @@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoverySearchTimeoutPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoverySearchTimeoutPeriod parameter specifies the number of minutes that a discovery search runs before it times out. @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Exchange ActiveSync user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Exchange ActiveSync user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -952,7 +952,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EASMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Exchange ActiveSync user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The EasMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 10. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EASMaxDeviceDeletesPerMonth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxDeviceDeletesPerMonth parameter specifies a limit to the number of Exchange ActiveSync partnerships that a user can delete per month. By default, each user can delete a maximum of 20 partnerships per calendar month. When the limit is reached, the partnership deletion attempt fails and an error message is displayed to the user. @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EASMaxDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxDevices parameter specifies a limit to the number of Exchange ActiveSync partnerships that a user can have at one time. By default, each user can create 100 Exchange ActiveSync partnerships with their Exchange account. After users exceed the limit, they must delete one of their existing partnerships before they can create any more new partnerships. An email error message describing the limitation is sent to the user when the limit is exceeded. Additionally, an event is logged in the Application log when a user exceeds the limit. @@ -1006,7 +1006,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasMaxInactivityForDeviceCleanup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxInactivityForDeviceCleanup parameter specifies the length of time that a user's device partnerships remain active. By default, there is no limit to the number of days that a user's device partnerships remain active. Use this value if you want to minimize the amount of inactive device partnerships in your organization. To use this setting, specify a value in days since the user's last sync time to cause the device partnership to be removed. @@ -1084,7 +1084,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Exchange ActiveSync user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1120,7 +1120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1156,7 +1156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1174,7 +1174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1210,7 +1210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1246,7 +1246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsCostThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsCostThreshold parameter specifies the cost threshold for Exchange Web Services users. @@ -1264,7 +1264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Exchange Web Services user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Exchange Web Services user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1340,7 +1340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EWSMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Exchange Web Services user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The EwsMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 10. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -1358,7 +1358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EWSMaxSubscriptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsMaxSubscriptions parameter specifies the maximum number of active push and pull subscriptions that an Exchange Web Services user can have on a specified Exchange server at the same time. If a user tries to create more subscriptions than the configured maximum, the subscription fails, and an event is logged in Event Viewer. @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Exchange Web Services user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeMaxCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExchangeMaxCmdlets parameter specifies the number of cmdlets that can be executed within a specific time period before their execution is slowed down. The value specified by this parameter should be less than the value specified by the PowerShellMaxCmdlets parameter. @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardeeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForwardeeLimit parameter specifies the limits for the number of recipients that can be configured in Inbox Rules when using the forward or redirect action. This parameter doesn't limit the number of messages that can be forwarded or redirected to the recipients that are configured. @@ -1492,7 +1492,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an IMAP user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -1510,7 +1510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an IMAP user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1528,7 +1528,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IMAPMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an IMAP user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The ImapMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -1606,7 +1606,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the IMAP user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1624,7 +1624,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsServiceAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsServiceAccount switch specifies that the user accounts associated with this policy are moderated by per-user thresholds and the health of system resources (for example, overall CPU usage). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1646,7 +1646,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRateLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRateLimit parameter specifies the number of messages per minute that can be submitted to transport by POP3 or IMAP4 clients that use SMTP. Clients receive a transient error if they submit messages at a rate that exceeds the value of this parameter. Exchange attempts to connect and send the messages at a later time. @@ -1664,7 +1664,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1682,7 +1682,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1700,7 +1700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxSocketConnectionsPerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxSocketConnectionsPerUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1754,7 +1754,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxSubscriptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1772,7 +1772,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1790,7 +1790,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Outlook on the web user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Outlook on the web user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1826,7 +1826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Outlook on the web user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -1908,7 +1908,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Outlook on the web user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1926,7 +1926,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Outlook on the web voice user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -1944,7 +1944,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Outlook on the web voice user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1962,7 +1962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Outlook on the web voice user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The OwaVoiceMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 5. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -1980,7 +1980,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Outlook on the web voice user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1998,7 +1998,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -2016,7 +2016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2034,7 +2034,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -POPMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections a POP user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The PopMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 20. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -2112,7 +2112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the user budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2130,7 +2130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -2148,7 +2148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2166,7 +2166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth parameter specifies the number of operations allowed to be executed by the user. This value directly affects the behavior of the PowerShellMaxCmdlets and PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameters. For example, the PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter consumes at least two operations defined by the PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth parameter but additional operations are also consumed per cmdlet execution. The number of operations depends on the cmdlets executed. We recommend that the value for the PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth parameter be at least three times larger than the value of the PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter. This parameter doesn't affect Exchange admin center operations or Exchange Web Services operations. @@ -2184,7 +2184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxCmdlets parameter specifies the number of cmdlets that can be executed within a specific time period before their execution is stopped. The value specified by this parameter should be more than the value specified by the ExchangeMaxCmdlets parameter. The time period used for this limit is specified by the PowerShellMaxCmdletsTimePeriod parameter. Both values should be set at the same time. @@ -2202,7 +2202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxCmdletsTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxCmdletsTimePeriod parameter specifies the time period, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine whether the number of cmdlets being executed exceeds the limits specified by the PowerShellMaxCmdlets and ExchangeMaxCmdlets parameters. @@ -2220,7 +2220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter specifies different information depending on context: @@ -2243,7 +2243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets parameter specifies the number of destructive cmdlets that can be executed within a specific time period before their execution is stopped. Destructive cmdlets are cmdlets that can make significant changes to user data and configuration settings in your Exchange organization. Throttling these cmdlets might help prevent accidental data loss. The following cmdlets are designated as destructive: @@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdletsTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdletsTimePeriod parameter specifies the time period, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine how many destructive cmdlets can be run. You set a value for this parameter when you set the PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets parameter. Both values should be set at the same time. For more information, see the description for the PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets parameter. @@ -2291,7 +2291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxOperations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxOperations parameter specifies the protocol-level operations that are used to send and receive data. If the execution of a cmdlet results in a significant number of operations (for example, if there is a lot of input/output occurring), throttling might occur. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2309,7 +2309,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxRunspaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxRunspaces parameter specifies the number of concurrent Windows PowerShell sessions that a user is allowed to have. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2327,7 +2327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxRunspacesTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxRunspacesTimePeriod parameter specifies the time period, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine how many Windows PowerShell sessions can be run. You set this value when you set the PowerShellMaxRunspaces parameter. @@ -2345,7 +2345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency parameter limits the number of concurrent Windows PowerShell connections per tenant organization. By default, the limit for concurrent Windows PowerShell connections per tenant organization is set to 9. If users in a tenant organization try to make more concurrent requests than the limit set by the PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency parameter, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. This limit is enforced even if a single user hasn't exceeded the per-user limit set by the PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter. The PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 100 inclusive. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -2365,7 +2365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxTenantRunspaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxTenantRunspaces parameter specifies the number of concurrent Windows PowerShell sessions that a tenant is allowed to have. @@ -2383,7 +2383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the user budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2401,7 +2401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PswsMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PswsMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections a Windows PowerShell Web Services user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PswsMaxRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PswsMaxRequest parameter specifies how many requests a Windows PowerShell Web Services user can have against an Exchange server at one time. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2439,7 +2439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PswsMaxRequestTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PswsMaxRequestTimePeriod parameter specifies the period of time, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine how many requests can be run. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2457,7 +2457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2475,7 +2475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2493,7 +2493,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationMaxBurstPerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2511,7 +2511,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2529,7 +2529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2547,7 +2547,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationRechargeRatePerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2565,7 +2565,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationSamplingPeriodPerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2583,7 +2583,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -2601,7 +2601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2619,7 +2619,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RCAMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an RPC Client Access user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until the connection is closed or the connection is otherwise disconnected (for example, if the user goes offline). If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -2701,7 +2701,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the budget for the user is charged (how much the budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2719,7 +2719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaSharedCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for all users before they're completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component. @@ -2737,7 +2737,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaShardMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that all users can consume elevated amounts of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2755,7 +2755,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaSharedMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections all RPC Client Access users can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until the connection is closed or the connection is otherwise disconnected (for example, if users go offline). If there are more concurrent requests than the policy allows, new connection attempts fail. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -2775,7 +2775,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaSharedRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the budget for all users is charged (how much the budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2793,7 +2793,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRateLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientRateLimit parameter specifies the limits on the number of recipients that a user can address in a 24-hour period. @@ -2811,7 +2811,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2829,7 +2829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2847,7 +2847,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2865,7 +2865,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2883,7 +2883,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuiteCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2901,7 +2901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuiteMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2919,7 +2919,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuiteMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2937,7 +2937,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuiteRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2955,7 +2955,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicyScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThrottlingPolicyScope parameter specifies the scope of the throttling policy. You can use the following values. @@ -2979,7 +2979,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-TransportRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-TransportRule.md index 465d011257..f05877d0a4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-TransportRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-TransportRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ This example creates a rule with the following settings: ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the rule. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivationDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ActivationDate parameter specifies when the rule starts processing messages. The rule doesn't take any action on messages until the specified date/time. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADComparisonAttribute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADComparisonOperator -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddManagerAsRecipientType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddToRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfRecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyHtmlDisclaimerFallbackAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyHtmlDisclaimerLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyHtmlDisclaimerText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -857,7 +857,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentExtensionMatchesWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentHasExecutableContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentIsPasswordProtected -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentIsUnsupported -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentNameMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentProcessingLimitExceeded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentPropertyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1166,7 +1166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BetweenMemberOf1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1197,7 +1197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BetweenMemberOf2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlindCopyTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -1259,7 +1259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Comments parameter specifies optional descriptive text for the rule (for example, what the rule is used for, or how it has changed over time). The length of the comment can't exceed 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1277,7 +1277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1298,7 +1298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentCharacterSetContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1322,7 +1322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -1353,7 +1353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -1378,7 +1378,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Disconnect -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1403,7 +1403,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DlpPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1423,7 +1423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1445,7 +1445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the new rule is created as enabled or disabled. Valid values are: @@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfADComparisonAttribute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1522,7 +1522,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfADComparisonOperator -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1547,7 +1547,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1582,7 +1582,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1617,7 +1617,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1643,7 +1643,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfRecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1669,7 +1669,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1704,7 +1704,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1739,7 +1739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1809,7 +1809,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1833,7 +1833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentExtensionMatchesWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1857,7 +1857,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentHasExecutableContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1884,7 +1884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentIsPasswordProtected -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1909,7 +1909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentIsUnsupported -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1940,7 +1940,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1966,7 +1966,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentNameMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1988,7 +1988,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentProcessingLimitExceeded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2015,7 +2015,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentPropertyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2056,7 +2056,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2088,7 +2088,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBetweenMemberOf1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2119,7 +2119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBetweenMemberOf2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2150,7 +2150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfContentCharacterSetContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2174,7 +2174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2207,7 +2207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2231,7 +2231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2257,7 +2257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2290,7 +2290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2315,7 +2315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2343,7 +2343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasNoClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2368,7 +2368,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasSenderOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2395,7 +2395,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2417,7 +2417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2443,7 +2443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderMatchesMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2465,7 +2465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2489,7 +2489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfManagerAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2522,7 +2522,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfManagerForEvaluatedUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2549,7 +2549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageContainsDataClassifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2577,7 +2577,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2609,7 +2609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2641,7 +2641,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2699,7 +2699,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2755,7 +2755,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2777,7 +2777,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2801,7 +2801,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2845,7 +2845,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSCLOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2872,7 +2872,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2930,7 +2930,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2986,7 +2986,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3032,7 +3032,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderIpRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3062,7 +3062,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderManagementRelationship -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3087,7 +3087,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3118,7 +3118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3147,7 +3147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3174,7 +3174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3200,7 +3200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3222,7 +3222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3248,7 +3248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3270,7 +3270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3296,7 +3296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExpiryDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3318,7 +3318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -From -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3351,7 +3351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3375,7 +3375,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3401,7 +3401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3434,7 +3434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3459,7 +3459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenerateIncidentReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3490,7 +3490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenerateNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3523,7 +3523,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3551,7 +3551,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasNoClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3576,7 +3576,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasSenderOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3603,7 +3603,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3625,7 +3625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3651,7 +3651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderMatchesMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3673,7 +3673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3697,7 +3697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncidentReportContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3765,7 +3765,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogEventText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3795,7 +3795,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagerAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3828,7 +3828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagerForEvaluatedUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3855,7 +3855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageContainsDataClassifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3885,7 +3885,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3917,7 +3917,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3949,7 +3949,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Mode parameter specifies how the rule operates. Valid values are: @@ -3971,7 +3971,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerateMessageByManager -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3998,7 +3998,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerateMessageByUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4031,7 +4031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotifySender -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4067,7 +4067,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrependSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4091,7 +4091,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, the value 0 is the highest priority, and rules can't have the same priority value. @@ -4117,7 +4117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Quarantine -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4144,7 +4144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4202,7 +4202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4258,7 +4258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4280,7 +4280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4327,7 +4327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4371,7 +4371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RedirectMessageTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4402,7 +4402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessageEnhancedStatusCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4430,7 +4430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessageReasonText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4462,7 +4462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4587,7 +4587,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RouteMessageOutboundRequireTls -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4612,7 +4612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RuleErrorAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RuleErrorAction parameter specifies what to do if rule processing can't be completed on messages. Valid values are: @@ -4633,7 +4633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RuleSubType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RuleSubType parameter specifies the rule type. Valid values are: @@ -4654,7 +4654,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4681,7 +4681,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4739,7 +4739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4795,7 +4795,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderAddressLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SenderAddressLocation parameter specifies where to look for sender addresses in conditions and exceptions that examine sender email addresses. Valid values are: @@ -4825,7 +4825,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4871,7 +4871,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderIpRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4901,7 +4901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderManagementRelationship -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4926,7 +4926,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4957,7 +4957,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4990,7 +4990,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5017,7 +5017,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetAuditSeverity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5044,7 +5044,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetHeaderName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5066,7 +5066,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetHeaderValue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5088,7 +5088,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetSCL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5113,7 +5113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpRejectMessageRejectStatusCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5137,7 +5137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpRejectMessageRejectText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5161,7 +5161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StopRuleProcessing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5186,7 +5186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5212,7 +5212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5234,7 +5234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5260,7 +5260,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5282,7 +5282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseLegacyRegex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UseLegacyRegex parameter specifies whether the rule uses regular expression syntax that's compatible with Exchange Server 2010. Valid values are: @@ -5303,7 +5303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -5321,7 +5321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md index a3d3fc0bc0..5fd6367dd4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example creates a virtual directory under the non-default website www.conto ### -ApplicationRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationRoot parameter specifies the metabase path of the virtual directory. By default, this path is the same as the website in which the virtual directory is created. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolId parameter specifies the IIS application pool in which the virtual directory runs. We recommend that you leave this parameter at its default setting. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppPoolIdForManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AppPoolIdForManagement parameter specifies the pool of programs that manages the virtual directory. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GzipLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GzipLevel parameter sets the Gzip configuration for the Exchange Web Services virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalNLBBypassUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalNLBBypassUrl parameter specifies the URL of the Exchange server that has the Client Access server role installed, regardless of whether it's behind a Network Load Balancing (NLB) array or not. @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MRSProxyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MRSProxyEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable MRSProxy for the Mailbox server. MRSProxy is a service that runs on Mailbox servers in a remote forest and helps to proxy a mailbox move. For more information, see [Mailbox moves in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/recipients/mailbox-moves). @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OAuthAuthentication parameter specifies whether OAuth authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Path parameter sets the path of the virtual directory in the metabase. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Role -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Role parameter species the configuration for the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that hosts the virtual directory. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebSiteName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebSiteName parameter specifies the name of the website under which to create the virtual directory. This parameter shouldn't be used when you're creating a virtual directory under the default website. @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSecurityAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WSSecurityAuthentication parameter specifies whether WS-Security (Web Services Security) authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md index af13148098..076d4f9729 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/New-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ This example creates an external relay domain for the X.400 namespace Europe org ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the X.400 authoritative domain. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -X400DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The X400DomainName parameter specifies the X.400 namespace, which can only include the X.400 organizational components. Specifically, only the following attribute types are supported: @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -X400ExternalRelay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The X400ExternalRelay parameter specifies authoritative domain an external relay domain. If you set the X400ExternalRelay parameter to $true, Microsoft Exchange routes email to the external address and doesn't treat resolution failures to this subdomain as an error. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Redirect-Message.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Redirect-Message.md index 4ff9812e91..05f186c4c4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Redirect-Message.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Redirect-Message.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example drains the active messages from the delivery queues on the Mailbox ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the source Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Target -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Target parameter specifies the target Mailbox server where you want to transfer the messages from the drained delivery queues. Enter the server name as a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ADPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ADPermission.md index 590b14b804..f51aa603d1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ADPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ADPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ This example removes the ability for anonymous users to send messages through th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the object from which the permission should be removed. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Instance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Instance parameter enables you to pass an entire object to the command to be processed. It's mainly used in scripts where an entire object must be passed to the command. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The User parameter specifies whose permissions are being removed from the Active Directory object. You can specify the following types of users or groups: @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccessRights -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AccessRights parameter specifies the rights that you want to remove from the user on the Active Directory object. Valid values include: @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ChildObjectTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ChildObjectTypes parameter specifies what type of object the permission should be removed from. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Deny -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Deny switch specifies that the permissions you're removing are Deny permissions. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedRights -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedRights parameter specifies the extended rights to remove. @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InheritanceType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InheritanceType parameter specifies how permissions are inherited. Valid values are: @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InheritedObjectType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InheritedObjectType parameter specifies what kind of object inherits this access control entry (ACE). @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Properties -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Properties parameter specifies what properties the object contains. @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AcceptedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AcceptedDomain.md index 4d52a5ac4c..e52512ac6c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AcceptedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AcceptedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the accepted domain Contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the accepted domain you want to remove. Enter either the GUID or the name of the remote domain. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDevice.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDevice.md index 53d507564f..e999d2e4a6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDevice.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDevice.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ This example removes the mobile device partnership for the device named Tablet\_ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter uniquely identifies the specific device partnership to be removed. @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md index 252701126d..749904cbf9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes all device access rules that have a name that starts with C ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the device access rule. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceClass.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceClass.md index 4cb1c29820..ae96896997 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceClass.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncDeviceClass.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example retrieves the list of devices connecting to Microsoft Exchange and ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the group of devices on which to scope the task. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md index 529397252e..d800c7776c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example removes the mobile device mailbox policy named Management and bypas ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device mailbox policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md index 781217db58..0d298379c4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example removes a custom Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory from the ser ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressBookPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressBookPolicy.md index e878164f2d..a074082f24 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressBookPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressBookPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example deletes the address book policy Murchison's Class. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the address book policy that you want to remove. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressList.md index 02ce9abe28..9def5d8847 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example removes the address list named AddressList1 and all of its child ad ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the address list that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recursive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recursive switch specifies whether to remove all child address lists. You don't need to specify a value for this switch. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressRewriteEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressRewriteEntry.md index e4e75d866f..63385b48ca 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressRewriteEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AddressRewriteEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example removes all address rewrite entries that include contoso.com in the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the address rewrite entry you want to remove. The Identity parameter accepts a GUID or the unique address rewrite name. You can omit the Identity parameter label. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-App.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-App.md index 1c77501a84..0d998b170b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-App.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-App.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example removes the Finance Test app installed for user Tony. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the AppID (GUID value) of the app that you want to remove. To find the GUID value of an app, run the command Get-App | Format-Table -Auto DisplayName,AppId. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationApp -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationApp switch specifies that the scope of the app is organizational. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrivateCatalog switch specifies that the app you want to remove is located in a private catalog. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AttachmentFilterEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AttachmentFilterEntry.md index 2ba825ebe3..ea755ecb19 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AttachmentFilterEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AttachmentFilterEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes the attachment filter entry that filters attachments that h ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the type of attachment that this filter entry removes. The Identity parameter accepts values in the format Type:Name, where Type is one of the following two values: @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthRedirect.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthRedirect.md index 42edc677b5..2b6f344d38 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthRedirect.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthRedirect.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes all existing OAuth redirection objects from your organizati ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the existing OAuth redirection object that you want to remove. The object name uses the syntax `AuthRedirect-Bearer-GUID`. The easiest way to find the name of the OAuth redirection object is to run Get-AuthRedirect. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthServer.md index a611561cbd..7fb750f295 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the authorization server named AMC. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the authorization server object that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the authorization server. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthenticationPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthenticationPolicy.md index 2a4e144071..c6053a0e63 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthenticationPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AuthenticationPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example enables legacy Exchange tokens to be issued to ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the authentication policy you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md index 32c9ff50f0..d8cc8b9d69 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the Autodiscover virtual directory from the site autodiscov ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Autodiscover virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md index 3f035835bd..3fb0f0cda6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-AvailabilityAddressSpace.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example immediately removes the availability address space object named Con ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the availability address that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the object. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-CalendarEvents.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-CalendarEvents.md index 37af6e5b5e..bee5da9ccb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-CalendarEvents.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-CalendarEvents.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example previews the meetings that would be cancelled in Jacob Berger's cal ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueryWindowInDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The QueryWindowInDays parameter specifies the number of days after the QueryStartDate parameter value to look for meetings that you want to cancel. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CancelOrganizedMeetings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CancelOrganizedMeetings switch specifies whether to cancel meetings in the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreviewOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreviewOnly switch specifies whether to preview the results of the command without actually cancelling any meetings. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueryStartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The QueryStartDate parameter specifies the start date to look for meetings that you want to cancel. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClassificationRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClassificationRuleCollection.md index 67d123a26f..0ff6b967a2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClassificationRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClassificationRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the classification rule collection named External Classific ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the classification rule collection you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the classification rule collection. For example, you can specify the name, rule collection name or distinguished name (DN) of the classification rule collection. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClientAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClientAccessRule.md index 81d804fa9c..834cc6b4ad 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClientAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ClientAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example removes the existing client access rule named "Block Connections fr ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the client access rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the client access rule. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSearch.md index 523371b286..7c9d9fe70d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example removes the compliance search named Case 1234 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search that you want to remove. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md index b389657e6e..c5d810d5e4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ This example removes the compliance security filter named HR Filter. ### -FilterName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The FilterName parameter specifies the name of the compliance security filter that you want to remove. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ContentFilterPhrase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ContentFilterPhrase.md index 8598c8c44c..70e9dfa355 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ContentFilterPhrase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ContentFilterPhrase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example removes the custom phrase Free credit report from the list of phras ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies a custom word or phrase to remove. You must enclose the value of the Identity parameter in quotation marks ("). @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Phrase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Phrase parameter specifies a custom word or phrase to remove. You must enclose the value of the Phrase parameter in quotation marks ("). @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DataClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DataClassification.md index 11847d2a17..18bff51df5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DataClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DataClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the data classification rule named "Contoso Confidential". ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the data classification rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the data classification rule. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index d80ad23b93..5438ddd878 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example, deletes the DAG DAG1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG to be removed. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md index 398452c4aa..aa5781d103 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the DAG network DAGNetwork04 from the DAG DAG1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the network being removed. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupServer.md index 47cfb67982..ee1ceedf9a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes the configuration settings for the Mailbox server MBX4 from ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG from which you're removing the server. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxServer parameter specifies the Mailbox server to remove from the DAG. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationOnly switch remove the Mailbox server from the DAG object in Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDagValidation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipDagValidation switch specifies whether to bypass the validation of the DAG's quorum model and the health check on the DAG's witness when removing members from the DAG. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DeliveryAgentConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DeliveryAgentConnector.md index f44ef1cb27..3194730264 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DeliveryAgentConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DeliveryAgentConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the delivery agent connector named Contoso Delivery Agent C ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or name of the delivery agent connector. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroup.md index cf0c056d74..383997a66e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the distribution group named Temporary Staff. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the distribution group or mail-enabled security group that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroupMember.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroupMember.md index 4e4bc7777a..48f4e68cfb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroupMember.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DistributionGroupMember.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes Jan Dryml from the distribution group named Technical Suppo ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the distribution group or mail-enabled security group that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Member -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Member parameter specifies the recipient that you want to remove from the group. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicy.md index 7f63c45109..95997ba529 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the existing DLP policy named Contoso PII. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the DLP policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicyTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicyTemplate.md index bce7076d60..dad0fa5c40 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicyTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DlpPolicyTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the DLP policy template named External DLP Policy Template. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the DLP policy template you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the DLP policy template. For example, you can specify the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the DLP policy template. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DynamicDistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DynamicDistributionGroup.md index 2070951572..d39e9ff8ea 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DynamicDistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-DynamicDistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example deletes the dynamic distribution group named Test Users. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the dynamic distribution group that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the dynamic distribution group. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EcpVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EcpVirtualDirectory.md index f38307da67..675fe966a7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EcpVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EcpVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the ECP virtual directory named ecp located on the default ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ECP virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EdgeSubscription.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EdgeSubscription.md index ab2e694756..be87832098 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EdgeSubscription.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EdgeSubscription.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example removes Edge Subscription for the Edge Transport server named Edge1 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the Edge Transport server for which you want to remove Edge Subscription. The identity is expressed as the host name of the Edge Transport server. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EmailAddressPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EmailAddressPolicy.md index 659c486619..6c2632e510 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EmailAddressPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-EmailAddressPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the email address policy named Southwest Executives. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the email address policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ExchangeCertificate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ExchangeCertificate.md index 759c87b53a..d0baf2ebd7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ExchangeCertificate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ExchangeCertificate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example uses the same settings, but removes the certificate from the server ### -Thumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Thumbprint parameter specifies the certificate that you want to remove. You can find the thumbprint value by using the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the certificate that you want to remove. Valid values are: @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederatedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederatedDomain.md index a902c0d79e..e9808471ac 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederatedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederatedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the federated domain contoso.co.uk from the federated organ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainName parameter specifies the federated domain name to be removed from the federated organization identifier. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch specifies whether to suppress warning or confirmation messages when removing a federated domain. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederationTrust.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederationTrust.md index 7fe23723a4..cc5b1d537f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederationTrust.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-FederationTrust.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the federation trust Microsoft Federation Gateway. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the federation trust being removed. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ForeignConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ForeignConnector.md index ec31d4ab73..96bc0488fc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ForeignConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ForeignConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example deletes the Foreign connector named Fax Connector. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or connector name of a specific Foreign connector. You can also include the server name by using the format ServerName\\ConnectorName. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalAddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalAddressList.md index aa81c3aac7..fa78078f11 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalAddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalAddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the GAL named OldGAL. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the global address list that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the GAL. For example: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md index a2657bb1a4..c940398a59 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-GlobalMonitoringOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes a global monitoring override of the ExtensionAttributes pro ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the monitoring item that was overridden. The value is in the form of HealthSet\\MonitoringItem or HealthSet\\MonitoringItem\\TargetResource. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ItemType parameter specifies the item type that you want to remove. It can be any of the following values: @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PropertyName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PropertyName parameter specifies the property for the override you want to remove. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BuildRange -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Roles -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-HybridConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-HybridConfiguration.md index 612fd6ffd0..7d69254dc4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-HybridConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-HybridConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example removes the HybridConfiguration object for the hybrid deployment. ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListEntry.md index 1eb3678517..2ef113d683 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the IP address range 192.168.0.0/24 from the IP Allow list. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the integer value of the IP Allow list entry that you want to remove. When you add an entry to the IP Allow list, the Identity value is automatically assigned. To find the Identity value of an IP Allow list entry, use the Get-IPAllowListEntry cmdlet. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListProvider.md index 59c3544dac..ee2fc3e4c7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPAllowListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the IP Allow list provider named Contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Allow list provider that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Allow list provider. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListEntry.md index 6fc2815694..ced2083df8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the IP address range 192.168.0.0/24 from the IP Block list. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the integer value of the IP Block list entry that you want to remove. When you add an entry to the IP Block list, the Identity value is automatically assigned. To find the Identity value of an IP Block list entry, use the Get-IPBlockListEntry cmdlet. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListProvider.md index d9de5066d9..b8322e65f5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IPBlockListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the IP Block list provider named Contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Block list provider that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Block list provider. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-InboxRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-InboxRule.md index c4f3397c11..7045da5bf1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-InboxRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-InboxRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example removes all Inbox rules from the mailbox Joe@Contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Inbox rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob switch hides a warning message when you use Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App) or Exchange PowerShell to modify Inbox rules. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the Inbox rule. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IntraOrganizationConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IntraOrganizationConnector.md index 426008cadc..c46d33b773 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IntraOrganizationConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-IntraOrganizationConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the existing Intra-Organization connector named "Contoso On ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Intra-Organization connector that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the connector. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-JournalRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-JournalRule.md index 58e379d9f0..c5c9c43c0b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-JournalRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-JournalRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the journal rule Brokerage Communications that's no longer ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the rule you want to remove. Enter either name or the GUID of the journal rule. You can omit the parameter label. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailContact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailContact.md index 41677f24f9..83b6c22e1f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailContact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailContact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example removes the mail contact named John. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail contact that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail contact. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailUser.md index 550a45c9ff..27bdf66632 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example removes the mail user named Ed Meadows. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail user that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail user. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreLegalHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Mailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Mailbox.md index 0765f501d9..a5ec1e6026 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Mailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Mailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example removes the specified soft-deleted mailbox. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter identifies the mailbox that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StoreMailboxIdentity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuxAuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreLegalHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Migration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Migration switch is required to remove migration mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Permanent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolder switch is required to remove public folder mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveArbitrationMailboxWithOABsAllowed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveLastArbitrationMailboxAllowed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SupervisoryReviewPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabase.md index 25db72c47c..7170bc25ba 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the mailbox database MailboxDatabase01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox database that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md index 04f4669b42..50ce155e83 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes a copy of mailbox database DB1 from the Mailbox server MBX3 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the mailbox database whose copy is being removed. When using this parameter, specify a format of DatabaseName\\ServerName. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxExportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxExportRequest.md index f4371e2ec3..672fbac9b9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxExportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxExportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ This example cancels the export request by using the RequestGuid parameter for a ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the export request. By default, export requests are named `\MailboxExportX` (where X = 0-9). Use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestGuid parameter specifies the unique identifier for the export request. To find the export request GUID, use the Get-MailboxExportRequest cmdlet. If you specify the RequestGuid parameter, you must also specify the RequestQueue parameter. You can't use this parameter with the Identity parameter. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestQueue parameter identifies the request based on the mailbox database where the request is being run. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxFolderPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxFolderPermission.md index fd615eb7b3..cf2be3023b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxFolderPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxFolderPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example clears any corrupted delegate information from Kim's mailbox. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the target mailbox and folder. The syntax is `Mailbox:\Folder`. For the value of Mailbox, you can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter specifies the mailbox, mail user, or mail-enabled security group (security principal) that's granted permission to the mailbox folder. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetDelegateUserCollection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResetDelegateUserCollection switch forces the removal of the LocalFreeBusy or the PR_FREEBUSY_ENTRYIDs files in case of corruption. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxImportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxImportRequest.md index 4b0ccfcb1b..56619c7c57 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxImportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxImportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This example removes all completed import requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the import request. By default, import requests are named `\MailboxImportX` (where X = 0-9). If you created the request using the Name parameter, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxPermission.md index 49d7dc1c4e..adbba4c33c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example excludes the HR Project mailbox from auto-mappi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox where you are removing permissions. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox: For example: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccessRights -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccessRights parameter specifies the permission that you want to remove from the user on the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Instance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter specifies whose permissions are being removed from the specified mailbox. You can specify the following types of users or groups (security principals) for this parameter: @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClearAutoMapping -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Deny -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Deny switch specifies that the permissions you're removing are Deny permissions. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InheritanceType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InheritanceType parameter specifies whether permissions are inherited to folders within the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRepairRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRepairRequest.md index 0f77f23c1c..59a4597166 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRepairRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRepairRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ This example deletes a specific mailbox repair request by specifying the unique ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox repair request to remove. Mailbox repair requests are identified by a complex GUID that is created when a new mailbox repair request is created. This GUID consists of a database ID, a Request ID and a job ID. The format is `DatabaseGuid\RequestGuid\JobGuid`. Use the Get-MailboxRepairRequest cmdlet to find the identity of a mailbox repair request. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRestoreRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRestoreRequest.md index 3b1bd245ff..df18d3ae1e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRestoreRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxRestoreRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example cancels the restore request by using the RequestGuid parameter for ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the restore request. The Identity parameter consists of the alias of the mailbox to be restored and the name that was specified when the restore request was created. The identity of the restore request uses the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxSearch.md index 90b6f263d9..74941b143a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the mailbox search Project Contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the mailbox search. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxUserConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxUserConfiguration.md index df48043dd3..96c9e86507 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxUserConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MailboxUserConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the specified user configuration item from the mailbox juli ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the user configuration item that you want to remove. This parameter uses the syntax MailboxFolder\ItemName: @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the user configuration items you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterPolicy.md index c839114494..cde2352cac 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example removes the malware filter policy named Contoso Malware Filter Poli ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter policy you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the malware filter policy. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterRule.md index eea5a20e1b..c04a2ceb8f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MalwareFilterRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the malware filter rule named Contoso Recipients. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the malware filter rule. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRole.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRole.md index 39277631d6..7c272978a2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRole.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRole.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ For more information about unscoped top-level management roles, see [Understandi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the custom role to remove. If the name of the role contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recurse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Recurse switch removes the specified role and all child roles of the specified role. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnScopedTopLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment.md index 4a4e87c6c9..e26f54ba29 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ After the list of role assignments to be removed is confirmed, remove the WhatIf ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the role assignment to remove. If the role assignment name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleEntry.md index def11dc9d1..7e6c993a43 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementRoleEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example forces you to acknowledge the command before proceeding (we didn't ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role entry that you want to remove. This parameter uses the syntax: `\` (for example, `CustomRole\Set-Mailbox`). @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementScope.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementScope.md index d21c285668..cbd3a39ac5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementScope.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ManagementScope.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ After you verify that the scopes to be removed are correct, run the command agai ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the scope to remove. You can't remove a scope if it's in use by a management role assignment. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MapiVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MapiVirtualDirectory.md index b5634346e1..89601355c0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MapiVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MapiVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the MAPI virtual directory from the local server named Cont ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the MAPI virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Message.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Message.md index 462f8cf196..30235da2fe 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Message.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-Message.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example removes all messages that meet the following criteria without gener ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the message. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue\\MessageInteger or Queue\\MessageInteger or MessageInteger, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com\\5 or 10. For details about message identity, see [Message identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#message-identity). @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more messages by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a message property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"FromAddress -like '*@contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable message properties and comparison operators, see [Properties of messages in queues](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/message-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithNDR -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WithNDR parameter specifies whether a non-delivery report (NDR) is returned to the sender of a message. The default value is $true. This parameter can be used with both the Identity parameter and Filter parameter sets. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MessageClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MessageClassification.md index 3ad8456773..02a6b28f61 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MessageClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MessageClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the message classification named "My Message Classification ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the message classification that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the message classification. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationBatch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationBatch.md index 621ad34cae..5a7633aaa7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationBatch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationBatch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example removes the corrupted migration batch LocalMove1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter identifies the migration batch that you want to remove. The value for this parameter is the name that was specified when the migration batch was created. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationEndpoint.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationEndpoint.md index b550b89413..2de85027b8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationEndpoint.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationEndpoint.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example removes the migration endpoint CrossForestME01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the migration endpoint you want to remove. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationUser.md index 21265c4d48..38fe6a43eb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MigrationUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the migration user Tony Smith from a migration batch. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the user that you want to remove from the migration batch. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDevice.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDevice.md index d47d20a69c..f4d11ef44f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDevice.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDevice.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes the mobile device partnership for the specified device and ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device partnership that you want to remove. You can use the following values that uniquely identifies the mobile device: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md index 978c5c882f..c238b63ed8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example removes the mobile device mailbox policy named Management and bypas ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device mailbox policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MoveRequest.md index 3c1e58353f..b414be957f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-MoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ The MailboxGuid and MoveRequestQueue parameters are for debugging purposes only. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use the following values: @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveRequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OabVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OabVirtualDirectory.md index ce326f3292..3b6d435a81 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OabVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OabVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example removes the default OAB virtual directory from Server1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the OAB virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OfflineAddressBook.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OfflineAddressBook.md index 7d7ab5b347..a4eadbf4de 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OfflineAddressBook.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OfflineAddressBook.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example removes the OAB named Contoso Executives. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the OAB that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OAB. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OrganizationRelationship.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OrganizationRelationship.md index e1a750ebb3..f60fdee79e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OrganizationRelationship.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OrganizationRelationship.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the organization relationship Contoso using the Identity pa ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the organization relationship that you want to remove. You can use one of the following values: @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProtectionRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProtectionRule.md index 9c740ebb31..bb92d3a648 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProtectionRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProtectionRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example removes all Outlook protection rules from the organization. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the Outlook protection rule that you want to remove. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProvider.md index 963f8c71d9..7b4a6ee9a5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OutlookProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example deletes the AutoDiscoverConfig object named Test Object from Active ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the AutoDiscoverConfig object to remove from Active Directory. @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaMailboxPolicy.md index 5b620c8bb2..af5b2cd99a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example removes the mailbox policy named Corporate for the tenant Contoso i ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaVirtualDirectory.md index a124400754..d89f980954 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-OwaVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the specified Outlook on the web virtual directory from the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the OWA virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PartnerApplication.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PartnerApplication.md index 936b9caaf0..edeb804c3f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PartnerApplication.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PartnerApplication.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This command removes the HRApp partner application. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the partner application. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PolicyTipConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PolicyTipConfig.md index d20d920506..7c5b735090 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PolicyTipConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PolicyTipConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes all the custom Russian Policy Tips. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the custom Policy Tip you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the custom Policy Tip. For example: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md index 72abe8d4c1..de97083644 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Be careful when using the Remove-PowerShellVirtualDirectory cmdlet without confi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the PowerShell virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolder.md index d3d0cdf444..8dfac0ab45 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example deletes the public folder Directory Folder and all its child public ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name and path of the public folder you want to remove. A valid value uses the syntax: `\Level1\Level2\...\LevenN\PublicFolder`. For example, `"\Customer Discussion"` or `"\Engineering\Customer Discussion"`. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recurse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recurse switch specifies whether all subfolders of the specified folder should also be removed. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderClientPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderClientPermission.md index 4d3cc811a7..96e7dc9d38 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderClientPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderClientPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example removes permission for the user Chris to the public folder My Publi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or public folder name that represents a specific public folder. You can also include the path by using the format \\TopLevelPublicFolder\\PublicFolder. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter specifies the user whose permissions are being removed. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md index 0667881178..df99edf198 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMailboxMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example returns duplicate public folder migration requests (requests create ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the public folder mailbox migration request that you want to remove. This value uses the syntax `\PublicFolderMailboxMigration` (for example, `\PublicFolderMailboxMigrationac6d9eb4-ee49-405f-b90d-04e9a258bd7e`). @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md index 8d030b34ca..374dd15017 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ The RequestGuid and RequestQueue parameters are for debugging purposes only. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the migration request that you want to remove. You can use the following values: @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestGuid parameter identifies the migration request to remove by its RequestGUID value. This parameter also requires the RequestQueue parameter. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestQueue parameter identifies the migration request by the mailbox database where the request is being run. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md index 26486f972c..8627acb82c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ The RequestGuid and RequestQueue parameters are for debugging purposes only. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the public folder move request. The default identity is \\PublicFolderMove. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestGuid parameter specifies the GUID of the public folder move request. If you specify the RequestGuid parameter, you must also specify the RequestQueue parameter. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestQueue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestQueue parameter identifies the request based on the mailbox database where the request is being run. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ReceiveConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ReceiveConnector.md index f8720a5197..75dbe3dc79 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ReceiveConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ReceiveConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example removes the Receive connector named Contoso.com Receive Connector. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Receive connector that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Receive connector. For example: @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteDomain.md index a4d1dfe0c2..66d775fc09 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the remote domain object named Contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the remote domain that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the remote domain. For example: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteMailbox.md index fd6ab9e40a..ff92a0cad0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RemoteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example removes the on-premises mail-enabled user Kim Akers and the associa ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter identifies the mail-enabled user and the associated mailbox in the service that you want to remove. You can use one of the following values: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreLegalHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreLegalHold switch ignores the legal hold status of the remote user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ResubmitRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ResubmitRequest.md index c85c142160..4ece31ad16 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ResubmitRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ResubmitRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes all resubmit requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the resubmit request you want to remove. Each resubmit request is identified by an incremented integer value. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicy.md index 0475a58a8f..010d3880a8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example removes the retention policy Business Critical, which is assigned t ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the retention policy name. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicyTag.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicyTag.md index d8d0bfdde8..fc50717840 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicyTag.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RetentionPolicyTag.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example removes the retention tag Finance-DeletedItems. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the retention policy tag. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md index 5b564b0d0d..ee27eb7529 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ For more information about the Where cmdlet and pipelining, see [Working with co ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the assignment policy to remove. If the assignment policy name has spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroup.md index 8823aa5d8b..e70371f1c6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example removes the Vancouver Recipient Administrators role group. Because ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role group to remove. If the role group name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroupMember.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroupMember.md index a7c39c03c7..b6fcbbf46e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroupMember.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-RoleGroupMember.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example removes the Training Assistants USG from the Training Administrator ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role group that you want to remove a member from. If the role group name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Member -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Member parameter specifies who to remove from the role group. You can specify the following types of users or groups (security principals) for this parameter: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SearchDocumentFormat.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SearchDocumentFormat.md index f0db065269..734253fba9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SearchDocumentFormat.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SearchDocumentFormat.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the search document format with an identity equal to "sct". ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter uniquely identifies the format to be removed. You can use the Get-SearchDocumentFormat cmdlet to view the identities of the installed formats. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SendConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SendConnector.md index 731a453bec..e76cacedf7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SendConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SendConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example deletes the Send connector named Contoso.com Send Connector. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name, or GUID of the Send connector. If the Identity name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). You can omit the Identity parameter label. You can also include the server name by using the format ServerName\\ConnectorName. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ServerMonitoringOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ServerMonitoringOverride.md index d4d2e18a65..2df2f375d2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ServerMonitoringOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ServerMonitoringOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example removes a server monitoring override of the ExtensionAttributes pro ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the monitoring item that was overridden. The value is in the form of HealthSet\\MonitoringItem or HealthSet\\MonitoringItem\\TargetResource. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ItemType parameter specifies the item type of the override that you want to remove. It can be any of the following values: @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PropertyName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PropertyName parameter specifies the property for the override you want to remove. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server that contains the override that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SettingOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SettingOverride.md index be10212190..3553943047 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SettingOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SettingOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the setting override named IM Server Integration. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the setting override that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the override. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SharingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SharingPolicy.md index 719d9621a8..df9b839429 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SharingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SharingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example removes the sharing policy Contoso and suppresses the confirmation ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the sharing policy that you want to remove. You can use one of the following values: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md index 78406d422b..8ce50bb76a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example deletes the site mailbox policy named Default that was created when ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the site mailbox provisioning policy that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-StoreMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-StoreMailbox.md index 7f22253212..0b0ae0b641 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-StoreMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-StoreMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example permanently purges all soft-deleted mailboxes from mailbox database ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Database parameter specifies the mailbox database that contains the mailbox to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox that you want to remove. Use the mailbox GUID as the value for this parameter. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxState -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxState parameter specifies the mailbox state on the source mailbox database. This parameter accepts the following values: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SweepRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SweepRule.md index 3815b75020..59f9f6fb22 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SweepRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SweepRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example removes all Sweep rules in the specified mailbox. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Sweep rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the rule you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SyncMailPublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SyncMailPublicFolder.md index 5b7c3b265b..820d10e781 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SyncMailPublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SyncMailPublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This cmdlet is only used by the Sync-MailPublicFolders.ps1 script. Don't run thi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mail-enabled public folder object that you want to remove from Exchange Online. For example: @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SystemMessage.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SystemMessage.md index 159bf7e9fa..1213f6465d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SystemMessage.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-SystemMessage.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example removes the specified custom quota message (combination of language ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the custom system message that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the system message. For example: @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ThrottlingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ThrottlingPolicy.md index 34b4dbf066..094ae1ab94 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ThrottlingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-ThrottlingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ You can't remove a policy that's associated with any users. This example reassig ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter identifies the throttling policy you want to remove. Use the name that matches the name of the policy in Active Directory. @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-TransportRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-TransportRule.md index 6efbe05339..91eb6434d2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-TransportRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-TransportRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example removes the rule named "Redirect messages from kim@contoso.com to l ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the rule that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-UserPhoto.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-UserPhoto.md index 7fdc01f89c..28cf153f71 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-UserPhoto.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-UserPhoto.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example deletes the photo associated with Ann Beebe's user account. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the user. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClearMailboxPhotoRecord -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClearMailboxPhoto switch specifies that a deleted mailbox photo is considered blank instead of deleted. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GroupMailbox switch is required to modify Microsoft 365 Groups. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhotoType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md index 146c97aa5f..d095b5cdae 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example removes the Exchange Web Services virtual directory named Sales fro ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the EWS virtual directory that you want to remove. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md index d15a9671e2..37a5815f57 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Remove-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example removes the X.400 authoritative domain object for the X.400 authori ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies a string value for the X.400 authoritative domain. Enter either the GUID or the name of the X.400 authoritative domain. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Reset-ProvisioningCache.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Reset-ProvisioningCache.md index 304b16a5f9..810db51c98 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Reset-ProvisioningCache.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Reset-ProvisioningCache.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example runs in a multi-tenant deployment by a data center administrator to ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the server that the application you want to reset is running on. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Application -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Application parameter specifies the specific administrative application to reset the provisioning cache for. You can use the following values: @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalCache -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GlobalCache switch clears all cache keys. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CacheKeys -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CacheKeys parameter specifies the value for the cache key that you want to clear. The format for the values should contain 32 digits separated by four dashes: xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CurrentOrganization -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CurrentOrganization switch resets the provision cache for the organization. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Organizations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Organizations parameter specifies the organizations where the provisioning cache is reset. Use this parameter in multi-tenant deployments. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index d57df551a4..05ca97870d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example activates member servers in the DAG DAG1 for the Active Directory s ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG being manipulated. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveDirectorySite -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveDirectorySite parameter specifies the site containing the DAG members to be restored. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateWitnessDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateWitnessDirectory parameter specifies the name of an alternate directory used to store witness data. The specified directory must not be in use by any other DAGs or used for any other purpose. This value can be populated ahead by using the Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup cmdlet. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateWitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateWitnessServer parameter specifies the name of a new witness server for the DAG as part of a site activation process. This value can be populated ahead by using the Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup cmdlet. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePrimaryWitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UsePrimaryWitnessServer switch specifies that the DAG's currently configured witness server should be used if a witness is needed by the DAG members that are being activated. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DetailsTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DetailsTemplate.md index c535b125f8..fa1f5da099 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DetailsTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-DetailsTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example restores the default attributes to the User details template for th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or specifies the details template type and language separated by a backslash, for example, en-us\\User. Details template types include: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-RecoverableItems.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-RecoverableItems.md index 7dfbf5787e..a4fa08974d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-RecoverableItems.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Restore-RecoverableItems.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ This example bulk restores all the recoverable items for administrator. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the deleted items that you want to restore. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EntryID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EntryID parameter specifies the deleted item that you want to restore. The EntryID value for the deleted item is unique in the mailbox. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterEndTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FilterEndTime specifies the end date/time of the date range. This parameter uses the LastModifiedTime value of the item. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterItemType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FilterItemType parameter filters the results by the specified MessageClass (ItemClass) property value of the deleted item. For example: @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterStartTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FilterStartTime specifies the start date/time of the date range. This parameter uses the LastModifiedTime value of the item. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastParentFolderID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LastParentFolderID parameter specifies the FolderID value of the item before it was deleted. For example, 53B93149989CA54DBC9702AE619B9CCA000062CE9397. @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceFolder parameter specifies where to search for deleted items in the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectContains parameter filters the deleted items by the specified text value in the Subject field. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md index 645c002cfe..8665313ed1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This example resumes replication and replay activity for the copy of the databas ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the database whose copying is being resumed. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableReplayLag -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisableReplayLag switch disables any configured replay lag time for the database copy when the passive copy is resumed. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableReplayLagReason -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisableReplayLagReason parameter is used with the DisableReplayLag parameter to specify an administrative reason for disabling replay lag time for a passive copy. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplicationOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplicationOnly switch resumes replication without affecting the activation setting (for example, the ActivationSuspended property for the database copy remains set to True). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxExportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxExportRequest.md index 9dd5908f7a..b3adf7bcd2 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxExportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxExportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example resumes any failed export move requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the export request. By default, export requests are named `\MailboxExportX` (where X = 0-9). Use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxImportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxImportRequest.md index 785786b9af..84b68f065c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxImportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxImportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example resumes all failed import requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the import request. By default, import requests are named `\MailboxImportX` (where X = 0-9). If you created the request using the Name parameter, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxRestoreRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxRestoreRequest.md index fad77ae856..e724a01e35 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxRestoreRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MailboxRestoreRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example resumes any restore request with the status of Failed. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the restore request. The Identity parameter consists of the alias of the mailbox to be restored and the name that was specified when the restore request was created. The identity of the restore request uses the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Message.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Message.md index 0e3a1e81b7..8e12b6fcb9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Message.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Message.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example resumes delivery of all messages in a suspended state and for which ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the message. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue\\MessageInteger or Queue\\MessageInteger or MessageInteger, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com\\5 or 10. For details about message identity, see [Message identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#message-identity). @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more messages by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a message property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"FromAddress -like '*@contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable message properties and comparison operators, see [Properties of messages in queues](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/message-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MoveRequest.md index b1659f57e9..04cf94c12d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-MoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example resumes any move requests that have the suspend comment "Resume aft ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use the following values: @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendWhenReadyToComplete switch suspends the move request before it reaches the status of CompletionInProgress. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md index bd11ab1149..be2acbe60f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example resumes any failed migration requests. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the migration request that you want to resume. You can use the following values: @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md index 3573fecc7e..829cf0927e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example resumes a move request that has the suspend comment "Resume after 1 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the public folder move request. The default identity is \\PublicFolderMove. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Queue.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Queue.md index fcd4ceaf1c..8accbc01e9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Queue.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Resume-Queue.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example resumes processing of all queues where the NextHopDomain is Fourthc ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the queue. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue or Queue, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com or Unreachable. For details about queue identity, see [Queue identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#queue-identity). @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more queues by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a queue property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"NextHopDomain -eq 'contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable queue properties and comparison operators, see [Queue properties in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queue-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Retry-Queue.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Retry-Queue.md index 20b8cbb918..211362d848 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Retry-Queue.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Retry-Queue.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example forces a connection attempt for all queues that meet the following ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the queue. Valid input for this parameter uses the syntax Server\\Queue or Queue, for example, Mailbox01\\contoso.com or Unreachable. For details about queue identity, see [Queue identity](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell#queue-identity). @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Filter parameter specifies one or more queues by using OPATH filter syntax. The OPATH filter includes a queue property name followed by a comparison operator and value (for example, `"NextHopDomain -eq 'contoso.com'"`). For details about filterable queue properties and comparison operators, see [Queue properties in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queue-properties) and [Find queues and messages in queues in the Exchange Management Shell](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/mail-flow/queues/queues-and-messages-in-powershell). @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Resubmit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Resubmit parameter specifies whether the queue contents should be resubmitted to the categorizer before a connection is established. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-AdminAuditLog.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-AdminAuditLog.md index a1fe3fddee..870d841fbc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-AdminAuditLog.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-AdminAuditLog.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ This example returns entries in the administrator audit log of an Exchange Onlin ### -Cmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Cmdlets parameter filters the results by the cmdlets that were used. You can specify multiple cmdlets separated by commas. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalAccess parameter filters the results by changes that were made (cmdlets that were run) by users outside of your organization. Valid values are: @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsSuccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The IsSuccess parameter filters the results by whether the changes were successful. Valid values are: @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ObjectIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ObjectIds parameter filters the results by the object that was modified (the mailbox, public folder, Send connector, transport rule, accepted domain, etc. that the cmdlet operated on). A valid value depends on how the object is represented in the audit log. For example: @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Parameters parameter filters the results by the parameters that were used. You can only use this parameter with the Cmdlets parameter (you can't use it by itself). You can specify multiple parameters separated by commas. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. The default value is 1000. @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The StartIndex parameter specifies the position in the result set where the displayed results start. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The UserIds parameter filters the results by the user who made the change (who ran the cmdlet). diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-Mailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-Mailbox.md index 31efc27c8a..f9a7bd3a44 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-Mailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-Mailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ This example searches all mailboxes in your organization for messages that conta ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox to search. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EstimateResultOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EstimateResultOnly switch returns only an estimate of the total number and size of messages. Messages aren't copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetFolder parameter specifies a folder name in which search results are saved in the target mailbox. The folder is created in the target mailbox upon execution. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the destination mailbox where search results are copied. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note**: You need to be assigned the Mailbox Import Export management role to use this switch. By default, this role isn't assigned to any role group (including Organization Management). Typically, you assign a role to a built-in or custom role group. @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DoNotIncludeArchive -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DoNotIncludeArchive switch specifies that the user's archive mailbox shouldn't be included in the search. You don't need to specify a value for this switch. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeUnsearchableItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IncludeUnsearchableItems switch includes items that couldn't be indexed by Exchange Search in the search results. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogLevel parameter specifies the logging level for the search. It can have one of the following values: @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogOnly switch performs a search, but only generates a log. Messages returned by the search aren't copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchDumpster -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SearchDumpster switch specifies whether to include the Recoverable Items folder in the search. The Recoverable items folder stores items that were deleted from the Deleted Items folder or items that were hard-deleted until they're purged from the mailbox database. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchDumpsterOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SearchDumpsterOnly switch specifies that only the Recoverable Items folder of the specified mailbox is searched. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SearchQuery parameter specifies a search string or a query formatted using Keyword Query Language (KQL). For more information about KQL in Exchange, see [Message properties and search operators for In-Place eDiscovery](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/security-and-compliance/in-place-ediscovery/message-properties-and-search-operators). @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MailboxAuditLog.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MailboxAuditLog.md index 8a20ce8c36..d94d150151 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MailboxAuditLog.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MailboxAuditLog.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ This example retrieves mailbox audit log entries for Ken Kwok's mailbox for acti ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies a single mailbox to retrieve mailbox audit log entries from. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalAccess parameter specifies whether to return only audit log entries for mailbox access by users that are outside of your organization. In Exchange Online, this parameter returns audit log entries for mailbox access by Microsoft datacenter administrators. Valid values are: @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasAttachments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasAttachments parameter filters the search by messages that have attachments. Valid values are: @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogonTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LogonTypes parameter specifies the type of logons. Valid values are: @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailboxes parameter specifies the mailboxes to retrieve mailbox audit log entries from. You can use this parameter to search audit logs for multiple mailboxes. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Operations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Operations parameter filters the search results by the mailbox actions that are logged by mailbox audit logging. Valid values are: @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of mailbox audit log entries to return. Valid values include an integer from 1 through 250000. By default, 1000 entries are returned. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowDetails switch retrieves the details of each log entry from the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MessageTrackingReport.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MessageTrackingReport.md index 87a469ee90..6f8d6c7f06 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MessageTrackingReport.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Search-MessageTrackingReport.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ This example returns the message tracking reports that the Help desk can analyze ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter scopes the search to the specified mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Sender -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Sender parameter specifies the email address of the message sender for messages that are sent to the mailbox that's specified by the Identity parameter. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassDelegateChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BypassDelegateChecking switch allows Help desk staff and administrators to track messages for any user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DoNotResolve -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DoNotResolve switch specifies whether to prevent the resolution of email addresses to display names. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageEntryId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageId parameter filters the results by the Message-ID header field of the message. This value is also known as the Client ID. The format of the Message-ID depends on the messaging server that sent the message. The value should be unique for each message. However, not all messaging servers create values for the Message-ID in the same way. Be sure to include the full Message ID string (which might include angle brackets) and enclose the value in quotation marks (for example, ""). @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipients parameter filters the results by the email addresses of the specified recipients. You can specify multiple email addresses separated by commas. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResultSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResultSize parameter specifies the maximum number of results to return. If you want to return all requests that match the query, use unlimited for the value of this parameter. The default value is 1000. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Subject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Subject parameter searches for messages with the specified Subject field value. If the value contains spaces, enclosed the value in quotation marks. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TraceLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TraceLevel parameter specifies the details to include in the results. Valid values are: @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Send-TextMessagingVerificationCode.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Send-TextMessagingVerificationCode.md index af84b61d3e..6571b18577 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Send-TextMessagingVerificationCode.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Send-TextMessagingVerificationCode.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ This example sends the text messaging verification code to Tony Smith's mobile p ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox where you are trying to enable text messaging notifications. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADServerSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADServerSettings.md index 537e6dd15f..f1c61d1cfa 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADServerSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADServerSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example sets the scope of the current session to the entire forest and desi ### -PreferredServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreferredServer parameter specifies the FQDN of the domain controller to be used for this session. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RunspaceServerSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RunspaceServerSettings parameter specifies whether to pass an entire configuration object to the command to be processed. This parameter is useful in scripts where an entire object must be passed to the command. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationDomainController parameter specifies the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the configuration domain controller to be used for reading Exchange configuration information in this session. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferredGlobalCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreferredGlobalCatalog parameter specifies the FQDN of the global catalog server to be used for reading recipient information in this session. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientViewRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientViewRoot parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) to include in the recipient scope for this session. When you specify a recipient scope with this parameter, only the recipients included in the scope are returned. To specify an OU, use the syntax `/`. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetPreferredDomainControllers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SetPreferredDomainControllers parameter specifies the list of domain controllers used to read information from Active Directory in this session. You must specify the FQDN of the domain controllers. Separate multiple domain controllers using commas. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ViewEntireForest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ViewEntireForest parameter specifies whether all the objects in the forest are viewed and managed in this session. Valid values are $true and $false. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSite.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSite.md index 03b5ba59ce..d944da297f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSite.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSite.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example configures the Active Directory site named Default-First-Site-Name ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the Active Directory site you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the site. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the Active Directory site. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HubSiteEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HubSiteEnabled parameter specifies whether this site acts as a hub site. The default value is $false. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InboundMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InboundMailEnabled parameter enables or disables receiving incoming messages for all Exchange servers located in the Active Directory site. Typically, you use this parameter after Active Directory site failover or maintenance. Valid values are: @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PartnerId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSiteLink.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSiteLink.md index f47a8b17c3..8714158ab8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSiteLink.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ADSiteLink.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example assigns an Exchange-specific cost of 25 to the IP site link DEFAULT ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name or GUID of the IP site link you want to modify. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeCost -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExchangeCost parameter specifies an Exchange-specific cost for the IP site link. This cost is used instead of the Active Directory-assigned cost. To clear the value of the ExchangeCost parameter and revert to using the cost of the IP site link specified in Active Directory, set the value of the ExchangeCost parameter to $null. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can pass across the Active Directory IP site link. The default value is unlimited. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the IP site link. The name that you assign overwrites the current identity of the IP site link. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AcceptedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AcceptedDomain.md index 6c681e1ca8..79b84fb443 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AcceptedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AcceptedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example makes the accepted domain Contoso the default accepted domain. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the accepted domain you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the accepted domain object. For example, you can use the name, GUID or distinguished name (DN) of the accepted domain. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressBookEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DomainType parameter specifies the accepted domain type. Valid values are: @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MakeDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MatchSubDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MatchSubDomains parameter enables mail to be sent by and received from users on any subdomain of this accepted domain. The default value is $false. @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PendingCompletion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PendingRemoval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md index b2dfc71570..bf13bff81e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example changes the organization's device access rule so that all devices e ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the device access rule. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccessLevel parameter specifies whether the devices are allowed, blocked or quarantined. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAutoblockThreshold.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAutoblockThreshold.md index 8b29f977a3..7eedcada2e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAutoblockThreshold.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncDeviceAutoblockThreshold.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example sets the autoblock threshold rule RecentCommands with several setti ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the autoblock threshold rule. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminEmailInsert -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdminEmailInsert parameter specifies the text to include in the email sent to the user when a mobile device triggers an autoblock threshold rule. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BehaviorTypeIncidenceDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BehaviorTypeIncidenceDuration parameter specifies the interval (in minutes) within which the BehaviorType must occur to trigger the autoblock rule. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BehaviorTypeIncidenceLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BehaviorTypeIncidenceLimit parameter specifies the number of occurrences of the behavior type needed to trigger blocking. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceBlockDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeviceBlockDuration parameter specifies the length of time (in minutes) that the mobile device is blocked. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md index d5222a900b..eb05bd85e3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ This example sets several policy settings for the Mobile Device mailbox policy D ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Mobile Device mailbox policy. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBluetooth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBluetooth parameter specifies whether the Bluetooth capabilities are allowed on the mobile phone. The available options are Disable, HandsfreeOnly, and Allow. The default value is Allow. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBrowser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBrowser parameter indicates whether Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer is allowed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't affect non-Microsoft browsers. @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCamera -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowCamera parameter specifies whether the mobile phone's camera is allowed. The default value is $true. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConsumerEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConsumerEmail parameter specifies whether the mobile phone user can configure a personal email account on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access to emails using non-Microsoft mobile phone email programs. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowDesktopSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowDesktopSync parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can synchronize with a desktop computer through a cable. The default value is $true. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowExternalDeviceManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowExternalDeviceManagement parameter specifies whether an external device management program is allowed to manage the mobile phone. @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowHTMLEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowHTMLEmail parameter specifies whether HTML email is enabled on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. If set to $false, all email is converted to plain text before synchronization occurs. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowInternetSharing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowInternetSharing parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can be used as a modem to connect a computer to the Internet. The default value is $true. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIrDA -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowIrDA parameter specifies whether infrared connections are allowed to the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowMobileOTAUpdate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowMobileOTAUpdate parameter specifies whether the Exchange ActiveSync mailbox policy can be sent to the mobile phone over a cellular data connection. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNonProvisionableDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter specifies whether all mobile phones can synchronize with the server running Exchange. When set to $true, the AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter enables all mobile phones to synchronize with the Exchange server, regardless of whether the phone can enforce all the specific settings established in the Mobile Device mailbox policy. This also includes mobile phones managed by a separate device management system. When set to $false, this parameter blocks mobile phones that aren't provisioned from synchronizing with the Exchange server. The default value is $false. @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowPOPIMAPEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowPOPIMAPEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a POP3 or IMAP4 email account on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access by non-Microsoft email programs. @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRemoteDesktop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRemoteDesktop parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can initiate a remote desktop connection. The default value is $true. @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSimpleDevicePassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSimpleDevicePassword parameter specifies whether a simple device password is allowed. A simple device password is a password that has a specific pattern, such as 1111 or 1234. The default value is $true. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation parameter specifies whether the messaging application on the mobile phone can negotiate the encryption algorithm if a recipient's certificate doesn't support the specified encryption algorithm. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMESoftCerts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMESoftCerts parameter specifies whether S/MIME software certificates are allowed. The default value is $true. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowStorageCard -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowStorageCard parameter specifies whether the mobile phone can access information stored on a storage card. The default value is $true. @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowTextMessaging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowTextMessaging parameter specifies whether text messaging is allowed from the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedApplications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedApplications parameter specifies whether unsigned applications can be installed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages parameter specifies whether unsigned installation packages can be executed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowWiFi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowWiFi parameter specifies whether wireless Internet access is allowed on the mobile phone. The default value is $true. @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlphanumericDevicePasswordRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlphanumericDevicePasswordRequired parameter specifies whether the password for the mobile phone must be alphanumeric. The default value is $false. @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApprovedApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApprovedApplicationList parameter specifies a list of approved applications for the mobile phone. @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether attachments can be downloaded. When set to $false, the AttachmentsEnabled parameter blocks the user from downloading attachments. The default value is $true. @@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeviceEncryptionEnabled parameter specifies whether encryption is enabled. The DeviceEncryptionEnabled parameter, when set to $true, enables device encryption on the mobile phone. The default value is $false. @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordEnabled parameter specifies whether a password is required. When set to $true, the DevicePasswordEnabled parameter requires that the user set a password for the mobile phone. The default value is $false. @@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordExpiration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordExpiration parameter specifies the length of time, in days, that a password can be used. After this length of time, a new password must be created. The format of the parameter is dd.hh.mm:ss, for example, 24.00:00 = 24 hours. @@ -664,7 +664,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePasswordHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePasswordHistory parameter specifies the number of previously used passwords to store. When a user creates a password, the user can't reuse a stored password that was previously used. @@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePolicyRefreshInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePolicyRefreshInterval parameter specifies how often the policy is sent from the server to the mobile phone. @@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IrmEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) is enabled for the mailbox policy. @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default Mobile Device mailbox policy. The default value is $false. If another policy is currently set as the default, setting this parameter replaces the old default policy with this policy. @@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefaultPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default Mobile Device mailbox policy. The default value is $false. If another policy is currently set as the default, setting this parameter replaces the old default policy with this policy. @@ -774,7 +774,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAttachmentSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxAttachmentSize parameter specifies the maximum size of attachments that can be downloaded to the mobile phone. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -792,7 +792,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCalendarAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxCalendarAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum range of calendar days that can be synchronized to the device. The value is specified by entering one of the following values: @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxDevicePasswordFailedAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxDevicePasswordFailedAttempts parameter specifies the number of attempts a user can make to enter the correct password for the mobile phone. You can enter any number from 4 through 16. The default value is 8. @@ -835,7 +835,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum number of days of email items to synchronize to the mobile phone. The value is specified by entering one of the following values. @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile phone. The value is specified in kilobytes (KB). @@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which HTML-formatted email messages are synchronized to the mobile phone. The value is specified in KB. @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock parameter specifies the length of time that the mobile phone can be inactive before the password is required to reactivate it. You can enter any interval between 30 seconds and 1 hour. The default value is 15 minutes. The format of the parameter is hh.mm:ss, for example, 15:00 = 15 minutes. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinDevicePasswordComplexCharacters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinDevicePasswordComplexCharacters parameter specifies the minimum number of complex characters required in a mobile phone password. A complex character isn't a letter. @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinDevicePasswordLength -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinDevicePasswordLength parameter specifies the minimum number of characters in the device password. You can enter any number from 1 through 16. The maximum length a password can be is 16 characters. The default value is 4. @@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the friendly name of the Mobile Device mailbox policy. @@ -968,7 +968,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether the recovery password for the mobile phone is stored on an Exchange server. When set to $true, the PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter enables you to store the recovery password for the mobile phone on an Exchange server. The default value is $false. The recovery password can be viewed from either Outlook on the web or the Exchange admin center. @@ -986,7 +986,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireDeviceEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireDeviceEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption is required on the device. The default value is $false. @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether you must encrypt S/MIME messages. The default value is $false. @@ -1022,7 +1022,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies what required algorithm must be used when encrypting a message. @@ -1040,7 +1040,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming parameter specifies whether the mobile phone must synchronize manually while roaming. The default value is $false. @@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies what required algorithm must be used when signing a message. @@ -1076,7 +1076,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile phone must send signed S/MIME messages. @@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireStorageCardEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter specifies whether storage card encryption is enabled for the mailbox policy. Setting this parameter to $true also sets the DeviceEncryptionEnabled parameter to $true. @@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnapprovedInROMApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UnapprovedInROMApplicationList parameter contains a list of applications that can't be run in ROM. @@ -1130,7 +1130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UNCAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows file shares is enabled. Access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -1148,7 +1148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1166,7 +1166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WSSAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services is enabled. Access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncOrganizationSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncOrganizationSettings.md index c1e59f6d4b..c020f0c314 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncOrganizationSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncOrganizationSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example sets the default access level to quarantine and sets two administra ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the ActiveSync organization settings object that you want to modify. The default name of this object is Mobile Mailbox Settings. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AdminMailRecipients parameter specifies the email addresses of the administrators for reporting purposes. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowAccessForUnSupportedPlatform -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRMSSupportForUnenlightenedApps -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultAccessLevel parameter specifies the access level for new and existing device partnerships. Valid values are: @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtaNotificationMailInsert -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OtaNotificationMailInsert parameter specifies the text to include in an email message that's sent to users who need to update their older devices to use the new Exchange ActiveSync features in Microsoft Exchange. @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserMailInsert -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserMailInsert parameter specifies an informational footer that's added to the email message sent to users when their mobile device isn't synchronized because the device is quarantined. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md index 676037bf7e..70e34052a8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ActiveSyncVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ This example configures the external URL on the default Exchange ActiveSync virt ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ActiveSync virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveSyncServer parameter specifies the URL of the Mailbox server. This value is in the following format: https://servername/Microsoft-Server-ActiveSync. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemReportingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemReportingEnabled parameter specifies whether items that can't be synchronized should be reported to the user. If set to $true, the user receives a notification when an item can't be synchronized to the mobile phone. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClientCertAuth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClientCertAuth parameter specifies the status of client certificate authentication. By default, client certificate authentication is disabled. The default setting is Ignore. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompressionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompressionEnabled parameter is a Boolean value that identifies the compression applied to the specified Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. The default setting is $true. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAuthenticationMethods parameter restricts the authentication methods that can be used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. Valid values are: @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstallIsapiFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InstallIsapiFilter parameter specifies whether the Internet Server API (ISAPI) filter is installed. @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication methods supported by the server that contains the virtual directory when access is requested from inside the network firewall. If this parameter isn't set, all authentication methods can be used. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobileClientCertificateAuthorityURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MobileClientCertificateAuthorityURL parameter specifies the URL for the certification authority (CA) used by the mobile phone. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobileClientCertificateProvisioningEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MobileClientCertificateProvisioningEnabled parameter specifies whether the Autodiscover service returns the Certificate Services server URL in the XML file. @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobileClientCertTemplateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MobileClientCertTemplateName parameter specifies the template name for the client certificate. @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsActionForUnknownServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteDocumentsActionForUnknownServers parameter specifies the action that occurs when a Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services or Microsoft Windows file share request comes in via Exchange ActiveSync. When a request arrives, Exchange ActiveSync looks for the requested host name in the Allow and Block lists. If the host name isn't found in either list, the action specified in this parameter, either Block or Allow, is performed. @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsAllowedServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteDocumentsAllowedServers parameter is a multivalued property that lists all the allowed servers for remote document access. @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsBlockedServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteDocumentsBlockedServers parameter is a multivalued property that lists all the blocked servers for remote document access. @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsInternalDomainSuffixList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteDocumentsInternalDomainSuffixList parameter is used in organizations that don't run Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) in their network. In these environments, you can specify one or more FQDNs that Exchange ActiveSync treats as internal when a request for remote file access is received. @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendWatsonReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendWatsonReport parameter specifies whether a Watson report is sent for errors and events. @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthEnabled parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled. The default value is $false. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressBookPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressBookPolicy.md index 3ca49ee585..d9cbb93845 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressBookPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressBookPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example changes the OAB that the address book policy All Fabrikam ABP uses ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the address book policy that you want to modify. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressLists -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressLists parameter specifies the address lists for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalAddressList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GlobalAddressList parameter specifies the GAL for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the GAL. For example: @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name that you want this address book policy to be called. Use this parameter to change the name of the address book policy. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OfflineAddressBook parameter specifies the OAB for mailbox users who are assigned this address book policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OAB. For example: @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RoomList parameter specifies an address list that used for location experiences for mailbox users who have this address book policy assigned to them. @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressList.md index 72c8d4e3e6..bb34e97f03 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ This example modifies the type of recipients and the department of the recipient ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the address list that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the address list. The maximum length is 64 characters, and it can't include a carriage return or a backslash (\\). If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressRewriteEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressRewriteEntry.md index 10e8fe26ff..8fef843742 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressRewriteEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AddressRewriteEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example changes the existing address rewrite entry named "Address entry for ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the address rewrite entry you want to modify. You can specify the name or GUID of the address rewrite entry. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptionList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExceptionList parameter specifies the domain names that should be excluded from address rewriting when the InternalAddress parameter contains a value that specifies multiple domain names. You can separate multiple domain names included with the ExceptionList parameter with commas. For more information about how to add values to or remove values from multivalued properties, see [Modifying multivalued properties](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/modifying-multivalued-properties-exchange-2013-help). @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAddress parameter specifies the final email addresses that you want. If the InternalAddress parameter specifies a single email address (chris@contoso.com), the ExternalAddress parameter must also specify a single email address (support@contoso.com). If the InternalAddress parameter specifies a single domain (contoso.com) or a domain and all subdomains (\*.contoso.com), the ExternalAddress parameter must specify a single domain (fabrikam.com). @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalAddress parameter specifies the original email addresses that you want to change. You can use the following values: @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for this address rewrite entry. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutboundOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutboundOnly parameter enables or disables outbound-only address rewriting. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The value $true means address rewriting occurs in outbound mail only. The value $false means address rewriting occurs on outbound mail and also on inbound mail (rewritten email addresses are changed back to the original email addresses in inbound mail). The default value is $false. @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AdminAuditLogConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AdminAuditLogConfig.md index 42c5b5bdfa..0a6ed0dac7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AdminAuditLogConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AdminAuditLogConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ This example enables administrator audit logging only for specific parameters th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogExcludedCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminAuditLogParameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TestCmdletLoggingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnifiedAuditLogIngestionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-App.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-App.md index 4fe9357f89..ac6e743d11 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-App.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-App.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example disables the organization app named FinanceTestApp across the organ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the AppID (GUID value) of the app that you want to modify. To find the GUID value of an app, run the command Get-App | Format-Table -Auto DisplayName,AppId. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultStateForUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultStateForUser parameter specifies the default initial state of the organization app for the specified users. Valid values are: @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the app is available to users in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationApp -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizationApp switch specifies that the scope of the app is organizational (not bound to a specific user). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivateCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrivateCatalog switch specifies that the app you want to modify is located in a private catalog. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProvidedTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProvidedTo parameter specifies the availability of the app in your organization. Valid value are: @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserList parameter specifies who can use an organizational app. This parameter is limited to 1000 users. In the cloud-based service, this value is less relevant as Office Add-in management is moving to [Centralized Deployment](https://learn.microsoft.com/office/dev/add-ins/publish/centralized-deployment). @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md index 40c8190235..87b10a0fa8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AttachmentFilterListConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example modifies the action that the Attachment Filtering agent takes on an ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Action parameter specifies how the Attachment Filtering agent handles an attachment that matches an entry on the attachment filter list. Valid values are: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdminMessage parameter specifies the content of a text file that replaces attachments removed by the Attachment Filtering agent. The AdminMessage parameter only appears when the Attachment Filtering agent is configured to remove an attachment that's been identified as bad. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptionConnectors -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExceptionConnectors parameter specifies a list of connectors that should be excluded from attachment filtering. Attachment filters aren't applied to email messages received through these connectors. You must use the connector GUID to specify the ExceptionConnectors parameter value. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectResponse parameter specifies the message body that you want delivered in the NDR to senders whose messages contain an attachment that's blocked. The RejectResponse parameter is required only if you set the Action parameter to Reject. Don't exceed 240 characters in the parameter argument. When you pass an argument, you must enclose the RejectResponse parameter value in quotation marks (") if the phrase contains spaces, for example: "Message rejected". The default setting is Message rejected due to unacceptable attachments. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthConfig.md index 8bdf7d268b..08daf7b0f5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ This example immediately rolls over the certificate configured as the next certi ### -CertificateThumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CertificateThumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint of the certificate to be used by Exchange for server-to-server authentication. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClearPreviousCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClearPreviousCertificate switch clears the certificate that was saved as the previous certificate in the authorization configuration. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewCertificateEffectiveDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NewCertificateEffectiveDate parameter specifies a date when the certificate configured as the next certificate should be used. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewCertificateThumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NewCertificateThumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint of the new certificate to be used as the next certificate in the authorization configuration. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PublishCertificate switch immediately rolls over the specified certificate as the current certificate. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Realm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Realm parameter specifies a security realm for partner applications. If a service or user presents a token from a domain that's not an accepted domain in the Exchange organization, the token must contain the specified realm to gain access to resources. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter isn't available in this release. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServiceName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ServiceName parameter identifies Microsoft Exchange to other partner applications such as SharePoint 2013. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipImmediateCertificateDeployment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipImmediateCertificateDeployment switch specifies that the certificate shouldn't be used immediately. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthRedirect.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthRedirect.md index f23fcfa6f2..0629cf6d1d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthRedirect.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthRedirect.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example sets the TargetURL value for all existing OAuth redirection objects ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the existing OAuth redirection object that you want to modify. The object name uses the syntax `AuthRedirect-Bearer-GUID`. The easiest way to find the name of the OAuth redirection object is to run Get-AuthRedirect. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetUrl parameter specifies the FQDN of the Exchange 2013 Client Access server that processes the Oauth request. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthServer.md index 5419f5f7de..ad946cfe01 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ This command disables the authorization server ACS. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the authorization server object that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the authorization server. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available in the April 18, 2025 Hotfix update (HU) for Exchange 2019 CU15 and Exchange 2016 CU23. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthMetadataUrl parameter specifies the URL of the authorization server. This can be the AuthMetadataUrl of your Exchange Online organization. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in Exchange Server 2016 (CU18 or higher) and Exchange Server 2019 (CU7 or higher). @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the authorization server is enabled. Only enabled authorization servers can issue and accept tokens. Disabling the authorization server prevents any partner applications configured to use the authorization server from getting a token. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefaultAuthorizationEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsDefaultAuthorizationEndpoint parameter specifies whether this server is the default authorization endpoint. Valid values are: @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the authorization server object. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RefreshAuthMetadata -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RefreshAuthMetadata switch specifies whether Exchange should refresh the auth metadata from the specified URL. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustAnySSLCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TrustAnySSLCertificate switch allows Exchange to accept certificates from untrusted certification authorities (CAs). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthenticationPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthenticationPolicy.md index cf7790c298..41d628b916 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthenticationPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AuthenticationPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example blocks legacy Exchange tokens from being issued ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the authentication policy you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthAutodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthImap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthMapi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthOfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthPop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthRpc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockLegacyAuthWebServices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthActiveSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthAutodiscover -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthImap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthMapi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthOfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthPop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthRpc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockModernAuthWebServices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -834,7 +834,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md index ca01c30e74..1691eb2ac3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AutodiscoverVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example sets Integrated Windows authentication for the Autodiscover virtual ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Autodiscover virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OAuthAuthentication parameter specifies whether OAuth authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSecurityAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WSSecurityAuthentication parameter specifies whether WS-Security (Web Services Security) authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AvailabilityConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AvailabilityConfig.md index 1eb3727049..dad6108eeb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AvailabilityConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-AvailabilityConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrgWideAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PerUserAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CASMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CASMailbox.md index e4545c1e31..07ac50c1d5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CASMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CASMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ This example sets the display name and disables Outlook Anywhere access for the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to configure. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncAllowedDeviceIDs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online TheActiveSyncAllowedDeviceIDs parameter specifies one or more Exchange ActiveSync device IDs that are allowed to synchronize with the mailbox. A device ID is a text string that uniquely identifies the device. Use the Get-MobileDevice cmdlet to see the devices that have Exchange ActiveSync partnerships with the mailbox. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncBlockedDeviceIDs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncBlockedDeviceIDs parameter specifies one or more Exchange ActiveSync device IDs that aren't allowed to synchronize with the mailbox. A device ID is a text string that uniquely identifies the device. Use the Get-MobileDevice cmdlet to see the devices that have Exchange ActiveSync partnerships with the mailbox. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncDebugLogging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncDebugLogging parameter enables or disables Exchange ActiveSync debug logging for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using Exchange ActiveSync. Valid values are: @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncMailboxPolicy parameter specifies the Exchange ActiveSync mailbox policy for the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Exchange ActiveSync mailbox policy. For example: @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncSuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncSuppressReadReceipt parameter controls the behavior of read receipts for Exchange ActiveSync clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ECPEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowEntourage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowEntourage parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox by Microsoft Entourage clients that use Exchange Web Services (for example, Entourage 2008 for Mac, Web Services Edition). @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowList parameter specifies the Exchange Web Services applications (user agent strings) that are allowed to access the mailbox. @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowMacOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowMacOutlook parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox by Outlook for Mac clients that use Exchange Web Services (for example, Outlook for Mac 2011 or later). Valid values are: @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowOutlook parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox by Outlook clients that use Exchange Web Services. Outlook uses Exchange Web Services for free/busy, out-of-office settings, and calendar sharing. Valid values are: @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsApplicationAccessPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsApplicationAccessPolicy parameter controls access to the mailbox using Exchange Web Services applications. @@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsBlockList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsBlockList parameter specifies the Exchange Web Services applications (user agent strings) that aren't allowed to access the mailbox using Exchange Web Services. @@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using Exchange Web Services clients. Valid values are: @@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using IMAP4 clients. Valid values are: @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapEnableExactRFC822Size -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapForceICalForCalendarRetrievalOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapForceICalForCalendarRetrievalOption parameter specifies how meeting requests are presented to IMAP4 clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapMessagesRetrievalMimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapMessagesRetrievalMimeFormat parameter specifies the message format for IMAP4 clients that access the mailbox. You can use an integer or a text value. Valid values are: @@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapSuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapSuppressReadReceipt parameter controls the behavior of read receipts for IMAP4 clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapUseProtocolDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImapUseProtocolDefaults parameter specifies whether to use the IMAP4 protocol defaults for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsOptimizedForAccessibility -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIBlockOutlookNonCachedMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIBlockOutlookExternalConnectivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIBlockOutlookRpcHttp -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -877,7 +877,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIBlockOutlookVersions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -901,7 +901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MAPIEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using MAPI clients (for example, Outlook). Valid values are: @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MapiHttpEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1015,7 +1015,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App or OWA) and the new Outlook for Windows. Valid values are: @@ -1038,7 +1038,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAforDevicesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAforDevicesEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using the older Outlook Web App (OWA) app on iOS and Android devices. Valid values are: @@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaMailboxPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OwaMailboxPolicy parameter specifies the Outlook on the web mailbox policy for the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Outlook on the web mailbox policy. For example: @@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopEnabled parameter enables or disables access to the mailbox using POP3 clients. Valid values are: @@ -1106,7 +1106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopEnableExactRFC822Size -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1131,7 +1131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopForceICalForCalendarRetrievalOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopForceICalForCalendarRetrievalOption parameter specifies how meeting requests are presented to POP3 clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopMessagesRetrievalMimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopMessagesRetrievalMimeFormat parameter specifies the message format for POP3 clients that access the mailbox. You can use an integer or a text value. Valid values are: @@ -1182,7 +1182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopSuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopSuppressReadReceipt parameter controls the behavior of read receipts for POP3 clients that access the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -1205,7 +1205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopUseProtocolDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PopUseProtocolDefaults parameter specifies whether to use the POP3 protocol defaults for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -1233,7 +1233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1253,7 +1253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderClientAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolderClientAccess parameter enables or disables access to public folders in Microsoft Outlook. Valid values are: @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetAutoBlockedDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1294,7 +1294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowGalAsDefaultView -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowGalAsDefaultView parameter specifies whether the global address list (GAL) is the default recipient picker for messages. Valid values are: @@ -1391,7 +1391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarNotification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarNotification.md index c20aafc1af..f2b894c1dd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarNotification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarNotification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example configures the calendar in Tony's mailbox to send the following tex ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarUpdateNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarUpdateNotification parameter specifies whether calendar update text message notifications are sent to the user's mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarUpdateSendDuringWorkHour -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarUpdateSendDuringWorkHour parameter specifies whether calendar update text notifications are sent to the user's mobile device during working hours only. Valid values are: @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DailyAgendaNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DailyAgendaNotification parameter specifies whether daily agenda text message notifications are sent to the user's mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DailyAgendaNotificationSendTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DailyAgendaNotificationSendTime parameter specifies the time to send daily agenda text message notifications to the user's mobile device. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MeetingReminderNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MeetingReminderNotification parameter specifies whether meeting reminder text message notifications are sent to the user's mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MeetingReminderSendDuringWorkHour -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MeetingReminderSendDuringWorkHour parameter specifies whether meeting reminder text message notifications are sent to the user's mobile device during working hours only. Valid values are: @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NextDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NextDays parameter specifies how many days should be sent in the daily agenda text message notification to the user's mobile device. A valid value is an integer between 1 and 7. The default value is 1. @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarProcessing.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarProcessing.md index da0a5b0cfd..2412c29cdc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarProcessing.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CalendarProcessing.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ This example rejects meeting requests from any user who isn't a member of the Ex ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the resource mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddAdditionalResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddAdditionalResponse parameter specifies whether additional information (the value of the AdditionalResponse parameter) is added to meeting request responses. Valid values are: @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdditionalResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AdditionalResponse parameter specifies the additional information to be included in responses to meeting requests when the value of the AddAdditionalResponse parameter is $true. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddNewRequestsTentatively -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddNewRequestsTentatively parameter specifies whether new meeting requests are added to the calendar as tentative. Valid values are: @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddOrganizerToSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddOrganizerToSubject parameter specifies whether the meeting organizer's name is used as the subject of the meeting request. Valid values are: @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllBookInPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllBookInPolicy parameter specifies whether to automatically approve in-policy requests from all users to the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConflicts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConflicts parameter specifies whether to allow conflicting meeting requests. Valid values are: @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRecurringMeetings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRecurringMeetings parameter specifies whether to allow recurring meetings in meeting requests. Valid values are: @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllRequestInPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllRequestInPolicy parameter specifies whether to allow all users to submit in-policy requests to the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllRequestOutOfPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllRequestOutOfPolicy parameter specifies whether to allow all users to submit out-of-policy requests to the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutomateProcessing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutomateProcessing parameter enables or disables calendar processing on the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingWindowInDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BookingWindowInDays parameter specifies the maximum number of days in advance that the resource can be reserved. A valid value is an integer from 0 through 1080. The default value is 180 days. The value 0 means today. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookInPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BookInPolicy parameter specifies users or groups who are allowed to submit in-policy meeting requests to the resource mailbox that are automatically approved. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user or group. For example: @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConflictPercentageAllowed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConflictPercentageAllowed parameter specifies the maximum percentage of meeting conflicts for new recurring meeting requests. A valid value is an integer from 0 through 100. The default value is 0. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteAttachments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteAttachments parameter specifies whether to remove attachments from all incoming messages. Valid values are: @@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteComments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteComments parameter specifies whether to remove or keep any text in the message body of incoming meeting requests. Valid values are: @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteNonCalendarItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteNonCalendarItems parameter specifies whether to remove or keep all non-calendar-related messages that are received by the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteSubject parameter specifies whether to remove or keep the subject of incoming meeting requests. Valid values are: @@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableResponseDetails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EnableResponseDetails parameter specifies whether to include the reasons for accepting or declining a meeting in the response email message. Valid values are: @@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnforceSchedulingHorizon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EnforceSchedulingHorizon parameter controls the behavior of recurring meetings that extend beyond the date specified by the BookingWindowInDays parameter. Valid values are: @@ -721,7 +721,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardRequestsToDelegates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardRequestsToDelegates parameter specifies whether to forward incoming meeting requests to the delegates that are configured for the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -765,7 +765,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaximumConflictInstances -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaximumConflictInstances parameter specifies the maximum number of conflicts for new recurring meeting requests when the AllowRecurringMeetings parameter is set to $true. A valid value is an integer from 0 through INT32 (2147483647). The default value is 0. @@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaximumDurationInMinutes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaximumDurationInMinutes parameter specifies the maximum duration in minutes for meeting requests. A valid value is an integer from 0 through INT32 (2147483647). The default value is 1440 (24 hours). @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizerInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OrganizerInfo parameter specifies whether the resource mailbox sends organizer information when a meeting request is declined because of conflicts. Valid values are: @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProcessExternalMeetingMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProcessExternalMeetingMessages parameter specifies whether to process meeting requests that originate outside the Exchange organization. Valid values are: @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveForwardedMeetingNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoveForwardedMeetingNotifications parameter specifies whether forwarded meeting notifications are moved to the Deleted Items folder after they're processed by the Calendar Attendant. Valid values are: @@ -935,7 +935,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveOldMeetingMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoveOldMeetingMessages parameter specifies whether the Calendar Attendant removes old and redundant updates and responses. Valid values are: @@ -956,7 +956,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemovePrivateProperty -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemovePrivateProperty parameter specifies whether to clear the private flag for incoming meetings that were sent by the organizer in the original requests. Valid values are: @@ -977,7 +977,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestInPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestInPolicy parameter specifies users who are allowed to submit in-policy meeting requests to the resource mailbox that require approval by a resource mailbox delegate. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestOutOfPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestOutOfPolicy parameter specifies users who are allowed to submit out-of-policy requests that require approval by a resource mailbox delegate. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceDelegates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResourceDelegates parameter specifies users can approve or reject requests that are sent to the resource mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ScheduleOnlyDuringWorkHours -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ScheduleOnlyDuringWorkHours parameter specifies whether to allow meetings to be scheduled outside of the working hours that are defined for the resource mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TentativePendingApproval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TentativePendingApproval parameter specifies whether to mark pending requests as tentative on the calendar. Valid values are: @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClassificationRuleCollection.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClassificationRuleCollection.md index 53a24290a9..2d0a4b5f89 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClassificationRuleCollection.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClassificationRuleCollection.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example imports the classification rule collection file C:\\My Documents\\E ### -FileData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FileData parameter specifies the classification rule collection file you want to import. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessRule.md index c608194cb5..35a73dec35 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ This example adds the IP address range 172.17.17.27/16 to the existing client ac ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the client access rule that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the client access rule. For example: @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Action parameter specifies the action for the client access rule. Valid values for this parameter are AllowAccess and DenyAccess. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges parameter specifies a condition for the client access rule that's based on the client's IPv4 or IPv6 address. Valid values are: @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfProtocols -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AnyOfProtocols parameter specifies a condition for the client access rule that's based on the client's protocol. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the client access rule is enabled or disabled. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptAnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptAnyOfClientIPAddressesOrRanges parameter specifies an exception for the client access rule that's based on the client's IPv4 or IPv6 address. Valid values are: @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptUsernameMatchesAnyOfPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the client access rule. @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the client access rule. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, and a higher priority rule is evaluated before a lower priority rule. The default value is 1. @@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Scope parameter specifies the scope of the client access rule. Valid values are: @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsernameMatchesAnyOfPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserRecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessServer.md index c508f745f4..0c106a7e10 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example configures the internal Autodiscover URL for the Active Directory s ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateServiceAccountCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateServiceAccountCredential parameter specifies an alternative service account username and password that's typically used for Kerberos authentication in Exchange Server 2010 coexistence environments. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Array -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDiscoverServiceInternalUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDiscoverServiceInternalUri parameter specifies the internal URL of the Autodiscover service. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDiscoverSiteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDiscoverSiteScope parameter specifies the Active Directory site that the Autodiscover service is authoritative for. Clients that connect to the Autodiscover service by using the internal URL need to exist in the specified site. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CleanUpInvalidAlternateServiceAccountCredentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CleanUpInvalidAlternateServiceAccountCredentials switch specifies whether to remove a previously configured alternate service account that's no longer valid. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveAlternateServiceAccountCredentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveAlternateServiceAccountCredentials switch specifies whether to remove a previously distributed alternate service account. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessService.md index 054020ca76..67d8e44f47 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ClientAccessService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example configures the internal Autodiscover URL for the Active Directory s ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateServiceAccountCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateServiceAccountCredential parameter specifies an alternative service account that's typically used for Kerberos authentication in Exchange Server 2010 coexistence environments. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Array -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDiscoverServiceInternalUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDiscoverServiceInternalUri parameter specifies the internal URL of the Autodiscover service. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDiscoverSiteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDiscoverSiteScope parameter specifies the Active Directory site that the Autodiscover service is authoritative for. Clients that connect to the Autodiscover service by using the internal URL need to exist in the specified site. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CleanUpInvalidAlternateServiceAccountCredentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CleanUpInvalidAlternateServiceAccountCredentials switch specifies whether to remove a previously configured alternate service account that's no longer valid. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveAlternateServiceAccountCredentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveAlternateServiceAccountCredentials switch specifies whether to remove a previously distributed alternate service account. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CmdletExtensionAgent.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CmdletExtensionAgent.md index 1076192f9a..4ce86eaea0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CmdletExtensionAgent.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-CmdletExtensionAgent.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example changes the priority of the fictitious "Validation Agent" cmdlet ex ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the cmdlet extension agent that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the agent. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the cmdlet extension agent. The maximum length of the agent name is 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the priority of the cmdlet extension agent. Higher priority agents are applied before lower priority agents. A valid value is an integer from 0 to 255. Lower integer values indicate higher priority. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearch.md index 77914d94f0..1cc1cdb8a1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ You might have to change the language setting if you're using non-English keywor ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search that you want to modify. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddExchangeLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The AddExchangeLocation parameter specifies the mailboxes to add to the list of included mailboxes when you aren't using the value All for the ExchangeLocation parameter. Valid values are: @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddExchangeLocationExclusion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNotFoundExchangeLocationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The AllowNotFoundExchangeLocationsEnabled parameter specifies whether to include mailboxes other than regular user mailboxes in the compliance search. Valid values are: @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentMatchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ContentMatchQuery parameter specifies a content search filter. @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Description parameter specifies a description for the compliance search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ExchangeLocation parameter specifies the mailboxes to include. Valid values are: @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeLocationExclusion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Language parameter specifies the language for the compliance search. @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveExchangeLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The RemoveExchangeLocation parameter specifies the mailboxes to remove from the list of included mailboxes when you aren't using the value All for the ExchangeLocation parameter. Valid values are: @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveExchangeLocationExclusion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearchAction.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearchAction.md index 7b3b7caae8..60be06c85d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearchAction.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSearchAction.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example changes the export key on the export compliance search action named ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search action that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the compliance search action. For example: @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ChangeExportKey -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The ChangeExportKey switch creates a new export key for the compliance search action. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md index 40742de678..f69d0441f0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ComplianceSecurityFilter.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example removes user annb@contoso.com to the compliance security filter nam ### -FilterName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The FilterName parameter specifies the name of the compliance security filter that you want to modify. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Action parameter specifies that type of search action that the filter is applied to. A valid value for this parameter is All, which means the filter is applied to all search actions. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Description parameter specifies a description for the compliance security filter. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Filters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Filters parameter specifies the search criteria for the compliance security filter. You can create three different types of filters: @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Region -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Region parameter specifies the satellite location for multi-geo tenants to conduct eDiscovery searches in. Valid values are: @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Users -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Users parameter specifies the user who gets this filter applied to their searches. Valid values are: @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Contact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Contact.md index cfd2ce2f56..835d80fec1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Contact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Contact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Change the Company parameter value to Contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the contact that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the contact. For example: @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUMCallsFromNonUsers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssistantName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AssistantName parameter specifies the name of the contact's assistant. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -City -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The City parameter specifies the contact's city. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Company -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Company parameter specifies the contact's company. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CountryOrRegion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CountryOrRegion parameter specifies the contact's country or region. A valid value is a valid ISO 3166-1 two-letter country code (for example, AU for Australia) or the corresponding friendly name for the country (which might be different from the official ISO 3166 Maintenance Agency short name). @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Department -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Department parameter specifies the contact's department. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the contact. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fax -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Fax parameter specifies the contact's fax number. @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GeoCoordinates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GeoCoordinates parameter specifies the contact's location in latitude, longitude and (optionally) altitude coordinates. A valid value for this parameter uses one of the following formats: @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HomePhone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HomePhone parameter specifies the contact's home telephone number. @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Manager -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Manager parameter specifies the contact's manager. @@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobilePhone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MobilePhone parameter specifies the contact's primary mobile phone number. @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the contact. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Notes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Notes parameters specifies additional information about the object. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Office -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Office parameter specifies the user's physical office name or number. @@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtherFax -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OtherFax parameter specifies the contact's alternative fax number. @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtherHomePhone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OtherHomePhone parameter specifies the contact's alternative home telephone number. @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtherTelephone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OtherTelephone parameter specifies the contact's alternative office telephone number. @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Pager -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Pager parameter specifies the contact's pager number. @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Phone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Phone parameter specifies the contact's office telephone number. @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhoneticDisplayName parameter specifies an alternate spelling of the user's name that's used for text to speech in Unified Messaging (UM) environments. Typically, you use this parameter when the pronunciation and spelling of the user's name don't match. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -644,7 +644,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PostalCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PostalCode parameter specifies the contact's postal code. @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PostOfficeBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PostOfficeBox parameter specifies the contact's post office box number. @@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SeniorityIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SeniorityIndex parameter specifies the order in which this contact displays in a hierarchical address book. A contact with a value of 2 displays higher in an address book than a contact with a value of 1. @@ -698,7 +698,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The StateOrProvince parameter specifies the contact's state or province. @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StreetAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The StreetAddress parameter specifies the contact's physical address. @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TelephoneAssistant -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TelephoneAssistant parameter specifies the telephone number of the contact's assistant. @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Title -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Title parameter specifies the contact's title. @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMCallingLineIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebPage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WebPage parameter specifies the contact's web page. @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ContentFilterConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ContentFilterConfig.md index e16cf78246..a7340abe9d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ContentFilterConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ContentFilterConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ It defines two users for whom the Content Filter doesn't process messages. ### -BypassedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedRecipients parameter specifies the SMTP addresses of recipients who skip processing by the Content Filter agent. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassedSenderDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedSenderDomains parameter specifies the sender email address domains of senders who skip processing by the Content Filter agent. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassedSenders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedSenders parameter specifies the SMTP addresses of senders who skip processing by the Content Filter agent. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter enables or disables the Content Filter agent on the computer on which you're running the command. Valid values are: @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages from unauthenticated connections from sources external to your Exchange organization are processed by the Content Filter agent. Valid values are: @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages from authenticated connections and from authoritative domains in your enterprise are processed by the Content Filter agent. Valid values are: @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookEmailPostmarkValidationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutlookEmailPostmarkValidationEnabled parameter specifies whether Outlook Email Postmark validation is enabled. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QuarantineMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QuarantineMailbox parameter specifies an SMTP address to be used as a spam quarantine mailbox. A spam quarantine mailbox is required when you set the SCLQuarantineEnabled parameter to $true. All messages that meet or exceed the value set in the SCLQuarantineThreshold parameter are sent to the SMTP address that you set in this parameter. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectionResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectionResponse parameter specifies the message body that you want delivered in the non-delivery report (NDR) to senders whose messages meet or exceed the SCLRejectThreshold value. The RejectionResponse parameter is required if you set the SCLRejectEnabled parameter to $true. The RejectionResponse parameter takes a string. Don't exceed 240 characters in the argument. When you pass an argument, you must enclose the RejectionResponse parameter in quotation marks (") if the phrase contains spaces, for example: "Message rejected". The default setting is Message rejected due to content restrictions. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLDeleteEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLDeleteEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages that meet or exceed the value set in the SCLDeleteThreshold parameter are deleted. Valid values are: @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLDeleteThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLDeleteThreshold parameter specifies an integer value from 1 through 9. This value represents the SCL rating that a particular message must meet or exceed for the Content Filter agent to delete the message and not send an NDR. To enable this functionality, you must set the SCLDeleteEnabled parameter to $true. The default setting is 9. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLQuarantineEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLQuarantineEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages that meet or exceed the value set in the SCLQuarantineThreshold parameter are sent to the spam quarantine mailbox specified in the QuarantineMailbox parameter. Valid values are: @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLQuarantineThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLQuarantineThreshold parameter specifies an integer value from 1 through 9. This value represents the SCL rating that a particular message must meet or exceed for the Content Filter agent to quarantine the message. To enable quarantine functionality, you must set the SCLQuarantineEnabled parameter to $true, and provide a valid SMTP address in the QuarantineMailbox parameter. The default setting is 9. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLRejectEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLRejectEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages that meet or exceed the value set in the SCLRejectThreshold parameter are rejected in an NDR to the sender. Valid values are: @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLRejectThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SCLRejectThreshold parameter specifies an integer value from 1 through 9. This value represents the SCL rating that a particular message must meet or exceed for the Content Filter agent to reject the message and send an NDR to the sender. To enable the delete functionality, you must set the SCLDeleteEnabled parameter to $true. Also, you can revise the default NDR message by editing the RejectionResponse parameter. The default setting is 7. @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DataClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DataClassification.md index 96da55616a..eb9441e324 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DataClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DataClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ The first three commands return the list of document fingerprints in the data cl ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the data classification rule that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the data classification rule. For example: @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the data classification rule. You use the Description parameter with the Locale and Name parameters to specify descriptions for the data classification rule in different languages. The localized values of Description appear in the AllLocalizedDescriptions property of the data classification rule. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fingerprints -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Fingerprints parameter specifies the byte-encoded document files that are used as fingerprints by the data classification rule. For instructions on how to import documents to use as templates for fingerprints, see [New-Fingerprint](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/exchangepowershell/new-fingerprint) or the Examples section. For instructions on how to add and remove document fingerprints from an existing data classification rule, see the Examples section. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault switch is used with the Locale parameter to specify the default language for the data classification rule. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Locale parameter adds or removes languages that are associated with the data classification rule. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the data classification rule. The value must be less than 256 characters. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index 050d159a8c..1e2ff17c90 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ This example configures the DAG DAG1 for AutoReseed using custom mount point pat ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG that you want to modify. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityState -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCrossSiteRpcClientAccess -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateWitnessDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateWitnessDirectory parameter specifies the name of an alternate directory that's used to store file share witness data. The specified directory must not be in use by any other DAGs or used for any other purpose. This parameter is used only as part of a datacenter switchover process. If the DAG is extended across multiple datacenters in a site resilience configuration, we recommend preconfiguring the alternate witness server and directory. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlternateWitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AlternateWitnessServer parameter specifies the name of an alternate server that's used to store file share witness data. The specified server must not be a member of the DAG that's configured to use it. This parameter is used only as part of a datacenter switchover process. If the DAG is extended across multiple datacenters in a site resilience configuration, we recommend preconfiguring the alternate witness server and directory. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagAllServersInstalled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagAutoRedistributeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagAutoRedistributeEnabled parameter specifies whether automatic DAG redistribution is enabled or disabled during AutoReseed. The default value is $true (enabled). @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagAutoReseedEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagAutoReseedEnabled is used to enable or disable Autoreseed. The default value is $true (enabled). @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagBitlockerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagBitlockerEnabled parameter ensures that Disk Reclaimer handles spare disks correctly and encrypts them with BitLocker. If Bitlocker is used to encrypt database disks, set the value of this parameter to $true on all Mailbox servers in the DAG after they are all running Exchange 2013 CU13 or later, or Exchange 2016 CU2 or later. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagDatabaseCopiesPerDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagDatabaseCopiesPerVolume -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagDatabaseCopiesPerVolume parameter is used to specify the configured number of database copies per volume. This parameter is used only with AutoReseed. @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagDatabasesRootFolderPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagDatabasesRootFolderPath parameter specifies the directory containing the database mount points when using AutoReseed. This parameter is required when using AutoReseed. AutoReseed uses a default path of C:\\ExchangeDatabases. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagDiskReclaimerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagDiskReclaimerEnabled is used to enable or disable the volume formatting functions used by Autoreseed. The default value is $true (enabled). If you set this to $false, you need to manually format the volume before the database(s) can be reseeded. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagTotalNumberOfDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagTotalNumberOfServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagVolumesRootFolderPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagVolumesRootFolderPath parameter specifies the volume containing the mount points for all disks, including spare disks, when using the AutoReseed feature of the DAG. This parameter is required when using AutoReseed. AutoReseed uses a default path of C:\\ExchangeVolumes. @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DagConfiguration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter specifies one or more static IP addresses to the DAG when a Mailbox server is added to a DAG. If you omit the DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter when creating a DAG, the system attempts to lease one or more IP addresses from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server in your organization to assign to the DAG. You must specify this parameter each time an additional IP address is added to the DAG, such as in the case of multi-subnet DAGs. You must also specify all IP addresses previously assigned to the DAG each time the DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter is used. Setting the DatabaseAvailabilityGroupIpAddresses parameter to a value of 0.0.0.0 automatically configures the DAG to use DHCP. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatacenterActivationMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatacenterActivationMode parameter specifies the datacenter activation mode for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoverNetworks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoverNetworks switch specifies whether to force a rediscovery of the network and network interfaces. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FileSystem -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FileSystem parameter specifies the file system that's used for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManualDagNetworkConfiguration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ManualDagNetworkConfiguration parameter specifies whether DAG networks should be automatically configured. If this parameter is set to $false, DAG networks are automatically configured. If this parameter is set to $true, you must manually configure DAG networks. @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MetaCacheDatabaseVolumesPerServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NetworkCompression -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NetworkCompression parameter specifies the network compression option for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NetworkEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NetworkEncryption parameter specifies the network encryption option for the DAG. Valid values are: @@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferenceMoveFrequency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreferenceMoveFrequency parameter specifies how frequently the Microsoft Exchange Replication service inspects and automatically rebalances the database copies. If the most preferred database copy (ActivationPreference value of 1) isn't the active copy, the most preferred database copy is activated by performing a lossless switchover. @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplayLagManagerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplayLagManagerEnabled parameter specifies whether to disable the automatic playdown of log files for a lagged database copy. @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplicationPort -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplicationPort parameter specifies a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port for replication (log shipping and seeding) activity. If this parameter isn't specified, the default port for replication is TCP 64327. @@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDagValidation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipDagValidation switch specifies whether to bypass the validation of the DAG's quorum model and the health check on the DAG's witness when configuring the DAG. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WitnessDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WitnessDirectory parameter specifies the name of the directory on the server that's used to store file share witness data. The specified directory must not be in use by any other DAGs. @@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WitnessServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WitnessServer parameter specifies the name of a server that acts as a witness for the DAG. The server specified can't be a member of the DAG. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md index 26432fbd03..0679873a53 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroupNetwork.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example disables the DAG network DAGNetwork02 in the DAG DAG2 for replicati ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the DAG network being configured. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Description parameter specifies an optional description for the DAG network. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreNetwork -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreNetwork parameter indicates that the specified network should be ignored and not used by the DAG. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter provides a name for the DAG network. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplicationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplicationEnabled parameter specifies whether the network can be used for replication activity. If this parameter isn't specified, the default behavior is to enable the network for replication. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Subnets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Subnets parameter specifies one or more subnets that are associated with the DAG network. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DeliveryAgentConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DeliveryAgentConnector.md index 4996845f35..dd3062b215 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DeliveryAgentConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DeliveryAgentConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example uses the temporary variable $ConnectorConfig to add the address spa ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or name of the delivery agent connector. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names that the delivery agent connector is responsible for. The complete syntax for entering an address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. Enclose each address space in quotation marks ("). @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryProtocol -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeliveryProtocol parameter specifies the communication protocol that determines which delivery agents are responsible for servicing the connector. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the delivery agent connector is enabled. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers. If the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in your organization. If the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can only be used by Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections this connector accepts from a specific IP address. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that's allowed to pass through this connector. When you enter a value, qualify the value with one of the following units: @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessagesPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessagesPerConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of messages this connector accepts per connection. The connector terminates the connection after this limit is reached and the sending server has to initiate a new connection to send more messages. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of this delivery agent connector. The value for the Name parameter can't exceed 64 characters. @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the list of Mailbox servers that host this connector. You can specify more than one server by separating their names with commas. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DetailsTemplate.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DetailsTemplate.md index 95bb18e238..3afb7ff226 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DetailsTemplate.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DetailsTemplate.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example sets attributes for the User details template for the U.S. English ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the details template using a GUID or specifies a template type and language separated by a slash. The following is an example of the user template type and U.S. English language: en-us\\User. Details template types include: @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Pages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DistributionGroup.md index 01e017c678..0a06420b0c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ This example changes the name of an existing distribution group from Ed\_DirectR ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the distribution group or mail-enabled security group that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassNestedModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ByPassNestedModerationEnabled parameter specifies how to handle message approval when a moderated group contains other moderated groups as members. Valid values are: @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -723,7 +723,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -781,7 +781,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -801,7 +801,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -863,7 +863,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExpansionServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -938,7 +938,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -986,7 +986,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1028,7 +1028,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this group. Although messages send on behalf of the group clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the group, not the sender. @@ -1065,7 +1065,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -1110,7 +1110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreNamingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IgnoreNamingPolicy switch specifies whether to prevent this group from being affected by your organization's group naming policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1155,7 +1155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies an owner for the group. A group must have at least one owner. If you don't use this parameter to specify the owner when you create the group, the user account that created the group is the owner. The group owner is able to: @@ -1254,7 +1254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1287,7 +1287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MemberDepartRestriction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MemberDepartRestriction parameter specifies the restrictions that you put on requests to leave the group. Valid values are: @@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MemberJoinRestriction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MemberJoinRestriction parameter specifies the restrictions that you put on requests to join the group. Valid values are: @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1396,7 +1396,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1419,7 +1419,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1437,7 +1437,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. You can't use the EmailAddresses and PrimarySmtpAddress parameters in the same command. @@ -1459,7 +1459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1494,7 +1494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1529,7 +1529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1566,7 +1566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportToManagerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ReportToManagerEnabled parameter specifies whether delivery status notifications (also known as DSNs, non-delivery reports, NDRs, or bounce messages) are sent to the owner (first one listed if more than one) of the group (defined by the ManagedBy property). Valid values are: @@ -1589,7 +1589,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportToOriginatorEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ReportToOriginatorEnabled parameter specifies whether delivery status notifications (also known as DSNs, non-delivery reports, NDRs, or bounce messages) are sent to senders who send messages to this group. Valid values are: @@ -1612,7 +1612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -1653,7 +1653,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RoomList switch specifies that all members of this distribution group are room mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1673,7 +1673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1693,7 +1693,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -1717,7 +1717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendOofMessageToOriginatorEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendOofMessageToOriginatorEnabled parameter specifies how to handle out of office (OOF) messages for members of the group. Valid values are: @@ -1738,7 +1738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1814,7 +1814,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1832,7 +1832,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DlpPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DlpPolicy.md index 5229b5b8b3..40a9e4886b 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DlpPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DlpPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example disables the DLP policy named Employee Numbers. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the DLP policy that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies an optional description for the DLP policy. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mode parameter specifies the action and notification level of the DLP policy. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the DLP policy. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -State -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The State parameter enables or disables the DLP policy. Valid input for this parameter is Enabled or Disabled. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DynamicDistributionGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DynamicDistributionGroup.md index 66ffc8fef1..436da59675 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DynamicDistributionGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-DynamicDistributionGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ This example applies the following changes to the existing dynamic distribution ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the dynamic distribution group that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the dynamic distribution group. For example: @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -721,7 +721,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -769,7 +769,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -861,7 +861,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -969,7 +969,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1023,7 +1023,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1041,7 +1041,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1095,7 +1095,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1113,7 +1113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1151,7 +1151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the dynamic distribution group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1189,7 +1189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1251,7 +1251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExpansionServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1278,7 +1278,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1326,7 +1326,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1350,7 +1350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1374,7 +1374,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1418,7 +1418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this dynamic distribution group. Although messages send on behalf of the group clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the group, not the sender. @@ -1473,7 +1473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -1494,7 +1494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1519,7 +1519,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -1546,7 +1546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1569,7 +1569,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -1595,7 +1595,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies an owner for the group. A dynamic group can only have one owner. The group owner is able to: @@ -1630,7 +1630,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1663,7 +1663,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1727,7 +1727,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1750,7 +1750,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the dynamic distribution group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1768,7 +1768,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Notes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Notes parameters specifies additional information about the object. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1786,7 +1786,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhoneticDisplayName parameter specifies an alternate spelling of the user's name that's used for text to speech in Unified Messaging (UM) environments. Typically, you use this parameter when the pronunciation and spelling of the user's name don't match. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. You can't use the EmailAddresses and PrimarySmtpAddress parameters in the same command. @@ -1826,7 +1826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientContainer parameter specifies a filter that's based on the recipient's location in Active Directory. Valid input for this parameter is an organizational unit (OU) or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -1853,7 +1853,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientFilter parameter specifies a custom OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -1880,7 +1880,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1915,7 +1915,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1950,7 +1950,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1987,7 +1987,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportToManagerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ReportToManagerEnabled parameter specifies whether delivery status notifications (also known as DSNs, non-delivery reports, NDRs, or bounce messages) are sent to the owners of the group (defined by the ManagedBy property). Valid values are: @@ -2010,7 +2010,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportToOriginatorEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ReportToOriginatorEnabled parameter specifies whether delivery status notifications (also known as DSNs, non-delivery reports, NDRs, or bounce messages) are sent to senders who send messages to this group. Valid values are: @@ -2033,7 +2033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -2054,7 +2054,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -2078,7 +2078,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendOofMessageToOriginatorEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendOofMessageToOriginatorEnabled parameter specifies how to handle out of office (OOF) messages for members of the group. Valid values are: @@ -2099,7 +2099,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -2123,7 +2123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2175,7 +2175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -2193,7 +2193,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EcpVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EcpVirtualDirectory.md index dfc2e8dfb3..7ef6fa85ed 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EcpVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EcpVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example turns off the Internet access to the EAC on server named Server01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ECP virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdfsAuthentication parameter specifies that the ECP virtual directory allows users to authenticate through Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS) authentication. This parameter accepts $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdminEnabled parameter specifies that the EAC isn't able to be accessed through the Internet. For more information, see [Turn off access to the Exchange admin center](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/architecture/client-access/disable-exchange-admin-center-access). This parameter accepts $true or $false. @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication methods supported on the Exchange server from outside the firewall. @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FormsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FormsAuthentication parameter specifies whether forms-based authentication is enabled on the ECP virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GzipLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GzipLevel parameter sets Gzip configuration information for the ECP virtual directory. @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE {{ Fill OAuthAuthentication Description }} @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaOptionsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaOptionsEnabled parameter specifies that Outlook on the web Options is enabled for end users. If this parameter is set to $false, users aren't able to access Outlook on the web Options. You might want to disable access if your organization uses non-Microsoft provider tools. This parameter accepts $true or $false. @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md index 46b76be6cb..12e35df0ce 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EdgeSyncServiceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ The log files are kept for 3 days. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service you want to configure. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationSyncInterval parameter specifies how frequently the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service synchronizes configuration data. The default value is 3 minutes. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CookieValidDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CookieValidDuration parameter specifies how long a cookie record is valid. The default value is 21 days. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FailoverDCInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FailoverDCInterval parameter specifies how long EdgeSync waits before failing over to another domain controller if it can't read configuration data from Active Directory. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LockDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LockDuration parameter specifies how long an instance of the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service can maintain an exclusive lock on the synchronization rights. While an EdgeSync service maintains an exclusive lock on synchronization rights, no other EdgeSync service can take over synchronization. The default value is 6 minutes. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LockRenewalDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LockRenewalDuration parameter specifies how long before the expiry of an exclusive lock an EdgeSync service can renew the lock. The default value is 4 minutes. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogEnabled parameter specifies enables or disables the EdgeSyncLog. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogLevel parameter specifies the EdgeSync logging level. Valid values are: @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum duration in days to keep the EdgeSyncLog files. Log files older than the specified value can be overwritten. The default value is 30 days. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxDirectorySize specifies the maximum amount of disk space the EdgeSyncLog directory can use. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum log file size for the EdgeSyncLog files. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogPath parameter specifies the disk location to store the EdgeSyncLog files. The default value is TransportRoles\\Logs\\EdgeSync\\. @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the EdgeSync service configuration. @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OptionDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OptionDuration parameter specifies how long an instance of the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service can maintain an optional lock on the synchronization rights. While an EdgeSync service maintains an optional lock on synchronization rights, another EdgeSync service can take over synchronization after the optional lock has expired if it's initiated using the Start-EdgeSynchronization command. The default value is 30 minutes. @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientSyncInterval parameter specifies how frequently the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service synchronizes recipient data from the global catalog. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EmailAddressPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EmailAddressPolicy.md index 1c7aeb2dd0..0e369a50c4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EmailAddressPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EmailAddressPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example modifies the existing email address policy name ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the email address policy that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisabledEmailAddressTemplates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -658,7 +658,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledEmailAddressTemplates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnabledEmailAddressTemplates parameter specifies the rules in the email address policy that are used to generate email addresses for recipients. @@ -689,7 +689,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnabledPrimarySMTPAddressTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnabledPrimarySMTPAddressTemplate parameter specifies the rule in the email address policy that's used to generate the primary SMTP email addresses for recipients. You can use this parameter instead of the EnabledEmailAddressTemplates if the policy only applies the primary email address and no additional proxy addresses. @@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the email address policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies the order that the email address policies are evaluated. By default, every time that you add a new email address policy, the policy is assigned a priority of N+1, where N is the number of email address policies that you've created. @@ -800,7 +800,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EventLogLevel.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EventLogLevel.md index 79703e4588..cf382d401a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EventLogLevel.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-EventLogLevel.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example sets the event log level to High for the MSExchangeTransport\\SmtpR ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the event logging category for which you want to set the event logging level. @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Level -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Level parameter specifies the log level for the specific event logging category. The valid values are: @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md index c8d43e777b..42f439b1a1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeAssistanceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example changes the Help location for the Exchange admin center. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CommunityLinkDisplayEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CommunityURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ControlPanelFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ControlPanelFeedbackURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ControlPanelHelpURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ControlPanelHelpURL parameter specifies the URL where help for the Exchange admin center (EAC) is hosted. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeHelpAppOnline -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExchangeHelpAppOnline specifies whether your organization uses the public help that's hosted by Microsoft. Valid values are: @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagementConsoleFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagementConsoleFeedbackURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagementConsoleHelpURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ManagementConsoleHelpURL parameter specifies the URL where help for the Exchange Management Console (EMC) is hosted. @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAFeedbackURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAHelpURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OWAHelpURL parameter specifies the URL for where help for the standard version of Outlook on the web is hosted. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWALightFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWALightFeedbackURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWALightHelpURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OWALightHelpURL parameter specifies the URL for where help for the light version of Outlook on the web is hosted. @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivacyLinkDisplayEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrivacyStatementURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeFeature.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeFeature.md index fd7e59be88..a2e2cc0c75 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeFeature.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeFeature.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: lusassl-msft external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This example blocks the features F1.1.1, F1.2.1, and F2.1.1 on the computer name ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Approve -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Approve switch approves the feature specified by the FeatureID parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Block -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Block switch blocks the feature specified by the FeatureID parameter. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FeatureID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FeatureID parameter specifies the feature you want to control. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeServer.md index d57443c90a..81bec36dcd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ This example removes an Exchange server from the Customer Experience Improvement ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomerFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CustomerFeedbackEnabled parameter specifies whether the Exchange server is enrolled in the Microsoft Customer Experience Improvement Program (CEIP). The CEIP collects anonymous information about how you use Exchange and problems that you might encounter. If you decide not to participate in the CEIP, the servers are opted-out automatically. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DataCollectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DataCollectionEnabled parameter specifies whether the EM Service collects and send diagnostic data to Microsoft using OCS. Valid values are: @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ErrorReportingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ErrorReportingEnabled parameter specifies whether error reporting is enabled. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternetWebProxy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternetWebProxy parameter specifies the web proxy server that the Exchange server uses to reach the internet. A valid value for this parameter is the URL of the web proxy server. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternetWebProxyBypassList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternetWebProxyBypassList parameter specifies a list of servers that bypass the web proxy server specified by the InternetWebProxy parameter. You identify the servers by their FQDN (for example, server01.contoso.com). @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MitigationsApplied -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE Do not use this parameter. The EM service uses this parameter to store and track mitigation status. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MitigationsBlocked -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MitigationsBlocked parameter specifies a list of mitigations that are blocked. The Mitigation IDs present in this list are not applied by EM service in its hourly run. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MitigationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MitigationsEnabled parameter specifies whether the Exchange Emergency Mitigation service (EM service) automatically applies mitigations on the Exchange server. Valid values are: @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MonitoringGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MonitoringGroup parameter specifies how to add your Exchange servers to monitoring groups. You can add your servers to an existing group or create a monitoring group based on location or deployment, or to partition monitoring responsibility among your servers. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProductKey -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProductKey parameter specifies the server product key. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RingLevel parameter specifies the server ring level that's used by the Feature Flighting feature. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticConfigDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticConfigDomainController parameter specifies whether to configure a domain controller to be used by the server via Directory Service Access (DSAccess). @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticDomainControllers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticDomainControllers parameter specifies whether to configure a list of domain controllers to be used by the server via DSAccess. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticExcludedDomainControllers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticExcludedDomainControllers parameter specifies whether to exclude a list of domain controllers from being used by the server. @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticGlobalCatalogs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticGlobalCatalogs parameter specifies whether to configure a list of global catalogs to be used by the server via DSAccess. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeSettings.md index 82fde1fc28..844d0b9c78 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ExchangeSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ This example allows users to see the results of Unified Audit Logging. This exam ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the existing Exchange settings object that contains the Exchange settings that you want to configure. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClearHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClearHistory switch specifies that you want to clear the entries in the modification history for the Exchange setting object. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigName parameter specifies the available Exchange setting that you want to add, remove, or update in the Exchange settings object. Valid values for this parameter are determined by the configuration schema that was specified by the Name parameter on the New-ExchangeSettings cmdlet. @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigPairs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigName parameter specifies the available Exchange setting that you want to add, remove, or update in the Exchange settings object. Valid values for this parameter are determined by the configuration schema that was specified by the Name parameter on the New-ExchangeSettings cmdlet. The syntax for a value is `=`. You can separate multiple values separated by commas. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigValue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigValue parameter specifies the value for the Exchange setting that you specified with the ConfigName parameter. The values are determined by the type of setting (a number, a timespan, $true or $false, etc.). @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateSettingsGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CreateSettingsGroup switch specifies that you're creating an Exchange settings group, which is a group of related Exchange settings. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExpirationDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExpirationDate parameter specifies the end date/time of the Exchange settings that are defined by the specified Exchange settings group. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GuidMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GuidMatch parameter specifies the scope of an Exchange settings group based on the GUID of the object (for example, the GUID of the mailbox database). This parameter is available for use with all Scope parameter values other than Forest. @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Reason -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Reason parameter specifies a description for why the Exchange setting or settings group was created or modified. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSetting -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveSetting switch specifies that you're removing an existing Exchange setting from an Exchange settings object. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSettingsGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveSettingsGroup switch specifies that you're removing an Exchange settings group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SettingsGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SettingsGroup parameter specifies an existing Exchange settings group that's used to create a new settings group, or modify an existing settings group. @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpdateSetting -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UpdateSetting switch specifies that you're updating an Exchange setting in an existing Exchange settings object. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpdateSettingsGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UpdateSettingsGroup switch specifies that you're modifying an Exchange settings group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Disable -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Disable switch specifies that the Exchange settings group is disabled. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisableGroup parameter specifies the name of the enabled Exchange settings group that you want to disable. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableGroup parameter specifies the name of the disabled Exchange settings group that you want to enable. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenericScopeName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GenericScopeName parameter specifies the name of the scope. The available values are determined by the schema of the Exchange setting object. @@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenericScopeValue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GenericScopeValue parameter specifies the value of the scope specified by the GenericScopeName parameter. The available values are determined by the schema of the Exchange setting object. @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GroupName parameter specifies the name of the Exchange settings group in group operations. For example: @@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxVersion parameter specifies the scope of an Exchange settings group based on the version of the object (for example, the version of Exchange that's installed on the server). This parameter is available for use with all Scope parameter values other than Forest. @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MinVersion parameter specifies the scope of an Exchange settings group based on the version of the object (for example, the version of Exchange that's installed on the server). This parameter is available for use with all Scope parameter values other than Forest. @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NameMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NameMatch parameter specifies the scope of an Exchange settings group based on the name of the object (for example, the process name). This parameter is available for use with all Scope parameter values other than Forest. @@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the priority of an Exchange settings group. The priority value for every group must be unique. A lower priority value indicates a higher priority. @@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Scope parameter specifies the scope of the Exchange settings object. Valid values are: @@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ScopeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ScopeFilter parameter uses OPATH filter syntax to specify the scope of an Exchange settings group based. The syntax is `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"` (for example, `"ServerRole -like 'Mailbox*'"`). @@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md index 2f88fa08ee..3af3c01013 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederatedOrganizationIdentifier.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example enables the organization identifier. This enables federation for th ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the federated organization identifier. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountNamespace -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AccountNamespace parameter specifies the federated domain to be used to establish the organization identifier with the Microsoft Federation Gateway. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DefaultDomain parameter specifies the federated domain used for delegation tokens issued by the Microsoft Federation Gateway for user accounts in the Exchange organization. If the DefaultDomain parameter isn't set, the primary SMTP domain for each user account is used in delegation tokens issued by the Microsoft Federation Gateway. Only a single domain or subdomain for the Exchange organization should be configured, and it applies to all delegation tokens issued for the Exchange organization, for example, contoso.com. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DelegationFederationTrust -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DelegationFederationTrust parameter specifies the identity of the federation trust to be used by the organization identifier. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the organization identifier is enabled. Valid values include $true or $false. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationContact -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationContact parameter specifies the SMTP address of the federation contact. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederationTrust.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederationTrust.md index 9906bb2479..1f2bdd24ad 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederationTrust.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FederationTrust.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Before you configure a federation trust to use the next certificate as the curre ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the federation trust being modified. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplicationUri parameter specifies the primary domain used for the federation organization identifier. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishFederationCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PublishFederationCertificate switch specifies the next certificate as the current certificate for the federation trust and publishes it to the Microsoft Federation Gateway. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MetadataUrl parameter specifies the URL where WS-FederationMetadata is published by the Microsoft Federation Gateway. @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a name for the federation trust. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RefreshMetadata -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RefreshMetadata switch specifies that the metadata document and certificate is retrieved again from the Microsoft Federation Gateway. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Thumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Thumbprint parameter specifies the thumbprint of the X.509 certificate to be configured as the next certificate for the federation trust. After the certificate is deployed on all Exchange servers in the organization, you can use the PublishFederationCertificate switch to configure the trust to use this certificate. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ForeignConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ForeignConnector.md index 39b7e32309..6c5fbc08ee 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ForeignConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ForeignConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example configures a 10 MB message size limit on the existing Foreign conne ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Foreign connector that you want to modify. The Identity parameter can take any of the following values for the Foreign connector object: @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names to which the Foreign connector sends messages. The complete syntax for entering each address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DropDirectory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DropDirectory parameter specifies the name of the Drop directory used by this Foreign connector. All outbound messages sent to address spaces defined by this Foreign connector are put in the specified Drop directory. The location of the Drop directory for each Foreign connector is controlled by the following two items: @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DropDirectoryQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DropDirectoryQuota parameter specifies the maximum size of all message files in the Drop directory. When the specified value is reached, no new message files can be copied into the Drop directory until the existing messages are delivered and deleted. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the Foreign connector. The valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers. When the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in the Exchange organization. When the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can be used only by Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. The default value is $false. @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can pass through this Foreign connector. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the Foreign connector. @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RelayDsnRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RelayDsnRequired parameter specifies whether a Relay delivery status notification (DSN) is required by the Foreign connector when messages are written to the Drop directory. The valid input values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the names of the Mailbox servers that use this Foreign connector. Having a single Foreign connector homed on multiple Mailbox servers running the Transport service provides fault tolerance and high availability if one of the servers fails. The default value of this parameter is the name of the Mailbox server on which this Foreign connector was first installed. @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FrontendTransportService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FrontendTransportService.md index d9a3a5221e..bdbf2666e0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FrontendTransportService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-FrontendTransportService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ This example sets the ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter to C:\\SMTP Protocol Logs ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server that you want to modify. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the agent log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the agent log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all agent logs in the agent log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each agent log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogPath parameter specifies the default agent log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\AgentLog. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables agent logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the AgentLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AntispamAgentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AntispamAgentsEnabled parameter specifies whether anti-spam agents are installed on the server specified with the Identity parameter. The default value is $false for the Front End Transport service. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the connectivity log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the connectivity log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all connectivity logs in the connectivity log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 1000 MB. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each connectivity log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogPath parameter specifies the default connectivity log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\Connectivity. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables connectivity logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the ConnectivityLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the DNS log is enabled. The default value is $false. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the DNS log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all DNS logs in the DNS log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 100 MB. @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each DNS log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogPath parameter specifies the DNS log directory location. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates no location is configured. If you enable DNS logging, you need to specify a local file path for the DNS log files by using this parameter. If the path contains spaces, enclose the entire path value in quotation marks ("). @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter specifies one or more Domain Name System (DNS) servers that Exchange uses for external DNS lookups. When the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is set to $true, DNS lookups of destinations outside the Exchange organization are performed by using the DNS settings of the external network adapter specified by the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter. If you want to specify a custom list of DNS servers used for external Exchange DNS lookups only, you must specify the DNS servers by using the ExternalDNSServers parameter, and you must also set the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter to $false. The default value of the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is $true. @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSAdapterGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter specifies the network adapter that has the DNS settings used for DNS lookups of destinations that exist outside the Exchange organization. The concept of an external network adapter and an internal network adapter is only applicable in a multi-homed Exchange server environment. When no particular network adapter is specified as the network adapter for external DNS lookups, the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000, and external DNS lookups are performed by using the DNS settings of any available network adapter. You might enter the GUID of a specific network adapter to use for external DNS lookups. The default value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000. @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSProtocolOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSProtocolOption parameter specifies which protocol to use when querying external DNS servers. The valid options for this parameter are Any, UseTcpOnly, and UseUdpOnly. The default value is Any. @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSServers parameter specifies the list of external DNS servers that the server queries when resolving a remote domain. You must separate IP addresses by using commas. The default value is an empty list ({}). @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalIPAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalIPAddress parameter specifies the IP address used in the Received message header field for every message that travels through the Front End Transport service. The IP address in the Received header field is used for hop count and routing loop detection. The IP address specified by the ExternalIPAddress parameter overrides the external network adapter's actual IP address. Typically, you would want to set the value of the ExternalIPAddress parameter to match the value of your domain's public MX record. The default value of the ExternalIPAddress parameter is blank. This means the actual IP address of the external network adapter is used in the Received header field. @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSAdapterEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter specifies one or more DNS servers that Exchange uses for internal DNS lookups. When the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is set to $true, DNS lookups of destinations inside the Exchange organization are performed by using the DNS settings of the internal network adapter specified by the value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter. If you want to specify a custom list of DNS servers used for internal Exchange DNS lookups only, you must specify the DNS servers by using the InternalDNSServers parameter, and you must also set the value of the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter to $false. The default value of the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is $true. @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSAdapterGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter specifies the network adapter that has the DNS settings used for DNS lookups of servers that exist inside the Exchange organization. The concept of an internal network adapter and an external network adapter is only applicable in a multi-homed Exchange server environment. When no particular network adapter is specified as the network adapter for external DNS lookups, the value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000, and internal DNS lookups are performed by using the DNS settings of any available network adapter. You might enter the GUID of a specific network adapter to use for internal DNS lookups. The default value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000. @@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSProtocolOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSProtocolOption parameter specifies which protocol to use when you query internal DNS servers. Valid options for this parameter are Any, UseTcpOnly, or UseUdpOnly. @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSServers parameter specifies the list of DNS servers that should be used when resolving a domain name. DNS servers are specified by IP address and are separated by commas. The default value is any empty list ({}). @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IntraOrgConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IntraOrgConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel parameter enables or disables SMTP protocol logging on the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector In the Front End Transport service. Valid values are: @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionRatePerMinute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionRatePerMinute parameter specifies the maximum rate that connections are allowed to be opened with the transport service. If many connections are attempted with the transport service at the same time, the MaxConnectionRatePerMinute parameter limits the rate that the connections are opened so that the server's resources aren't overwhelmed. The default value is 1200 connections per minute. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 2147483647. @@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file that's shared by all Receive connectors in the Transport service on the server. Log files that are older than the specified value are automaticallydeleted. @@ -760,7 +760,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory that's shared by all Receive connectors in the Front End Transport service on the server. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -794,7 +794,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file that's shared by all Receive connectors in the Front End Transport service on the server. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -828,7 +828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for all Receive connectors in the Front End Transport service on the server. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpReceive. @@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum routing table log age. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7 days. @@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the routing table log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -900,7 +900,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogPath parameter specifies the directory location where routing table log files should be stored. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\Routing. Setting this parameter to $null disables routing table logging. @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file that's shared by all Send connectors in the Front End Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. Log files that are older than the specified value are deleted. @@ -942,7 +942,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory that's shared by all Send connectors in the Front End Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file that's shared by all the Send connectors in the Front End Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for all Send connectors in the Front End Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\FrontEnd\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpSend. @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransientFailureRetryCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransientFailureRetryCount parameter specifies the maximum number of immediate connection retries attempted when the server encounters a connection failure with a remote server. The default value is 6. The valid input range for this parameter is from 0 through 15. When the value of this parameter is set to 0, the server doesn't immediately attempt to retry an unsuccessful connection. @@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransientFailureRetryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransientFailureRetryInterval parameter controls the connection interval between each connection attempt specified by the TransientFailureRetryCount parameter. For the Front End Transport service, the default value of the TransientFailureRetryInterval parameter is 5 minutes. @@ -1073,7 +1073,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-GlobalAddressList.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-GlobalAddressList.md index 1b6156bcc7..427add54fe 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-GlobalAddressList.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-GlobalAddressList.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This example assigns a new name, GALwithNewName, to the GAL with the GUID 96d0c5 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the global address list that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the GAL. For example: @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCompany -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCompany parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Company property. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute1 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute1 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute10 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute10 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute11 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute11 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute12 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute12 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute13 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute13 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute14 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute14 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute15 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute15 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute2 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute2 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute3 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute3 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute4 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute4 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute5 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute5 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute6 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute6 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute7 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute7 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute8 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute8 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalCustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalCustomAttribute9 parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's CustomAttribute9 property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalDepartment parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's Department property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConditionalStateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConditionalStateOrProvince parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the value of the recipient's StateOrProvince property. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludedRecipients parameter specifies a precanned filter that's based on the recipient type. Valid values are: @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the GAL. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientContainer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientFilter parameter specifies an OPATH filter that's based on the value of any available recipient property. You can use any available Windows PowerShell operator, and wildcards and partial matches are supported. The search criteria uses the syntax `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Group.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Group.md index 0d12511a23..3e23d3c7be 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Group.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Group.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ This example specifies that the group Human Resources is a hierarchical group an ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the group that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the group. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsHierarchicalGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The IsHierarchicalGroup parameter specifies whether the group is part of a hierarchical address book. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies an owner for the group. A group must have at least one owner. If you don't use this parameter to specify the owner when you create the group, the user account that created the group is the owner. The group owner is able to: @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the group. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Notes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Notes parameters specifies additional information about the object. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhoneticDisplayName parameter specifies an alternate spelling of the user's name that's used for text to speech in Unified Messaging (UM) environments. Typically, you use this parameter when the pronunciation and spelling of the user's name don't match. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SeniorityIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SeniorityIndex parameter specifies the order in which this group displays in a hierarchical address book. A group with a value of 2 displays higher in an address book than a group with a value of 1. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Universal -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Universal switch changes the scope of the group from Global or DomainLocal to Universal. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-HybridConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-HybridConfiguration.md index 6e76762288..020664f802 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-HybridConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-HybridConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example specifies that the hybrid deployment uses a defined TLS certificate ### -ClientAccessServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Domains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Domains parameter specifies the domain namespaces used in the hybrid deployment. These domains must be configured as accepted domains in either on-premises Exchange or Exchange Online. The domains are used in configuring the organization relationships and Send and Receive connectors used by the hybrid configuration. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalIPAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalIPAddresses parameter is a legacy parameter that specifies the publicly accessible inbound IP address of Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Hub Transport servers. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Features -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Features parameter specifies the features that are enabled for the hybrid configuration. Valid values are: @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesSmartHost -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OnPremisesSmartHost parameter specifies the FQDN of the on-premises Exchange Mailbox server used for secure mail transport between on-premises Exchange and Exchange Online. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivingTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceivingTransportServers parameter specifies the Mailbox servers defined in the outbound connector configuration in Exchange Online. Valid values are: @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendingTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendingTransportServers parameter specifies the Mailbox servers defined in the inbound connector configuration in Exchange Online. Valid values are: @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServiceInstance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is meaningful only in Office 365 operated by 21Vianet in China. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. Valid syntax for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`: @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EdgeTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EdgeTransportServers parameter specifies the Edge Transport servers that are configured to support the hybrid deployment features. The Edge Transport server must be externally accessible from the Internet on port 25. The accepted values for the EdgeTransportServers parameter are either the full or short computer name of an Edge Transport server, for example, either edge.corp.contoso.com or EDGE. Separate server names with a comma if defining more than one Edge Transport server. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListConfig.md index 98ff7468b6..1d6d73bd21 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example configures connection filtering to use the IP Allow list on message ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the IP Allow list is used for content filtering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, the IP Allow list is used for content filtering. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections outside of the Exchange organization are evaluated by the IP Allow list. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, messages from external connections are evaluated by the IP Allow list. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections inside the Exchange organization are evaluated by the IP Allow list. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. By default, messages from internal connections are not evaluated by the IP Allow list. Authenticated partner messages aren't considered internal mail. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvider.md index af75586dea..ef60d3134a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example sets the priority to 1 for the existing IP Allow list provider name ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Allow list provider that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Allow list provider. For example: @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnyMatch parameter specifies whether any response by the allow list provider is treated as a match. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. When this parameter is set to $true, and connection filtering sends the IP address of the connecting SMTP server to the allow list provider, any response code returned by the allow list provider causes connection filtering to allow messages from that source. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BitmaskMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BitmaskMatch parameter specifies the bit mask status code that's returned by the allow list provider. Use this parameter if the allow list provider returns bitmask responses. Valid input for this parameter is a single IP address in the format 127.0.0.1. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the Connection Filtering agent queries the IP Allow list provider according to the priority set for this IP Allow list provider configuration. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, the Connection Filtering agent queries the IP Allow list provider according to the priority set for this IP Allow list provider configuration. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IPAddressesMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IPAddressesMatch parameter specifies the IP address status codes that are returned by the allow list provider. Use this parameter if the allow list provider returns IP address or A record responses. Valid input for this parameter one or more IP addresses in the format 127.0.0.1. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LookupDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LookupDomain parameter specifies the host name that's required to use the allow list provider. Connection filtering sends the IP address of the connecting SMTP server to the host name value that you specify. An example value is allowlist.spamservice.com. The actual value you need to use is provided by the allow list provider. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the IP Allow list provider. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order that the Connection Filtering agent queries the IP Allow list providers that you've configured. By default, every time that you add a new IP Allow list provider, the entry is assigned a priority of N+1, where N is the number of IP Allow list providers you've configured. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md index 02de75f25d..b302367695 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPAllowListProvidersConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example configures connection filtering to use IP Allow list providers on m ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether IP Allow list providers are used for content filtering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. The default value is $true. By default, IP Allow list providers are used for content filtering. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections outside of the Exchange organization are evaluated by IP Allow list providers. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, messages from external connections are evaluated by IP Allow list providers. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections inside the Exchange organization are evaluated by IP Allow list providers. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. By default, messages from internal connections are not evaluated by IP Allow list providers. Authenticated partner messages aren't considered internal mail. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListConfig.md index 07b5a80820..52a84ea0f0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example configures connection filtering to use the IP Block list on message ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the IP Block list is used for content filtering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, the IP Block list is used for content filtering. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections outside of the Exchange organization are evaluated by the IP Block list. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, messages from external connections are evaluated by the IP Block list. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections inside the Exchange organization are evaluated by the IP Block list. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. By default, messages from internal connections are not evaluated by the IP Block list. Authenticated partner messages aren't considered internal mail. @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MachineEntryRejectionResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MachineEntryRejectionResponse parameter specifies customized text in the non-delivery report (NDR) for messages that are blocked by connection filtering due to IP addresses in the IP Block list that were added by sender reputation. The value can't exceed 240 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in double quotation marks ("). @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StaticEntryRejectionResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The StaticEntryRejectionResponse parameter specifies a customized text in the NDR for messages that are blocked by connection filtering due to IP addresses in the IP Block list. The value can't exceed 240 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in double quotation marks ("). @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvider.md index 7768c0863f..cbfed7d8a3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example sets the priority value to 1 for the IP Block list provider named C ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the IP Block list provider that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the IP Block list provider. For example: @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnyMatch parameter specifies whether any response by the block list provider is treated as a match. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. When this parameter is set to $true and connection filtering sends the IP address of the connecting SMTP server to the block list provider, any response code returned by the block list provider causes connection filtering to block messages from that source. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BitmaskMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BitmaskMatch parameter specifies the bit mask status code that's returned by the block list provider. Use this parameter if the block list provider returns bitmask responses. Valid input for this parameter is a single IP address in the format 127.0.0.1. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the connection filtering uses this IP Block list provider. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, connection filtering uses new IP Block list providers that you create. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IPAddressesMatch -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IPAddressesMatch parameter specifies the IP address status codes that are returned by the block list provider. Use this parameter if the block list provider returns IP address or A record responses. Valid input for this parameter one or more IP addresses in the format 127.0.0.1. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LookupDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LookupDomain parameter specifies the host name that's required to use the block list provider. Connection filtering sends the IP address of the connecting SMTP server to the host name value that you specify. An example value is blocklist.spamservice.com. The actual value you need to use is provided by the block list provider. @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the IP Block list provider. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order that the Connection Filtering agent queries the IP Block list providers. A lower priority integer value indicates a higher priority. By default, every time that you add a new IP Block list provider, the entry is assigned a priority of N+1, where N is the number of IP Block list provider services that you have configured. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectionResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectionResponse parameter specifies the text that you want to include in the SMTP rejection response when messages are blocked by connection filtering. The argument can't exceed 240 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md index 6ff657f659..2fcbad285d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IPBlockListProvidersConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example makes the following changes to the list of bypassed recipients: ### -BypassedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedRecipients parameter specifies the email addresses of internal recipients that are exempted from filtering by IP Block list providers. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether IP Block list providers are used for content filtering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. The default value is $true. By default, IP Block list providers are used for content filtering. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections outside of the Exchange organization are evaluated by IP Block list providers. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. By default, messages from external connections are evaluated by IP Bock list providers. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from connections inside the Exchange organization are evaluated by IP Block list providers. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. By default, messages from internal connections are not evaluated by IP Block list providers. Authenticated partner messages aren't considered internal mail. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IRMConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IRMConfiguration.md index 31c494d89b..5c112c0342 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IRMConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IRMConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClientAccessServerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EDiscoverySuperUserEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EDiscoverySuperUserEnabled parameter specifies whether members of the Discovery Management role group can access IRM-protected messages in a discovery mailbox that were returned by a discovery search. Valid values are: @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalLicensingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalLicensingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection **Note**: In Exchange Online, this parameter affects both internal and external messages. In on-premises Exchange, this parameter only affects internal messages. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalReportDecryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The JournalReportDecryptionEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable journal report decryption. Valid values are: @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LicensingLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LicensingLocation parameter specifies the RMS licensing URLs. You can specify multiple URL values separated by commas. @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RefreshServerCertificates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SearchEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable searching of IRM-encrypted messages in Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App). Valid values are: @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportDecryptionSetting -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TransportDecryptionSetting parameter specifies the transport decryption configuration. Valid values are: @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ImapSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ImapSettings.md index c596ae4a64..7dbf537398 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ImapSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ImapSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ This example specifies the certificate that contains mail.contoso.com is used to ### -AuthenticatedConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthenticatedConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the period of time to wait before closing an idle authenticated connection. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Banner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Banner parameter specifies the text string that's displayed to connecting IMAP4 clients. The default value is: The Microsoft Exchange IMAP4 service is ready. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarItemRetrievalOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarItemRetrievalOption parameter specifies how calendar items are presented to IMAP4 clients. Valid values are: @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExactRFC822Size -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableExactRFC822Size parameter specifies how message sizes are presented to IMAP4 clients. Valid values are: @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableGSSAPIAndNTLMAuth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableGSSAPIAndNTLMAuth parameter specifies whether connections can use Integrated Windows authentication (NTLM) using the Generic Security Services application programming interface (GSSAPI). This setting applies to connections where Transport Layer Security (TLS) is disabled. Valid values are: @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnforceCertificateErrors -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnforceCertificateErrors parameter specifies whether to enforce valid Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate validation failures. Valid values are: @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionPolicy parameter specifies how Extended Protection for Authentication is used. Valid values are: @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalConnectionSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalConnectionSettings parameter specifies the host name, port, and encryption method that's used by external IMAP4 clients (IMAP4 connections from outside your corporate network). @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalConnectionSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalConnectionSettings parameter specifies the host name, port, and encryption method that's used by internal IMAP4 clients (IMAP4 connections from inside your corporate network). This setting is also used when a IMAP4 connection is forwarded to another Exchange server that's running the Microsoft Exchange IMAP4 service. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFileLocation parameter specifies the location for the IMAP4 protocol log files. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%Logging\\Imap4. @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileRollOverSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFileRollOverSettings parameter specifies how frequently IMAP4 protocol logging creates a new log file. Valid values are: @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LoginType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LoginType parameter specifies the authentication method for IMAP4 connections. Valid values are: @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogPerFileSizeQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogPerFileSizeQuota parameter specifies the maximum size of a IMAP4 protocol log file. @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCommandSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxCommandSize parameter specifies the maximum size in bytes of a single IMAP4 command. Valid values are from 1024 through 16384. The default value is 10240. @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionFromSingleIP -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionFromSingleIP parameter specifies the maximum number of IMAP4 connections that are accepted by the Exchange server from a single IP address. Valid values are from 1 through 2147483647. The default value is 2147483647. @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of IMAP4 connections that are accepted by the Exchange server. Valid values are from 1 through 2147483647. The default value is 2147483647. @@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionsPerUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionsPerUser parameter specifies the maximum number of IMAP4 connections that are allowed for each user. Valid values are from 1 through 2147483647. The default value is 16. @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRetrievalMimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRetrievalMimeFormat parameter specifies the MIME encoding of messages. Valid values are: @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaServerUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaServerUrl parameter specifies the URL that's used to retrieve calendar information for instances of custom Outlook on the web calendar items. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreAuthenticatedConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreAuthenticatedConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the period of time to wait before closing an idle IMAP4 connection that isn't authenticated. @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProtocolLogEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable protocol logging for IMAP4. Valid values are: @@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProxyTargetPort -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProxyTargetPort parameter specifies the port on the Microsoft Exchange IMAP4 Backend service that listens for client connections that are proxied from the Microsoft Exchange IMAP4 service. The default value is 1993. @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowHiddenFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ShowHiddenFoldersEnabled parameter specifies whether hidden mailbox folders are visible. Valid values are: @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SSLBindings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SSLBindings parameter specifies the IP address and TCP port that's used for IMAP4 connection that's always encrypted by SSL/TLS. This parameter uses the syntax `IPv4OrIPv6Address:Port`. @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuppressReadReceipt parameter specifies whether to stop duplicate read receipts from being sent to IMAP4 clients that have the Send read receipts for messages I send setting configured in their IMAP4 email program. Valid values are: @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnencryptedOrTLSBindings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UnencryptedOrTLSBindings parameter specifies the IP address and TCP port that's used for unencrypted IMAP4 connections, or IMAP4 connections that are encrypted by using opportunistic TLS (STARTTLS) after the initial unencrypted protocol handshake. This parameter uses the syntax `IPv4OrIPv6Address:Port`. @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -X509CertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The X509CertificateName parameter specifies the certificate that's used for encrypting IMAP4 client connections. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-InboxRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-InboxRule.md index a9d14c5d20..88e296d6ef 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-InboxRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-InboxRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ This example modifies the action of the existing Inbox rule ProjectContoso. The ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Inbox rule that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysDeleteOutlookRulesBlob switch hides a warning message when you use Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App) or Exchange PowerShell to modify Inbox rules. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that applies the specified category to messages. A valid value is any text value that you want to define as a category. You can specify multiple categories separated by commas. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplySystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplySystemCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that applies the specified system category to messages. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BodyContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the body of messages. @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyToFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CopyToFolder parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that copies messages to the specified mailbox folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteSystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteSystemCategory parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that deletes the specified system category from messages. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeleteMessage parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that sends messages to the Deleted Items folder. Valid values are: @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfBodyContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the body of messages. @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFlaggedForAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFlaggedForAction parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks messages with the specified message flag. Valid values are: @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFrom parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in the sender's email address. @@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasAttachment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfHasAttachment parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with attachments. Valid values are: @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfHasClassification parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message classification. You can find message classifications by using the Get-MessageClassification cmdlet. You can specify multiple message classifications separated by commas. @@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HeaderContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the header fields of messages. @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages of the specified type. Valid values are: @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInCcBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the Cc field. Valid values are: @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInToBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -649,7 +649,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameInToOrCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameInToOrCcBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To or Cc fields Valid values are. @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMyNameNotInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfMyNameNotInToBox parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner isn't in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfReceivedAfterDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfReceivedAfterDate parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received after the specified date. @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfReceivedBeforeDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfReceivedBeforeDate parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received before the specified date. @@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in recipient email addresses. @@ -765,7 +765,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentOnlyToMe -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSentOnlyToMe parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the only recipient is the mailbox owner. Valid values are: @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSentTo parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field of messages. @@ -843,7 +843,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field or body of messages. @@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithImportance parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified importance level. Valid values are: @@ -893,7 +893,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMaximum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMaximum parameter specifies part of an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that smaller than specified maximum size. @@ -925,7 +925,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMinimum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithinSizeRangeMinimum parameter specifies part of an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are larger than the specified minimum size. @@ -957,7 +957,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithSensitivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExceptIfWithSensitivity parameter specifies an exception for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified sensitivity level. Valid values are: @@ -982,7 +982,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FlaggedForAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FlaggedForAction parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message flag. Valid values are: @@ -1012,7 +1012,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardAsAttachmentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardAsAttachmentTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that forwards the message to the specified recipient as an attachment. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that forwards the message to the specified recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1086,7 +1086,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -From -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The From parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -1115,7 +1115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromAddressContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in the sender's email address. @@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasAttachment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasAttachment parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with attachments. Valid values are: @@ -1164,7 +1164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HasClassification parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified message classification. You can find message classifications by using the Get-MessageClassification cmdlet. You can specify multiple message classifications separated by commas. @@ -1184,7 +1184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HeaderContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the header fields of messages. @@ -1210,7 +1210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the Inbox rule. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -1239,7 +1239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarkAsRead -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MarkAsRead parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that marks messages as read. Valid values are: @@ -1260,7 +1260,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MarkImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MarkImportance parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that marks messages with the specified importance flag. Valid values are: @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTypeMatches parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages of the specified type. Valid values are: @@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveToFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveToFolder parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that moves messages to the specified mailbox folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -1347,7 +1347,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInCcBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the Cc field. Valid values are: @@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInToBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -1393,7 +1393,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameInToOrCcBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameInToOrCcBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner is in the To or Cc fields Valid values are. @@ -1416,7 +1416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MyNameNotInToBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MyNameNotInToBox parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the mailbox owner isn't in the To field. Valid values are: @@ -1439,7 +1439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the Inbox rule. The maximum length is 512 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1457,7 +1457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PinMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PinMessage parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that pins messages to the top of the Inbox. Valid values are: @@ -1478,7 +1478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies a priority for the Inbox rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, @@ -1496,7 +1496,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivedAfterDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReceivedAfterDate parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received after the specified date. @@ -1518,7 +1518,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceivedBeforeDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReceivedBeforeDate parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages received before the specified date. @@ -1540,7 +1540,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientAddressContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the specified words are in recipient email addresses. @@ -1566,7 +1566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RedirectTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RedirectTo parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that redirects the message to the specified recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1593,7 +1593,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendTextMessageNotificationTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1617,7 +1617,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentOnlyToMe -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentOnlyToMe parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages where the only recipient is the mailbox owner. Valid values are: @@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentTo parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified recipients. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -1689,7 +1689,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StopProcessingRules -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StopProcessingRules parameter specifies an action for the Inbox rule that stops processing additional rules if the conditions of this Inbox rule are met. Valid values are:If set to $true, the StopProcessingRules parameter instructs Exchange to stop processing additional rules if the conditions of this Inbox rule are met. @@ -1710,7 +1710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field of messages. @@ -1736,7 +1736,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SubjectOrBodyContainsWords parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for the specified words or phrases in the Subject field or body of messages. @@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithImportance parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified importance level. Valid values are: @@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithinSizeRangeMaximum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithinSizeRangeMaximum parameter specifies part of a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are smaller than specified maximum size. @@ -1836,7 +1836,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithinSizeRangeMinimum -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithinSizeRangeMinimum parameter specifies part of a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages that are larger than the specified minimum size. @@ -1868,7 +1868,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithSensitivity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WithSensitivity parameter specifies a condition for the Inbox rule that looks for messages with the specified sensitivity level. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IntraOrganizationConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IntraOrganizationConnector.md index 54ac46f17a..a1f7a1c74d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IntraOrganizationConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-IntraOrganizationConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example disables the Intra-Organization connector named "MainCloudConnector ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the Intra-Organization connector that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the connector. For example: @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DiscoveryEndpoint parameter specifies the externally accessible URL used for the Autodiscover service for the domain configured in the IntraOrganization Connector. This parameter is automatically populated with the TargetAutodiscoverEpr value from the Get-FederationInformation cmdlet for the defined domain. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter enables or disabled the Intra-organization connector. The valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetAddressDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetAddressDomains parameter specifies the domain namespaces to be used in the Intra-Organization connector. The domains must have valid Autodiscover endpoints defined in their organizations. The domains and their associated Autodiscover endpoints are used by the Intra-Organization connector for feature and service connectivity. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-JournalRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-JournalRule.md index f0a36d4384..05448cdeb4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-JournalRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-JournalRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,6 +47,8 @@ Set-JournalRule "Consolidated Messenger" -JournalEmailAddress "ArchiveMailbox@co This example modifies the journal email address to which journal reports are sent by the existing journal rule Consolidated Messenger. +The Identity parameter is positional, which means you can use it without the -Identity label in the supported location in the command (in this case, first). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). + ### Example 2 ```powershell Get-JournalRule | Set-JournalRule -JournalEmailAddress "Archive Mailbox" @@ -58,12 +60,10 @@ This example modifies the journal email address for all journal rules. The Get-J ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name or GUID of the rule you want to modify. -The Identity parameter is a positional parameter. When using positional parameters in a command, you can omit the parameter label. - ```yaml Type: RuleIdParameter Parameter Sets: (All) @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The JournalEmailAddress parameter specifies a journal recipient. Journal reports for the specified rule are sent to the journal recipient. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the journal rule. The name of the rule can be up to 64 characters. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipient parameter specifies the SMTP address of a mailbox, contact, or distribution group to journal. If you specify a distribution group, all recipients in that distribution group are journaled. All messages sent to or received from a recipient are journaled. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Scope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Scope parameter specifies the scope of email messages to which the journal rule is applied. You can use the following values: @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailContact.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailContact.md index 35488447ff..2b06f8b281 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailContact.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailContact.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ This example sets John Rodman's external email address to john@contoso.com. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail contact that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail contact. For example: @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail contact. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center (EAC) and in address lists. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -754,7 +754,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies the target email address of the mail contact or mail user. By default, this value is used as the primary email address of the mail contact or mail user. @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this mail contact. Although messages sent on behalf of the mail contact clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the mail contact, not the sender. @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MacAttachmentFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MacAttachmentFormat parameter specifies the Apple Macintosh operating system attachment format to use for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -1025,7 +1025,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -1074,7 +1074,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1109,7 +1109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxRecipientPerMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1133,7 +1133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1168,7 +1168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageBodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -1195,7 +1195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageFormat parameter specifies the message format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -1223,7 +1223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1254,7 +1254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1277,7 +1277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail contact. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1321,7 +1321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1356,7 +1356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1391,7 +1391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemovePicture -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1450,7 +1450,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSpokenName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1472,7 +1472,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -1493,7 +1493,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1513,7 +1513,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryDialPlan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -1557,7 +1557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -1581,7 +1581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1613,7 +1613,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseMapiRichTextFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UseMapiRichTextFormat parameter specifies what to do with messages that are sent to the mail user or mail contact in MAPI rich text format, also known as Outlook Rich Text or Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF). Valid values are: @@ -1637,7 +1637,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePreferMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UsePreferMessageFormat specifies whether the message format settings configured for the mail user or mail contact override the global settings configured for the remote domain or configured by the message sender. Valid value are: @@ -1698,7 +1698,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1716,7 +1716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailPublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailPublicFolder.md index 08ae62604e..1b5c034778 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailPublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailPublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ This example removes the secondary email address MyPublicFolder@fabrikam.com fro ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the GUID or public folder name that represents a specific public folder. You can also include the path using the format \\TopLevelPublicFolder\\PublicFolder. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Contacts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Contacts parameter specifies the contacts for the public folder. Contacts are persons about whom you can save several types of information, such as addresses, telephone numbers, and web page URLs. @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -633,7 +633,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliverToMailboxAndForward -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeliverToMailboxAndForward parameter specifies the message delivery behavior when a forwarding address is specified by the ForwardingAddress or ForwardingSmtpAddress parameters. Valid values are: @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the Public Folder Proxy object. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, address lists, and Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -787,7 +787,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddressPolicyEnabled parameter specifies whether to apply email address policies to this recipient. Valid values are: @@ -808,7 +808,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EntryId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EntryId parameter specifies the EntryID value for the public folder. You use this parameter to correct an existing EntryID that points to a folder that can't be found. @@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -922,7 +922,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -946,7 +946,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies an email address outside the organization. @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardingAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardingAddress parameter specifies a forwarding address for messages that are sent to this public folder. A valid value for this parameter is a recipient in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this public folder. Although messages sent on behalf of the mail user clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the public folder, not the sender. @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -1054,7 +1054,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreMissingFolderLink -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreMissingFolderLink parameter specifies whether to exclude the mail-enabled public folder from a specific validation check that's used during a public folder migration. Valid values are: @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -1147,7 +1147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the public folder. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxSendSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent by the public folder. @@ -1209,7 +1209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the public folder. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1281,7 +1281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnPremisesObjectId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OnPremisesObjectId parameter specifies the ObjectID (GUID) value of the mail-enabled public folder from the on-premises environment. @@ -1299,7 +1299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PhoneticDisplayName parameter specifies an alternate spelling of the user's name that's used for text to speech in Unified Messaging (UM) environments. Typically, you use this parameter when the pronunciation and spelling of the user's name don't match. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. You can't use the EmailAddresses and PrimarySmtpAddress parameters in the same command. @@ -1362,7 +1362,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1397,7 +1397,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1432,7 +1432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1469,7 +1469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -1539,7 +1539,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -1583,7 +1583,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1601,7 +1601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailUser.md index 8ecd9e7617..fcdc2c27d6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ This example modifies the external email address for the mail user named John Wo ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mail user that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail user. For example: @@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1020,7 +1020,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1092,7 +1092,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -1128,7 +1128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1159,7 +1159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1177,7 +1177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1197,7 +1197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1251,7 +1251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1292,7 +1292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1328,7 +1328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1346,7 +1346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1400,7 +1400,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1418,7 +1418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1436,7 +1436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1472,7 +1472,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1508,7 +1508,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1526,7 +1526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1570,7 +1570,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mail user. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, address lists, and Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1588,7 +1588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1608,7 +1608,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -1647,7 +1647,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1692,7 +1692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1756,7 +1756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1828,7 +1828,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1852,7 +1852,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -1876,7 +1876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalEmailAddress parameter specifies the target email address of the mail contact or mail user. By default, this value is used as the primary email address of the mail contact or mail user. @@ -1918,7 +1918,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ForceUpgrade switch suppresses the confirmation message that appears if the object was created in a previous version of Exchange. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1936,7 +1936,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this mail user. Although messages sent on behalf of the mail user clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `, replies to these messages are delivered to the mail user, not the sender. @@ -1973,7 +1973,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -2014,7 +2014,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2039,7 +2039,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -2099,7 +2099,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MacAttachmentFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MacAttachmentFormat parameter specifies the Apple Macintosh operating system attachment format to use for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -2147,7 +2147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2170,7 +2170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -2196,7 +2196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the mail user. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -2227,7 +2227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxSendSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent by the mail user. @@ -2258,7 +2258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageBodyFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageBodyFormat parameter specifies the message body format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -2285,7 +2285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MessageFormat parameter specifies the message format for messages sent to the mail contact or mail user. Valid values are: @@ -2333,7 +2333,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -2364,7 +2364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -2387,7 +2387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail user. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2431,7 +2431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2477,7 +2477,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientLimits -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2501,7 +2501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2535,7 +2535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2569,7 +2569,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -2604,7 +2604,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -2639,7 +2639,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemovePicture -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2840,7 +2840,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSpokenName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2862,7 +2862,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -2908,7 +2908,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2928,7 +2928,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE Online Protection This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2948,7 +2948,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryDialPlan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2968,7 +2968,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -2992,7 +2992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -3016,7 +3016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDualWrite -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in Exchange 2016 or later. @@ -3036,7 +3036,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3088,7 +3088,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseMapiRichTextFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UseMapiRichTextFormat parameter specifies what to do with messages that are sent to the mail user or mail contact in MAPI rich text format, also known as Outlook Rich Text or Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF). Valid values are: @@ -3112,7 +3112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UsePreferMessageFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UsePreferMessageFormat specifies whether the message format settings configured for the mail user or mail contact override the global settings configured for the remote domain or configured by the message sender. Valid value are: @@ -3133,7 +3133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UserCertificate parameter specifies the digital certificate used to sign a user's email messages. @@ -3151,7 +3151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3171,7 +3171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserSMimeCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The UserSMimeCertificate parameter specifies the S/MIME certificate that's used to sign a user's email messages. @@ -3189,7 +3189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -3207,7 +3207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Mailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Mailbox.md index 0af9d1bc47..0ecd97ae8d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Mailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Mailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example removes the delay hold that's applied to Asraf' ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -1221,7 +1221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1291,7 +1291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -1328,7 +1328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressBookPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressBookPolicy parameter specifies the address book policy that's applied to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address book policy. For example: @@ -1375,7 +1375,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -1411,7 +1411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AntispamBypassEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1434,7 +1434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyMandatoryProperties -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyMandatoryProperties switch specifies whether to update the msExchVersion attribute of the mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1478,7 +1478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArbitrationMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1509,7 +1509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1555,7 +1555,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ArchiveName parameter specifies the name of the archive mailbox. This is the name displayed to users in Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App). If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1583,7 +1583,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1615,7 +1615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveStatus -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This cmdlet is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1635,7 +1635,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1667,7 +1667,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttributesToClear -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1687,7 +1687,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditAdmin -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditAdmin parameter specifies the mailbox operations to log for administrators as part of mailbox audit logging. Valid values are: @@ -1732,7 +1732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditDelegate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditDelegate parameter specifies the mailbox operations to log for delegate users as part of mailbox audit logging. Valid values are: @@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable mailbox audit logging for the mailbox. If auditing is enabled, actions specified in the AuditAdmin, AuditDelegate, and AuditOwner parameters are logged. Valid values are: @@ -1797,7 +1797,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1821,7 +1821,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditLogAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditLogAgeLimit parameter specifies the maximum age of audit log entries for the mailbox. Log entries older than the specified value are removed. The default value is 90 days. @@ -1843,7 +1843,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditOwner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditOwner parameter specifies the mailbox operations to log for mailbox owners as part of mailbox audit logging. Valid values include: @@ -1886,7 +1886,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuxAuditLog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1910,7 +1910,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -1943,7 +1943,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarLoggingQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1979,7 +1979,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CalendarRepairDisabled parameter specifies whether to prevent calendar items in the mailbox from being repaired by the Calendar Repair Assistant. Valid values are: @@ -2000,7 +2000,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarVersionStoreDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CalendarVersionStoreDisabled parameter specifies whether to prevent calendar changes in the mailbox from being logged. Valid values are: @@ -2043,7 +2043,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClientExtensions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2065,7 +2065,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -2086,7 +2086,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2109,7 +2109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2127,7 +2127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2145,7 +2145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2163,7 +2163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2181,7 +2181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2199,7 +2199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2217,7 +2217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2235,7 +2235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2253,7 +2253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2271,7 +2271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2289,7 +2289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2307,7 +2307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2325,7 +2325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2343,7 +2343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2361,7 +2361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2379,7 +2379,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Database -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2457,7 +2457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderMailbox parameter assigns a specific public folder mailbox to the user. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the public folder mailbox. For example: @@ -2484,7 +2484,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliverToMailboxAndForward -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeliverToMailboxAndForward parameter specifies the message delivery behavior when a forwarding address is specified by the ForwardingAddress or ForwardingSmtpAddress parameters. Valid values are: @@ -2507,7 +2507,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisableThrottling -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2530,7 +2530,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the mailbox. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, in address lists, and in Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -2548,7 +2548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2568,7 +2568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DowngradeHighPriorityMessagesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2591,7 +2591,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DumpsterMessagesPerFolderCountReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2613,7 +2613,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DumpsterMessagesPerFolderCountWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2678,7 +2678,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -2717,7 +2717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2740,7 +2740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableRoomMailboxAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2767,7 +2767,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDateForRetentionHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDateForRetentionHold parameter specifies the end date for retention hold for messaging records management (MRM). To use this parameter, you need to set the RetentionHoldEnabled parameter to the value $true. @@ -2855,7 +2855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedPropertiesCountQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2875,7 +2875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2899,7 +2899,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2923,7 +2923,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2947,7 +2947,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2971,7 +2971,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -2995,7 +2995,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalOofOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalOofOptions parameter specifies the automatic replies or Out of Office (also known OOF) message options that are available for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -3016,7 +3016,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderHierarchyChildrenCountReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3038,7 +3038,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderHierarchyChildrenCountWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3060,7 +3060,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderHierarchyDepthReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3082,7 +3082,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderHierarchyDepthWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3104,7 +3104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FoldersCountReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3126,7 +3126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FoldersCountWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3148,7 +3148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -3168,7 +3168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardingAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardingAddress parameter specifies a forwarding address in your organization for messages that are sent to this mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the internal recipient. For example: @@ -3202,7 +3202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardingSmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForwardingSmtpAddress parameter specifies a forwarding SMTP address for messages that are sent to this mailbox. Typically, you use this parameter to specify external email addresses that aren't validated. @@ -3229,7 +3229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GMGen -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3251,7 +3251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GrantSendOnBehalfTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GrantSendOnBehalfTo parameter specifies who can send on behalf of this mailbox. Although messages send on behalf of the mailbox clearly show the sender in the From field (` on behalf of `), replies to these messages are delivered to the mailbox, not the sender. @@ -3308,7 +3308,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -3329,7 +3329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3354,7 +3354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImListMigrationCompleted -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3383,7 +3383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -3431,7 +3431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy parameter prevents users from accessing the public folder hierarchy on this public folder mailbox. For load-balancing purposes, users are equally distributed across public folder mailboxes by default. When this parameter is set on a public folder mailbox, that mailbox isn't included in this automatic load-balancing and can't be accessed by users to retrieve the public folder hierarchy. However, if an administrator has set the DefaultPublicFolderMailbox property on a user mailbox to a specific public folder mailbox, the user can still access the specified public folder mailbox even if the IsExcludedFromServingHierarchy parameter is set for that public folder mailbox. @@ -3451,7 +3451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsHierarchyReady -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3471,7 +3471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsHierarchySyncEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3491,7 +3491,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -3545,7 +3545,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Languages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Languages parameter specifies the language preferences for this mailbox, in order of preference. Several Exchange components display information to a mailbox user in the preferred language, if that language is supported. Some of those components include quota messages, non-delivery reports (NDRs), the Outlook on the web user interface, and Unified Messaging (UM) voice prompts. @@ -3569,7 +3569,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3591,7 +3591,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3611,7 +3611,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedMasterAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3636,7 +3636,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LitigationHoldDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LitigationHoldDate parameter specifies the date that the mailbox is placed on litigation hold. The parameter is populated automatically when you place a mailbox on litigation hold. The date you specify can be used for informational or reporting purposes. @@ -3656,7 +3656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LitigationHoldDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LitigationHoldDuration parameter specifies how long mailbox items are held if the mailbox is placed on litigation hold. The duration is calculated from the date a mailbox item is received or created. @@ -3676,7 +3676,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LitigationHoldEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LitigationHoldEnabled parameter specifies whether to place the mailbox on litigation hold. Valid values are: @@ -3701,7 +3701,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LitigationHoldOwner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LitigationHoldOwner parameter specifies the user who placed the mailbox on litigation hold. If you don't use this parameter when you place the mailbox on litigation hold, the value is populated automatically. If you use this parameter when you place the mailbox on litigation hold, you can specify a text value. If the value contains spaces, include the value in quotation marks ("). You can use this value for informational and reporting purposes. @@ -3719,7 +3719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxMessagesPerFolderCountReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is an available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3743,7 +3743,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxMessagesPerFolderCountWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is an available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3791,7 +3791,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -3814,7 +3814,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -3884,7 +3884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Management -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3906,7 +3906,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxBlockedSenders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3926,7 +3926,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the mailbox. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -3963,7 +3963,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSafeSenders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3983,7 +3983,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxSendSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent by the mailbox. @@ -4020,7 +4020,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageCopyForSendOnBehalfEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: Previously, this parameter was available only for shared mailboxes. In Exchange Online or Exchange 2016 CU6 or later, this parameter is also available for user mailboxes. This parameter is not available for linked user mailboxes. @@ -4045,7 +4045,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageCopyForSentAsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: Previously, this parameter was available only for shared mailboxes. In Exchange Online or Exchange 2016 CU6 or later, this parameter is also available for user mailboxes. This parameter is not available for linked user mailboxes. @@ -4095,7 +4095,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTracking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4117,7 +4117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingReadStatusEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTrackingReadStatusEnabled parameter specifies whether to include detailed information in delivery reports for messages sent to the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -4158,7 +4158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Migration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4178,7 +4178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -4209,7 +4209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -4232,7 +4232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mailbox. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -4252,7 +4252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4298,7 +4298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OABGen -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4320,7 +4320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Office -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Office parameter specifies the user's physical office name or number. @@ -4338,7 +4338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4364,7 +4364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OldPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4390,7 +4390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OMEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4410,7 +4410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OMEncryptionStore -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4430,7 +4430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Password -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Password parameter resets the password of the user account that's associated with the mailbox to the value you specify. To use this parameter on a mailbox other than your own, consider the following options: @@ -4457,7 +4457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4481,7 +4481,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProhibitSendQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send new messages, and the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -4515,7 +4515,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProhibitSendReceiveQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send or receive new messages. Messages sent to the mailbox are returned to the sender with a descriptive error message. This value effectively determines the maximum size of the mailbox. @@ -4569,7 +4569,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PstProvider -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4589,7 +4589,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolder switch is required to modify public folder mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -4609,7 +4609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueryBaseDN -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4653,7 +4653,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientLimits -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientLimits parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients allowed in messages sent by the mailbox. @@ -4675,7 +4675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4711,7 +4711,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4747,7 +4747,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -4782,7 +4782,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -4817,7 +4817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -4854,7 +4854,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteRecipientType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4965,7 +4965,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveManagedFolderAndPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5009,7 +5009,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemovePicture -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5031,7 +5031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSpokenName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5053,7 +5053,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -5074,7 +5074,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5099,7 +5099,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceCapacity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResourceCapacity parameter specifies the capacity of the resource mailbox. For example, you can use this parameter to identify the number of seats in a conference room (room mailbox) or in a vehicle (equipment mailbox). A valid value is an integer. @@ -5117,7 +5117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceCustom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResourceCustom parameter specifies one or more custom resource properties to add to the resource mailbox. You can use this parameter only on resource mailboxes. @@ -5143,7 +5143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainDeletedItemsFor -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetainDeletedItemsFor parameter specifies the length of time to keep soft-deleted items for the mailbox. Soft-deleted items are items that have been deleted by using any of these methods: @@ -5177,7 +5177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainDeletedItemsUntilBackup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5204,7 +5204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RetentionComment parameter specifies a comment that's displayed in Outlook regarding the user's retention hold status. @@ -5228,7 +5228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionHoldEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionHoldEnabled parameter specifies whether the mailbox is placed on retention hold. Placing the mailbox on retention hold temporarily suspends the processing of retention policies or managed folder mailbox policies for the mailbox (for example, when the user is on vacation). Valid values are: @@ -5251,7 +5251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionPolicy parameter specifies the retention policy that you want applied to this mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -5277,7 +5277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RetentionUrl parameter specifies the URL or an external web page with additional details about the organization's messaging retention policies. @@ -5297,7 +5297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoleAssignmentPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RoleAssignmentPolicy parameter specifies the role assignment policy that's assigned to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the role assignment policy. For example: @@ -5323,7 +5323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoomMailboxPassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5359,7 +5359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RulesQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RulesQuota parameter specifies the limit for the size of Inbox rules for the mailbox. When you enter a value, qualify the value with one of the following: @@ -5390,7 +5390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5430,7 +5430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLDeleteEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5454,7 +5454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLDeleteThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5476,7 +5476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLJunkEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5500,7 +5500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLJunkThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5522,7 +5522,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLQuarantineEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5548,7 +5548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLQuarantineThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5570,7 +5570,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLRejectEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5594,7 +5594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLRejectThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5616,7 +5616,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5636,7 +5636,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryDialPlan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5656,7 +5656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -5680,7 +5680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SharingPolicy parameter specifies the sharing policy that's assigned to the mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the sharing policy. For example: @@ -5704,7 +5704,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -5728,7 +5728,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SingleItemRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SingleItemRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether to prevent the Recoverable Items folder from being purged. Valid values are: @@ -5749,7 +5749,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDualWrite -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange @@ -5769,7 +5769,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDateForRetentionHold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDateForRetentionHold parameter specifies the start date for the retention hold that's placed on the mailbox. @@ -5791,7 +5791,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StsRefreshTokensValidFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -5809,7 +5809,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemMessageSizeShutoffQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5829,7 +5829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemMessageSizeWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5849,7 +5849,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5875,7 +5875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Type parameter specifies the mailbox type for the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -5900,7 +5900,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDataStorage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5922,7 +5922,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5954,7 +5954,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMGrammar -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5996,7 +5996,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDatabaseQuotaDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseDatabaseQuotaDefaults parameter specifies whether applicable quotas for the mailbox are determined by the quota values on the mailbox or the corresponding quota values on the mailbox database (not all mailbox quotas are configurable on the mailbox database). Valid values are: @@ -6026,7 +6026,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDatabaseRetentionDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -6059,7 +6059,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserCertificate parameter specifies the digital certificate used to sign a user's email messages. @@ -6077,7 +6077,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -6097,7 +6097,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserSMimeCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserSMimeCertificate parameter specifies the S/MIME certificate that's used to sign a user's email messages. @@ -6115,7 +6115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -6133,7 +6133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md index 727665ecc5..e902549d46 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example removes the bypass association for the Svc-MyApplication account. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies a user or computer account to be bypassed from mailbox audit logging. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuditBypassEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AuditBypassEnabled parameter specifies whether audit bypass is enabled for the user or computer. Valid values include the following: @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md index 8e5570733c..eae06dedc4 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxAutoReplyConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ This example configures Automatic Replies for Tony's mailbox to be sent, specifi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDeclineFutureRequestsWhenOOF -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoReplyState -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoReplyState parameter specifies whether the mailbox is enabled for Automatic Replies. Valid values are: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateOOFEvent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeclineAllEventsForScheduledOOF -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeclineEventsForScheduledOOF -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeclineMeetingMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndTime parameter specifies the end date and time that Automatic Replies are sent for the mailbox. You use this parameter only when the AutoReplyState parameter is set to Scheduled, and the value of this parameter is meaningful only when AutoReplyState is Scheduled. @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EventsToDeleteIDs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAudience -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalAudience parameter specifies whether Automatic Replies are sent to external senders. Valid values are: @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalMessage parameter specifies the Automatic Replies message that's sent to external senders or senders outside the organization. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalMessage parameter specifies the Automatic Replies message that's sent to internal senders or senders within the organization. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OOFEventSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartTime parameter specifies the start date and time that Automatic Replies are sent for the specified mailbox. You use this parameter only when the AutoReplyState parameter is set to Scheduled, and the value of this parameter is meaningful only when AutoReplyState is Scheduled. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md index d0f4c94bb5..3c37bb9ac5 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ This example sets the working day's starting hour to 7 A.M. for the calendar of ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgendaMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConversationalSchedulingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConversationalSchedulingEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable conversational scheduling. Valid values are: @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DailyAgendaMailSchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultMeetingDuration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultReminderTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultReminderTime parameter specifies the length of time before a meeting or appointment when the reminder is first displayed. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstWeekOfYear -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FirstWeekOfYear parameter specifies the first week of the year. Valid values are: @@ -912,7 +912,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemindersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemindersEnabled parameter enables or disables reminders for calendar items. Valid values are: @@ -935,7 +935,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReminderSoundEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReminderSoundEnabled parameter specifies whether a sound is played along with the reminder. Valid values are: @@ -1023,7 +1023,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowWeekNumbers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowWeekNumbers parameter specifies whether the week number is displayed in the Outlook on the web calendar. Valid values are: @@ -1044,7 +1044,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipAgendaMailOnFreeDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeIncrement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TimeIncrement parameter specifies the scale that the Outlook on the web calendar uses to show time. Valid values are: @@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseBrightCalendarColorThemeInOwa -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseBrightCalendarColorThemeInOwa parameter specifies whether to use light colors or bright colors for the calendar in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WeekStartDay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WeekStartDay parameter specifies the first day of the week. Valid values are: @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1248,7 +1248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkDays parameter specifies the work days in the calendar. Valid values are: @@ -1280,7 +1280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkingHoursEndTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkingHoursEndTime parameter specifies the time that the work day ends. @@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkingHoursStartTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkingHoursStartTime parameter specifies the time that the work day starts. @@ -1324,7 +1324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WorkingHoursTimeZone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WorkingHoursTimeZone parameter specifies the time zone that's used by the WorkingHoursStartTime and WorkingHoursEndTime parameters. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarFolder.md index 7ad33e450c..dd3821709f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxCalendarFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ This example enables the calendar in Kai's mailbox to be searchable on the web. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the calendar folder that you want to modify. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DetailLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DetailLevel parameter specifies the level of calendar detail that's published and available to anonymous users. Valid values are: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishDateRangeFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublishDateRangeFrom parameter specifies the start date of calendar information to publish (past information). Valid values are: @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishDateRangeTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublishDateRangeTo parameter specifies the end date of calendar information to publish (future information). Valid values are: @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublishEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublishEnabled parameter specifies whether to publish the specified calendar information. Valid values are: @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResetUrl switch replaces the existing non-public URL with a new URL for a calendar that is published without being publicly searchable. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchableUrlEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SearchableUrlEnabled parameter specifies whether the published calendar URL is discoverable on the web. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetAsSharingSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SetAsSharingSource switch specifies whether to set the calendar folder as a sharing source. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseHttps -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseHttps switch specifies whether to use HTTPS for the published URL of the calendar folder. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabase.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabase.md index e700a98c53..2512649f93 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabase.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabase.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ For more information about RPC access through Client Access servers, see [Set-Rp ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox database that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the database. For example: @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowFileRestore -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AllowFileRestore parameter specifies whether to allow a database to be restored from a backup. Valid values are: @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagExcludeFromMonitoring -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDagExcludedFromMonitoring parameter specifies whether to exclude the mailbox database from the ServerOneCopyMonitor, which alerts an administrator when a replicated database has only one healthy copy available. Valid values are: @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDatabaseMountDial -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BackgroundDatabaseMaintenance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BackgroundDatabaseMaintenance parameter specifies whether the Extensible Storage Engine (ESE) performs database maintenance. Valid values are: @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarLoggingQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarLoggingQuota parameter specifies the maximum size of the log in the Recoverable Items folder of the mailbox that stores changes to calendar items. When the log exceeds this size, calendar logging is disabled until messaging records management (MRM) removes older calendar logs to free up more space. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CircularLoggingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CircularLoggingEnabled parameter specifies whether circular logging is enabled for the database. Valid values are: @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DataMoveReplicationConstraint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DataMoveReplicationConstraint parameter specifies the throttling behavior for high availability mailbox moves. Valid values are: @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeletedItemRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeletedItemRetention parameter specifies the length of time to keep deleted items in the Recoverable Items\\Deletions folder in mailboxes. Items are moved to this folder when the user deletes items from the Deleted Items folder, empties the Deleted Items folder, or deletes items by using Shift+Delete. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EventHistoryRetentionPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EventHistoryRetentionPeriod parameter specifies the length of time to keep event data. This event data is stored in the event history table in the Exchange store. It includes information about changes to various objects in the mailbox database. You can use this parameter to prevent the event history table from becoming too large and using too much disk space. @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IndexEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange 2016 or earlier. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromInitialProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioning parameter specifies whether to exclude the database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer that distributes new mailboxes randomly and evenly across the available databases. Valid values are: @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioningByOperator -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IIsExcludedFromProvisioningByOperator parameter specifies whether to exclude the database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer that distributes new mailboxes randomly and evenly across the available databases. @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioningDueToLogicalCorruption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioningDueToLogicalCorruption parameter specifies whether to exclude the database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer that distributes new mailboxes randomly and evenly across the available databases. @@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioningReason -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioningReason parameter specifies the reason why you excluded the mailbox database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). The value must contain at least 10 characters. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsSuspendedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsSuspendedFromProvisioning parameter specifies whether to exclude the database from the mailbox provisioning load balancer that distributes new mailboxes randomly and evenly across the available databases. Valid values are: @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalRecipient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The JournalRecipient parameter specifies the journal recipient to use for per-database journaling for all mailboxes on the database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxRetention parameter specifies the length of time to keep deleted mailboxes before they are permanently deleted or purged. @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaintenanceSchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MetaCacheDatabaseMaxCapacityInBytes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MetaCacheDatabaseMaxCapacityInBytes parameter specifies the size of the metacache database in bytes. To convert gigabytes to bytes, multiply the value by 1024^3. For terabytes to bytes, multiply by 1024^4. @@ -691,7 +691,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MountAtStartup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MountAtStartup parameter specifies whether to mount the mailbox database when the Microsoft Exchange Information Store service starts. Valid values are: @@ -712,7 +712,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mailbox database. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OfflineAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OfflineAddressBook parameter specifies the offline address book that's associated with the mailbox database. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the offline address book. For example: @@ -754,7 +754,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProhibitSendQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send new messages, and the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProhibitSendReceiveQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send or receive new messages. Messages sent to the mailbox are returned to the sender with a descriptive error message. This value effectively determines the maximum size of the mailbox. @@ -818,7 +818,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QuotaNotificationSchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecoverableItemsQuota parameter specifies the maximum size for the Recoverable Items folder of the mailbox. If the Recoverable Items folder reaches or exceeds this size, it no longer accepts messages. @@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecoverableItemsWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the Recoverable Items folder for the mailbox. If the Recoverable Items folder reaches or exceeds this size, Exchange logs an event to the application event log. @@ -950,7 +950,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainDeletedItemsUntilBackup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RetainDeletedItemsUntilBackup parameter specifies whether to keep items in the Recoverable Items\\Deletions folder of the mailbox until the next database backup occurs. Valid values are: @@ -1002,7 +1002,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md index 91532aaab8..e85cf0fabf 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxDatabaseCopy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example configures an activation preference of 3 for the copy of the databa ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the database whose copy is being modified. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivationPreference -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActivationPreference parameter value is used as part of Active Manager's best copy selection process and to redistribute active mailbox databases throughout the database availability group (DAG) when using the RedistributeActiveDatabases.ps1 script. The value for the ActivationPreference parameter is a number equal to or greater than 1, where 1 is at the top of the preference order. The position number can't be larger than the number of database copies of the mailbox database. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplayLagTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplayLagTime parameter specifies the amount of time that the Microsoft Exchange Replication service should wait before replaying log files that have been copied to the passive database copy. Setting this parameter to a value greater than 0 creates a lagged database copy. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TruncationLagTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TruncationLagTime parameter specifies the amount of time that the Microsoft Exchange Replication service should wait before truncating log files that have replayed into the passive copy of the database. The time period begins after the log is successfully replayed into the copy of the database. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseCopyAutoActivationPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplayLagMaxDelay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplayLagMaxDelay parameter specifies the maximum delay for lagged database copy play down (also known as deferred lagged copy play down). If the disk read IO latency is greater than 25 ms, lagged copy play down is delayed up to the value of this parameter. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxExportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxExportRequest.md index b81f0286db..fe5b9cea85 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxExportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxExportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ This example changes the second export request Ayla\\MailboxExport1 to accept up ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the export request. By default, export requests are named `\MailboxExportX` (where X = 0-9). If you specify a name for the export request, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BatchName parameter specifies the name of the batch. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default value is 30 days. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RehomeRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RehomeRequest switch tells the Microsoft Exchange Mailbox Replication service (MRS) that the request needs to be moved to the same database as the mailbox that's being exported. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMerging parameter specifies steps in the export that should be skipped. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxFolderPermission.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxFolderPermission.md index 223ac5f5c3..72c6e76489 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxFolderPermission.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxFolderPermission.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ In Exchange Online, this example changes an existing user's permissions to Edito ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the target mailbox and folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccessRights -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccessRights parameter specifies the permissions that you want to modify for the user on the mailbox folder. The values that you specify replace the existing permissions for the user on the folder. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -User -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The User parameter specifies the mailbox, mail user, or mail-enabled security group (security principal) that's granted permission to the mailbox folder. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxImportRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxImportRequest.md index 86bba500cd..fb66c38f42 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxImportRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxImportRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This example finds all import requests that have a status of Suspended, and then ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the import request. By default, import requests are named `\MailboxImportX` (where X = 0-9). If you specified a name for the import request with the New-MailboxImportRequest cmdlet, use the following syntax: `Alias\Name`. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies the name of the batch. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RehomeRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies the steps in the import that should be skipped. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md index 7c763e94da..264b0132ca 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxJunkEmailConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example identifies mailboxes where contacts are treated as trusted senders ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedSendersAndDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BlockedSendersAndDomains parameter specifies the Blocked Senders list, which is a list of sender email addresses and domains whose messages are automatically sent to the Junk Email folder. This parameter corresponds to the Outlook on the web setting: Move email from these senders or domains to my Junk Email folder. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContactsTrusted -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ContactsTrusted parameter specifies whether the contacts in the Contacts folder are treated as trusted senders. This parameter corresponds to the Outlook on the web setting: Trust email from my contacts. Valid values are: @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter enables or disables the junk email rule on the mailbox (a hidden Inbox rule named Junk E-mail Rule). Valid values are: @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustedListsOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TrustedListsOnly parameter specifies that only messages from senders in the Safe Senders list are delivered to the Inbox. All other messages are treated as junk email. This parameter corresponds to the Outlook on the web setting: Don't trust email unless it comes from someone in my Safe Senders and Recipients list. Valid values are: @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustedRecipientsAndDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustedSendersAndDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TrustedSendersAndDomains parameter specifies the Safe Senders list and Safe Recipients list, which are lists of email addresses and domains. Messages from these senders that reach the mailbox are never delivered to the Junk Email folder, regardless of the content. This parameter corresponds to the Outlook on the web setting: Don't move email from these senders or domains to my Junk Email folder. @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md index 40134436a3..22c5f6ec9a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxMessageConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ This example sets the compose email message form to always show the Bcc field in ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AfterMoveOrDeleteBehavior -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AfterMoveOrDeleteBehavior parameter specifies the behavior after moving or deleting an email item in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysShowBcc -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysShowBcc parameter shows or hides the blind carbon copy (Bcc) field when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlwaysShowFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlwaysShowFrom parameter shows or hides the From field when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoAddSignature -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoAddSignatureOnMobile -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoAddSignatureOnReply -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoAddSignature parameter specifies whether to automatically add signatures to reply email messages created in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CheckForForgottenAttachments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CheckForForgottenAttachments parameter shows or hides the attachment warning prompt when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConversationSortOrder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConversationSortOrder parameter specifies the sorting of messages in the reading pane in Conversation view for the user in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFontColor -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFontColor parameter specifies the default text color when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. This parameter accepts a hexadecimal color code value in the format #xxxxxx. The default value is #000000. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFontFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFontFlags parameter specifies the default text effect when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFontName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFontName parameter specifies the default font when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFontSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFontSize parameter specifies the default text size when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultFormat parameter specifies the default message format when the user creates messages in Outlook on the web. Accepted values are Html and PlainText. The default value is Html. @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailComposeMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmptyDeletedItemsOnLogoff -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EmptyDeletedItemsOnLogoff parameter specifies whether to delete items from the Deleted Items folder when the user logs out of Outlook on the web. @@ -660,7 +660,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalReadingPanePosition -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in Exchange 2016 or later. It doesn't work in Exchange Online. @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HideDeletedItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HideDeletedItems parameter shows or hides deleted messages in Conversation view for the user in Outlook on the web. @@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsFavoritesFolderTreeCollapsed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsFavoritesFolderTreeCollapsed parameter specifies whether to collapse the Favorites folder tree by default in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsMailRootFolderTreeCollapsed -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsMailRootFolderTreeCollapsed parameter specifies whether to collapse the Mail root folder tree by default in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -809,7 +809,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsReplyAllTheDefaultResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsReplyAllTheDefaultResponse parameter specifies whether Reply All is the default response for messages in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -830,7 +830,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkPreviewEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LinkPreviewEnabled parameter specifies whether link preview of URLs in email messages is enabled for the user in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailFolderPaneExpanded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailFolderPaneExpanded parameter specifies whether the Mail folder pane is expanded by default in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NavigationPaneViewOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NavigationPaneViewOption parameter specifies the default navigation pane view in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -978,7 +978,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NewItemNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NewItemNotification parameter specifies how to provide notification for the arrival of new items for the user in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferAccessibleContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreferAccessibleContent parameter specifies whether to prefer accessible content in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1026,7 +1026,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreviewMarkAsReadBehavior -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreviewMarkAsReadBehavior parameter specifies the options for marking an item as Read in the reading pane for the user in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreviewMarkAsReadDelaytime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreviewMarkAsReadDelaytime parameter specifies the time in seconds to wait before marking an item as Read for the user in Outlook on the web. @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadReceiptResponse -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadReceiptResponse parameter specifies how to respond to requests for read receipts for the user in Outlook on the web. You can use the following values: @@ -1149,7 +1149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowConversationAsTree -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowConversationAsTree parameter specifies how to sort messages in the list view in an expanded conversation for the user in Outlook on the web. @@ -1209,7 +1209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowPreviewTextInListView -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowPreviewTextInListView parameter specifies whether to show preview text for messages in list view in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowReadingPaneOnFirstLoad -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowReadingPaneOnFirstLoad parameter specifies whether to show the reading pane when the user opens in Outlook on the web for the first time. Valid values are: @@ -1251,7 +1251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowSenderOnTopInListView -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowSenderOnTopInListView parameter specifies whether to show the message sender on top in list view in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1272,7 +1272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowUpNext -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ShowUpNext parameter specifies whether the next upcoming event should be shown above the mail list view in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1293,7 +1293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SignatureHtml -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -1355,7 +1355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SignatureText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -1377,7 +1377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SignatureTextOnMobile -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter doesn't work if the Outlook roaming signatures feature is enabled in your cloud-based organization. Admins can now temporarily disable roaming signatures without opening a support ticket by using the PostponeRoamingSignaturesUntilLater parameter on the Set-OrganizationConfig cmdlet. @@ -1479,7 +1479,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDefaultSignatureOnMobile -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseDefaultSignatureOnMobile parameter specifies whether to add the default email signature to messages created by the user in Outlook on the web for devices. The user configures the default signature in Outlook. @@ -1519,7 +1519,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md index d9fdf8c9c0..ba7752e06d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRegionalConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ This example sets Megan Bowen mailbox language to Spanish Argentina, sets the da ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DateFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DateFormat parameter specifies a valid date format based on the current or specified language for the mailbox. For example, if the language is set to en-US, valid DateFormat parameter values include: @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Language parameter specifies the language for the mailbox. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LocalizeDefaultFolderName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LocalizeDefaultFolderName switch localizes the default folder names of the mailbox in the current or specified language. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TimeFormat parameter specifies a valid time format based on the current or specified language value for the mailbox. For example, if the language is set to en-us, valid TimeFormat parameter values include: @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeZone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TimeZone parameter specifies the time zone for the mailbox. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRestoreRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRestoreRequest.md index fc864e68e8..699f3b7b49 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRestoreRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxRestoreRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example changes the first restore request for Kweku's mailbox to skip 100 c ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the restore request. The Identity parameter consists of the alias of the mailbox to be restored and the name that was specified when the restore request was created. The identity of the restore request uses the following syntax: `Alias\Name` @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies the name of the batch. Use this parameter to change, create, or remove a batch name. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the status of a completed restore request is set to Completed. If this parameter is set to a value of 0, the status is cleared immediately instead of changing it to Completed. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RehomeRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies folder-related items to skip when restoring the mailbox. Use one of the following values: @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSearch.md index 0e5035c4d9..7506c5c6b8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example adds all public folders to the existing ma ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the mailbox search that you want to modify. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllPublicFolderSources -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllPublicFolderSources parameter specifies whether to include all public folders in the organization in the search. Valid values are: @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllSourceMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllSourceMailboxes parameter specifies whether to include all mailboxes in the search. Valid values are: @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies a description for the search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EndDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EndDate parameter specifies the end date of the date range. @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EstimateOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EstimateOnly switch provides only an estimate of the number of items that will be returned without copying message to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExcludeDuplicateMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExcludeDuplicateMessages parameter eliminates duplication of messages across mailboxes in an In-Place eDiscovery search. Valid values are: @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeKeywordStatistics -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeKeywordStatistics switch returns keyword statistics (number of instances for each keyword). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncludeUnsearchableItems -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncludeUnsearchableItems parameter specifies whether items that couldn't be indexed by Exchange Search should be included in the results. Valid values are: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InPlaceHoldEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The InPlaceHoldEnabled parameter specifies whether to set an In-Place Hold on items in the search results. Valid values are: @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ItemHoldPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ItemHoldPeriod parameter specifies the number of days for the In-Place Hold onthe mailbox items (all items or the mailbox items that are returned in the search query results). You use this parameter with the InPlaceHoldEnabled parameter to set an In-Place Hold. The duration is calculated from the time the item is received or created in the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Language -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Language parameter specifies a locale for the mailbox search. @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LogLevel parameter specifies a logging level for the mailbox search. Valid values are: @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageTypes parameter specifies the message types to include in the search query. Valid values are: @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the search. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Recipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Recipients parameter specifies one or more recipients include in the search query. Messages that have the specified recipients in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields are returned in the search results. @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchQuery -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SearchQuery parameter specifies keywords for the search query by using the Keyword Query Language (KQL). For more information, see [Keyword Query Language (KQL) syntax reference](https://learn.microsoft.com/sharepoint/dev/general-development/keyword-query-language-kql-syntax-reference) and [Keyword queries and search conditions for eDiscovery](https://learn.microsoft.com/purview/ediscovery-keyword-queries-and-search-conditions). @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Senders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Senders parameter specifies one or more senders to include in the search query. Messages that have the specified sender are returned in the search results. Senders can include users, distribution groups (messages sent by members of the group), SMTP addresses, or domains. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceMailboxes parameter specifies the mailboxes to be searched. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartDate parameter specifies the start date of the date range. @@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatisticsStartIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatisticsStartIndex parameter is used by the Exchange admin center (EAC) to retrieve keyword statistics in a paged operation. @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatusMailRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatusMailRecipients parameter specifies one or more recipients to receive a status email message upon completion of the search. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetMailbox parameter specifies the destination mailbox where the search results are copied. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxServer.md index 7748bd0a40..3b965ef2fd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ In Exchange 2010, this example throttles the TopN Words Assistant and the Unifie ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Mailbox server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDagServerConfigured -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoDatabaseMountDial -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AutoDatabaseMountDial parameter specifies the automatic database mount behavior for a continuous replication environment after a database failover on the Mailbox server. You can use the following values: @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairIntervalEndWindow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairIntervalEndWindow parameter specifies the number of days into the future to repair calendar items in mailboxes on the Mailbox server. @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogDirectorySizeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogDirectorySizeLimit parameter specifies the maximum size of calendar repair log directory on the Mailbox server. When the directory reaches its maximum size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the Calendar Repair Attendant logs items that it repairs on the Mailbox server. The repair log doesn't contain failed repair attempts. @@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogFileAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogFileAgeLimit parameter specifies the calendar repair log maximum file age on the Mailbox server. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 10 days. @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogPath parameter specifies the location of the calendar repair log files on the Mailbox server. The default value is %ExchangeInstallPath%Logging\\Calendar Repair Assistant. @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairLogSubjectLoggingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairLogSubjectLoggingEnabled parameter specifies whether to include the subject of repaired calendar items in the calendar repair log on the Mailbox server. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairMissingItemFixDisabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairMissingItemFixDisabled parameter specifies whether the Calendar Repair Assistant fixes missing calendar items in mailboxes on the Mailbox server.Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarRepairMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarRepairMode parameter specifies the Calendar Repair Assistant mode on the Mailbox server. Valid values for this parameter are ValidateOnly or RepairAndValidate. The default value is RepairAndValidate. @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseCopyActivationDisabledAndMoveNow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseCopyActivationDisabledAndMoveNow parameter specifies whether to prevent databases from being mounted on this Mailbox server if there are other healthy copies of the databases on other Mailbox servers. It also immediately moves any mounted databases on the server to other servers if copies exist and are healthy. @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseCopyAutoActivationPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DatabaseCopyAutoActivationPolicy parameter specifies the type of automatic activation available for mailbox database copies on the specified Mailbox server. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FaultZone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FolderLogForManagedFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceGroupMetricsGeneration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceGroupMetricsGeneration parameter specifies that group metrics information must be generated on the Mailbox server regardless of whether that server generates an offline address book (OAB). Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1027,7 +1027,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromProvisioning -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsExcludedFromProvisioning parameter specifies that the Mailbox server isn't considered by the OAB provisioning load balancer. Valid values are: @@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalingLogForManagedFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The JournalingLogForManagedFoldersEnabled parameter specifies whether journaling activity is recorded in the managed folder log on the Mailbox server.Valid input for this parameter is$true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Locale -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Locale parameter specifies the locale of the Mailbox server. A locale is a collection of language-related user preferences such as writing system, calendar, and date format. The following are examples: @@ -1116,7 +1116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogDirectorySizeLimitForManagedFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1150,7 +1150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileAgeLimitForManagedFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1174,7 +1174,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileSizeLimitForManagedFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1206,7 +1206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogPathForManagedFolders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1288,7 +1288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedFolderAssistantSchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note**: Although this parameter is available in Exchange 2016 and Exchange 2019, it's only used for coexistence with previous versions of Exchange. For more information, see [Configure and run the Managed Folder Assistant in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/policy-and-compliance/mrm/configure-managed-folder-assistant). @@ -1383,7 +1383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MAPIEncryptionRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MAPIEncryptionRequired parameter specifies whether Exchange blocks MAPI client connections to the Mailbox server that don't use encrypted remote procedure calls (RPCs). Valid input for this parameter is$true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaximumActiveDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaximumActiveDatabases parameter specifies the maximum number of databases that can be mounted on the Mailbox server. @@ -1423,7 +1423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaximumPreferredActiveDatabases -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaximumPreferredActiveDatabases parameter specifies a preferred maximum number of databases that theMailbox server should have. This value is different from the actual maximum, which is configured using the MaximumActiveDatabases parameter. The value of MaximumPreferredActiveDatabases is only honored during best copy and server selection, database and server switchovers, and when rebalancing the DAG. @@ -1588,7 +1588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1606,7 +1606,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1624,7 +1624,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1642,7 +1642,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1660,7 +1660,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MigrationLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1890,7 +1890,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionLogForManagedFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -1992,7 +1992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharingPolicySchedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SharingPolicySchedule parameter specifies the intervals each week during which the sharing policy runs on the Mailbox server. The Sharing Policy Assistant checks permissions on shared calendar items and contact folders in users' mailboxes against the assigned sharing policy. The assistant lowers or removes permissions according to the policy. @@ -2383,7 +2383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectLogForManagedFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is used for coexistence with Exchange 2010. Specifically, this parameter works with messaging records management (MRM) 1.0 (managed folders). This parameter doesn't work with MRM 2.0 (retention policies) that were introduced in Exchange 2010 Service Pack 1 (SP1). @@ -2405,7 +2405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubmissionServerOverrideList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2527,7 +2527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacDiscoveryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WacDiscoveryEndpoint parameter specifies the discovery endpoint for Office Online Server (formerly known as Office Web Apps Server and Web Access Companion Server) for all mailboxes on the server. For example, `https://oos.internal.contoso.com/hosting/discovery`. @@ -2547,7 +2547,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md index ad74531f90..21303b2650 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxSpellingConfiguration.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example sets the spelling checker to ignore words containing numbers for me ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CheckBeforeSend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CheckBeforeSend parameter specifies whether Outlook on the web checks the spelling for every message when the user clicks Send in the new message form. Valid values are$true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DictionaryLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DictionaryLanguage parameter specifies the dictionary language to use when the spelling checker checks the spelling in messages. Valid values are: @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreMixedDigits -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreMixedDigits parameter specifies whether the spelling checker ignores words that contain numbers. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreUppercase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreUppercase parameter specifies whether the spelling checker ignores words that contain only uppercase letters, for example, acronyms. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxTransportService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxTransportService.md index 98eb1644f0..d36117eb6e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxTransportService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MailboxTransportService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ This example sets the ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter to C:\\SMTP Protocol Logs ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server that you want to modify. @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the connectivity log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the connectivity log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all connectivity logs in the connectivity log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 1000 MB. @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each connectivity log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogPath parameter specifies the default connectivity log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\Connectivity. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables connectivity logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the ConnectivityLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentConversionTracingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ContentConversionTracingEnabled parameter specifies whether content conversion tracing is enabled. Content conversion tracing captures content conversion failures that occur in the Transport service or in the Mailbox Transport service on the Mailbox server. The default value is $false. Content conversion tracing captures a maximum of 128 MB of content conversion failures. When the 128 MB limit is reached, no more content conversion failures are captured. Content conversion tracing captures the complete contents of email messages to the path specified by the PipelineTracingPath parameter. Make sure that you restrict access to this directory. The permissions required on the directory specified by the PipelineTracingPath parameter are as follows: @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the agent log for the Mailbox Transport Delivery service is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the agent log file of the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all Mailbox Transport Delivery service agent logs in the agent log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each agent log file for the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryAgentLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryAgentLogPath parameter specifies the default agent log directory location for the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\AgentLog\\Delivery. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables agent logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the MailboxDeliveryAgentLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryConnectorMaxInboundConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryConnectorMaxInboundConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of inbound connections for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. The default value is 5000. If you enter the value unlimited, no connection limit is imposed on the mailbox delivery Receive connector. @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel parameter enables or disables SMTP protocol logging for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. Valid values are: @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryConnectorSmtpUtf8Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryConnectorSmtpUtf8Enabled parameters or disables email address internationalization (EAI) support for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. Valid values are: @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the mailbox delivery throttling log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the mailbox delivery throttling log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all mailbox delivery throttling logs in the mailbox delivery throttling log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 200 MB. @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each mailbox delivery throttling log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogPath parameter specifies the default mailbox delivery throttling log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Throttling\\Delivery. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables mailbox delivery throttling logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the MailboxDeliveryThrottlingLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the agent log is enabled for the Mailbox Transport Submission service. The default value is $true. @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the agent log file of the Mailbox Transport Submission service. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all Mailbox Transport Submission service agent logs in the agent log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each agent log file for the Mailbox Transport Submission service. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxSubmissionAgentLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxSubmissionAgentLogPath parameter specifies the default agent log directory location for the Mailbox Transport Submission service. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\AgentLog\\Submission. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables agent logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the MailboxSubmissionAgentLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -698,7 +698,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMailboxDeliveries -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentMailboxDeliveries parameter specifies the maximum number of delivery threads that the transport service can have open at the same time to deliver messages to mailboxes. The default value is 20. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 256. We recommend that you don't modify the default value unless Microsoft Customer Service and Support advises you to do this. @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMailboxSubmissions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentMailboxSubmissions parameter specifies the maximum number of submission threads that the transport service can have open at the same time to send messages from mailboxes. The default value is 20. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 256. @@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable pipeline tracing. Pipeline tracing captures message snapshot files that record the changes made to the message by each transport agent configured in the transport service on the server. Pipeline tracing creates verbose log files that accumulate quickly. Pipeline tracing should only be enabled for a short time to provide in-depth diagnostic information that enables you to troubleshoot problems. In addition to troubleshooting, you can use pipeline tracing to validate changes that you make to the configuration of the transport service where you enable pipeline tracing. The default value is $false. @@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingPath parameter specifies the location of the pipeline tracing logs. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\PipelineTracing. The path must be local to the Exchange server. @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingSenderAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingSenderAddress parameter specifies the sender email address that invokes pipeline tracing. Only messages from this address generate pipeline tracing output. The address can be either inside or outside the Exchange organization. Depending on your requirements, you might have to set this parameter to different sender addresses and send new messages to start the transport agents or routes that you want to test. The default value of this parameter is $null. @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. Log files that are older than the specified value are automatically deleted. @@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for the implicit and invisible mailbox delivery Receive connector in the Mailbox Transport Delivery service. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpReceive. The log files are automatically stored in the Delivery subdirectory. @@ -910,7 +910,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum routing table log age. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7 days. @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the routing table log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogPath parameter specifies the directory location where routing table log files should be stored. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\Routing. Setting this parameter to $null disables routing table logging. @@ -980,7 +980,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file for the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the Mailbox Transport Submission service. Log files that are older than the specified value are automatically deleted. @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory for the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the Mailbox Transport Submission service. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -1038,7 +1038,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file for the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the Mailbox Transport Submission service. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the Mailbox Transport Submission service. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Mailbox\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpSend. Log files are automatically stored in the following subdirectories: @@ -1095,7 +1095,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterPolicy.md index d697405ee3..4bcf5151bb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ The last two commands remove the seventh file type that's displayed in the list. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter policy you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdminDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AdminDisplayName parameter specifies a description for the policy. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassInboundMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassOutboundMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAlertText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomExternalBody -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomExternalBody parameter specifies the custom body to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomExternalSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomExternalSubject parameter specifies the custom subject to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomFromAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomFromAddress parameter specifies the custom From address to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal or external senders. @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomFromName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomFromName parameter specifies the custom From name to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal or external senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomInternalBody -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomInternalBody parameter specifies the custom body to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomInternalSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomInternalSubject parameter specifies the custom subject to use in notification messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomNotifications parameter enables or disables the customization of notification messages for malware detections. Valid values are: @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExternalSenderAdminNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnableExternalSenderAdminNotifications parameter enables or disables sending notification messages to an administrator for malware detections in messages from internal senders. Valid values are: @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExternalSenderNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableInternalSenderAdminNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The EnableInternalSenderAdminNotifications parameter enables or disables sending notification messages to an administrator for malware detections in messages from internal senders. Valid values are: @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableInternalSenderNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalSenderAdminAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExternalSenderAdminAddress parameter specifies the email address of the administrator who receives notifications messages for malware detections in messages from external senders. @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalSenderAdminAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The InternalSenderAdminAddress parameter specifies the email address of the administrator who receives notifications messages for malware detections in messages from internal senders. @@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MakeDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MakeDefault switch makes this malware filter policy the default policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterRule.md index c9a8199c78..4d1d9b9479 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilterRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example adds an exception to the malware filter rule named Contoso Recipien ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the malware filter rule that you want to view. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example, you can use the name, GUID, or distinguished name (DN) of the malware filter rule. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Comments parameter specifies informative comments for the rule, such as what the rule is used for or how it has changed over time. The length of the comment can't exceed 1024 characters. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients with email addresses in the specified domains. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfSentTo parameter specifies an exception that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExceptIfSentToMemberOf parameter specifies an exception that looks for messages sent to members of distribution groups, mail-enabled security groups, or sent to Microsoft 365 Groups. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MalwareFilterPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MalwareFilterPolicy parameter specifies the malware filter policy that's associated with the malware filter rule. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the malware filter rule. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, the value 0 is the highest priority, and rules can't have the same priority value. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientDomainIs parameter specifies a condition that looks for recipients with email addresses in the specified domains. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SentTo parameter specifies a condition that looks for recipients in messages. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SentToMemberOf parameter specifies a condition that looks for messages sent to members of distribution groups, mail-enabled security groups, or sent to Microsoft 365 Groups. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilteringServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilteringServer.md index 3f204ae47a..fa0f636452 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilteringServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MalwareFilteringServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ This example sets the following Malware agent settings on the Mailbox server nam ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the server where you want to configure the anti-malware settings. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassFiltering -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassFiltering parameter temporarily bypasses malware filtering without disabling the Malware agent on the server. The Malware agent is still active, and the agent is still called for every message, but no malware filtering is actually performed. This allows you to temporarily disable and then enable malware filtering on the server without disrupting mail flow by restarting the Microsoft Exchange Transport service. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeferAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeferAttempts parameter specifies the maximum number of times to defer a message that can't be scanned by the Malware agent. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 1 and 5. The default value is 3. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeferWaitTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeferWaitTime parameter specifies the time period in minutes to increase the interval to resubmit messages for malware filtering in an effort to reduce the workload on the server. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceRescan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceRescan parameter specifies that messages should be scanned by the malware agent, even if the message was already scanned by cloud-based protection. Valid values are: @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinimumSuccessfulEngineScans -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimaryUpdatePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PrimaryUpdatePath parameter specifies where to download malware scanning engine updates. The default value is `http://forefrontdl.microsoft.com/server/scanengineupdate`. The location specified by the PrimaryUpdatePath parameter is always tried first. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ScanErrorAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ScanErrorAction parameter specifies the action to take when a message can't be scanned by the malware filter. Valid values for this parameter are Block or Allow. The default value is Block. @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ScanTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ScanTimeout parameter specifies the timeout interval in seconds for messages that can't be scanned by the malware filter. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 10 and 900. The default value is 300 (5 minutes). @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SecondaryUpdatePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SecondaryUpdatePath parameter specifies an alternate download location for malware scanning engine updates. The default values is blank ($null). This means no alternate download location is specified. @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpdateFrequency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UpdateFrequency parameter specifies the frequency interval in minutes to check for malware scanning engine updates. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 1 and 38880 (27 days). The default value is 60 (one hour). The locations to check for updates are specified by the PrimaryUpdatePath and SecondaryUpdatePath parameters. @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpdateTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UpdateTimeout parameter specifies the timeout interval in seconds to use when checking for malware scanning engine updates. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 60 and 300. The default value is 150 seconds (2.5 minutes). @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md index e42e17a347..171f044fc0 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy.md @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Set-ManagedFolderMailboxPolicy "PM Storage Template1" -Name "PM Storage Template This example changes the name of the managed folder mailbox policy PM Storage Template1 to PM Storage Template2. -The Identity parameter is a positional parameter. Positional parameters can be used without the label (Identity). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). +The Identity parameter is positional, which means you can use it without the -Identity label in the supported location in the command (in this case, first). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). ### Example 2 ```powershell @@ -58,7 +58,11 @@ This example links the managed custom folders Custom Folder 1 and Custom Folder > Applicable: Exchange Server 2010 -The Identity parameter specifies the name, distinguished name (DN), or GUID of the managed folder mailbox policy. +The Identity parameter specifies the managed folder mailbox policy that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: + +- Name +- Distinguished name (DN) +- GUID ```yaml Type: MailboxPolicyIdParameter diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleAssignment.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleAssignment.md index a0c404aed0..3b5d137088 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleAssignment.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleAssignment.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ This example restricts the Distribution Groups\_Cairns Admins role assignment us ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the management role assignment to modify. If the name of the management role contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAdministrativeUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CustomRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the existing recipient-based management scope to associate with this management role assignment. If the management scope name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether the management role assignment is enabled or disabled. The valid values are $true and $false. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveConfigWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ExclusiveRecipientWriteScope parameter specifies the existing recipient-based exclusive management scope to associate with this management role assignment. If the management scope name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientOrganizationalUnitScope parameter specifies the OU to scope the new role assignment to. If the OU name contains spaces, enclose the domain and OU in quotation marks ("). @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRelativeWriteScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRelativeWriteScope parameter specifies the type of restriction to apply to a recipient scope. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleEntry.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleEntry.md index 5ab67ee695..d44f3a41d9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleEntry.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementRoleEntry.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ In on-premises Exchange, this example adds the Location parameter to the Mailbox ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the role entry that you want to modify. This parameter uses the syntax: `\` (for example, `CustomRole\Set-Mailbox`). @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddParameter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AddParameter switch specifies that you're adding parameters to the specified role entry. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Parameters parameter specifies the parameters to be added to or removed from the role entry. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveParameter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RemoveParameter switch specifies that you're removing parameters to the specified role entry. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnScopedTopLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementScope.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementScope.md index 8b671cdcef..cb4707ab96 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementScope.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ManagementScope.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ This example changes the Active Directory site used in the server restriction fi ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the management scope to modify. If the name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DatabaseRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the management scope. The management scope name can be a maximum of 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks ("). @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRestrictionFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRestrictionFilter parameter uses OPATH filter syntax to specify the recipients that are included in the scope. The syntax is `"Property -ComparisonOperator 'Value'"`. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RecipientRoot parameter specifies the organizational unit (OU) under which the filter specified with the RecipientRestrictionFilter parameter should be applied. Valid input for this parameter is an OU or domain that's returned by the Get-OrganizationalUnit cmdlet. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OU or domain. For example: @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MapiVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MapiVirtualDirectory.md index bd261af787..cd48e72f02 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MapiVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MapiVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example makes the following configuration changes to the MAPI virtual direc ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the MAPI virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyDefaults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ApplyDefaults switch specifies whether to apply the correct defaults to the related internal IIS application settings. Typically, this switch is used only by Exchange Setup during the installation of Exchange Cumulative Updates or Service Packs and you shouldn't need to use it. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IISAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IISAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication methods that are enabled on the virtual directory in Internet Information Services (IIS). Valid values are: @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MessageClassification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MessageClassification.md index c5de61e4a9..c2760e2c2a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MessageClassification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MessageClassification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example makes the following configuration changes to the message classifica ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the message classification that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the message classification. For example: @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClassificationID -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ClassificationID parameter specifies the classification ID (GUID) of an existing message classification that you want to import and use in your Exchange organization. Use this parameter if you're configuring message classifications that span two Exchange forests in the same organization. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayName parameter specifies the title of the message classification that's displayed in Outlook and selected by users. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayPrecedence -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayPrecedence parameter specifies the relative precedence of the message classification to other message classifications that might be applied to a specified message. Valid values are: @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the message classification. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PermissionMenuVisible -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PermissionMenuVisible parameter specifies whether the values that you entered for the DisplayName and RecipientDescription parameters are displayed in Outlook as the user composes a message. Valid values are: @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDescription -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RecipientDescription parameter specifies the detailed text that's shown to Outlook recipient when they receive a message that has the message classification applied. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainClassificationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetainClassificationEnabled parameter specifies whether the message classification should persist with the message if the message is forwarded or replied to. @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderDescription -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SenderDescription parameter specifies the detailed text that's shown to Outlook senders when they select a message classification to apply to a message before they send the message. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationBatch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationBatch.md index f6ae4c00ee..16801ba5be 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationBatch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationBatch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ This example updates MigrationBatch01 by approving all of the skipped items for ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the migration batch that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the migration batch. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIncrementalSyncs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnknownColumnsInCsv -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnknownColumnsInCsv parameter specifies whether to allow extra columns in the CSV file that aren't used by migration. Valid values are: @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoRetryCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the migration request is ready to complete. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompleteAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CSVData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CSVData parameter specifies the CSV file that contains information about the user mailboxes to be moved or migrated. The required attributes in the header row of the CSV file vary depending on the type of migration. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveOptions parameter specifies the stages of the migration that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotificationEmails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NotificationEmails parameter specifies one or more email addresses that migration status reports are sent to. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReportInterval parameter specifies how frequently emailed reports should be sent to the email addresses listed within NotificationEmails. @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipMerging parameter specifies the stages of the migration that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoving -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is replaced by the MoveOptions parameter. @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipReports -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipReports switch specifies that you want to skip automatic reporting for the migration. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourcePublicFolderDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartAfter parameter specifies a delay before the data migration for the users within the batch is started. The migration is prepared, but the actual data migration for users within the batch doesn't start until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SyncNow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SyncNow switch starts an immediate sync for users that have already reached Synced status, but doesn't resume any Failed users. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Update -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Update switch sets the Update flag on the migration batch. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationConfig.md index 605b6fd87b..cfcd6935cd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example sets the migration system to only allow 100 concurrent migrations. ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Features -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMigrations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxNumberOfBatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationEndpoint.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationEndpoint.md index ff7cf2b290..be05400cb8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationEndpoint.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationEndpoint.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ This example changes the MaxConcurrentMigrations setting to 10 on the Onboarding ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the migration endpoint you want to configure. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Credentials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Credentials parameter specifies the username and password for connecting to the remote endpoint. Credentials should be used when creating either a staged or cutover Exchange endpoint or a RemoteMove endpoint. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentIncrementalSyncs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxConcurrentIncrementalSyncs parameter specifies the maximum number of incremental syncs allowed for this endpoint at a specified time. This value must be less or equal to MaxConcurrentMigrations parameter. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMigrations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxConcurrentMigrations parameter specifies the maximum number of migrated mailboxes for this endpoint at a specified time. This parameter is applicable for all migration types. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteServer parameter specifies the remote server depending on the protocol type for moves: @@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipVerification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SkipVerification switch skips verifying that the remote server is reachable when creating a migration endpoint. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationUser.md index 9e26ca12a5..b5bd1e1a1a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MigrationUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ This example approves all of the skipped items encountered for the user laura@co ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the email address of the user that's being migrated. @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the migration request is ready to complete. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the migration request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SyncNow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SyncNow switch specifies whether to trigger an incremental sync for the migrated user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md index 1418931139..4a8c96d67e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MobileDeviceMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.MediaAndDevices-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ This example sets several policy settings for the mobile device mailbox policy D ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mobile device mailbox policy. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBluetooth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBluetooth parameter specifies whether the Bluetooth capabilities are allowed on the mobile device. Valid values are: @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowBrowser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowBrowser parameter specifies whether Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer is allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't affect non-Microsoft browsers. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCamera -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowCamera parameter specifies whether the mobile device's camera is allowed. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowConsumerEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowConsumerEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a personal email account on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access to email accounts using non-Microsoft mobile device email programs. @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowDesktopSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowDesktopSync parameter specifies whether the mobile device can synchronize with a desktop computer through a cable. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowExternalDeviceManagement -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowExternalDeviceManagement parameter specifies whether an external device management program is allowed to manage the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowHTMLEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowHTMLEmail parameter specifies whether HTML-formatted email is enabled on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. If set to $false, all email is converted to plain text before synchronization occurs. @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowInternetSharing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowInternetSharing parameter specifies whether the mobile device can be used as a modem to connect a computer to the Internet. This process is also known as tethering. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowIrDA -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowIrDA parameter specifies whether infrared connections are allowed to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowMobileOTAUpdate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowMobileOTAUpdate parameter specifies whether the policy can be sent to the mobile device over a cellular data connection. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowNonProvisionableDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowNonProvisionableDevices parameter specifies whether all mobile devices can synchronize with Exchange. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowPOPIMAPEmail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowPOPIMAPEmail parameter specifies whether the user can configure a POP3 or IMAP4 email account on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This parameter doesn't control access by non-Microsoft email programs. @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowRemoteDesktop -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowRemoteDesktop parameter specifies whether the mobile device can initiate a remote desktop connection. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSimplePassword -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSimplePassword parameter specifies whether a simple password is allowed on the mobile device. A simple password is a password that has a specific pattern, such as 1111 or 1234. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMEEncryptionAlgorithmNegotiation parameter specifies whether the messaging application on the mobile device can negotiate the encryption algorithm if a recipient's certificate doesn't support the specified encryption algorithm. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowSMIMESoftCerts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowSMIMESoftCerts parameter specifies whether S/MIME software certificates are allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowStorageCard -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowStorageCard parameter specifies whether the mobile device can access information stored on a storage card. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowTextMessaging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowTextMessaging parameter specifies whether text messaging is allowed from the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedApplications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedApplications parameter specifies whether unsigned applications can be installed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowUnsignedInstallationPackages parameter specifies whether unsigned installation packages can be executed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowWiFi -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowWiFi parameter specifies whether wireless Internet access is allowed on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AlphanumericPasswordRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AlphanumericPasswordRequired parameter specifies whether the password for the mobile device must be alphanumeric. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApprovedApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApprovedApplicationList parameter specifies a configured list of approved applications for the device. @@ -634,7 +634,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether attachments can be downloaded on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeviceEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This setting is supported by Outlook for iOS and Android. @@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DevicePolicyRefreshInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DevicePolicyRefreshInterval parameter specifies how often the policy is sent to the mobile device. @@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IrmEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) is enabled for the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether this policy is the default mobile device mailbox policy. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value for the built-in mobile device mailbox policy named Default is $true. The default value for new mobile device mailbox policies that you create is $false. @@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAttachmentSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxAttachmentSize parameter specifies the maximum size of attachments that can be downloaded to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is a size value between 0 and 2147482624 bytes (approximately 2 GB), or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -803,7 +803,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCalendarAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxCalendarAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum range of calendar days that can be synchronized to the mobile device. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailAgeFilter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailAgeFilter parameter specifies the maximum number of days of email items to synchronize to the mobile device. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 0 and 2147483647 (Int32) or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxEmailHTMLBodyTruncationSize parameter specifies the maximum size at which HTML-formatted email messages are truncated when synchronized to the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is an integer between 0 and 2147483647 (Int32) or the value Unlimited. The default value is Unlimited. @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInactivityTimeLock -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxInactivityTimeLock parameter specifies the length of time that the mobile device can be inactive before the password is required to reactivate it. Valid values are: @@ -917,7 +917,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxPasswordFailedAttempts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxPasswordFailedAttempts parameter specifies the number of attempts a user can make to enter the correct password for the mobile device. @@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinPasswordComplexCharacters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MinPasswordComplexCharacters parameter specifies the character sets that are required in the password of the mobile device. The character sets are: @@ -971,7 +971,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinPasswordLength -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This setting is supported by Outlook for Android. @@ -993,7 +993,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the friendly name of the mobile device mailbox policy. @@ -1011,7 +1011,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordEnabled parameter specifies whether a password is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordExpiration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordExpiration parameter specifies how long a password can be used on a mobile device before the user is forced to change the password. Valid values are: @@ -1052,7 +1052,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordHistory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordHistory parameter specifies the number of unique new passwords that need to be created on the mobile device before an old password can be reused. @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PasswordRecoveryEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PasswordRecoveryEnabled parameter specifies whether the recovery password for the mobile device is stored in Exchange. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1092,7 +1092,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireDeviceEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireDeviceEncryption parameter specifies whether encryption is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1110,7 +1110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile device must send encrypted S/MIME messages. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1128,7 +1128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireEncryptionSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that's required to encrypt S/MIME messages on a mobile device. The valid values for this parameter are: @@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireManualSyncWhenRoaming parameter specifies whether the mobile device must synchronize manually while roaming. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1172,7 +1172,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEAlgorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that's used to sign S/MIME messages on the mobile device. @@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSignedSMIMEMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireSignedSMIMEMessages parameter specifies whether the mobile device must send signed S/MIME messages. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1210,7 +1210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireStorageCardEncryption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequireStorageCardEncryption parameter specifies whether storage card encryption is required on the mobile device. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnapprovedInROMApplicationList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UnapprovedInROMApplicationList parameter specifies a list of applications that can't be run in ROM on the mobile device. @@ -1248,7 +1248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UNCAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows file shares is enabled from the mobile device. In on-premises Exchange organizations, access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. @@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1284,7 +1284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WSSAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether access to Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services is enabled from the mobile device. In on-premises Exchange organizations, access to specific shares is configured on the Exchange ActiveSync virtual directory. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MoveRequest.md index ea5a7779aa..47f81b815c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-MoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ This example changes the move request for Sruthi to approve all skipped items en ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the mailbox or mail user. You can use the following values: @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveTargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BatchName parameter specifies a different name for a batch. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompleteAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompleteAfter parameter specifies a delay before the request is completed. The request is started, but not completed until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncrementalSyncInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IncrementalSyncInterval parameter specifies the wait time between incremental syncs. Use this parameter with the CompleteAfter parameter to create a move request that does periodic incremental syncs after the initial sync is complete. @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MoveOptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MoveOptions parameter specifies the stages of the move that you want to skip for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless you're directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreventCompletion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreventCompletion parameter specifies whether to run the move request, but not allow it to complete. Valid values are: @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Protect -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteCredential parameter specifies the username and password an administrator who has permission to perform the mailbox move. @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteGlobalCatalog -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteGlobalCatalog parameter specifies the FQDN of the global catalog server for the remote forest. @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemoteHostName parameter specifies the FQDN of the cross-forest organization from which you're moving the mailbox. @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMoving -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is replaced by the MoveOptions parameter. @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StartAfter -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StartAfter parameter specifies a delay before the request is started. The request isn't started until the date/time you specify with this parameter. @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SuspendWhenReadyToComplete parameter specifies whether to suspend the move request before it reaches the status of CompletionInProgress. Instead of this parameter, we recommend using CompleteAfter parameter. @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Notification.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Notification.md index 55cdd0e679..d128aa3891 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Notification.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-Notification.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ This example configures the specified notification event to send notification em ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the notification event that you want to modify. You identify the notification event by its AlternativeID property value (a GUID). You can find this value by running the command: `Get-Notification | Format-List DisplayName,AlternativeID,StartTime,Status,Type`. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotificationEmails -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NotificationEmails parameter specifies the recipients for notification emails related to notification events. You can specify multiple recipients separated by commas. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProcessType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OabVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OabVirtualDirectory.md index b5baa5d5b7..c998400e9a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OabVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OabVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example changes the external URL of the OAB virtual directory OAB (Default ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the OAB virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PollInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange 2010. @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSSL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireSSL parameter specifies whether the client connection to the virtual directory requires Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption. Valid values are: @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OfflineAddressBook.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OfflineAddressBook.md index 9aa1ab5a32..985662bed9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OfflineAddressBook.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OfflineAddressBook.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example changes the organization mailbox that's responsible for generating ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the OAB that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the OAB. For example: @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressLists -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressLists parameter specifies the address lists or global address lists that are included in the OAB. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the address list. For example: @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyMandatoryProperties -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyMandatoryProperties switch specifies whether to update the mandatory properties of a legacy OAB. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfiguredAttributes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConfiguredAttributes parameter specifies the recipient MAPI properties that are available in the OAB. This parameter uses the syntax: `"Name1,Type1","Name2,Type2",..."NameN,TypeN"` where Name is the name of the MAPI property (for example, MobileTelephoneNumber), and Type is the value ANR (ambiguous name resolution), Value, or Indicator. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiffRetentionPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DiffRetentionPeriod parameter specifies the number of days that the OAB difference files are stored on the server. Valid values are integers from 7 to 1825, or the value unlimited. The default value is 30. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FullOabDownloadPreventionThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GeneratingMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalWebDistributionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault parameter specifies whether the OAB is used by all mailboxes and mailbox databases that don't have an OAB specified. Valid values are: @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxBinaryPropertySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMultivaluedBinaryPropertySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMultivaluedStringPropertySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxStringPropertySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the OAB. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Schedule -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in Exchange 2010. @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowMailboxDistributionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UpgradeFromE14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDefaultAttributes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseDefaultAttributes switch specifies whether to revert the recipient MAPI properties that are available in the OAB to the default list. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Versions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Versions parameter specifies the OAB versions that are generated for client download. Valid values are: @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -VirtualDirectories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ZipOabFilesBeforeUploading -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ZipOabFilesBeforeUploading specifies whether to use ZIP file compression on the OAB files before uploading them to the server. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationConfig.md index 35f5f42bd8..76d5771931 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ACLableSyncedObjectEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutEnabled parameter enables or disables the inactivity interval for automatic logoff in Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App). Valid values are: @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutInterval parameter specifies the period of inactivity that causes an automatic logoff in Outlook on the web. @@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutWithSingleSignOnEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActivityBasedAuthenticationTimeoutWithSingleSignOnEnabled parameter enables or disables the inactivity interval for automatic logoff for single sign-on in Outlook on the Web. Valid values are: @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsAudienceUris -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsAuthenticationConfiguration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -763,7 +763,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsEncryptCertificateThumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsIssuer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -805,7 +805,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsSignCertificateThumbprints -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AppsForOfficeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AppsForOfficeEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable apps for Outlook features. By default, the parameter is set to $true. If the flag is set to $false, no new apps can be activated for any user in the organization. @@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AsyncSendEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AsyncSendEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable async send in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1409,7 +1409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ByteEncoderTypeFor7BitCharsets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ByteEncoderTypeFor7BitCharsets parameter specifies the 7-bit transfer encoding method for MIME format for messages sent to this remote domain. The valid values for this parameter are: @@ -1477,7 +1477,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1498,7 +1498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectorsActionableMessagesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConnectorsActionableMessagesEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable actionable buttons in messages (connector cards) from connected apps on Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1521,7 +1521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectorsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConnectorsEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable all connected apps in organization. Valid values are: @@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomerFeedbackEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1680,7 +1680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DataClassifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1700,7 +1700,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultAuthenticationPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DefaultAuthenticationPolicy parameter specifies the authentication policy that's used for the whole organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderAgeLimit parameter specifies the default age limit for the contents of public folders across the entire organization. Content in a public folder is automatically deleted when this age limit is exceeded. This attribute applies to all public folders in the organization that don't have their own AgeLimit setting. @@ -1815,7 +1815,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderDeletedItemRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderDeletedItemRetention parameter specifies the default value of the length of time to retain deleted items for public folders across the entire organization. This attribute applies to all public folders in the organization that don't have their own RetainDeletedItemsFor attribute set. @@ -1833,7 +1833,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderIssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderIssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the default value across the entire organization for the public folder size at which a warning message is sent to this folder's owners, warning that the public folder is almost full. This attribute applies to all public folders within the organization that don't have their own warning quota attribute set. The default value of this attribute is unlimited. @@ -1863,7 +1863,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderMaxItemSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderMaxItemSize parameter specifies the default maximum size for posted items within public folders across the entire organization. Items larger than the value of the DefaultPublicFolderMaxItemSize parameter are rejected. This attribute applies to all public folders within the organization that don't have their own MaxItemSize attribute set. The default value of this attribute is unlimited. @@ -1893,7 +1893,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderMovedItemRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderMovedItemRetention parameter specifies how long items that have been moved between mailboxes are kept in the source mailbox for recovery purposes before being removed by the Public Folder Assistant. @@ -1913,7 +1913,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultPublicFolderProhibitPostQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultPublicFolderProhibitPostQuota parameter specifies the size of a public folder at which users are notified that the public folder is full. Users can't post to a folder whose size is larger than the DefaultPublicFolderProhibitPostQuota parameter value. The default value of this attribute is unlimited. @@ -2026,7 +2026,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DistributionGroupDefaultOU -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DistributionGroupDefaultOU parameter specifies the container where distribution groups are created by default. @@ -2044,7 +2044,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DistributionGroupNameBlockedWordsList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DistributionGroupNameBlockedWordsList parameter specifies words that can't be included in the Display Name values of distribution groups that are created by users. Separate multiple values with commas. @@ -2062,7 +2062,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DistributionGroupNamingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DistributionGroupNamingPolicy parameter specifies the additional text that's applied to the Display Name value of distribution groups created by users. You can require a prefix, a suffix, or both. The prefix and suffix can be text strings, user attribute values from the person who created the group, or a combination of text strings and attributes. @@ -2097,7 +2097,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2142,7 +2142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmptyAddressBookForNonExchangeUsers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2162,7 +2162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableAuthAdminReadSession -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2182,7 +2182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableDownloadDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2227,7 +2227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableOrgWidePermissionOnScopedRoles -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2320,7 +2320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowEntourage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowEntourage parameter specifies whether to enable or disable Entourage 2008 to access Exchange Web Services (EWS) for the entire organization. The default value is $true. @@ -2338,7 +2338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowList parameter specifies the applications that are allowed to access EWS or REST when the EwsApplicationAccessPolicy parameter is set to EwsAllowList. Other applications that aren't specified by this parameter aren't allowed to access EWS or REST. You identify the application by its user agent string value. Wildcard characters (\*) are supported. @@ -2362,7 +2362,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowMacOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowMacOutlook parameter enables or disables access to mailboxes by Outlook for Mac clients that use Exchange Web Services (for example, Outlook for Mac 2011 or later). @@ -2380,7 +2380,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsAllowOutlook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsAllowOutlook parameter enables or disables access to mailboxes by Outlook clients that use Exchange Web Services. Outlook uses Exchange Web Services for free/busy, out-of-office settings, and calendar sharing. @@ -2398,7 +2398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsApplicationAccessPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsApplicationAccessPolicy parameter specifies the client applications that have access to EWS and REST. Valid values are: @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsBlockList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsBlockList parameter specifies the applications that aren't allowed to access EWS or REST when the EwsApplicationAccessPolicy parameter is set to EnforceBlockList. All other applications that aren't specified by this parameter are allowed to access EWS or REST. You identify the application by its user agent string value. Wildcard characters (\*) are supported. @@ -2443,7 +2443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EwsEnabled parameter specifies whether to globally enable or disable EWS access for the entire organization, regardless of what application is making the request. Valid values are: @@ -2664,7 +2664,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HierarchicalAddressBookRoot -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HierarchicalAddressBookRoot parameter specifies the user, contact, or group to be used as the root organization for a hierarchical address book in the Exchange organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the recipient. For example: @@ -2714,7 +2714,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Industry -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2768,7 +2768,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsAgendaMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2786,7 +2786,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromOffboardMigration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2806,7 +2806,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsExcludedFromOnboardMigration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2826,7 +2826,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsFfoMigrationInProgress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2909,7 +2909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LeanPopoutEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LeanPopoutEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable faster loading of pop-out messages in Outlook on the web for Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge. Valid values are: @@ -2935,7 +2935,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkPreviewEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LinkPreviewEnabled parameter specifies whether link preview of URLs in email messages is allowed for the organization. Valid values are: @@ -2956,7 +2956,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxDataEncryptionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2976,7 +2976,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAllTipsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsAllTipsEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips are enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -2994,7 +2994,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsExternalRecipientsTipsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsExternalRecipientsTipsEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips for external recipients are enabled. The default value is $false. @@ -3012,7 +3012,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsGroupMetricsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsGroupMetricsEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips that rely on group metrics data are enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -3030,7 +3030,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsLargeAudienceThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsLargeAudienceThreshold parameter specifies what a large audience is. The default value is 25. @@ -3048,7 +3048,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsMailboxSourcedTipsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailTipsMailboxSourcedTipsEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips that rely on mailbox data (out-of-office or full mailbox) are enabled. @@ -3066,7 +3066,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedFolderHomepage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3086,7 +3086,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MapiHttpEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3151,7 +3151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMigrations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3292,7 +3292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MicrosoftExchangeRecipientEmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3314,7 +3314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MicrosoftExchangeRecipientEmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3336,7 +3336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MicrosoftExchangeRecipientPrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3360,7 +3360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MicrosoftExchangeRecipientReplyRecipient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3387,7 +3387,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MitigationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3435,7 +3435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OabShadowDistributionOldestFileAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3455,7 +3455,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuth2ClientProfileEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OAuth2ClientProfileEnabled parameter enables or disables modern authentication in the Exchange organization. Valid values are: @@ -3506,7 +3506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationSummary -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3740,7 +3740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferredInternetCodePageForShiftJis -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -3758,7 +3758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicComputersDetectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicComputersDetectionEnabled parameter specifies whether Outlook on the web detects when a user signs from a public or private computer or network, and then enforces the attachment handling settings from public networks. The default is $false. However, if you set this parameter to $true, Outlook on the web determines if the user is signing in from a public computer, and all public attachment handling rules are applied and enforced. @@ -3796,7 +3796,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderMailboxesLockedForNewConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3819,7 +3819,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderMailboxesMigrationComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3842,7 +3842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderMigrationComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3862,7 +3862,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFoldersEnabled parameter specifies how public folders are deployed in your organization. Valid values are: @@ -3884,7 +3884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolderShowClientControl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PublicFolderShowClientControl parameter enables or disables the control access feature for public folders in Microsoft Outlook. Valid values are: @@ -3905,7 +3905,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFoldersLockedForMigration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3925,7 +3925,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReadTrackingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReadTrackingEnabled parameter specifies whether the tracking for read status for messages in an organization is enabled. The default value is $false. @@ -3963,7 +3963,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RefreshSessionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -4001,7 +4001,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemotePublicFolderMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemotePublicFolderMailboxes parameter specifies the identities of the public folder objects (represented as mail user objects locally) corresponding to the public folder mailboxes created in the remote forest. The public folder values set here are used only if the public folder deployment is a remote deployment. @@ -4019,7 +4019,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequiredCharsetCoverage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -4037,7 +4037,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLJunkThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4102,7 +4102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SiteMailboxCreationURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SiteMailboxCreationURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to create site mailboxes. Site mailboxes improve collaboration and user productivity by allowing access to both SharePoint documents and Exchange email in Outlook 2013 or later. @@ -4120,7 +4120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpActionableMessagesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SmtpActionableMessagesEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable action buttons in email messages in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -4190,7 +4190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMAvailableLanguages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4210,7 +4210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnblockUnsafeSenderPromptEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -4228,7 +4228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseIcsSyncStateStreaming -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4295,7 +4295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WACDiscoveryEndpoint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4363,7 +4363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationRelationship.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationRelationship.md index 2e0b8862f8..34afdbd64c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationRelationship.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OrganizationRelationship.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ This example disables the organization relationship with Contoso ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the organization relationship that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the organization relationship. For example: @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ArchiveAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship is configured to provide remote archive access. Valid values are: @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryReportEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DeliveryReportEnabled parameter specifies whether Delivery Reports should be shared over the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainNames -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DomainNames parameter specifies the SMTP domains of the external organization. You can specify multiple domains separated by commas (for example, "contoso.com","northamerica.contoso.com"). @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship should be used to retrieve free/busy information from the external organization. Valid values are: @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessLevel parameter specifies the maximum amount of detail returned to the requesting organization. Valid values are: @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreeBusyAccessScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FreeBusyAccessScope parameter specifies a mail-enabled security group in the internal organization that contains users whose free/busy information is accessible by an external organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxMoveEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailboxMoveEnabled parameter specifies whether the organization relationship enables moving mailboxes to or from the external organization. Valid values are: @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessEnabled parameter specifies whether MailTips for users in this organization are returned over this organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessLevel parameter specifies the level of MailTips data externally shared over this organization relationship. This parameter can have the following values: @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipsAccessScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MailTipsAccessScope parameter specifies a mail-enabled security group in the internal organization that contains users whose free/busy information is accessible by an external organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the group. For example: @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the organization relationship. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationContact -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OrganizationContact parameter specifies the email address that can be used to contact the external organization (for example, administrator@fourthcoffee.com). @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhotosEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhotosEnabled parameter specifies whether photos for users in the internal organization are returned over the organization relationship. Valid values are: @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetApplicationUri -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetApplicationUri parameter specifies the target Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) of the external organization. The TargetApplicationUri parameter is specified by Exchange when requesting a delegated token to retrieve free and busy information, for example, mail.contoso.com. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetAutodiscoverEpr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetAutodiscoverEpr parameter specifies the Autodiscover URL of Exchange Web Services for the external organization, for example, `https://contoso.com/autodiscover/autodiscover.svc/wssecurity`. Exchange uses Autodiscover to automatically detect the correct Exchange server endpoint to use for external requests. @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetOwaURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetOwaURL parameter specifies the Outlook on the web (formerly Outlook Web App) URL of the external organization that's defined in the organization relationship. It is used for Outlook on the web redirection in a cross-premise Exchange scenario. Configuring this attribute enables users in the organization to use their current Outlook on the web URL to access Outlook on the web in the external organization. @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetSharingEpr -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The TargetSharingEpr parameter specifies the URL of the target Exchange Web Services for the external organization. @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookAnywhere.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookAnywhere.md index ac591d7859..a4498d90ac 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookAnywhere.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookAnywhere.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ In Exchange 2010 and Exchange 2013, this example sets the available authenticati ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultAuthenticationMethod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultAuthenticationMethod parameter specifies the default authentication method for Outlook Anywhere. This parameter replaces the existing ExternalClientAuthenticationMethod, InternalClientAuthenticationMethod and IISAuthenticationMethods property values with the value you specify. Valid values are: @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalClientAuthenticationMethod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalClientAuthenticationMethod parameter specifies the authentication method that's used to authenticate external Outlook Anywhere clients. Valid values are: @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalClientsRequireSsl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalClientsRequireSsl parameter specifies whether external Outlook Anywhere clients are required to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). Valid values are: @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalHostname -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalHostname parameter specifies the external hostname for the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory. For example, mail.contoso.com. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IISAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IISAuthenticationMethods parameter specifies the authentication method that's used on the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory in IIS. Valid values are: @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalClientAuthenticationMethod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalClientAuthenticationMethod parameter specifies the authentication method that's used to authenticate internal Outlook Anywhere clients. Valid values are: @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalClientsRequireSsl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalClientsRequireSsl parameter specifies whether internal Outlook Anywhere clients are required to use SSL. Valid values are: @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalHostname -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalHostname parameter specifies the internal hostname for the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory. For example, mail.contoso.com. @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory. The default value is Rpc (Default Web Site). If the value you specify contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SSLOffloading -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SSLOffloading parameter specifies whether a network device accepts SSL connections and decrypts them before proxying the connections to the Outlook Anywhere virtual directory on the Exchange server. Valid values are: @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProtectionRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProtectionRule.md index e7bc6acefb..69da8ab7fc 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProtectionRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProtectionRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example sets the priority of the Outlook protection rule OPR-DG-Finance to ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the rule. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate parameter specifies an RMS template to be applied to messages matching the conditions. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromDepartment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The FromDepartment parameter specifies a department name. The rule is applied to messages where the sender's department attribute matches this value. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a name for the rule. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Priority parameter specifies a priority for the Outlook protection rule. Rule priority values can range from 0 through n-1, where n is the total number of existing Outlook protection rules. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentTo parameter specifies one or more recipients. External recipients can be specified using the SMTP address. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SentToScope parameter specifies the scope of messages to which the rule applies. Valid values include: @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserCanOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UserCanOverride parameter specifies whether the Outlook user can override the rule behavior, either by using a different RMS template, or by removing rights protection before sending the message. Valid values include: @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProvider.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProvider.md index aa50953b25..166c2ab25e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProvider.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OutlookProvider.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example changes the duration that the Autodiscover service settings are val ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the ADIDParameter value of the MAPI protocol for which you want to set global settings. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CertPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CertPrincipalName parameter specifies the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate principal name required for connecting to Exchange from an external location. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a common name for the Outlook Provider Configuration object. This can be a user-friendly name for identification. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookProviderFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutlookProviderFlags parameter specifies how Outlook clients should connect to the Exchange server. The value can be set to ServerExclusiveConnect, ExternalClientsRequireSSL, InternalClientsRequireSSL or to None to clear the flags. The recommended value is None, which is also the default setting. @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequiredClientVersions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequiredClientVersions parameter specifies the minimum version of Microsoft Outlook that's allowed to connect to the Exchange server. This information is in the Autodiscover response to the client connection request. This parameter uses the syntax `"MinimumVersion, ExpirationDate"`. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Mailbox server to use for Outlook Anywhere clients. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TTL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TTL parameter specifies the duration (in hours) that the specified settings are valid. @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OwaMailboxPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OwaMailboxPolicy.md index fa861191a0..164572be01 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OwaMailboxPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OwaMailboxPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ This example disables Outlook UserVoice for the default mailbox policy in Micros ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Outlook on the web mailbox policy that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActionForUnknownFileAndMIMETypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActionForUnknownFileAndMIMETypes parameter specifies how to handle file types that aren't specified in the Allow, Block, and Force Save lists for file types and MIME types. Valid values are: @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncIntegrationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActiveSyncIntegrationEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable Exchange ActiveSync settings in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies which address lists are available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCopyContactsToDeviceAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowCopyContactsToDeviceAddressBook parameter specifies whether users can copy the contents of their Contacts folder to a mobile device's native address book when using Outlook on the web for devices. Valid values are: @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowedFileTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowedFileTypes parameter specifies the attachment file types (file extensions) that can be saved locally or viewed from Outlook on the web. The default values are: @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowedMimeTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowedMimeTypes parameter specifies the MIME extensions of attachments that allow the attachments to be saved locally or viewed from Outlook on the web. The default values are: @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowOfflineOn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedFileTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BlockedFileTypes parameter specifies a list of attachment file types (file extensions) that can't be saved locally or viewed from Outlook on the web. The default values are: @@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedMimeTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The BlockedMimeTypes parameter specifies MIME extensions in attachments that prevent the attachments from being saved locally or viewed from Outlook on the web. The default values are: @@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BoxAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ChangePasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClassicAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ClassicAttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether users can attach local files as regular email attachments in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContactsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -789,7 +789,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultClientLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -807,7 +807,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultTheme -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DefaultTheme parameter specifies the default theme that's used in Outlook on the web when the user hasn't selected a theme. The default value is blank ($null). For more information about the built-in themes that are available in Outlook on the web, see [Default Outlook on the web themes in Exchange](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/clients/outlook-on-the-web/themes#default-outlook-on-the-web-themes-in-exchange-2016). @@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DelegateAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DirectFileAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DirectFileAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled parameter specifies the left-click options for attachments in Outlook on the web for private computer sessions. Valid values are: @@ -873,7 +873,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DirectFileAccessOnPublicComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DirectFileAccessOnPublicComputersEnabled parameter specifies the left-click options for attachments in Outlook on the web for public computer sessions. Valid values are: @@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayPhotosEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DisplayPhotosEnabled parameter specifies whether users see sender photos in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DropboxAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1004,7 +1004,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExplicitLogonEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalSPMySiteHostURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalSPMySiteHostURL specifies the My Site Host URL for external users (for example, `https://sp01.contoso.com`). @@ -1095,7 +1095,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceSaveAttachmentFilteringEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForceSaveAttachmentFilteringEnabled parameter specifies whether files are filtered before they can be saved from Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1116,7 +1116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceSaveFileTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForceSaveFileTypes parameter specifies the attachment file types (file extensions) that can only be saved from Outlook on the web (not opened). The default values are: @@ -1145,7 +1145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceSaveMimeTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForceSaveMimeTypes parameter specifies the MIME extensions in attachments that only allow the attachments to be saved locally (not opened). The default values are: @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceWacViewingFirstOnPrivateComputers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForceWacViewingFirstOnPrivateComputers parameter specifies whether private computers must first preview an Office file as a web page in Office Online Server (formerly known as Office Web Apps Server and Web Access Companion Server) before opening the file in the local application. Valid values are: @@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceWacViewingFirstOnPublicComputers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ForceWacViewingFirstOnPublicComputers parameter specifies whether public computers must first preview an Office file as a web page in Office Online Server before opening the file in the local application. Valid values are: @@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreCardsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1294,7 +1294,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalAddressListEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The GlobalAddressListEnabled parameter specifies whether the global address list is available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1315,7 +1315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GoogleDriveAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1335,7 +1335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupCreationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -1381,7 +1381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstantMessagingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InstantMessagingEnabled parameter specifies whether instant messaging is available in Outlook on the web. This does not affect chat capabilities provided by Skype for Business or Teams. Valid values are: @@ -1402,7 +1402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstantMessagingType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InstantMessagingType parameter specifies the type of instant messaging provider in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1446,7 +1446,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalSPMySiteHostURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalSPMySiteHostURL specifies the My Site Host URL for internal users (for example, `https://sp01.contoso.com`). @@ -1466,7 +1466,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IRMEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IRMEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) features are available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1487,7 +1487,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault switch specifies whether the Outlook on the web policy is the default policy that's used to configure the Outlook on the web settings for new mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1534,7 +1534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The JournalEnabled parameter specifies whether the Journal folder is available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1555,7 +1555,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JunkEmailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1621,7 +1621,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogonAndErrorLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LogonAndErrorLanguage parameter specifies the language that used in Outlook on the web for forms-based authentication and for error messages when a user's current language setting can't be read. @@ -1683,7 +1683,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -1701,7 +1701,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NotesEnabled parameter specifies whether the Notes folder is available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OneDriveAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -1837,7 +1837,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OnSendAddinsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OnSendAddinsEnabled parameter specifies whether a mail item can be edited while an on-send add-in is processing it in Outlook on the web or the new Outlook on Windows. Valid values are: @@ -1858,7 +1858,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online When the OrganizationEnabled parameter is set to $false, the Automatic Reply option doesn't include external and internal options, the address book doesn't show the organization hierarchy, and the Resources tab in Calendar forms is disabled. The default value is $true. @@ -1876,7 +1876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutboundCharset -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OutboundCharset parameter specifies the character set that's used for outgoing messages in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2025,7 +2025,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWALightEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWALightEnabled parameter controls the availability of the light version of Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2115,7 +2115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticSupportEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PhoneticSupportEnabled parameter specifies phonetically spelled entries in the address book. This parameter is available for use in Japan. @@ -2156,7 +2156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PremiumClientEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PremiumClientEnabled parameter controls the availability of the full version of Outlook Web App. Valid values are: @@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2248,7 +2248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverDeletedItemsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2271,7 +2271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReferenceAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ReferenceAttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether users can attach files from the cloud as linked attachments in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2292,7 +2292,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemindersAndNotificationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RemindersAndNotificationsEnabled parameter specifies whether notifications and reminders are enabled in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2315,7 +2315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportJunkEmailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: In Exchange Online, this parameter does not affect the ability of users to report messages. Whether a user is able to report messages and where is controlled in the Microsoft Defender portal as described in [User reported message settings](https://learn.microsoft.com/defender-office-365/submissions-user-reported-messages-custom-mailbox). @@ -2340,7 +2340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RulesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RulesEnabled parameter specifies whether a user can view, create, or modify server-side rules in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2361,7 +2361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SatisfactionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SatisfactionEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the satisfaction survey. Valid values are: @@ -2382,7 +2382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SaveAttachmentsToCloudEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SaveAttachmentsToCloudEnabled parameter specifies whether users can save regular email attachments to the cloud. Valid values are: @@ -2403,7 +2403,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SearchFoldersEnabled parameter specifies whether Search Folders are available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2424,7 +2424,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetPhotoEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SetPhotoEnabled parameter specifies whether users can add, change, and remove their sender photo in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2447,7 +2447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetPhotoURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SetPhotoURL parameter controls where users go to select their photo. You can't specify a URL that contains one or more picture files, as there's no mechanism to copy a URL photo to the properties of Exchange Online mailboxes. @@ -2485,7 +2485,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SignaturesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SignaturesEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the use of signatures in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2506,7 +2506,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SilverlightEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2529,7 +2529,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipCreateUnifiedGroupCustomSharepointClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -2552,7 +2552,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SMimeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2597,7 +2597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SpellCheckerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2622,7 +2622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TasksEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2670,7 +2670,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TextMessagingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TextMessagingEnabled parameter specifies whether users can send and receive text messages in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2693,7 +2693,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThemeSelectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ThemeSelectionEnabled parameter specifies whether users can change the theme in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2714,7 +2714,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThirdPartyAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2734,7 +2734,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMIntegrationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UMIntegrationEnabled parameter specifies whether Unified Messaging (UM) integration is enabled in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2759,7 +2759,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2779,7 +2779,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessOnPublicComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2799,7 +2799,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseGB18030 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseGB18030 parameter specifies whether to use the GB18030 character set instead of GB2312 in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2820,7 +2820,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseISO885915 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseISO885915 parameter specifies whether to use the character set ISO8859-15 instead of ISO8859-1 in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2841,7 +2841,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserVoiceEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -2864,7 +2864,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacEditingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WacEditingEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable editing documents in Outlook on the web by using Office Online Server (formerly known as Office Web Apps Server and Web Access Companion Server). Valid values are: @@ -2885,7 +2885,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacExternalServicesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WacExternalServicesEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable external services when viewing documents in Outlook on the web (for example, machine translation) by using Office Online Server. Valid values are: @@ -2906,7 +2906,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacOMEXEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WacOMEXEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable apps for Outlook in Outlook on the web in Office Online Server. Valid values are: @@ -2927,7 +2927,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacViewingOnPrivateComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WacViewingOnPrivateComputersEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable web viewing of supported Office documents private computer sessions in Office Online Server (formerly known as Office Web Apps Server and Web Access Companion Server). By default, all Outlook on the web sessions are considered to be on private computers. Valid values are: @@ -2950,7 +2950,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacViewingOnPublicComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WacViewingOnPublicComputersEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable web viewing of supported Office documents in public computer sessions in Office Online Server. Valid values are: @@ -2996,7 +2996,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebPartsFrameOptionsType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WebPartsFrameOptionsType parameter specifies what sources can access web parts in IFRAME or FRAME elements in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -3208,7 +3208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -3225,7 +3225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ``` ### -WSSAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -3243,7 +3243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessOnPublicComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OwaVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OwaVirtualDirectory.md index f60879da83..921ca5f56c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OwaVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-OwaVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ This example sets the ActionForUnknownFileAndMIMETypes parameter to Block on the ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the OWA virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActionForUnknownFileAndMIMETypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActionForUnknownFileAndMIMETypes parameter specifies how to handle file types that aren't specified in the Allow, Block, and Force Save lists for file types and MIME types. Valid values are: @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveSyncIntegrationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveSyncIntegrationEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable Exchange ActiveSync settings in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdfsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdfsAuthentication parameter enables or disables Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS) authentication on the Outlook on the web virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AllAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies which address lists are available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowCopyContactsToDeviceAddressBook -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AllowCopyContactsToDeviceAddressBook parameter specifies whether users can copy the contents of their Contacts folder to a mobile device's native address book when using Outlook on the web for devices. Valid values are: @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowedFileTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AllowedFileTypes parameter specifies the attachment file types (file extensions) that can be saved locally or viewed from Outlook on the web. The default values are: @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowedMimeTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AllowedMimeTypes parameter specifies the MIME extensions of attachments that allow the attachments to be saved locally or viewed from Outlook on the web. The default values are: @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowOfflineOn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AllowOfflineOn parameter specifies when Outlook on the web in offline mode is available for supported web browsers. Valid values are: @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousFeaturesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousFeaturesEnabled parameter specifies whether you want to allow Outlook on the web users that are logged on anonymously to access specific features. Valid values are: @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedFileTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BlockedFileTypes parameter specifies a list of attachment file types (file extensions) that can't be saved locally or viewed from Outlook on the web. The default values are: @@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedMimeTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BlockedMimeTypes parameter specifies MIME extensions in attachments that prevent the attachments from being saved locally or viewed from Outlook on the web. The default values are: @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BoxAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the calendar in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -570,7 +570,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ChangePasswordEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ChangePasswordEnabled parameter specifies whether users can change their passwords from inside Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClassicAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClassicAttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether users can attach local files as regular email attachments in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClientAuthCleanupLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ClientAuthCleanupLevel parameter specifies how much of the cache is cleared when the user logs off from Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContactsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ContactsEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable Contacts in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultClientLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultDomain parameter specifies which domain to use when the LogonFormat parameter is set to UserName (for example, contoso.com). @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultTheme -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultTheme parameter specifies the default theme that's used in Outlook on the web when the user hasn't selected a theme. The default value is blank ($null). For more information about the built-in themes that are available in Outlook on the web, see [Default Outlook on the web themes in Exchange](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/clients/outlook-on-the-web/themes#default-outlook-on-the-web-themes-in-exchange-2016). @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DelegateAccessEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -781,7 +781,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -804,7 +804,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DirectFileAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DirectFileAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled parameter specifies the left-click options for attachments in Outlook on the web for private computer sessions. Valid values are: @@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DirectFileAccessOnPublicComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DirectFileAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled parameter specifies the left-click options for attachments in Outlook on the web for public computer sessions. Valid values are: @@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayPhotosEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisplayPhotosEnabled parameter specifies whether users see sender photos in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -871,7 +871,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DropboxAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Exchange2003Url -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -927,7 +927,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchwebProxyDestination -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -945,7 +945,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExplicitLogonEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExplicitLogonEnabled parameter specifies whether to allow a user to open someone else's mailbox in Outlook on the web (provided that user has permissions to the mailbox). Valid values are: @@ -966,7 +966,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -994,7 +994,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalAuthenticationMethods -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalAuthenticationMethods parameter restricts the authentication methods that can be used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. Valid values are: @@ -1084,7 +1084,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDownloadHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDownloadHostName parameter specifies the download location for files in Outlook on the web for external users (for example, in-line image files). @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalSPMySiteHostURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalSPMySiteHostURL specifies the My Site Host URL for external users (for example, `https://sp01.contoso.com`). @@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -1142,7 +1142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FailbackUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FailbackUrl parameter specifies the URL that Outlook on the web uses to connect to the server after failback in a site resilience process and requires a separate DNS entry pointing to the original server's IP address. @@ -1162,7 +1162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FilterWebBeaconsAndHtmlForms -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FilterWebBeaconsAndHtmlForms parameter specifies how web beacons are handled in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1184,7 +1184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceSaveAttachmentFilteringEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceSaveAttachmentFilteringEnabled parameter specifies whether files are filtered before they can be saved from Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1205,7 +1205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceSaveFileTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceSaveFileTypes parameter specifies the attachment file types (file extensions) that can only be saved from Outlook on the web (not opened). The default values are: @@ -1234,7 +1234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceSaveMimeTypes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceSaveMimeTypes parameter specifies the MIME extensions in attachments that only allow the attachments to be saved locally (not opened). The default values are: @@ -1267,7 +1267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceWacViewingFirstOnPrivateComputers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceWacViewingFirstOnPrivateComputers parameter specifies whether private computers must first preview an Office file as a web page in Office Online Server (formerly known as Office Web Apps Server and Web Access Companion Server) before opening the file in the local application. Valid values are: @@ -1290,7 +1290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceWacViewingFirstOnPublicComputers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceWacViewingFirstOnPublicComputers parameter specifies whether public computers must first preview an Office file as a web page in Office Online Server before opening the file in the local application. Valid values are: @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FormsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FormsAuthentication parameter enables or disables forms-based authentication on the Outlook on the web virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FreCardsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1402,7 +1402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GlobalAddressListEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GlobalAddressListEnabled parameter specifies whether the global address list is available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1423,7 +1423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GoogleDriveAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1441,7 +1441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GzipLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GzipLevel parameter sets Gzip configuration information for the Outlook on the web virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -1464,7 +1464,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstantMessagingCertificateThumbprint -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InstantMessagingCertificateThumbprint parameter specifies the trusted certificate used to communicate between the instant messaging server and the Mailbox server. Use the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet to find the thumbprint of the certificate. @@ -1482,7 +1482,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstantMessagingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InstantMessagingEnabled parameter specifies whether instant messaging is available in Outlook on the web. This does not affect chat capabilities provided by Skype for Business or Teams. Valid values are: @@ -1503,7 +1503,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstantMessagingServerName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InstantMessagingServerName parameter specifies the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the instant messaging server or set of servers behind a load balancing device. @@ -1521,7 +1521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InstantMessagingType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InstantMessagingType parameter specifies the type of instant messaging provider in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1542,7 +1542,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IntegratedFeaturesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IntegratedFeaturesEnabled parameter specifies whether to allow Outlook on the web users who are logged on using Integrated Windows authentication to access specific features. Valid values are: @@ -1563,7 +1563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDownloadHostName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDownloadHostName parameter specifies the download location for files in Outlook on the web for internal users (for example, in-line image files). The default value is blank ($null). @@ -1581,7 +1581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalSPMySiteHostURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalSPMySiteHostURL specifies the My Site Host URL for internal users (for example, `https://sp01.contoso.com`). @@ -1601,7 +1601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -1621,7 +1621,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IRMEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IRMEnabled parameter specifies whether Information Rights Management (IRM) features are available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1642,7 +1642,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsPublic -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsPublic parameter specifies whether external users use the virtual directory for Outlook on the web in multiple virtual directory environments (you've configured separate virtual directories on the same server for internal vs. external Outlook on the web connections). Valid values are: @@ -1663,7 +1663,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The JournalEnabled parameter specifies whether the Journal folder is available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1684,7 +1684,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JunkEmailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The JunkEmailEnabled parameter specifies whether the Junk Email folder and junk email management are available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1728,7 +1728,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogonAndErrorLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogonAndErrorLanguage parameter specifies the language that used in Outlook on the web for forms-based authentication and for error messages when a user's current language setting can't be read. @@ -1750,7 +1750,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogonFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogonFormat parameter specifies the type of logon format that's required for forms-based authentication on the Outlook on the web sign-in page. Valid values are: @@ -1772,7 +1772,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogonPageLightSelectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogonPageLightSelectionEnabled parameter specifies whether the Outlook on the web sign-in page includes the option to sign in to the light version of Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogonPagePublicPrivateSelectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogonPagePublicPrivateSelectionEnabled parameter specifies whether the Outlook on the web sign-in page includes the public/private computer session option at sign-in. Valid values are: @@ -1820,7 +1820,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The NotesEnabled parameter specifies whether the Notes folder is available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1841,7 +1841,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotificationInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -1865,7 +1865,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1883,7 +1883,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OneDriveAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1901,7 +1901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrganizationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE When the OrganizationEnabled parameter is set to $false, the Automatic Reply option doesn't include external and internal options, the address book doesn't show the organization hierarchy, and the Resources tab in Calendar forms is disabled. The default value is $true. @@ -1919,7 +1919,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutboundCharset -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutboundCharset parameter specifies the character set that's used for outgoing messages in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1941,7 +1941,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWALightEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OWALightEnabled parameter controls the availability of the light version of Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -1985,7 +1985,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PremiumClientEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PremiumClientEnabled parameter controls the availability of the full version of Outlook Web App. Valid values are: @@ -2006,7 +2006,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2029,7 +2029,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverDeletedItemsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2052,7 +2052,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RedirectToOptimalOWAServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RedirectToOptimalOWAServer parameter specifies whether to find the optimal server for Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2073,7 +2073,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReferenceAttachmentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReferenceAttachmentsEnabled parameter specifies whether users can attach files from the cloud as linked attachments in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2094,7 +2094,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemindersAndNotificationsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemindersAndNotificationsEnabled parameter specifies whether notifications and reminders are enabled in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2117,7 +2117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsActionForUnknownServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2137,7 +2137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsAllowedServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2157,7 +2157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsBlockedServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2177,7 +2177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteDocumentsInternalDomainSuffixList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2197,7 +2197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReportJunkEmailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReportJunkEmailEnabled parameter specifies whether users can report messages as junk or not junk to Microsoft in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2220,7 +2220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RulesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RulesEnabled parameter specifies whether a user can view, create, or modify server-side rules in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2241,7 +2241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SaveAttachmentsToCloudEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SaveAttachmentsToCloudEnabled parameter specifies whether users can save regular email attachments to the cloud. Valid values are: @@ -2262,7 +2262,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SearchFoldersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2285,7 +2285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetPhotoEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SetPhotoEnabled parameter specifies whether users can add, change, and remove their sender photo in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2306,7 +2306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetPhotoURL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SetPhotoURL parameter specifies the location (URL) of user photos. The default value of this parameter is blank ($null). @@ -2324,7 +2324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SignaturesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SignaturesEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the use of signatures in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2345,7 +2345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SilverlightEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2368,7 +2368,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SMimeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2393,7 +2393,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SpellCheckerEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010. @@ -2418,7 +2418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TasksEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TasksEnabled parameter specifies whether Tasks folder is available in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2441,7 +2441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TextMessagingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TextMessagingEnabled parameter specifies whether users can send and receive text messages in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2464,7 +2464,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThemeSelectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThemeSelectionEnabled parameter specifies whether users can change the theme in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2485,7 +2485,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMIntegrationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UMIntegrationEnabled parameter specifies whether Unified Messaging (UM) integration is enabled in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2510,7 +2510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -2528,7 +2528,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UNCAccessOnPublicComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -2546,7 +2546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseGB18030 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseGB18030 parameter specifies whether to use the GB18030 character set instead of GB2312 in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2567,7 +2567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseISO885915 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseISO885915 parameter specifies whether to use the character set ISO8859-15 instead of ISO8859-1 in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2588,7 +2588,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserContextTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UserContextTimeout parameter specifies the time-out setting in minutes for a user context object. This parameter doesn't limit public and private forms-based authentication time-out settings. @@ -2608,7 +2608,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -VirtualDirectoryType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -2626,7 +2626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacEditingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WacEditingEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable editing documents in Outlook on the web by using Office Online Server (formerly known as Office Web Apps Server and Web Access Companion Server). Valid values are: @@ -2647,7 +2647,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacViewingOnPrivateComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WacViewingOnPrivateComputersEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable web viewing of supported Office documents private computer sessions in Office Online Server (formerly known as Office Web Apps Server and Web Access Companion Server). By default, all Outlook on the web sessions are considered to be on private computers. Valid values are: @@ -2670,7 +2670,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WacViewingOnPublicComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WacViewingOnPublicComputersEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable web viewing of supported Office documents in public computer sessions in Office Online Server. Valid values are: @@ -2693,7 +2693,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebPartsFrameOptionsType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WebPartsFrameOptionsType parameter specifies what sources can access web parts in IFRAME or FRAME elements in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -2905,7 +2905,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -2923,7 +2923,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter enables or disables Integrated Windows authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -2944,7 +2944,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessOnPrivateComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. @@ -2962,7 +2962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSAccessOnPublicComputersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is deprecated and no longer used. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PartnerApplication.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PartnerApplication.md index 5be97a4965..85dddd2094 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PartnerApplication.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PartnerApplication.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ This example refreshes the auth metadata for the HRApp partner application. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the partner application you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the partner application. For example: @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptSecurityIdentifierInformation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AcceptSecurityIdentifierInformation parameter specifies whether Exchange should accept security identifiers (SIDs) from another trusted Active Directory forest for the partner application. By default, new partner applications are configured to not accept SIDs from another forest. If you're in deployment with a trusted forest, set the parameter to $true. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AccountType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AccountType parameter specifies the type of Microsoft account that's required for the partner application. Valid values are: @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActAsPermissions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ActAsPermissions parameter specifies the delegate permissions that are allowed for the partner application. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplicationIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ApplicationIdentifier parameter specifies a unique application identifier for the partner application that uses an authorization server. @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMetadataUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether the partner application is enabled. By default, new partner applications are enabled. Set the parameter to $false to create the application configuration in a disabled state. @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LinkedAccount parameter specifies a linked Active Directory user account for the application. Exchange evaluates Role Based Access Control (RBAC) permissions for the linked account when authorizing a token used to perform a task. @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a new name for the partner application. @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Realm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RefreshAuthMetadata -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustAnySSLCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PendingFederatedDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PendingFederatedDomain.md index 2024688f5a..92a82fcef1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PendingFederatedDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PendingFederatedDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ This example adds the pending domains contoso.com and sales.contoso.com to the e ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PendingAccountNamespace -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PendingAccountNamespace parameter specifies the pending domain that's used as the account namespace for the federation trust. @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PendingDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PendingDomains parameter specifies the pending federated domains that are configured for the federation trust. @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PolicyTipConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PolicyTipConfig.md index 75a9554dd4..8bf4dd3de8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PolicyTipConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PolicyTipConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example replaces the text of all custom Spanish Policy Tips with the value, ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the custom Policy Tip you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the custom Policy Tip. For example: @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Value -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Value parameter specifies the text that's displayed by the Policy Tip. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PopSettings.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PopSettings.md index 0f07bd405a..38da595909 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PopSettings.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PopSettings.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ This example specifies the certificate that contains mail.contoso.com is used to ### -AuthenticatedConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthenticatedConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the time to wait before closing an idle authenticated connection. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Banner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Banner parameter specifies the text string that's displayed to connecting POP3 clients. The default value is: The Microsoft Exchange POP3 service is ready. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CalendarItemRetrievalOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CalendarItemRetrievalOption parameter specifies how calendar items are presented to POP3 clients. Valid values are: @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableExactRFC822Size -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableExactRFC822Size parameter specifies how message sizes are presented to POP3 clients. Valid values are: @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableGSSAPIAndNTLMAuth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableGSSAPIAndNTLMAuth parameter specifies whether connections can use Integrated Windows authentication (NTLM) by using the Generic Security Services application programming interface (GSSAPI). This setting applies to connections where Transport Layer Security (TLS) is disabled. Valid values are: @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnforceCertificateErrors -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnforceCertificateErrors parameter specifies whether to enforce Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate validation failures. Valid values are: @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionPolicy parameter specifies how Extended Protection for Authentication is used for POP3 connections. Valid values are: @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalConnectionSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalConnectionSettings parameter specifies the host name, port, and encryption method that's used by external POP3 clients (POP3 connections from outside your corporate network). @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalConnectionSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalConnectionSettings parameter specifies the host name, port, and encryption method that's used by internal POP3 clients (POP3 connections from inside your corporate network). This setting is also used when a POP3 connection is forwarded to another Exchange server that's running the Microsoft Exchange POP3 service. @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFileLocation parameter specifies the location for the POP3 protocol log files. The default location is%ExchangeInstallPath%Logging\\Pop3. @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogFileRollOverSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogFileRollOverSettings parameter defines how frequently POP3 protocol logging creates a new log file. Valid values are: @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LoginType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LoginType parameter specifies the authentication method for POP3 connections. Valid values are: @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogPerFileSizeQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LogPerFileSizeQuota parameter specifies the maximum size of a POP3 protocol log file. @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxCommandSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxCommandSize parameter specifies the maximum size in bytes of a single POP3 command. Valid values are from 40 through 1024. The default value is 512. @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionFromSingleIP -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionFromSingleIP parameter specifies the maximum number of POP3 connections that are accepted by the Exchange server from a single IP address. Valid values are from 1 through 2147483647. The default value is 2147483647. @@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of POP3 connections that are accepted by the Exchange server. Valid values are from 1 through 2147483647. The default value is 2147483647. @@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionsPerUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionsPerUser parameter specifies the maximum number of POP3 connections that are allowed for each user. Valid values are from 1 through 2147483647. The default value is 16. @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRetrievalMimeFormat -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRetrievalMimeFormat parameter specifies the MIME encoding of messages. Valid values are: @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRetrievalSortOrder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRetrievalSortOrder parameter specifies how retrieved messages are sorted. Valid values are: @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaServerUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaServerUrl parameter specifies the URL that's used to retrieve calendar information for instances of custom Outlook on the web calendar items. @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreAuthenticatedConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreAuthenticatedConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the time to wait before closing an idle POP3 connection that isn't authenticated. @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProtocolLogEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable protocol logging for POP3. Valid values are: @@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProxyTargetPort -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProxyTargetPort parameter specifies the port on the Microsoft Exchange POP3 Backend service that listens for client connections that are proxied from the Microsoft Exchange POP3 service. The default value is 1995. @@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SSLBindings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SSLBindings parameter specifies the IP address and TCP port that's used for an POP3 connection that's always encrypted by SSL/TLS. This parameter uses the syntax `IPv4OrIPv6Address:Port`. @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuppressReadReceipt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuppressReadReceipt parameter specifies whether to stop duplicate read receipts from being sent to POP3 clients that have the Send read receipts for messages I send setting configured in their POP3 email program. Valid values are: @@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UnencryptedOrTLSBindings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UnencryptedOrTLSBindings parameter specifies the IP address and TCP port that's used for unencrypted POP3 connections, or POP3 connections that are encrypted by using opportunistic TLS (STARTTLS) after the initial unencrypted protocol handshake. This parameter uses the syntax `IPv4OrIPv6Address:Port`. @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -X509CertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The X509CertificateName parameter specifies the certificate that's used for encrypting POP3 client connections. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md index 955bf80c98..bf18ace465 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PowerShellVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ This example modifies the external URL of the Contoso Windows PowerShell virtual ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the PowerShell virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CertificateAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CertificateAuthentication parameter specifies whether certificate authentication is enabled on the Windows PowerShell virtual directory. The valid values are $true and $false. The default value is $false. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSSL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireSSL parameter specifies whether the Windows PowerShell virtual directory should require that the client connection be made using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). The valid values are $true and $false. The default value is $true. @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolder.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolder.md index 1482cb835f..637254fa24 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolder.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolder.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ In Exchange 2010, this example sets the folder to replicate only on weekends. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name and path of the public folder you want to modify. A valid value uses the format: `\Level1\Level2\...\LevenN\PublicFolder`. For example, `"\Customer Discussion"` or `"\Engineering\Customer Discussion"`. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AgeLimit parameter specifies the overall age limit on the folder. Items that reach the age limit are deleted from the public folder. Replicas of this public folder are automatically deleted when the age limit is exceeded. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EformsLocaleId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The EformsLocaleId parameter specifies the locale-specific version of the e-forms library. The valid input for the EformsLocaleId parameter is the string names listed in the Culture Name column in the Microsoft .NET Class Library class reference available at [CultureInfo Class](https://learn.microsoft.com/dotnet/api/system.globalization.cultureinfo). @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the public folder size that triggers a warning to public folder owners stating that the folder is almost full. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailEnabled parameter specifies that the public folder is mail-enabled. To do this, you use the value $true. @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailRecipientGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MailRecipientGuid parameter specifies the MailRecipientGuid value of the public folder. You use this parameter to correct a mail-enabled public folder that lost its MailRecipientGuid value. @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxItemSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxItemSize parameter specifies the maximum size for posted items. Items larger than the value of the MaxItemSize parameter are rejected. The default value is unlimited, which is 2 gigabytes. When you enter a value, qualify the value with one of the following units: @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name for the public folder. @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OverrideContentMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Path -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Path parameter specifies the path of the public folder, for example, \\TopLevelPublicFolder\\PublicFolder. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PerUserReadStateEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PerUserReadStateEnabled parameter specifies whether to maintain read and unread data on a per-user basis. @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitPostQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ProhibitPostQuota parameter specifies the size of a public folder at which users are notified that the public folder is full. Users can't post to a folder whose size is larger than the ProhibitPostQuota parameter value. The default value is unlimited, which is 2 terabytes. @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetainDeletedItemsFor -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetainDeletedItemsFor parameter specifies the retention time for deleted items. @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md index a2c4eedfb8..e02fbe8c83 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolderMigrationRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ This example changes the setting of the PublicFolderMigration migration request ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the migration request that you want to modify. You can use the following values: @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RehomeRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RehomeRequest switch tells the Microsoft Exchange Mailbox Replication service (MRS) that the request needs to be moved to the same database as the public folder that's being migrated. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BatchName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BatchName parameter specifies a descriptive name for the public folder batch migration. You can use the BatchName parameter as a search string when you use the Get-PublicFolderMigrationRequest cmdlet. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreventCompletion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PreventCompletion parameter specifies whether to run the migration request, but not allow it to complete. Valid values are: @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipMerging -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SkipMerging parameter specifies whether certain stages of a migration are to be skipped for debugging purposes. Don't use this parameter unless directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support or specific documentation. @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md index d1e95ab4b5..a38c57d131 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-PublicFolderMoveRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example changes the public folder move request \\PublicFolderMove to accept ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the public folder move request. The default identity of a public folder move request is \\PublicFolderMove. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptLargeDataLoss -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptLargeDataLoss switch specifies the request should continue even if a large number of items in the source mailbox can't be copied to the target mailbox. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BadItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BadItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of bad items that are allowed before the request fails. A bad item is a corrupt item in the source mailbox that can't be copied to the target mailbox. Also included in the bad item limit are missing items. Missing items are items in the source mailbox that can't be found in the target mailbox when the request is ready to complete. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CompletedRequestAgeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter specifies how long the request is kept after it has completed before being automatically removed. The default CompletedRequestAgeLimit parameter value is 30 days. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalFlags parameter specifies the optional steps in the request. This parameter is used primarily for debugging purposes. @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LargeItemLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LargeItemLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of large items that are allowed before the request fails. A large item is a message in the source mailbox that exceeds the maximum message size that's allowed in the target mailbox. If the target mailbox doesn't have a specifically configured maximum message size value, the organization-wide value is used. @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the order in which the request should be processed in the request queue. Requests are processed in order, based on server health, status, priority, and last update time. Valid priority values are: @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestExpiryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequestExpiryInterval parameter specifies an age limit for a completed or failed request. When you use this parameter, the completed or failed request is automatically removed after the specified interval expires. If you don't use this parameter: @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuspendWhenReadyToComplete -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuspendWhenReadyToComplete parameter specifies whether to suspend the request before it reaches the status of CompletionInProgress. After the move is suspended, it has a status of AutoSuspended. You can then manually complete the move by using the Resume-PublicFolderMoveRequest command. @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ReceiveConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ReceiveConnector.md index c84552f4b2..9ac0a5b89e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ReceiveConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ReceiveConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Configures the Receive connector to time out connections after 15 minutes. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Receive connector that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the Receive connector. For example: @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AdvertiseClientSettings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AdvertiseClientSettings parameter specifies whether the SMTP server name, port number, and authentication settings for the Receive connector are displayed to users in the options of Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthMechanism -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthMechanism parameter specifies the advertised and accepted authentication mechanisms for the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthTarpitInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthTarpitInterval parameter specifies the period of time to delay responses to failed authentication attempts from remote servers that might be abusing the connection. The default value is 5 seconds. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Banner -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Banner parameter specifies a custom SMTP 220 banner that's displayed to remote messaging servers that connect to the Receive connector. When you specify a value, enclose the value in quotation marks, and start the value with 220 (the default "Service ready" SMTP response code). @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BareLinefeedRejectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BareLinefeedRejectionEnabled parameter specifies whether this Receive connector rejects messages that contain line feed (LF) characters without immediately preceding carriage return characters (CR) in the SMTP DATA stream. This condition is known as bare line feeds. Valid values are: @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BinaryMimeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BinaryMimeEnabled parameter specifies whether the BINARYMIME Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Bindings -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Bindings parameter specifies the local IP address and TCP port number that's used by the Receive connector. This parameter uses the syntax `"IPv4Address:TCPPort","IPv6Address:TCPPort"`. You can specify an IPv4 address and port, an IPv6 address and port, or both. The IP address values 0.0.0.0 or `[::]` indicate that the Receive connector uses all available local IPv4 or all IPv6 addresses. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ChunkingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ChunkingEnabled parameter specifies whether the CHUNKING Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Comment parameter specifies an optional comment. If you specify a value that contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("), for example: "This is an admin note". @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionInactivityTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectionInactivityTimeout parameter specifies the maximum amount of idle time before a connection to the Receive connector is closed. @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the maximum time that the connection to the Receive connector can remain open, even if the connection is actively transmitting data. @@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultDomain parameter specifies the default accepted domain to use for the Exchange organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the accepted domain. For example: @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryStatusNotificationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DeliveryStatusNotificationEnabled parameter specifies whether the DSN (delivery status notification) Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainSecureEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainSecureEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable mutual Transport Layer Security (TLS) authentication (also known as Domain Secure) for the domains that are serviced by the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EightBitMimeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EightBitMimeEnabled parameter specifies whether the 8BITMIME Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnableAuthGSSAPI -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnableAuthGSSAPI parameter enables or disables Kerberos when Integrated Windows authentication is available on the Receive connector (the AuthMechanism parameter contains the value Integrated). Valid values are: @@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EnhancedStatusCodesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EnhancedStatusCodesEnabled parameter specifies whether the ENHANCEDSTATUSCODES Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionPolicy parameter specifies how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the Receive connector.Valid values are: @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fqdn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Fqdn parameter specifies the destination FQDN that's shown to connected messaging servers. This value is used in the following locations: @@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LongAddressesEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LongAddressesEnabled parameter specifies whether the Receive connector accepts long X.400 email addresses. The X.400 email addresses are encapsulated in SMTP email addresses by using the Internet Mail Connector Encapsulated Address (IMCEA) encapsulation method. Valid values are: @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAcknowledgementDelay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter isn't used by Exchange Server 2016. It's used only by Exchange 2010 servers in coexistence environments. @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxHeaderSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxHeaderSize parameter specifies the maximum size of the SMTP message header before the Receive connector closes the connection. The default value is 256 kilobytes (262144 bytes). @@ -732,7 +732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxHopCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxHopCount parameter specifies the maximum number of hops that a message can take before the message is rejected by the Receive connector. The maximum number of hops is determined by the number of Received header fields that exist in a submitted message. @@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInboundConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxInboundConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of inbound connections that this Receive connector serves at the same time. @@ -774,7 +774,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInboundConnectionPercentagePerSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxInboundConnectionPercentagePerSource parameter specifies the maximum number of connections that a Receive connector serves at the same time from a single IP address, expressed as the percentage of available remaining connections on a Receive connector. @@ -794,7 +794,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxInboundConnectionPerSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxInboundConnectionPerSource parameter specifies the maximum number of connections that this Receive connector serves at the same time from a single IP address. @@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxLocalHopCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxLocalHopCount parameter specifies the maximum number of local hops that a message can take before the message is rejected by the Receive connector. The maximum number of local hops is determined by the number of Received headers with local server addresses in a submitted message. @@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxLogonFailures -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxLogonFailures parameter specifies the number of logon failures that the Receive connector retries before it closes the connection. @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that's allowed through the Receive connector. The default value is 36 MB, which results in a realistic maximum message size of 25 MB. @@ -892,7 +892,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxProtocolErrors -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxProtocolErrors parameter specifies the maximum number of SMTP protocol errors that the Receive connector accepts before closing the connection. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxRecipientsPerMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxRecipientsPerMessage parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients per message that the Receive connector accepts before closing the connection. @@ -934,7 +934,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRateLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRateLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of messages that can be sent by a single client IP address per minute. @@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRateSource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRateSource parameter specifies how the message submission rate is calculated. Valid values are: @@ -981,7 +981,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the Receive connector. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OrarEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OrarEnabled parameter enables or disables Originator Requested Alternate Recipient (ORAR) on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1022,7 +1022,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PermissionGroups -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PermissionGroups parameter specifies the well-known security principals who are authorized to use the Receive connector and the permissions that are assigned to them. Valid values are: @@ -1054,7 +1054,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipeliningEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipeliningEnabled parameter specifies whether the PIPELINING Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProtocolLoggingLevel parameter specifies whether to enable or disable protocol logging for the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1100,7 +1100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectReservedSecondLevelRecipientDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectReservedSecondLevelRecipientDomains parameter specifies whether to reject connections that contain recipients in reserved second-level domains as specified in RFC 2606 (example.com, example.net, or example.org). Valid value are: @@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectReservedTopLevelRecipientDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectReservedTopLevelRecipientDomains parameter specifies whether to reject connections that contain recipients in reserved top-level domains (TLDs) as specified in RFC 2606 (.test, .example, .invalid, or .localhost). Valid value are: @@ -1142,7 +1142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectSingleLabelRecipientDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectSingleLabelRecipientDomains parameter specifies whether to reject connections that contain recipients in single-label domains (for example, chris@contoso instead of chris@contoso.com). Valid values are: @@ -1163,7 +1163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteIPRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteIPRanges parameter specifies the remote IP addresses that the Receive connector accepts messages from. Valid values are: @@ -1195,7 +1195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireEHLODomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireEHLODomain parameter specifies whether the client must provide a domain name in the EHLO handshake after the SMTP connection is established. Valid values are: @@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireTLS -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireTLS parameter specifies whether to require TLS transmission for inbound messages on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServiceDiscoveryFqdn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ServiceDiscoveryFqdn parameter specifies the service discovery fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). for the Receive connector. @@ -1255,7 +1255,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SizeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SizeEnabled parameter specifies how the SIZE Extended SMTP extension is used on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1279,7 +1279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpUtf8Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1297,7 +1297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SuppressXAnonymousTls -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SuppressXAnonymousTls parameter specifies whether the X-ANONYMOUSTLS Extended SMTP extension is enabled or disabled on the Receive connector. Valid values are: @@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TarpitInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TarpitInterval parameter specifies the period of time to delay an SMTP response to a remote server that might be abusing the connection. The default value is 00:00:05 (5 seconds). @@ -1344,7 +1344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. A valid value for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`. The X.500Issuer value is found in the certificate's Issuer field, and the X.500Subject value is found in the certificate's Subject field. You can find these values by running the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet. Or, after you run Get-ExchangeCertificate to find the thumbprint value of the certificate, run the command `$TLSCert = Get-ExchangeCertificate -Thumbprint `, run the command `$TLSCertName = "$($TLSCert.Issuer)$($TLSCert.Subject)"` and then use the value $TLSCertName for this parameter. @@ -1362,7 +1362,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsDomainCapabilities -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsDomainCapabilities parameter specifies the capabilities that the Receive connector makes available to specific hosts outside of the organization. Remote hosts are authenticated with TLS with certificate validation before these capabilities are offered. @@ -1395,7 +1395,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportRole -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportRole parameter specifies the transport service on the Mailbox server where the Receive connector is created. Valid values are: @@ -1418,7 +1418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RecipientFilterConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RecipientFilterConfig.md index a2b2f7d24f..04a2802d81 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RecipientFilterConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RecipientFilterConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example makes the following changes to the Recipient Filter agent configura ### -BlockedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BlockedRecipients parameter specifies one or more SMTP addresses. To enter multiple SMTP addresses, separate the addresses by using a comma. The maximum number of individual SMTP addresses that you can input is 800. @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockListEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BlockListEnabled parameter specifies whether the Recipient Filter agent blocks messages sent to recipients listed in the BlockedRecipients parameter. Valid input for the BlockListEnabled parameter is $true or $false. The default setting is $false. When the BlockListEnabled parameter is set to $true, the Recipient Filter agent blocks messages sent to recipients listed in the BlockedRecipients parameter. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the Recipient Filter agent is enabled on the computer on which you're running the command. Valid input for the Enabled parameter is $true or $false. The default setting is $true. When the Enabled parameter is set to $true, the Recipient Filter agent is enabled on the computer on which you're running the command. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages received from unauthenticated connections by servers external to your organization are passed through the Recipient Filter agent for processing. Valid input for the ExternalMailEnabled parameter is $true or $false. The default setting is $true. When the ExternalMailEnabled parameter is set to $true, all messages received from unauthenticated connections by servers external to your organization are passed through the Recipient Filter agent for processing. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages from authenticated sender domains that belong to authoritative domains in the enterprise are passed through the Recipient Filter agent for processing. Valid input for the InternalMailEnabled parameter is $true or $false. The default setting is $false. When the InternalMailEnabled parameter is set to $true, all messages from authenticated sender domains that belong to authoritative domains in the enterprise are passed through the Recipient Filter agent for processing. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientValidationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientValidationEnabled parameter specifies whether the Recipient Filter agent blocks messages addressed to recipients that don't exist in the organization. Valid input for the RecipientValidationEnabled parameter is $true or $false. The default setting is $false. When the RecipientValidationEnabled parameter is set to $true, the Recipient Filter agent blocks messages addressed to recipients that don't exist in the organization. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RemoteDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RemoteDomain.md index ed3e25485e..2dff3a4d90 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RemoteDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RemoteDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ This example queries Active Directory for all remote domains for which auto repl ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the remote domain that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the remote domain. For example: @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowedOOFType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AllowedOOFType parameter specifies the type of automatic replies or out-of-office (also known as OOF) notifications than can be sent to recipients in the remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoForwardEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoForwardEnabled parameter specifies whether to allow messages that are auto-forwarded by client email programs in your organization. Valid values are: @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AutoReplyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AutoReplyEnabled parameter specifies whether to allow messages that are automatic replies from client email programs in your organization (for example, automatic reply messages that are generated by rules in Outlook). Valid values are: @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ByteEncoderTypeFor7BitCharsets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ByteEncoderTypeFor7BitCharsets parameter specifies the 7-bit transfer encoding method for MIME format for messages sent to this remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CharacterSet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CharacterSet parameter specifies a character set for MIME messages without defined character sets that are sent from your organization to recipients in the remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ContentType parameter specifies the outbound message content type and formatting. Valid values are: @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeliveryReportEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DeliveryReportEnabled parameter specifies whether to allow delivery reports from client software in your organization to recipients in the remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplaySenderName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: You should only modify this parameter under the direction of Microsoft Customer Service and Support. @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsInternal -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsInternal parameter specifies whether the recipients in the remote domain are considered to be internal recipients. Valid values are: @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LineWrapSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LineWrapSize parameter specifies the line-wrap size for messages to recipients in the remote domain. Valid values are an integer from 0 through 132 or the value to unlimited. The default value is unlimited. @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MeetingForwardNotificationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MeetingForwardNotificationEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable meeting forward notifications for recipients in the remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageCountThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the remote domain object. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NDRDiagnosticInfoEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NDREnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NDREnabled parameter specifies whether to allow non-delivery reports (also known NDRs or bounce messages) from your organization to recipients in the remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NonMimeCharacterSet -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NonMimeCharacterSet parameter specifies a character set for plain text messages without defined character sets that are sent from your organization to recipients in the remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PreferredInternetCodePageForShiftJis -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The PreferredInternetCodePageForShiftJis parameter specifies the specific code page to use for Shift JIS character encoding in messages that are sent to recipients in the remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequiredCharsetCoverage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RequiredCharsetCoverage parameter specifies a percentage threshold for characters in a message that must match to apply your organization's preferred character set before switching to automatic character set detection. @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetDeliveryDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TargetDeliveryDomain parameter specifies whether the remote domain is used in cross-forest deployments to generate target email addresses for new mail users that represent users in the other organization (for example, all mailboxes hosted on Exchange Online are represented as mail users in your on-premises organization). Valid values are: @@ -619,7 +619,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TNEFEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TNEFEnabled parameter specifies whether Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF) message encoding is used on messages sent to the remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustedMailInboundEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TrustedMailInboundEnabled parameter specifies whether messages from senders in the remote domain are treated as trusted messages. Valid values are: @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TrustedMailOutboundEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The TrustedMailOutboundEnabled parameter specifies whether messages sent to recipients in the remote domain are treated as trusted messages. Valid values are: @@ -683,7 +683,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseSimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The UseSimpleDisplayName parameter specifies whether the sender's simple display name is used for the From email address in messages sent to recipients in the remote domain. Valid values are: @@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RemoteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RemoteMailbox.md index c561807539..8d10964e6e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RemoteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RemoteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ This example configures delivery restrictions for the mailbox in the service tha ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the remote mailbox (mail user) that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mail user. For example: @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptMessagesOnlyFrom parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromDLMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AcceptMessagesOnlyFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from other senders are rejected. @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ACLableSyncedObjectEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ACLableSyncedObjectEnabled switch specifies whether the remote mailbox is an ACLableSyncedMailboxUser. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Alias -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Alias parameter specifies the Exchange alias (also known as the mail nickname) for the recipient. This value identifies the recipient as a mail-enabled object, and shouldn't be confused with multiple email addresses for the same recipient (also known as proxy addresses). A recipient can have only one Alias value. The maximum length is 64 characters. @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ArchiveName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ArchiveName parameter specifies the name of the archive mailbox. This is the name displayed to users in Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App). If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassModerationFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who is allowed to send messages to this moderated recipient without approval from a moderator. Valid values for this parameter are individual senders and groups in your organization. Specifying a group means all members of the group are allowed to send messages to this recipient without approval from a moderator. @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute10 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute10 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute11 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute11 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute12 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute12 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute13 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute13 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute14 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute14 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute15 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute15 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute6 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute6 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute7 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute7 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute8 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute8 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CustomAttribute9 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the CustomAttribute9 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. The maximum length is 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name for the mail user. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center, address lists, and Outlook. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EmailAddresses parameter specifies all email addresses (proxy addresses) for the recipient, including the primary SMTP address. In on-premises Exchange organizations, the primary SMTP address and other proxy addresses are typically set by email address policies. However, you can use this parameter to configure other proxy addresses for the recipient. For more information, see [Email address policies in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/email-addresses-and-address-books/email-address-policies/email-address-policies). @@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EmailAddressPolicyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EmailAddressPolicyEnabled parameter specifies whether to apply email address policies to this recipient. Valid values are: @@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExchangeGuid parameter specifies the ExchangeGuid property value of the mail user, which should match the ExchangeGuid value of the corresponding cloud mailbox. @@ -790,7 +790,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute1 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute2 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute3 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute3 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute4 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute4 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtensionCustomAttribute5 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter specifies a value for the ExtensionCustomAttribute5 property on the recipient. You can use this property to store custom information about the recipient, and to identify the recipient in filters. You can specify up to 1300 values separated by commas. @@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled parameter specifies whether this recipient is visible in address lists. Valid values are: @@ -949,7 +949,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImmutableId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImmutableId parameter is used by GAL synchronization (GALSync) and specifies a unique and immutable identifier in the form of an SMTP address for an Exchange mailbox used for federated delegation when requesting Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) tokens. If federation is configured for this mailbox and you don't set this parameter when you create the mailbox, Exchange creates the value for the immutable ID based upon the mailbox's ExchangeGUID and the federated account namespace, for example, 7a78e7c8-620e-4d85-99d3-c90d90f29699@mail.contoso.com. @@ -992,7 +992,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTip -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailTip parameter specifies the custom MailTip text for this recipient. The MailTip is shown to senders when they start drafting an email message to this recipient. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1015,7 +1015,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailTipTranslations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailTipTranslations parameter specifies additional languages for the custom MailTip text that's defined by the MailTip parameter. HTML tags are automatically added to the MailTip translation, additional HTML tags aren't supported, and the length of the MailTip translation can't exceed 175 displayed characters. @@ -1041,7 +1041,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModeratedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ModeratedBy parameter specifies one or more moderators for this recipient. A moderator approves messages sent to the recipient before the messages are delivered. A moderator must be a mailbox, mail user, or mail contact in your organization. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the moderator. For example: @@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ModerationEnabled parameter specifies whether moderation is enabled for this recipient. Valid value are: @@ -1095,7 +1095,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the mail user. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1113,7 +1113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrimarySmtpAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PrimarySmtpAddress parameter specifies the primary return email address that's used for the recipient. You can't use the EmailAddresses and PrimarySmtpAddress parameters in the same command. @@ -1135,7 +1135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecoverableItemsQuota parameter specifies the maximum size for the Recoverable Items folder of the mailbox. If the Recoverable Items folder reaches or exceeds this size, it no longer accepts messages. @@ -1167,7 +1167,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecoverableItemsWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecoverableItemsWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the Recoverable Items folder for the mailbox. If the Recoverable Items folder reaches or exceeds this size, Exchange logs an event to the application event log. @@ -1199,7 +1199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectMessagesFrom parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1234,7 +1234,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromDLMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectMessagesFromDLMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1269,7 +1269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RejectMessagesFromSendersOrMembers parameter specifies who isn't allowed to send messages to this recipient. Messages from these senders are rejected. @@ -1306,7 +1306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteRoutingAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteRoutingAddress parameter specifies the SMTP address of the mailbox in the service that's associated with this mail user. @@ -1326,7 +1326,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemovePicture -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemovePicture switch removes the picture from the mail user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1346,7 +1346,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveSpokenName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveSpokenName switch removes the spoken name from the mail user. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1366,7 +1366,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireSenderAuthenticationEnabled parameter specifies whether to accept messages only from authenticated (internal) senders. Valid values are: @@ -1389,7 +1389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ResetPasswordOnNextLogon parameter specifies whether the user must change their password the next time they log on. Valid values are: @@ -1410,7 +1410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SamAccountName parameter (also known as the pre-Windows 2000 user account or group name) specifies an object identifier that's compatible with older versions of Microsoft Windows client and server operating systems. The value can contain letters, numbers, spaces, periods (.), and the following characters: !, #, $, %, ^, &, -, \_, {, }, and ~. The last character can't be a period. Unicode characters are allowed, but accented characters might generate collisions (for example, o and ö match). The maximum length is 20 characters. @@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendModerationNotifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendModerationNotifications parameter specifies when moderation notification messages are sent. Valid values are: @@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Type -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Type parameter specifies the type for the mailbox in the service. Valid values are: @@ -1483,7 +1483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UserPrincipalName parameter specifies the logon name for the user account. The UPN uses an email address format: `username@domain`. Typically, the domain value is the domain where the user account resides. @@ -1501,7 +1501,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1519,7 +1519,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ResourceConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ResourceConfig.md index 5c934191af..b47989e46f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ResourceConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ResourceConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example adds the custom resource property Room/TV and removes Equipment/Lap ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourcePropertySchema -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ResourcePropertySchema parameter specifies the custom resource property that you want to make available to room or equipment mailboxes. This parameter uses the syntax `Room/` or `Equipment/` where the `` value doesn't contain spaces. For example, `Room/Whiteboard` or `Equipment/Van`. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ResubmitRequest.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ResubmitRequest.md index ac27df96d6..6f968b3786 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ResubmitRequest.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ResubmitRequest.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example disables the resubmit request with the identity 8. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the resubmit request you want to modify. Each resubmit request is identified by an incremented integer value. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter enables or disables an active resubmit request. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. Setting the value to $false disables the resubmit request. @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RetentionPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RetentionPolicy.md index be27958761..28d1b59219 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RetentionPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RetentionPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,13 +47,13 @@ Set-RetentionPolicy "MyPolicy" -RetentionPolicyTagLinks "MyRetentionPolicyTag" This example modifies the policy MyPolicy to link the retention policy tag MyRetentionPolicyTag with it. -The Identity parameter is a positional parameter. Positional parameters can be used without the label (Identity). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). +The Identity parameter is positional, which means you can use it without the -Identity label in the supported location in the command (in this case, first). For more information about positional parameters, see [About Parameters](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/microsoft.powershell.core/about/about_parameters). ## PARAMETERS ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name, distinguished name (DN), or GUID of the retention policy. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies a unique name for the retention policy. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionId parameter specifies the identity of the retention policy to make sure mailboxes moved between two Exchange organizations continue to have the same retention policy applied to them. For example, in a cross-forest deployment or in a cross-premises deployment, when a mailbox is moved from an on-premises Exchange server to the cloud, or a cloud-based mailbox is moved to an on-premises Exchange server, this parameter is used to make sure the same retention policy is applied to the mailbox. @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionPolicyTagLinks -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionPolicyTagLinks parameter specifies the identity of retention policy tags to associate with the retention policy. Mailboxes that get a retention policy applied have retention tags linked with that retention policy. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RetentionPolicyTag.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RetentionPolicyTag.md index cb2e87b762..b741d5fba9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RetentionPolicyTag.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RetentionPolicyTag.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ This example makes optional retention tags available to user Terry Adams using t ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name, distinguished name (DN), or GUID of the retention policy tag to be modified. @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies a mailbox for assigning opt-in tags. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgeLimitForRetention -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AgeLimitForRetention parameter specifies the age at which retention is enforced on an item. The age limit corresponds to the number of days from the date the item was delivered, or the date an item was created if it wasn't delivered. If this parameter isn't present and the RetentionEnabled parameter is set to $true, an error is returned. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Comment parameter specifies a comment for the retention policy tag. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LegacyManagedFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LegacyManagedFolder parameter specifies the name of a managed folder. The retention tag is created by using retention settings from the managed folder and its managed content settings. You can use this parameter to create retention tags based on existing managed folders to migrate users from managed folder mailbox policies to retention policies. @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LocalizedComment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LocalizedComment parameter specifies the localized comment and language for the retention policy tag. This comment is displayed in Microsoft Outlook based on the user's locale. @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LocalizedRetentionPolicyTagName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The LocalizedRetentionPolicyTagName parameter specifies a localized name for the retention policy tag. This name is displayed in Outlook based on the user's locale. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageClass -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MessageClass parameter specifies the message type to which the tag applies. If not specified, the default value is set to \*. @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MustDisplayCommentEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MustDisplayCommentEnabled parameter specifies whether the comment can be hidden. The default value is $true. @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the retention policy tag. @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OptionalInMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OptionalInMailbox parameter is used with the Mailbox parameter to assign personal tags to the mailbox. You can use this parameter to make available to a user a personal tag that isn't assigned to the retention policy applied to the specified mailbox. You can specify multiple personal tags separated by commas. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionAction parameter specifies the action for the retention policy. Valid values are: @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionEnabled parameter specifies whether the tag is enabled. When set to $false, the tag is disabled and no retention action is taken on messages that have the tag applied. @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetentionId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The RetentionId parameter specifies an alternate tag ID to ensure the retention tag found on mailbox items tagged in one Exchange organization matches the tag when the mailbox is moved to another Exchange organization (for example, in a cross-forest deployment or in a cross-premises deployment, when a mailbox is moved from an on-premises Exchange server to the cloud, or a cloud-based mailbox is moved to an on-premises Exchange server). @@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemTag -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SystemTag parameter specifies whether the retention policy tag is created for internal Exchange functionality. @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md index c7e9c8a83c..dd117830db 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RoleAssignmentPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ This example changes the default assignment policy. New mailboxes or mailboxes m ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the assignment policy to modify. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Description parameter specifies the description that's displayed when the role assignment policy is viewed using the Get-RoleAssignmentPolicy cmdlet. Enclose the description in quotation marks ("). @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IsDefault switch makes the assignment policy the default assignment policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the new name of the assignment policy. If the assignment policy name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). The maximum length of the name is 64 characters. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RoleGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RoleGroup.md index 085ea64b34..e67458b4f8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RoleGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RoleGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ The first command retrieves the credentials using the Get-Credential cmdlet and ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the name of the role group to modify. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedForeignGroup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The BypassSecurityGroupManagerCheck switch specifies whether to allow a user who isn't an owner of the group to modify or delete the group. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Description -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Description parameter specifies the description displayed when the role group is viewed using the Get-RoleGroup cmdlet. Enclose the description in quotation marks ("). @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the friendly name of the role group. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). This parameter has a maximum length of 256 characters. @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagedBy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ManagedBy parameter specifies the users or USG who can modify the configuration of a role group or add or remove members to or from a role group. The list you specify with this parameter overwrites the existing ManagedBy list. To add or remove individual role group managers, and for more information about modifying multivalued properties, see [Modifying multivalued properties](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/modifying-multivalued-properties-exchange-2013-help). @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the name of the role group. The name can contain up to 64 characters. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Security & Compliance, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RpcClientAccess.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RpcClientAccess.md index 0a9bafb950..f89351c27e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RpcClientAccess.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-RpcClientAccess.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ This example prevents Outlook Anywhere connections by Outlook 2013 clients that ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Client Access server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedClientVersions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BlockedClientVersions parameter specifies the RPC client versions that aren't allowed to connect to the specified Exchange server. For example, the Microsoft Exchange RPC Client Access service rejects an Outlook Anywhere connection if the version of Outlook is the specified value, or is in the specified range. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRequired -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EncryptionRequired parameter specifies whether encryption is required for RPC client connections. Valid values are: @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaximumConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaximumConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent client connections that are allowed by the Microsoft Exchange RPC Client Access service. The default value is 65536. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the configuration object in Active Directory. By default, this parameter is set to RpcClientAccess. @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SearchDocumentFormat.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SearchDocumentFormat.md index 71bbfc94b9..fe00863c4d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SearchDocumentFormat.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SearchDocumentFormat.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This command disables the Zip file format for indexing by Exchange Search. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the file format. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the file format is enabled. Set the parameter to $false to disable the format for content indexing. @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SendConnector.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SendConnector.md index 0bf6785c3c..1fa5337f50 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SendConnector.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SendConnector.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ This example makes the following configuration changes to the Send connector nam ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GUID or connector name that represents the Send connector you want to modify. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressSpaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AddressSpaces parameter specifies the domain names to which the Send connector routes mail. The complete syntax for entering each address space is: `AddressSpaceType:AddressSpace;AddressSpaceCost`. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthenticationCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AuthenticationCredential parameter specifies the username and password that's required to use the connector. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CloudServicesMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note**: We recommend that you don't use this parameter unless you are directed to do so by Microsoft Customer Service and Support, or by specific product documentation. Instead, use the Hybrid Configuration wizard to configure mail flow between your on-premises and cloud organizations. For more information, see [Hybrid Configuration wizard](https://learn.microsoft.com/exchange/hybrid-configuration-wizard). @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comment -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE TheComment parameter specifies an optional comment. You must enclose the Comment parameter in quotation marks ("), for example: "this is an admin note". @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectorType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectorType parameter specifies whether the connector is used in hybrid deployments to send messages to Microsoft 365. Valid values are: @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectionInactivityTimeOut -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectionInactivityTimeOut parameter specifies the maximum time an idle connection can remain open. The default value is ten minutes. @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DNSRoutingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DNSRoutingEnabled parameter specifies whether the Send connector uses Domain Name System (DNS) to route mail. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default value is $true. If you specify a SmartHosts parameter, the DNSRoutingEnabled parameter must be $false. @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainSecureEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainSecureEnabled parameter is part of the process to enable mutual Transport Layer Security (TLS) authentication for the domains serviced by this Send connector. Mutual TLS authentication functions correctly only when the following conditions are met: @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the Send connector to process email messages. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ErrorPolicies -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ErrorPolicies parameter specifies how communication errors are treated. Possible values are the following: @@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceHELO -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceHELO parameter specifies whether HELO is sent instead of the default EHLO. Valid values are $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fqdn -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Fqdn parameter specifies the FQDN used as the source server for connected messaging servers that use the Send connector to receive outgoing messages. The value of this parameter is displayed to connected messaging servers whenever a source server name is required, as in the following examples: @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FrontendProxyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The FrontendProxyEnabled parameter routes outbound messages through the CAS server, where destination specific routing, such as DNS or IP address, is set, when the parameter is set to $true. @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreSTARTTLS -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreSTARTTLS parameter specifies whether to ignore the StartTLS option offered by a remote sending server. This parameter is used with remote domains. This parameter must be set to $false if the RequireTLS parameter is set to $true. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. @@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsScopedConnector -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsScopedConnector parameter specifies the availability of the connector to other Mailbox servers with the Transport service. When the value of this parameter is $false, the connector can be used by all Mailbox servers in the Exchange organization. When the value of this parameter is $true, the connector can only be used by Transport service on Mailbox servers in the same Active Directory site. The default value is $false. @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxMessageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxMessageSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can pass through a connector. The default value is 25 MB. @@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the administrator-supplied name of the connector. You must enclose the Name parameter in quotation marks (") if the name contains spaces. For example, "New Send Connector". @@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Port -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Port parameter specifies the port number for smart host forwarding, if you specify a value in the SmartHosts parameter. The valid input range is an integer from 0 through 65535. The default value is 25. In most organizations, the port number is set to 25. @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProtocolLoggingLevel parameter specifies whether to enable protocol logging. Verbose enables protocol logging. None disables protocol logging. The location of the Send connector protocol logs for all Send connectors configured in the Transport service on a Mailbox server or on an Edge server is specified with the SendProtocolLogPath parameter of the Set-TransportService cmdlet. @@ -630,7 +630,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireOorg -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequireTLS -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RequireTLS parameter specifies whether all messages sent through this connector must be transmitted using TLS. The default value is $false. @@ -666,7 +666,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmartHostAuthMechanism -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SmartHostAuthMechanism parameter specifies the smart host authentication mechanism to use for authentication with a remote server. Use this parameter only when a smart host is configured and the DNSRoutingEnabled parameter is set to $false. Valid values are None, BasicAuth, BasicAuthRequireTLS, ExchangeServer, and ExternalAuthoritative. All values are mutually exclusive. If you select BasicAuth or BasicAuthRequireTLS, you must use the AuthenticationCredential parameter to specify the authentication credential. @@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmartHosts -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SmartHosts parameter specifies the smart hosts the Send connector uses to route mail. This parameter is required if you set the DNSRoutingEnabled parameter to $false and it must be specified on the same command line. The SmartHosts parameter takes one or more FQDNs, such as server.contoso.com, or one or more IP addresses, or a combination of both FQDNs and IP addresses. If you enter an IP address, you must enter the IP address as a literal. For example, 10.10.1.1. The smart host identity can be the FQDN of a smart-host server, a mail exchanger (MX) record, or an address (A) record. If you configure an FQDN as the smart host identity, the source server for the Send connector must be able to use DNS name resolution to locate the smart-host server. @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of messages the server can send per connection. @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceIPAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceIPAddress parameter specifies the local IP address to use as the endpoint for an SMTP connection to a remote messaging server. The default IP address is 0.0.0.0. This value means that the server can use any available local IP address. This parameter is valid only for Send connectors configured on an Edge server. @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceTransportServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SourceTransportServers parameter specifies the names of the Mailbox servers that can use this Send connector. This parameter isn't valid for Send connectors configured on an Edge server. @@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsAuthLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsAuthLevel parameter specifies the TLS authentication level that is used for outbound TLS connections established by this Send connector. Valid values are: @@ -788,7 +788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsCertificateName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsCertificateName parameter specifies the X.509 certificate to use for TLS encryption. A valid value for this parameter is `"X.500IssuerX.500Subject"`. The X.500Issuer value is found in the certificate's Issuer field, and the X.500Subject value is found in the certificate's Subject field. You can find these values by running the Get-ExchangeCertificate cmdlet. Or, after you run Get-ExchangeCertificate to find the thumbprint value of the certificate, run the command `$TLSCert = Get-ExchangeCertificate -Thumbprint `, run the command `$TLSCertName = "$($TLSCert.Issuer)$($TLSCert.Subject)"`, and then use the value $TLSCertName for this parameter. @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TlsDomain -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TlsDomain parameter specifies the domain name that the Send connector uses to verify the FQDN of the target certificate when establishing a TLS secured connection. @@ -831,7 +831,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseExternalDNSServersEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseExternalDNSServersEnabled parameter specifies whether this Send connector uses the external DNS list specified by the ExternalDNSServers parameter of the Set-TransportService cmdlet. The default value is $false. @@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderFilterConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderFilterConfig.md index dd199ee3db..e5828cb5d1 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderFilterConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderFilterConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ It adds user1@contoso.com and user2@contoso.com to the blocked senders list with ### -Action -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Action parameter specifies the action that the Sender Filter agent takes on messages from blocked senders or domains. Valid input for this parameter is StampStatus or Reject. The default value is Reject. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlankSenderBlockingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BlankSenderBlockingEnabled parameter blocks or allows messages that don't contain a sender value in the SMTP command MAIL FROM. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BlockedDomains parameter specifies the domain names to block. When the Sender Filter agent encounters a message from a domain on this list, the Sender Filter agent takes the action specified by the Action parameter. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedDomainsAndSubdomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BlockedDomainsAndSubdomains parameter specifies the domain names to block. When the Sender Filter agent encounters a message from a domain on this list, or from any of the domain's subdomains, the Sender Filter agent takes the action specified by the Action parameter. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlockedSenders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BlockedSenders parameter specifies one or more SMTP email addresses to block. When the Sender Filter agent encounters a message from a sender on this list, the Sender Filter agent takes the action specified by the Action parameter. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter enables or disables sender filtering on your Exchange server. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter enables or disables sender filtering on unauthenticated connections from external messaging servers. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter enables or disables sender filtering on authenticated connections from authoritative domains in your organization. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientBlockedSenderAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientBlockedSenderAction parameter specifies the action that the Sender Filter agent takes on messages received from blocked senders that are defined by SafeList aggregation. SafeList aggregation adds blocked senders that are defined by your users in Microsoft Outlook or Outlook on the web to the Blocked Senders list that's used by the Sender Filter agent. @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderIdConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderIdConfig.md index 92263d316d..0e2577dcff 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderIdConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderIdConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example makes the following modifications to the Sender ID configuration: ### -BypassedRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedRecipients parameter specifies one or more SMTP email addresses. Messages bound for the email addresses listed in this parameter are excluded from processing by the Sender ID agent. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. You can enter a maximum of 100 email addresses. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BypassedSenderDomains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BypassedSenderDomains parameter specifies one or more domain names. Messages that originate from the domains listed in this parameter are excluded from processing by the Sender ID agent. You can specify multiple values separated by commas. You can enter a maximum of 100 domain names. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter specifies whether the Sender ID agent is enabled on the computer on which you're running the command. Valid input for the Enabled parameter is $true or $false. The default setting is $true. When the Enabled parameter is set to $true, the Sender ID agent is enabled on the computer on which you're running the command. @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages from unauthenticated connections external to your organization are passed through the Sender ID agent for processing. Valid input for the ExternalMailEnabled parameter is $true or $false. The default setting is $true. When the ExternalMailEnabled parameter is set to $true, all messages from unauthenticated connections external to your organization are passed through the Sender ID agent for processing. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter specifies whether all messages from authenticated sender domains that belong to authoritative domains in your enterprise are passed through the Sender ID agent for processing. Valid input for the InternalMailEnabled parameter is $true or $false. The default setting is $false. When the InternalMailEnabled parameter is set to $true, all messages from authenticated sender domains that belong to authoritative domains in your enterprise are passed through the Sender ID agent for processing. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SpoofedDomainAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SpoofedDomainAction parameter specifies the action that the Sender ID agent takes on the message when the sender domain shows evidence of being spoofed. The SpoofedDomainAction parameter takes the following values: StampStatus, Reject or Delete. The default value is StampStatus. @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TempErrorAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TempErrorAction parameter specifies the action that the Sender ID agent takes on the message when a Sender ID status of TempError is returned. The TempErrorAction parameter takes the following values: StampStatus, Reject or Delete. The default value is StampStatus. @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderReputationConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderReputationConfig.md index 676c164d8d..d31d0a7da9 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderReputationConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SenderReputationConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailControl-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ It sets the number of hours that senders are put on the blocked senders list to ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Enabled parameter enables or disables sender reputation on the Exchange server. Valid values are: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalMailEnabled parameter allows or prevents sender reputation from processing messages from unauthenticated connections that are external to your Exchange organization. Valid values are: @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalMailEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalMailEnabled parameter allows or prevents sender reputation from processing messages from authenticated sender domains that are authoritative domains in your Exchange organization. Valid values are: @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OpenProxyDetectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OpenProxyDetectionEnabled parameter allows or prevents sender reputation from attempting to connect to the message's source IP address to send a test message back to the Exchange server. This test determines if the sender is an open proxy server. Valid values are: @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProxyServerName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProxyServerName parameter specifies the name or IP address of your organization's proxy server. Sender reputation uses this value to connect to the Internet for open proxy server detection. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProxyServerPort -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProxyServerPort parameter specifies the port number that's used by your organization's proxy server. Sender reputation uses this value to connect to the Internet for open proxy server detection. @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProxyServerType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProxyServerType parameter specifies the type of your organization's proxy server. Sender reputation uses this value to connect to the Internet for open proxy server detection. Valid values are: @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderBlockingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SenderBlockingEnabled parameter allows or prevents sender reputation from blocking senders when their sender reputation level (SRL) meets or exceeds the value of the SrlBlockThreshold parameter. Valid values are: @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderBlockingPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SenderBlockingPeriod parameter specifies the number of hours that a sender remains on the blocked senders list when their SRL meets or exceeds the value of the SrlBlockThreshold parameter. Valid input for this parameter is an integer from 0 through 48. The default value is 24. @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SrlBlockThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SrlBlockThreshold specifies the SRL rating that must be met or exceeded for sender reputation to block a sender. Valid input for this parameter is an integer from 0 through 9. The default value is 7. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ServerComponentState.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ServerComponentState.md index c0fc8e35b1..a128777da6 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ServerComponentState.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ServerComponentState.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ The second command changes the state to Active after the maintenance is over (re ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Component -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Component parameter specifies the component or endpoint for which you want to set the state. @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Requester -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Requester parameter specifies the system requesting this state change. Valid values are: @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -State -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The State parameter specifies the state that you want for the component. Valid values are: @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LocalOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The LocalOnly switch specifies that the changes are written to the registry of the Exchange server only and not to Active Directory. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoteOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoteOnly switch specifies that the changes are written to Active Directory only and not to the registry of the Exchange server. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TimeoutInSeconds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ServerMonitor.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ServerMonitor.md index 987756400a..a04cf496f3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ServerMonitor.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ServerMonitor.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ This example sets the maintenance monitor on the Exch01 server. ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the monitor identity. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Repairing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Repairing parameter specifies whether to set or clear the repairing property on a monitor. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetResource -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetResource parameter specifies the target resource that you want to set the monitor on. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SettingOverride.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SettingOverride.md index 99ff89a1af..440f1e77e8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SettingOverride.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SettingOverride.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example modifies the setting override named Change OAB Generation on the se ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the setting override that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the override. For example: @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxVersion parameter specifies the latest version of Exchange 2016 that this override applies to (up to and including the specified value). @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MinVersion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MinVersion parameter specifies the earliest version of Exchange 2016 that this override applies to (up to and including the specified value). @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Parameters parameter specifies one or more parameters for the override that are available for the combination of the Component and Section parameter values. This parameter uses the syntax: `@("Parameter1=Value1","Parameter2=Value2"...)`. For example: @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Reason -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Reason parameter is used to provide a description of why the override was created. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the name of the Exchange 2016 server where you want the override applied. You can specify a single Exchange 2016 server name, or an array of Exchange 2016 server name wildcards. For example, if you have three Exchange 2016 servers named Exchange01, Exchange02 and Exchange03, specify the value Exchange\* to apply the override to all of them. @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SharingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SharingPolicy.md index 029d5a0bd5..6801283c4d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SharingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SharingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.CalendarsAndGroups-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ This example disables the sharing policy SharingPolicy01. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the sharing policy that you want to modify. You can use one of the following values: @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Default -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Default switch specifies that the sharing policy is the default sharing policy for all mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Domains -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Domains parameter specifies the domains and the associated sharing options for those domains in the sharing policy. Values for this parameter use the basic syntax: `'Domain: SharingPolicyAction'`. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable the sharing policy. Valid values for this parameter are $true or $false. The default is $true. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the sharing policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SiteMailbox.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SiteMailbox.md index a75022387e..19c2ab872a 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SiteMailbox.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SiteMailbox.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ This example disables the duplication of email messages in the site mailbox SMO\ ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the site mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the site mailbox. For example: @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Active -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Active parameter specifies whether to change the site mailbox's lifecycle status. This parameter accepts $true or $false. This parameter is intended for use only by the user interface. We recommend that you don't use this parameter in the Exchange Management Shell. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the site mailbox. @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Members -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is intended for use only by the user interface. We recommend that you don't use this parameter. @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Owners -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is intended for use only by the user interface. We recommend that you don't use this parameter. @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveDuplicateMessages -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RemoveDuplicateMessages parameter specifies that when users post messages to a site mailbox, duplicate messages are deleted. This parameter accepts the values of $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SharePointUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SharePointUrl parameter specifies the URL of the SharePoint site, for example, "https://myserver/teams/edu". @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShowInMyClient -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is intended for use only by the user interface. We recommend that you don't use this parameter. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SyncEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SyncEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable synchronization for the site mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md index 5ff1502eb6..868f1e990d 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SiteMailboxProvisioningPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ This example changes the default provisioning policy named SM\_DefaultPolicy and ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the site mailbox provisioning policy that you want to edit. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AliasPrefix -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AliasPrefix parameter specifies the custom text prefix to add to the aliases of new site mailboxes. Valid values are: @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DefaultAliasPrefixEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DefaultAliasPrefixEnabled parameter specifies whether new site mailboxes have the default prefix text added to the alias. Valid values are: @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsDefault -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsDefault switch specifies that the site mailbox provisioning policy is the default policy. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IssueWarningQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IssueWarningQuota parameter specifies the warning threshold for the size of the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the user receives a descriptive warning message. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxReceiveSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a message that can be sent to the site mailbox. Messages larger than the maximum size are rejected. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the site mailbox provisioning policy. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ProhibitSendReceiveQuota -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ProhibitSendReceiveQuota parameter specifies a size limit for the mailbox. If the mailbox reaches or exceeds this size, the mailbox can't send or receive new messages. Messages sent to the mailbox are returned to the sender with a descriptive error message. This value effectively determines the maximum size of the mailbox. @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SmimeConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SmimeConfig.md index a86aa867c9..b8158b73ae 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SmimeConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SmimeConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ This example sets the S/MIME configuration to allow users the choice of signing ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAAllowUserChoiceOfSigningCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAAllowUserChoiceOfSigningCertificate parameter specifies whether to allow users to select the certificate to use when they digitally sign email messages in Outlook on the web. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAAlwaysEncrypt -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAAlwaysEncrypt parameter specifies whether all outgoing messages are automatically encrypted in Outlook on the web. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAAlwaysSign -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAAlwaysSign parameter specifies whether all outgoing messages are automatically signed in Outlook on the web. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWABCCEncryptedEmailForking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWABCCEncryptedEmailForking parameter specifies how Bcc messages are encrypted in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWACheckCRLOnSend -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWACheckCRLOnSend parameter specifies how the certificate revocation list (CRL) check is enforced when an email message is sent in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAClearSign -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAClearSign parameter specifies how email messages are signed in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWACopyRecipientHeaders -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWACRLConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWACRLConnectionTimeout parameter specifies the time in milliseconds that Outlook on the web waits while connecting to retrieve a single CRL as part of a certificate validation operation. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWACRLRetrievalTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWACRLRetrievalTimeout parameter specifies the time in milliseconds that Outlook on the web waits to retrieve all CRLs when validating a certificate. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWADisableCRLCheck -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWADisableCRLCheck parameter enables or disables CRL checking in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWADLExpansionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWADLExpansionTimeout parameter specifies the time in milliseconds that Outlook on the web waits when sending encrypted messages to members of a distribution group that requires expansion. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAEncryptionAlgorithms -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAEncryptionAlgorithms parameter specifies a list of symmetric encryption algorithms that are used by Outlook on the web to encrypt messages. Valid values are: @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAEncryptTemporaryBuffers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAEncryptTemporaryBuffers parameter specifies whether the Outlook on the web client-side temporary message storage buffers are encrypted. Valid values are: @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAForceSMIMEClientUpgrade -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAForceSMIMEClientUpgrade parameter specifies whether or not users are forced to upgrade an S/MIME control that's older than their current version in Outlook on the web. @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAIncludeCertificateChainAndRootCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAIncludeCertificateChainAndRootCertificate parameter specifies whether the certificate chains and root certificates of the signing or encryption certificates are included in the message in Outlook on the web. @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAIncludeCertificateChainWithoutRootCertificate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAIncludeCertificateChainWithoutRootCertificate parameter specifies whether the certificate chains of the signing or encryption certificates are included in messages in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAIncludeSMIMECapabilitiesInMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAIncludeSMIMECapabilitiesInMessage parameter specifies whether signed and encrypted messages in Outlook on the web include attributes that describe the supported encryption and signing algorithms. @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAOnlyUseSmartCard -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAOnlyUseSmartCard parameter specifies whether smartcard-based certificates are required for Outlook on the web message signing and decryption. Valid values are: @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWASenderCertificateAttributesToDisplay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWASenderCertificateAttributesToDisplay parameter controls which certificate attributes are displayed when signature verification proceeds despite a mismatch between the sender's email address and the email address in sender's certificate. @@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWASignedEmailCertificateInclusion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWASignedEmailCertificateInclusion parameter specifies whether the sender's encryption certificate is excluded from a signed email message in Outlook on the web. Valid values are: @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWASigningAlgorithms -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWASigningAlgorithms parameter specifies the list of symmetric encryption signing algorithms that are used by Outlook on the web to sign messages with the S/MIME control. Valid values are: @@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWATripleWrapSignedEncryptedMail -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWATripleWrapSignedEncryptedMail parameter specifies whether signed and encrypted email messages in Outlook on the web are triple-wrapped. Valid values are: @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAUseKeyIdentifier -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAUseKeyIdentifier parameter specifies whether a certificate's key identifier is used to encode the asymmetrically encrypted token in Outlook on the web. @@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAUseSecondaryProxiesWhenFindingCertificates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The OWAUseSecondaryProxiesWhenFindingCertificates parameter specifies whether alternative proxies are used during the certificate search in Outlook on the web. @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SMIMECertificateIssuingCA -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SMIMECertificateIssuingCA parameter specifies the serialized certificate store (SST) that contains the Certificate Authority (CA) signing and intermediate certificate information. @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SweepRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SweepRule.md index 444b193a61..e28e857498 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SweepRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SweepRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ This example modifies the existing rule that has the rule ID value x2hlsdpGmUifj ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the Sweep rule that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DestinationFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DestinationFolder parameter specifies an action for the Sweep rule that moves messages to the specified folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFlagged -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfPinned -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -KeepForDays -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The KeepForDays parameter specifies an action for the Sweep rule that specifies the number of days to keep messages that match the conditions of the rule. After the number of days have passed, the messages are moved to the location that's specified by the DestinationFolder parameter (by default, the Deleted Items folder). @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -KeepLatest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The KeepLatest parameter specifies an action for the Sweep rule that specifies the number of messages to keep that match the conditions of the rule. After the number of messages is exceeded, the oldest messages are moved to the location that's specified by the DestinationFolder parameter (by default, the Deleted Items folder). @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Mailbox parameter specifies the mailbox that contains the rule you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Name parameter specifies the name of the Sweep rule. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Provider -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Provider parameter specifies the provider for the Sweep rule. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Sender -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Sender parameter specifies a condition for the Sweep rule that looks for the specified sender in messages. For internal senders, you can use any value that uniquely identifies the sender. For example: @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SourceFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SourceFolder parameter specifies a condition for the Sweep rule that looks for messages in the specified folder. The syntax is `MailboxID:\ParentFolder[\SubFolder]`. @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SystemCategory -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The SystemCategory parameter specifies a condition for the sweep rule that looks for messages with the specified system category. System categories are available to all mailboxes in the organization. Valid values are: @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SystemMessage.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SystemMessage.md index 77c85b47e4..7b2c217f03 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SystemMessage.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-SystemMessage.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example modifies the text of the custom English WarningMailbox quota messag ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the custom system message that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the system message. For example: @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies a descriptive name for the system message. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Original -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Original switch specifies whether to stop using the custom system message and start using the default system message. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Text -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Text parameter specifies the text in the custom system message. The text should explain why the system message was sent and any actions that the user should take. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TextMessagingAccount.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TextMessagingAccount.md index ee1c667d6f..550a18a31f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TextMessagingAccount.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TextMessagingAccount.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ This example sets the region, mobile operator and notification phone number for ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the target mailbox. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox. For example: @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CountryRegionId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The CountryRegionId parameter specifies the country/region that your mobile phone is registered in. Although this parameter accepts any valid ISO 3166-1 two-letter country code value (for example, AU for Australia), the following values correspond to the country/region selections that are available in the text messaging settings in Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App): @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobileOperatorId -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MobileOperatorId parameter specifies the mobile operator (carrier) for your phone. Although this parameter accepts any random number, the following values correspond to the country/region and mobile operator selections that are available in the text messaging settings in Outlook on the web (formerly known as Outlook Web App): @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotificationPhoneNumber -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The NotificationPhoneNumber parameter specifies the telephone number to use for your text messaging notifications. This parameter uses the E.164 format: `+` (for example, `+15551234567`). @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ThrottlingPolicy.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ThrottlingPolicy.md index de0f211360..14a41dfeb7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ThrottlingPolicy.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ThrottlingPolicy.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.WebClient-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -209,9 +209,13 @@ This example modifies a throttling policy so that it restricts a user to be able ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE -The Identity parameter uniquely identifies the throttling policy that you want to modify values for. The name you use is the name of the throttling policy object in Active Directory. +The Identity parameter specifies the throttling policy that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: + +- Name +- Distinguished name (DN) +- GUID ```yaml Type: ThrottlingPolicyIdParameter @@ -227,7 +231,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an anonymous user before the user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -245,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an anonymous user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -263,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many anonymous connections can be made to a user's calendar data at the same time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If anonymous users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The AnonymousMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 1. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -341,7 +345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnonymousRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AnonymousRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an anonymous user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -359,7 +363,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -377,7 +381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -395,7 +399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -413,7 +417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BookingSelfServiceRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -431,7 +435,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ComplianceMaxExpansionDGRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ComplianceMaxExpansionDGRecipients parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients to expand in distribution groups when a discovery search is looking for a specified recipient. @@ -449,7 +453,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ComplianceMaxExpansionNestedDGs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ComplianceMaxExpansionNestedDGs parameter specifies the maximum number of nested distribution groups to expand when a discovery search is looking for a specified recipient. @@ -467,7 +471,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -488,7 +492,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -506,7 +510,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -524,7 +528,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -542,7 +546,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConsensusRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -560,7 +564,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CpaCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a cross-premises user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -578,7 +582,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CpaMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a cross-premises user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -596,7 +600,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CPAMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections a cross-premises user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The CpaMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -652,7 +656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CpaRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CpaRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which a cross premises user budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -690,7 +694,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxConcurrency parameter specifies the number of concurrent discovery search executions that a user can have at the same time. To modify the discovery throttling parameters, create a new policy and name it "DiscoveryThrottlingPolicy". @@ -708,7 +712,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxKeywords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxKeywords parameter specifies the maximum number of keywords that a user can include in a discovery search. For more information, see [Search-Mailbox](https://learn.microsoft.com/powershell/module/exchangepowershell/search-mailbox). @@ -726,7 +730,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxKeywordsPerPage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxKeywordsPerPage parameter specifies the number of keywords for which to show statistics on a single page in the EAC. @@ -744,7 +748,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxMailboxes parameter specifies the maximum number of source mailboxes that a user can include in a discovery search. @@ -762,7 +766,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxPreviewSearchMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxPreviewSearchMailboxes parameter specifies the maximum number of mailboxes that a user can include in eDiscovery Search Preview. @@ -780,7 +784,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxRefinerResults -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -798,7 +802,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxSearchQueueDepth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxSearchQueueDepth parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent discovery search threads that can be active at the same time. @@ -816,7 +820,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryMaxStatsSearchMailboxes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryMaxStatsSearchMailboxes parameter specifies the maximum number of mailboxes that a user can search in an In-Place eDiscovery search without being able to view the statistics. When the number of mailboxes configured with the DiscoveryMaxStatsSearchMailboxes parameter is exceeded, the user must copy the search results to a discovery mailbox to view the statistics for the discovery search. For more information, see [In-Place eDiscovery in Exchange Server](https://learn.microsoft.com/Exchange/policy-and-compliance/ediscovery/ediscovery). @@ -834,7 +838,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoveryPreviewSearchResultsPageSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoveryPreviewSearchResultsPageSize parameter specifies the number of messages displayed on a single page in eDiscovery Search Preview. @@ -852,7 +856,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiscoverySearchTimeoutPeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DiscoverySearchTimeoutPeriod parameter specifies the number of minutes that a discovery search runs before it times out. @@ -870,7 +874,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -890,7 +894,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Exchange ActiveSync user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -908,7 +912,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Exchange ActiveSync user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -926,7 +930,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EASMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Exchange ActiveSync user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The EasMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 10. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -944,7 +948,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EASMaxDeviceDeletesPerMonth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxDeviceDeletesPerMonth parameter specifies a limit to the number of Exchange ActiveSync partnerships that a user can delete per month. By default, each user can delete a maximum of 20 partnerships per calendar month. When the limit is reached, the partnership deletion attempt fails and an error message is displayed to the user. @@ -962,7 +966,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EASMaxDevices -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxDevices parameter specifies a limit to the number of Exchange ActiveSync partnerships that a user can have at one time. By default, each user can create 100 Exchange ActiveSync partnerships with their Exchange account. After users exceed the limit, they must delete one of their existing partnerships before they can create any more new partnerships. An email error message describing the limitation is sent to the user when the limit is exceeded. Additionally, an event is logged in the Application log when a user exceeds the limit. @@ -980,7 +984,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasMaxInactivityForDeviceCleanup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasMaxInactivityForDeviceCleanup parameter specifies the length of time that a user's device partnerships remain active. By default, there is no limit to the number of days that a user's device partnerships remain active. Use this value if you want to minimize the amount of inactive device partnerships in your organization. To use this setting, specify a value in days since the user's last sync time to cause the device partnership to be removed. @@ -1058,7 +1062,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EasRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EasRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Exchange ActiveSync user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1076,7 +1080,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1094,7 +1098,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1112,7 +1116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1130,7 +1134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionRecipientRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1148,7 +1152,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1166,7 +1170,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1184,7 +1188,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1202,7 +1206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EncryptionSenderRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1220,7 +1224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsCostThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsCostThreshold parameter specifies the cost threshold for Exchange Web Services users. @@ -1238,7 +1242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Exchange Web Services user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -1256,7 +1260,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Exchange Web Services user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1314,7 +1318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EWSMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Exchange Web Services user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The EwsMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 10. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -1332,7 +1336,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EWSMaxSubscriptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsMaxSubscriptions parameter specifies the maximum number of active push and pull subscriptions that an Exchange Web Services user can have on a specified Exchange server at the same time. If a user tries to create more subscriptions than the configured maximum, the subscription fails, and an event is logged in Event Viewer. @@ -1410,7 +1414,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -EwsRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The EwsRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Exchange Web Services user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1428,7 +1432,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExchangeMaxCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExchangeMaxCmdlets parameter specifies the number of cmdlets that can be executed within a specific time period before their execution is slowed down. The value specified by this parameter should be less than the value specified by the PowerShellMaxCmdlets parameter. @@ -1448,7 +1452,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1468,7 +1472,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForwardeeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForwardeeLimit parameter specifies the limits for the number of recipients that can be configured in Inbox Rules when using the forward or redirect action. This parameter doesn't limit the number of messages that can be forwarded or redirected to the recipients that are configured. @@ -1486,7 +1490,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an IMAP user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -1504,7 +1508,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an IMAP user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1522,7 +1526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IMAPMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an IMAP user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The ImapMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -1600,7 +1604,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ImapRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ImapRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the IMAP user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1618,7 +1622,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IsServiceAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IsServiceAccount switch specifies that the user accounts associated with this policy are moderated by per-user thresholds and the health of system resources (for example, overall CPU usage). You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1640,7 +1644,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRateLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRateLimit parameter specifies the number of messages per minute that can be submitted to transport by POP3 or IMAP4 clients that use SMTP. Clients receive a transient error if they submit messages at a rate that exceeds the value of this parameter. Exchange attempts to connect and send the messages at a later time. @@ -1658,7 +1662,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the name of the object in Active Directory. The default policy is named `DefaultThrottlingPolicy`. @@ -1676,7 +1680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1694,7 +1698,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1712,7 +1716,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1730,7 +1734,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxSocketConnectionsPerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1748,7 +1752,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxSocketConnectionsPerUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1766,7 +1770,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceMaxSubscriptions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1784,7 +1788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutlookServiceRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1802,7 +1806,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Outlook on the web user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -1820,7 +1824,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Outlook on the web user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1838,7 +1842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OWAMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Outlook on the web user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -1920,7 +1924,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Outlook on the web user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -1938,7 +1942,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for an Outlook on the web voice user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -1956,7 +1960,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that an Outlook on the web voice user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -1974,7 +1978,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an Outlook on the web voice user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The OwaVoiceMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 5. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -1992,7 +1996,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OwaVoiceRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OwaVoiceRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which an Outlook on the web voice user's budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2010,7 +2014,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -2028,7 +2032,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2046,7 +2050,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -POPMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections a POP user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. The PopMaxConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 2147483647 inclusive. The default value is 20. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -2124,7 +2128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PopRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PopRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the user budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2142,7 +2146,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -2160,7 +2164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2178,7 +2182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth parameter specifies the number of operations allowed to be executed by the user. This value directly affects the behavior of the PowerShellMaxCmdlets and PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameters. For example, the PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter consumes at least two operations defined by the PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth parameter but additional operations are also consumed per cmdlet execution. The number of operations depends on the cmdlets executed. We recommend that the value for the PowerShellMaxCmdletQueueDepth parameter be at least three times larger than the value of the PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter. This parameter doesn't affect Exchange admin center operations or Exchange Web Services operations. @@ -2196,7 +2200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxCmdlets parameter specifies the number of cmdlets that can be executed within a specific time period before their execution is stopped. The value specified by this parameter should be more than the value specified by the ExchangeMaxCmdlets parameter. The time period used for this limit is specified by the PowerShellMaxCmdletsTimePeriod parameter. Both values should be set at the same time. @@ -2214,7 +2218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxCmdletsTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxCmdletsTimePeriod parameter specifies the time period, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine whether the number of cmdlets being executed exceeds the limits specified by the PowerShellMaxCmdlets and ExchangeMaxCmdlets parameters. @@ -2232,7 +2236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter specifies different information depending on context: @@ -2255,7 +2259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets parameter specifies the number of destructive cmdlets that can be executed within a specific time period before their execution is stopped. Destructive cmdlets are cmdlets that can make significant changes to user data and configuration settings in your Exchange organization. Throttling these cmdlets might help prevent accidental data loss. The following cmdlets are designated as destructive: @@ -2285,7 +2289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdletsTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdletsTimePeriod parameter specifies the time period, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine how many destructive cmdlets can be run. You set a value for this parameter when you set the PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets parameter. Both values should be set at the same time. For more information, see the description for the PowerShellMaxDestructiveCmdlets parameter. @@ -2303,7 +2307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxOperations -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxOperations parameter specifies the protocol-level operations that are used to send and receive data. If the execution of a cmdlet results in a significant number of operations (for example, if there is a lot of input/output occurring), throttling might occur. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2321,7 +2325,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxRunspaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxRunspaces parameter specifies the number of concurrent Windows PowerShell sessions that a user is allowed to have. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2339,7 +2343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxRunspacesTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxRunspacesTimePeriod parameter specifies the time period, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine how many Windows PowerShell sessions can be run. You set this value when you set the PowerShellMaxRunspaces parameter. @@ -2357,7 +2361,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency parameter limits the number of concurrent Windows PowerShell connections per tenant organization. By default, the limit for concurrent Windows PowerShell connections per tenant organization is set to 9. If users in a tenant organization try to make more concurrent requests than the limit set by the PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency parameter, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. This limit is enforced even if a single user hasn't exceeded the per-user limit set by the PowerShellMaxConcurrency parameter. The PowerShellMaxTenantConcurrency parameter has a valid range from 0 through 100 inclusive. To indicate that the number of concurrent connections should be unthrottled (no limit), this value should be set to $null. @@ -2377,7 +2381,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellMaxTenantRunspaces -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellMaxTenantRunspaces parameter specifies the number of concurrent Windows PowerShell sessions that a tenant is allowed to have. @@ -2395,7 +2399,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PowerShellRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PowerShellRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the user budget is charged (budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2413,7 +2417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PswsMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PswsMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections a Windows PowerShell Web Services user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until a response is sent in its entirety to the requestor. If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -2433,7 +2437,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PswsMaxRequest -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PswsMaxRequest parameter specifies how many requests a Windows PowerShell Web Services user can have against an Exchange server at one time. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2451,7 +2455,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PswsMaxRequestTimePeriod -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PswsMaxRequestTimePeriod parameter specifies the period of time, in seconds, that the throttling policy uses to determine how many requests can be run. The default setting is Unlimited. @@ -2469,7 +2473,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2487,7 +2491,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2505,7 +2509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationMaxBurstPerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2523,7 +2527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2541,7 +2545,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2559,7 +2563,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationRechargeRatePerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2577,7 +2581,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PushNotificationSamplingPeriodPerDevice -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2595,7 +2599,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for a user before that user is completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -2613,7 +2617,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that a user can consume an elevated amount of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2631,7 +2635,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RCAMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections an RPC Client Access user can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until the connection is closed or the connection is otherwise disconnected (for example, if the user goes offline). If users attempt to make more concurrent requests than their policy allows, the new connection attempt fails. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -2713,7 +2717,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the budget for the user is charged (how much the budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2731,7 +2735,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaSharedCutoffBalance parameter specifies the resource consumption limits for all users before they're completely blocked from performing operations on a specific component after all available resources have been consumed. There is no preset default value for this parameter but it generally ranges from 600,000 to 3,000,000 in working state depending on the protocol. If for any reason, this value needs to be increased further, you must contact Microsoft Support because a higher value can affect server performance adversely. @@ -2749,7 +2753,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaShardMaxBurst parameter specifies the amount of time that all users can consume elevated amounts of resources before being throttled. This is measured in milliseconds. This value is set separately for each component. @@ -2767,7 +2771,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaSharedMaxConcurrency parameter specifies how many concurrent connections all RPC Client Access users can have against an Exchange server at one time. A connection is held from the moment a request is received until the connection is closed or the connection is otherwise disconnected (for example, if users go offline). If there are more concurrent requests than the policy allows, new connection attempts fail. However, the existing connections remain valid. @@ -2787,7 +2791,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RcaSharedRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RcaSharedRechargeRate parameter specifies the rate at which the budget for all users is charged (how much the budget grows by) during the budget time. @@ -2805,7 +2809,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientRateLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientRateLimit parameter specifies the limits on the number of recipients that a user can address in a 24-hour period. @@ -2823,7 +2827,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesCutoffBalance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2841,7 +2845,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesMaxBurst -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2859,7 +2863,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesMaxConcurrency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2877,7 +2881,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SchedulesRechargeRate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2895,7 +2899,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicyScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThrottlingPolicyScope parameter specifies the scope of the throttling policy. You can use the following values: @@ -2919,7 +2923,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md index 9c9408f002..07e8f891fd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ You don't need to use the Set-ThrottlingPolicyAssociation cmdlet to associate a ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the object to which you want to associate a throttling policy. The object can be a user with a mailbox, a user without a mailbox, a contact, or a computer account. @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ThrottlingPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ThrottlingPolicy parameter specifies the throttling policy that you want the object specified by the Identity parameter to be associated with. @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportAgent.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportAgent.md index d41b3a6694..da20218a86 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportAgent.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportAgent.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This example modifies the priority of a fictitious agent named Test App in the F ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name (Identity property value) of the transport agent that you want to modify. If the name contains spaces, enclose the name in quotation marks ("). @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Priority parameter specifies the priority of the transport agent. The priority of the transport agent controls the order in which the transport agents process email messages. The priority must be a value between 0 and the maximum number of transport agents. The default behavior is to append a new transport agent to the end of the priority list. Transport agents with a priority closest to 0 process email messages first. @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportService -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransportService parameter specifies the transport service that you want to view or modify. Valid values for this parameter are: @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportConfig.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportConfig.md index b4837dae87..a084e229ad 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportConfig.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportConfig.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ To avoid journaling issues, we recommend that you set JournalingReportNdrTo to a ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddressBookPolicyRoutingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AddressBookPolicyRoutingEnabled parameter controls how recipients are resolved in an organization that uses address book policies to create separate virtual organizations within the same Exchange organization. Specifically, the global address list (GAL) that's specified in the user's address book policy controls how recipients are resolved. When the value of this parameter is $true, users that are assigned different GALs appear as external recipients. When the value of this parameter is $false, users that are assigned different GALs appear as internal recipients. @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentGeneratedMessageLoopDetectionInSubmissionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentGeneratedMessageLoopDetectionInSmtpEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ClearCategories -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ClearCategories parameter keeps or removes Microsoft Outlook message categories during content conversion. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. This means that by default, Outlook message categories are removed during content conversion. @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConvertDisclaimerWrapperToEml -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ConvertDisclaimerWrapperToEml parameter specifies whether the original message is added as a TNEF attachment or a regular EML attachment to a disclaimer when all of the following are true: @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DiagnosticsAggregationServicePort -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DSNConversionMode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The DSNConversionMode parameter controls how Exchange handles delivery status notifications (also known as DSNs, non-delivery reports, NDRs, or bounce messages) that are generated by earlier versions of Exchange or other email systems. Valid values are: @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDelayDsnEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalDelayDsnEnabled parameter specifies whether a delay delivery status notification (DSN) message should be created for external messages that couldn't be immediately delivered. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDsnDefaultLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalDsnDefaultLanguage parameter specifies which Exchange server language should be used by default when you create external DSN messages. The default value is the default Windows server language. @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDsnLanguageDetectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalDsnLanguageDetectionEnabled parameter specifies whether the server should try to send an external DSN message in the same language as the original message that generated the notification. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false.The default value is $true. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDsnMaxMessageAttachSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDsnReportingAuthority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalDsnReportingAuthority parameter specifies the domain in the machine-readable part of external DSN messages. The default value is blank ($null), which means the value is the authoritative domain that you specified during the creation of the organization. @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDsnSendHtml -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalDsnSendHtml parameter specifies whether external DSN messages should be HTML or plain text. Valid values are: @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalPostmasterAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The ExternalPostmasterAddress parameter specifies the email address in the From header field of an external DSN message. The default value is blank ($null). @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenerateCopyOfDSNFor -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderPromotionModeSetting -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HeaderPromotionModeSetting parameter specifies whether named properties are created for custom X-headers on messages received. Valid values are: @@ -589,7 +589,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDelayDsnEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalDelayDsnEnabled parameter specifies whether a delay DSN message should be created for messages sent to or from recipients or senders in the same Exchange organization that couldn't be immediately delivered. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDsnDefaultLanguage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalDsnDefaultLanguage parameter specifies which Exchange server language should be used by default when you create internal DSN messages. The default value is the default Windows server language. @@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDsnLanguageDetectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalDsnLanguageDetectionEnabled parameter specifies whether the server should try to send an internal DSN message in the same language as the original message that generated the notification. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $true. @@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDsnMaxMessageAttachSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDsnReportingAuthority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalDsnReportingAuthority parameter specifies the domain in the machine-readable part of internal DSN messages. The default value is blank ($null), which means the value is the authoritative domain that you specified during the creation of the organization. @@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDsnSendHtml -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The InternalDsnSendHtml parameter specifies whether internal DSN messages should be HTML or plain text. Valid values are: @@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalSMTPServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -JournalingReportNdrTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The JournalingReportNdrTo parameter specifies the email address to which journal reports are sent if the journaling mailbox is unavailable. By default, if this parameter is left empty, Exchange continues to try to deliver the journal report to the journaling mailbox. We recommended that you use a dedicated (non-user) mailbox as the value for this parameter. Like the journaling mailbox, the alternate journaling mailbox can't be an Exchange Online mailbox. @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAllowedAgentGeneratedMessageDepth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxAllowedAgentGeneratedMessageDepthPerAgent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -839,7 +839,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxDumpsterSizePerDatabase -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -875,7 +875,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxDumpsterTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -905,7 +905,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxReceiveSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -940,7 +940,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxRecipientEnvelopeLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The MaxRecipientEnvelopeLimit parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients in a message. Exchange treats an unexpanded distribution group as one recipient. @@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxRetriesForLocalSiteShadow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxRetriesForRemoteSiteShadow -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxSendSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1100,7 +1100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueDiagnosticsAggregationInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessageOnShadowFailure -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1227,7 +1227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Rfc2231EncodingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Rfc2231EncodingEnabled parameter specifies whether the RFC 2231 encoding of MIME parameters for outbound messages is enabled in your organization. Valid input for this parameter is $true or $false. The default value is $false. @@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SafetyNetHoldTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1269,7 +1269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowHeartbeatFrequency -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1293,7 +1293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowHeartbeatRetryCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1317,7 +1317,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowHeartbeatTimeoutInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1345,7 +1345,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowMessageAutoDiscardInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1369,7 +1369,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowMessagePreferenceSetting -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1395,7 +1395,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowRedundancyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1415,7 +1415,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ShadowResubmitTimeSpan -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1475,7 +1475,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SupervisionTags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TLSReceiveDomainSecureList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1527,7 +1527,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TLSSendDomainSecureList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1557,7 +1557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportRuleAttachmentTextScanLimit -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -VerifySecureSubmitEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1614,7 +1614,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -VoicemailJournalingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1634,7 +1634,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1652,7 +1652,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Xexch50Enabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportRule.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportRule.md index 51b8d54495..876e36276c 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportRule.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportRule.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ This example modifies the existing rule named Sales Team Disclaimer transport ru ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the rule that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the rule. For example: @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActivationDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ActivationDate parameter specifies when the rule starts processing messages. The rule doesn't take any action on messages until the specified date/time. @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADComparisonAttribute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ADComparisonOperator -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddManagerAsRecipientType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AddToRecipients -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfRecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -635,7 +635,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AnyOfToHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyHtmlDisclaimerFallbackAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyHtmlDisclaimerLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyHtmlDisclaimerText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ApplyRightsProtectionTemplate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentExtensionMatchesWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentHasExecutableContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentIsPasswordProtected -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -983,7 +983,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentIsUnsupported -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1040,7 +1040,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentNameMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentProcessingLimitExceeded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1089,7 +1089,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentPropertyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1130,7 +1130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AttachmentSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1164,7 +1164,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BetweenMemberOf1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1195,7 +1195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BetweenMemberOf2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1226,7 +1226,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BlindCopyTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -1257,7 +1257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Comments -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Comments parameter specifies optional descriptive text for the rule (for example, what the rule is used for, or how it has changed over time). The length of the comment can't exceed 1024 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1275,7 +1275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -1296,7 +1296,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentCharacterSetContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CopyTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DeleteMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -1376,7 +1376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Disconnect -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DlpPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note**: This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1421,7 +1421,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1443,7 +1443,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfADComparisonAttribute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfADComparisonOperator -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1522,7 +1522,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1557,7 +1557,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1592,7 +1592,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1618,7 +1618,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfRecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1644,7 +1644,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToCcHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1679,7 +1679,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToCcHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1714,7 +1714,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1749,7 +1749,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAnyOfToHeaderMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1784,7 +1784,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentExtensionMatchesWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1832,7 +1832,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentHasExecutableContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1859,7 +1859,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentIsPasswordProtected -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1884,7 +1884,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentIsUnsupported -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1915,7 +1915,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1941,7 +1941,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentNameMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1963,7 +1963,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentProcessingLimitExceeded -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -1990,7 +1990,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentPropertyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2031,7 +2031,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfAttachmentSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2063,7 +2063,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBetweenMemberOf1 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2094,7 +2094,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfBetweenMemberOf2 -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2125,7 +2125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfContentCharacterSetContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2149,7 +2149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFrom -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2182,7 +2182,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2206,7 +2206,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2232,7 +2232,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2265,7 +2265,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfFromScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2290,7 +2290,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2318,7 +2318,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasNoClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2343,7 +2343,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHasSenderOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2370,7 +2370,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2392,7 +2392,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2418,7 +2418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderMatchesMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2440,7 +2440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfHeaderMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2464,7 +2464,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfManagerAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2497,7 +2497,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfManagerForEvaluatedUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2524,7 +2524,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageContainsDataClassifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -2552,7 +2552,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2584,7 +2584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfMessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2616,7 +2616,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2674,7 +2674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2730,7 +2730,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2752,7 +2752,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2776,7 +2776,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfRecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2820,7 +2820,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSCLOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2847,7 +2847,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2905,7 +2905,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -2961,7 +2961,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3007,7 +3007,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderIpRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3037,7 +3037,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSenderManagementRelationship -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3062,7 +3062,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3093,7 +3093,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3122,7 +3122,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3149,7 +3149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3175,7 +3175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3197,7 +3197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3223,7 +3223,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfSubjectOrBodyMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3245,7 +3245,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExceptIfWithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3271,7 +3271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExpiryDate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an exception or part of an exception for the rule. The name of the corresponding condition parameter doesn't include the ExceptIf prefix. @@ -3293,7 +3293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -From -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3326,7 +3326,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3350,7 +3350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3376,7 +3376,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3409,7 +3409,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FromScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3434,7 +3434,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenerateIncidentReport -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3465,7 +3465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GenerateNotification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3498,7 +3498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3526,7 +3526,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasNoClassification -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3551,7 +3551,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HasSenderOverride -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3578,7 +3578,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3600,7 +3600,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3626,7 +3626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderMatchesMessageHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3648,7 +3648,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HeaderMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3672,7 +3672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IncidentReportContent -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3740,7 +3740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LogEventText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3770,7 +3770,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagerAddresses -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3803,7 +3803,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ManagerForEvaluatedUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3830,7 +3830,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageContainsDataClassifications -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -3860,7 +3860,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageSizeOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3892,7 +3892,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTypeMatches -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -3924,7 +3924,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Mode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Mode parameter specifies how the rule operates. Valid values are: @@ -3946,7 +3946,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerateMessageByManager -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -3973,7 +3973,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ModerateMessageByUser -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4006,7 +4006,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the display name of the transport rule to be created. The length of the name canThe Name parameter specifies the unique name of the rule. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -4024,7 +4024,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -NotifySender -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online **Note:** This parameter is functional only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -4060,7 +4060,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PrependSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4084,7 +4084,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Priority -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Priority parameter specifies a priority value for the rule that determines the order of rule processing. A lower integer value indicates a higher priority, the value 0 is the highest priority, and rules can't have the same priority value. @@ -4110,7 +4110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Quarantine -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4137,7 +4137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4195,7 +4195,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4251,7 +4251,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4273,7 +4273,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientAddressMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4320,7 +4320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4364,7 +4364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RedirectMessageTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4395,7 +4395,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessageEnhancedStatusCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4423,7 +4423,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RejectMessageReasonText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4455,7 +4455,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemoveHeader -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4580,7 +4580,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RouteMessageOutboundRequireTls -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -4605,7 +4605,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RuleErrorAction -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RuleErrorAction parameter specifies what to do if rule processing can't be completed on messages. Valid values are: @@ -4626,7 +4626,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RuleSubType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The RuleSubType parameter specifies the rule type. Valid values are: @@ -4647,7 +4647,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SCLOver -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4674,7 +4674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderADAttributeContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4732,7 +4732,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderADAttributeMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4788,7 +4788,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderAddressLocation -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SenderAddressLocation parameter specifies where to look for sender addresses in conditions and exceptions that examine sender email addresses. Valid values are: @@ -4818,7 +4818,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderDomainIs -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4864,7 +4864,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderIpRanges -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4894,7 +4894,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SenderManagementRelationship -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4919,7 +4919,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentTo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4950,7 +4950,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToMemberOf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -4983,7 +4983,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SentToScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5010,7 +5010,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetAuditSeverity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5037,7 +5037,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetHeaderName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5059,7 +5059,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetHeaderValue -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5081,7 +5081,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SetSCL -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5106,7 +5106,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpRejectMessageRejectStatusCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5130,7 +5130,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SmtpRejectMessageRejectText -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter is functional only on Edge Transport servers in on-premises Exchange. @@ -5154,7 +5154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StopRuleProcessing -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies an action or part of an action for the rule. @@ -5179,7 +5179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5205,7 +5205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5227,7 +5227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyContainsWords -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5253,7 +5253,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SubjectOrBodyMatchesPatterns -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. @@ -5275,7 +5275,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -5293,7 +5293,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WithImportance -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection This parameter specifies a condition or part of a condition for the rule. The name of the corresponding exception parameter starts with ExceptIf. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportServer.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportServer.md index 73dbb0b6d9..5fc2ac7ac3 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportServer.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportServer.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ This example sets the ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter to C:\\SMTP Protocol Logs ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Transport server that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum duration that the per user activity statistics log files are kept. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the cap on the size of the per user activity statistics log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The minimum value is 1 megabyte (MB). The default value is 250 MB. @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum file size for the per user activity statistics log files. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveUserStatisticsLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveUserStatisticsLogPath parameter specifies the location of per user activity statistics log storage. The default location depends on your version of Exchange: @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the agent log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the agent log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all agent logs in the agent log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each agent log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogPath parameter specifies the default agent log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\AgentLog. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables agent logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the AgentLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AntispamAgentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AntispamAgentsEnabled parameter specifies whether anti-spam agents are installed on the server specified with the Identity parameter. The default value is $false for the Transport service on Mailbox servers and $true on Edge servers. @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the connectivity log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the connectivity log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all connectivity logs in the connectivity log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 1000 MB. @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each connectivity log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogPath parameter specifies the default connectivity log directory location. The default location depends on your version of Exchange: @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentConversionTracingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ContentConversionTracingEnabled parameter specifies whether content conversion tracing is enabled. Content conversion tracing captures content conversion failures that occur in the Transport service on a Mailbox server or on the Edge server. The default value is $false. Content conversion tracing captures a maximum of 128 MB of content conversion failures. When the 128 MB limit is reached, no more content conversion failures are captured. Content conversion tracing captures the complete contents of messages to the path specified by the PipelineTracingPath parameter. Make sure that you restrict access to this directory. The permissions required on the directory specified by the PipelineTracingPath parameter are as follows: @@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DelayNotificationTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DelayNotificationTimeout parameter specifies how long the server waits before it generates a delayed delivery status notification (DSN) message. The default value is 4 hours. @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the DNS log is enabled. The default value is $false. @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the DNS log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all DNS logs in the DNS log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 100 MB. @@ -676,7 +676,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each DNS log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogPath parameter specifies the DNS log directory location. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates no location is configured. If you enable DNS logging, you need to specify a local file path for the DNS log files by using this parameter. If the path contains spaces, enclose the entire path value in quotation marks ("). @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter specifies one or more Domain Name System (DNS) servers that Exchange uses for external DNS lookups. When the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is set to $true, DNS lookups of destinations outside the Exchange organization are performed by using the DNS settings of the external network adapter specified by the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter. If you want to specify a custom list of DNS servers used for external Exchange DNS lookups only, you must specify the DNS servers by using the ExternalDNSServers parameter, and you must also set the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter to $false. The default value of the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is $true. @@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSAdapterGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter specifies the network adapter that has the DNS settings used for DNS lookups of destinations that exist outside the Exchange organization. The concept of an external network adapter and an internal network adapter is only applicable in a multi-homed Exchange server environment. When no particular network adapter is specified as the network adapter for external DNS lookups, the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000, and external DNS lookups are performed by using the DNS settings of any available network adapter. You might enter the GUID of a specific network adapter to use for external DNS lookups. The default value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000. @@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSProtocolOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSProtocolOption parameter specifies which protocol to use when querying external DNS servers. The valid options for this parameter are Any, UseTcpOnly, and UseUdpOnly. The default value is Any. @@ -800,7 +800,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSServers parameter specifies the list of external DNS servers that the server queries when resolving a remote domain. DNS servers are specified by IP address. The default value is an empty list ({}). @@ -824,7 +824,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalIPAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalIPAddress parameter specifies the IP address used in the Received message header field for every message that travels through the Edge server or the Transport service on a Mailbox server. The IP address in the Received header field is used for hop count and routing loop detection. The IP address specified by the ExternalIPAddress parameter overrides the external network adapter's actual IP address. Typically, you would want to set the value of the ExternalIPAddress parameter to match the value of your domain's public MX record. The default value of the ExternalIPAddress parameter is blank. This means the actual IP address of the external network adapter is used in the Received header field. @@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSAdapterEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter specifies one or more DNS servers that Exchange uses for internal DNS lookups. When the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is set to $true, DNS lookups of destinations inside the Exchange organization are performed by using the DNS settings of the internal network adapter specified by the value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter. If you want to specify a custom list of DNS servers used for internal Exchange DNS lookups only, you must specify the DNS servers by using the InternalDNSServers parameter, and you must also set the value of the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter to $false. The default value of the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is $true. @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSAdapterGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter specifies the network adapter that has the DNS settings used for DNS lookups of servers that exist inside the Exchange organization. The concept of an internal network adapter and an external network adapter is only applicable in a multi-homed Exchange server environment. When no particular network adapter is specified as the network adapter for external DNS lookups, the value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000, and internal DNS lookups are performed by using the DNS settings of any available network adapter. You might enter the GUID of a specific network adapter to use for internal DNS lookups. The default value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000. @@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSProtocolOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSProtocolOption parameter specifies which protocol to use when you query internal DNS servers. Valid options for this parameter are Any, UseTcpOnly, or UseUdpOnly. @@ -900,7 +900,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSServers parameter specifies the list of DNS servers that should be used when resolving a domain name. DNS servers are specified by IP address. The default value is any empty list ({}). @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IntraOrgConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IntraOrgConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel parameter enables or disables SMTP protocol logging on the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connectors that are used to transmit messages between Exchange servers in the Exchange organization. @@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IntraOrgConnectorSmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IntraOrgConnectorSmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of messages per connection limit on the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connectors that are used to transmit messages between Exchange servers in the Exchange organization. @@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IrmLogEnabled parameter enables logging of Information Rights Management (IRM) transactions. IRM logging is enabled by default. Values include: @@ -983,7 +983,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IrmLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the IRM log file. Log files that are older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This IrmLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all IRM logs in the connectivity log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -1035,7 +1035,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This IrmLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each IRM log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -1065,7 +1065,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IrmLogPath parameter specifies the default IRM log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%Logging\\IRMLogs. @@ -1085,7 +1085,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMailboxDeliveries -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentMailboxDeliveries parameter specifies the maximum number of delivery threads that the transport service can have open at the same time to deliver messages to mailboxes. The default value is 20. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 256. We recommend that you don't modify the default value unless Microsoft Customer Service and Support advises you to do this. @@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMailboxSubmissions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentMailboxSubmissions parameter specifies the maximum number of submission threads that the transport service can have open at the same time to send messages from mailboxes. The default value is 20. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 256. @@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionRatePerMinute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionRatePerMinute parameter specifies the maximum rate that connections are allowed to be opened with the transport service. If many connections are attempted with the transport service at the same time, the MaxConnectionRatePerMinute parameter limits the rate that the connections are opened so that the server's resources aren't overwhelmed. The default value is 1200 connections per minute. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 2147483647. @@ -1139,7 +1139,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxOutboundConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxOutboundConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of outbound connections that can be open at a time. The default value is 1000. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 2147483647. If you enter a value of unlimited, no limit is imposed on the number of outbound connections. The value of the MaxOutboundConnections parameter must be greater than or equal to the value of the MaxPerDomainOutboundConnections parameter. @@ -1157,7 +1157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxPerDomainOutboundConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxPerDomainOutboundConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections to any single domain. The default value is 40. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 2147483647. If you enter a value of unlimited, no limit is imposed on the number of outbound connections per domain. The value of the MaxPerDomainOutboundConnections parameter must be less than or equal to the value of the MaxOutboundConnections parameter. @@ -1175,7 +1175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageExpirationTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageExpirationTimeout parameter specifies the maximum time that a particular message can remain in a queue. If a message remains in the queue for longer than this period of time, the message is returned to the sender as a permanent failure. The default value is 2 days. @@ -1197,7 +1197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRetryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRetryInterval parameter specifies the retry interval for individual messages after a connection failure with a remote server. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -1219,7 +1219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogEnabled parameter specifies whether message tracking is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogMaxAge parameter specifies the message tracking log maximum file age. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -1259,7 +1259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the message tracking log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of the message tracking log files. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -1324,7 +1324,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogPath parameter specifies the location of the message tracking logs. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\MessageTracking. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables message tracking. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the MessageTrackingLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. The preferred method to disable message tracking is to use the MessageTrackingLogEnabled parameter. @@ -1342,7 +1342,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogSubjectLoggingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogSubjectLoggingEnabled parameter specifies whether the message subject should be included in the message tracking log. The default value is $true. @@ -1360,7 +1360,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutboundConnectionFailureRetryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutboundConnectionFailureRetryInterval parameter specifies the retry interval for subsequent connection attempts to a remote server where previous connection attempts have failed. The previously failed connection attempts are controlled by the TransientFailureRetryCount and TransientFailureRetryInterval parameters. For the Transport service on a Mailbox server, the default value of the OutboundConnectionFailureRetryInterval parameter is 10 minutes. On an Edge server, the default value is 30 minutes. @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PickupDirectoryMaxHeaderSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PickupDirectoryMaxHeaderSize parameter specifies the maximum message header size that can be submitted to the Pickup directory. The default value is 64 KB. @@ -1411,7 +1411,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PickupDirectoryMaxMessagesPerMinute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PickupDirectoryMaxMessagesPerMinute parameter specifies the maximum number of messages processed per minute by the Pickup directory and by the Replay directory. Each directory can independently process message files at the rate specified by the PickupDirectoryMaxMessagesPerMinute parameter. The default value is 100. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 20000. @@ -1429,7 +1429,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PickupDirectoryMaxRecipientsPerMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PickupDirectoryMaxRecipientsPerMessage parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients that can be included on an message. The default value is 100. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 10000. @@ -1447,7 +1447,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PickupDirectoryPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PickupDirectoryPath parameter specifies the location of the Pickup directory. The Pickup directory is used by administrators and non-Microsoft applications to create and submit messages. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Pickup. If the value of the PickupDirectoryPath parameter is set to $null, the Pickup directory is disabled. @@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable pipeline tracing. Pipeline tracing captures message snapshot files that record the changes made to the message by each transport agent configured in the transport service on the server. Pipeline tracing creates verbose log files that accumulate quickly. Pipeline tracing should only be enabled for a short time to provide in-depth diagnostic information that enables you to troubleshoot problems. In addition to troubleshooting, you can use pipeline tracing to validate changes that you make to the configuration of the transport service where you enable pipeline tracing. The default value is $false. @@ -1483,7 +1483,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingPath parameter specifies the location of the pipeline tracing logs. The default location depends on your version of Exchange: @@ -1514,7 +1514,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingSenderAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingSenderAddress parameter specifies the sender address that invokes pipeline tracing. Only messages from this address generate pipeline tracing output. The address can be either inside or outside the Exchange organization. Depending on your requirements, you might have to set this parameter to different sender addresses and send new messages to start the transport agents or routes that you want to test. The default value of this parameter is $null. @@ -1532,7 +1532,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PoisonMessageDetectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PoisonMessageDetectionEnabled parameter specifies whether poison messages should be detected. The default value is $true. Poison messages are messages determined to be potentially harmful to the Exchange system after a server failure. Poison messages are put in the poison message queue. We recommend that you don't modify the default value unless Customer Service and Support advises you to do this. @@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PoisonThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PoisonThreshold parameter specifies the number of times a message can be rejected before it's classified as a poison message. The default value is 2. We recommend that you don't modify the default value unless Customer Service and Support advises you to do this. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 10. @@ -1568,7 +1568,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueMaxIdleTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueMaxIdleTime parameter specifies the period of time an empty delivery queue can exist before the queue is removed. The default value is 3 minutes. @@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of the queue log files. Log files that are older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7 days. @@ -1612,7 +1612,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the queue log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 200 MB. @@ -1642,7 +1642,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of the queue log files. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -1672,7 +1672,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueLogPath parameter specifies the path of the queue log directory. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\QueueViewer. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables queue logging. @@ -1690,7 +1690,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of the Receive connector protocol log file. Log files that are older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -1712,7 +1712,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the Receive connector protocol log directory shared by all the Receive connectors that exist on the server. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -1742,7 +1742,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of the Receive connector protocol log files shared by all the Receive connectors that exist on the server. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -1772,7 +1772,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the path of the protocol log directory for all the Receive connectors that exist on the server. The default location depends on your version of Exchange: @@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientValidationCacheEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientValidationCacheEnabled parameter specifies whether the recipient addresses used by transport agents, such as the Recipient Filtering agent, are cached. The default value is $true on Edge servers and $false for the Transport service on Mailbox servers. @@ -1813,7 +1813,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplayDirectoryPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplayDirectoryPath parameter specifies the path of the Replay directory. The Replay directory is used to resubmit exported messages and to receive messages from foreign gateway servers. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Replay. If the value of the ReplayDirectoryPath parameter is set to $null, the Replay directory is disabled. @@ -1831,7 +1831,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RootDropDirectoryPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RootDropDirectoryPath parameter specifies the top-level location of the Drop directory used by all Foreign connectors defined in the Transport service on a Mailbox server. The value of the RootDropDirectoryPath parameter might be a local path, or a Universal Naming Convention (UNC) path to a remote server. By default, the RootDropDirectoryPath parameter is blank. This indicates the value of RootDropDirectoryPath is the Exchange installation folder. The RootDropDirectoryPath parameter is used with the DropDirectory parameter in the Set-ForeignConnector cmdlet to specify the location for outgoing messages going to the address spaces defined on the Foreign connector. @@ -1849,7 +1849,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum routing table log age. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7 days. @@ -1871,7 +1871,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the routing table log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 50 MB. @@ -1901,7 +1901,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogPath parameter specifies the directory location where routing table log files should be stored. The default location depends on your version of Exchange: @@ -1924,7 +1924,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the Send connector protocol log file maximum age. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -1946,7 +1946,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the Send connector protocol log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The minimum value is 1 MB. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -1976,7 +1976,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of the Send connector protocol log files shared by all the Send connectors that exist on a server. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -2006,7 +2006,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of protocol log storage for the Send connectors. The default location depends on your version of Exchange: @@ -2029,7 +2029,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerStatisticsLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010 and Exchange 2013 CU6 or earlier. @@ -2053,7 +2053,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerStatisticsLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010 and Exchange 2013 CU6 or earlier. @@ -2083,7 +2083,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerStatisticsLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010 and Exchange 2013 CU6 or earlier. @@ -2113,7 +2113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerStatisticsLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2010 and Exchange 2013 CU6 or earlier. @@ -2138,7 +2138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransientFailureRetryCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransientFailureRetryCount parameter specifies the maximum number of immediate connection retries attempted when the server encounters a connection failure with a remote server. The default value is 6. The valid input range for this parameter is from 0 through 15. When the value of this parameter is set to 0, the server doesn't immediately attempt to retry an unsuccessful connection, and the next connection attempt is controlled by the OutboundConnectionFailureRetryInterval parameter. @@ -2156,7 +2156,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransientFailureRetryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransientFailureRetryInterval parameter controls the connection interval between each connection attempt specified by the TransientFailureRetryCount parameter. For the Transport service on a Mailbox server, the default value of the TransientFailureRetryInterval parameter is 5 minutes. On an Edge server, the default value is 10 minutes. @@ -2178,7 +2178,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDowngradedExchangeServerAuth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseDowngradedExchangeServerAuth parameter specifies whether the Generic Security Services application programming interface (GSSAPI) authentication method is used on connections where Transport Layer Security (TLS) is disabled. @@ -2200,7 +2200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -2218,7 +2218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WlmLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2236,7 +2236,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WlmLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2254,7 +2254,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WlmLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2272,7 +2272,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WlmLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportService.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportService.md index 60535549df..1c8982c109 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportService.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-TransportService.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.TransportMailflow-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ This example sets the ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter to C:\\SMTP Protocol Logs ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Mailbox server that hosts the Transport service configuration you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum duration that the per user activity statistics log files are kept. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the cap on the size of the per user activity statistics log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The minimum value is 1 megabyte (MB). The default value is 250 MB. @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveUserStatisticsLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum file size for the per user activity statistics log files. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveUserStatisticsLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveUserStatisticsLogPath parameter specifies the location of per user activity statistics log storage. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\ActiveUsersStats. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables server statistics logging. @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the agent log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the agent log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all agent logs in the agent log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each agent log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AgentLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AgentLogPath parameter specifies the default agent log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\AgentLog. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables agent logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the AgentLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AntispamAgentsEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AntispamAgentsEnabled parameter specifies whether anti-spam agents are installed on the server specified with the Identity parameter. The default value is $false for the Transport service on Mailbox servers and $true on Edge Transport servers. @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the connectivity log is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the connectivity log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all connectivity logs in the connectivity log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 1000 MB. @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each connectivity log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConnectivityLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConnectivityLogPath parameter specifies the default connectivity log directory location. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\Connectivity. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables connectivity logging. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the ConnectivityLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ContentConversionTracingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ContentConversionTracingEnabled parameter specifies whether content conversion tracing is enabled. Content conversion tracing captures content conversion failures that occur in the Transport service on a Mailbox server or on the Edge Transport server. The default value is $false. Content conversion tracing captures a maximum of 128 MB of content conversion failures. When the 128 MB limit is reached, no more content conversion failures are captured. Content conversion tracing captures the complete contents of email messages to the path specified by the PipelineTracingPath parameter. Make sure that you restrict access to this directory. The permissions required on the directory specified by the PipelineTracingPath parameter are as follows: @@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DelayNotificationTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DelayNotificationTimeout parameter specifies how long the server waits before it generates a delayed delivery status notification (DSN) message. The default value is 4 hours. @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogEnabled parameter specifies whether the DNS log is enabled. The default value is $false. @@ -658,7 +658,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the DNS log file. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7.00:00:00 or 7 days. @@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all DNS logs in the DNS log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 100 MB. @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each DNS log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -740,7 +740,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DnsLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DnsLogPath parameter specifies the DNS log directory location. The default value is blank ($null), which indicates no location is configured. If you enable DNS logging, you need to specify a local file path for the DNS log files by using this parameter. If the path contains spaces, enclose the entire path value in quotation marks ("). @@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter specifies one or more Domain Name System (DNS) servers that Exchange uses for external DNS lookups. When the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is set to $true, DNS lookups of destinations outside the Exchange organization are performed by using the DNS settings of the external network adapter specified by the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter. If you want to specify a custom list of DNS servers used for external Exchange DNS lookups only, you must specify the DNS servers by using the ExternalDNSServers parameter, and you must also set the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter to $false. The default value of the ExternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is $true. @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSAdapterGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter specifies the network adapter that has the DNS settings used for DNS lookups of destinations that exist outside the Exchange organization. The concept of an external network adapter and an internal network adapter is only applicable in a multi-homed Exchange server environment. When no particular network adapter is specified as the network adapter for external DNS lookups, the value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000, and external DNS lookups are performed by using the DNS settings of any available network adapter. You might enter the GUID of a specific network adapter to use for external DNS lookups. The default value of the ExternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000. @@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSProtocolOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSProtocolOption parameter specifies which protocol to use when querying external DNS servers. The valid options for this parameter are Any, UseTcpOnly, and UseUdpOnly. The default value is Any. @@ -834,7 +834,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalDNSServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalDNSServers parameter specifies the list of external DNS servers that the server queries when resolving a remote domain. DNS servers are specified by IP address. The default value is an empty list ({}). @@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalIPAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalIPAddress parameter specifies the IP address used in the Received message header field for every message that travels through the Edge Transport server or the Transport service on a Mailbox server. The IP address in the Received header field is used for hop count and routing loop detection. The IP address specified by the ExternalIPAddress parameter overrides the external network adapter's actual IP address. Typically, you would want to set the value of the ExternalIPAddress parameter to match the value of your domain's public MX record. The default value of the ExternalIPAddress parameter is blank. This means the actual IP address of the external network adapter is used in the Received header field. @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSAdapterEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter specifies one or more DNS servers that Exchange uses for internal DNS lookups. When the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is set to $true, DNS lookups of destinations inside the Exchange organization are performed by using the DNS settings of the internal network adapter specified by the value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter. If you want to specify a custom list of DNS servers used for internal Exchange DNS lookups only, you must specify the DNS servers by using the InternalDNSServers parameter, and you must also set the value of the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter to $false. The default value of the InternalDNSAdapterEnabled parameter is $true. @@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSAdapterGuid -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter specifies the network adapter that has the DNS settings used for DNS lookups of servers that exist inside the Exchange organization. The concept of an internal network adapter and an external network adapter is only applicable in a multi-homed Exchange server environment. When no particular network adapter is specified as the network adapter for external DNS lookups, the value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000, and internal DNS lookups are performed by using the DNS settings of any available network adapter. You might enter the GUID of a specific network adapter to use for internal DNS lookups. The default value of the InternalDNSAdapterGuid parameter is 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000. @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSProtocolOption -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSProtocolOption parameter specifies which protocol to use when you query internal DNS servers. Valid options for this parameter are Any, UseTcpOnly, or UseUdpOnly.The default value is Any. @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalDNSServers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalDNSServers parameter specifies the list of DNS servers that should be used when resolving a domain name. DNS servers are specified by IP address. The default value is any empty list ({}). @@ -956,7 +956,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IntraOrgConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IntraOrgConnectorProtocolLoggingLevel parameter enables or disables SMTP protocol logging for the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the following transport services on the server: @@ -982,7 +982,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IntraOrgConnectorSmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IntraOrgConnectorSmtpMaxMessagesPerConnection parameter specifies the maximum number of messages per connection that are allowed on the implicit and invisible intra-organization Send connector in the Transport service on the server. @@ -1002,7 +1002,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IrmLogEnabled parameter enables logging of Information Rights Management (IRM) transactions. IRM logging is enabled by default. Values include: @@ -1023,7 +1023,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IrmLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age for the IRM log file. Log files that are older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -1045,7 +1045,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This IrmLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of all IRM logs in the connectivity log directory. When a directory reaches its maximum file size, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 250 MB. @@ -1075,7 +1075,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This IrmLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of each IRM log file. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IrmLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IrmLogPath parameter specifies the default IRM log directory location. The default value is %ExchangeInstallPath%IRMLogs. @@ -1125,7 +1125,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMailboxDeliveries -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentMailboxDeliveries parameter specifies the maximum number of delivery threads that the transport service can have open at the same time to deliver messages to mailboxes. The default value is 20. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 256. We recommend that you don't modify the default value unless Microsoft Customer Service and Support advises you to do this. @@ -1143,7 +1143,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConcurrentMailboxSubmissions -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConcurrentMailboxSubmissions parameter specifies the maximum number of submission threads that the transport service can have open at the same time to send messages from mailboxes. The default value is 20. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 256. @@ -1161,7 +1161,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxConnectionRatePerMinute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxConnectionRatePerMinute parameter specifies the maximum rate that connections are allowed to be opened with the transport service. If many connections are attempted with the transport service at the same time, the MaxConnectionRatePerMinute parameter limits the rate that the connections are opened so that the server's resources aren't overwhelmed. The default value is 1200 connections per minute. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 2147483647. @@ -1179,7 +1179,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxOutboundConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxOutboundConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of outbound connections that can be open at a time. The default value is 1000. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 2147483647. If you enter a value of unlimited, no limit is imposed on the number of outbound connections. The value of the MaxOutboundConnections parameter must be greater than or equal to the value of the MaxPerDomainOutboundConnections parameter. @@ -1197,7 +1197,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MaxPerDomainOutboundConnections -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MaxPerDomainOutboundConnections parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections to any single domain. The default value is 40. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 2147483647. If you enter a value of unlimited, no limit is imposed on the number of outbound connections per domain. The value of the MaxPerDomainOutboundConnections parameter must be less than or equal to the value of the MaxOutboundConnections parameter. @@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageExpirationTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageExpirationTimeout parameter specifies the maximum time that a particular message can remain in a queue. If a message remains in the queue for longer than this period of time, the message is returned to the sender as a permanent failure. The default value is 2 days. @@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageRetryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageRetryInterval parameter specifies the retry interval for individual messages after a connection failure with a remote server. The default value is 5 minutes. @@ -1259,7 +1259,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogEnabled parameter specifies whether message tracking is enabled. The default value is $true. @@ -1277,7 +1277,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogMaxAge parameter specifies the message tracking log maximum file age. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 30 days. @@ -1299,7 +1299,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the message tracking log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -1335,7 +1335,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of the message tracking log files. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -1364,7 +1364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogPath parameter specifies the location of the message tracking logs. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\MessageTracking. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables message tracking. However, setting this parameter to $null when the value of the MessageTrackingLogEnabled attribute is $true generates event log errors. The preferred method to disable message tracking is to use the MessageTrackingLogEnabled parameter. @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MessageTrackingLogSubjectLoggingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MessageTrackingLogSubjectLoggingEnabled parameter specifies whether the message subject should be included in the message tracking log. The default value is $true. @@ -1400,7 +1400,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OutboundConnectionFailureRetryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OutboundConnectionFailureRetryInterval parameter specifies the retry interval for subsequent connection attempts to a remote server where previous connection attempts have failed. The previously failed connection attempts are controlled by the TransientFailureRetryCount and TransientFailureRetryInterval parameters. For the Transport service on a Mailbox server, the default value of the OutboundConnectionFailureRetryInterval parameter is 10 minutes. On an Edge Transport server, the default value is 30 minutes. @@ -1422,7 +1422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PickupDirectoryMaxHeaderSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PickupDirectoryMaxHeaderSize parameter specifies the maximum message header size that can be submitted to the Pickup directory. The default value is 64 KB. @@ -1451,7 +1451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PickupDirectoryMaxMessagesPerMinute -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PickupDirectoryMaxMessagesPerMinute parameter specifies the maximum number of messages processed per minute by the Pickup directory and by the Replay directory. Each directory can independently process message files at the rate specified by the PickupDirectoryMaxMessagesPerMinute parameter. The default value is 100. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 20000. @@ -1469,7 +1469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PickupDirectoryMaxRecipientsPerMessage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PickupDirectoryMaxRecipientsPerMessage parameter specifies the maximum number of recipients that can be included on an email message. The default value is 100. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 10000. @@ -1487,7 +1487,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PickupDirectoryPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PickupDirectoryPath parameter specifies the location of the Pickup directory. The Pickup directory is used by administrators and non-Microsoft applications to create and submit messages. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Pickup. If the value of the PickupDirectoryPath parameter is set to $null, the Pickup directory is disabled. @@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable pipeline tracing. Pipeline tracing captures message snapshot files that record the changes made to the message by each transport agent configured in the transport service on the server. Pipeline tracing creates verbose log files that accumulate quickly. Pipeline tracing should only be enabled for a short time to provide in-depth diagnostic information that enables you to troubleshoot problems. In addition to troubleshooting, you can use pipeline tracing to validate changes that you make to the configuration of the transport service where you enable pipeline tracing. The default value is $false. @@ -1523,7 +1523,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingPath parameter specifies the location of the pipeline tracing logs. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\PipelineTracing. The path must be local to the Exchange server. @@ -1549,7 +1549,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PipelineTracingSenderAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PipelineTracingSenderAddress parameter specifies the sender email address that invokes pipeline tracing. Only messages from this address generate pipeline tracing output. The address can be either inside or outside the Exchange organization. Depending on your requirements, you might have to set this parameter to different sender addresses and send new messages to start the transport agents or routes that you want to test. The default value of this parameter is $null. @@ -1567,7 +1567,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PoisonMessageDetectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PoisonMessageDetectionEnabled parameter specifies whether poison messages should be detected. The default value is $true. Poison messages are messages determined to be potentially harmful to the Exchange system after a server failure. Poison messages are put in the poison message queue. We recommend that you don't modify the default value unless Customer Service and Support advises you to do this. @@ -1585,7 +1585,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PoisonThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PoisonThreshold parameter specifies the number of times a message can be rejected before it's classified as a poison message. The default value is 2. We recommend that you don't modify the default value unless Customer Service and Support advises you to do this. The valid input range for this parameter is from 1 through 10. @@ -1603,7 +1603,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of the queue log files. Log files that are older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7 days. @@ -1625,7 +1625,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the queue log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 200 MB. @@ -1655,7 +1655,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of the queue log files. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. The default value is 10 MB. @@ -1685,7 +1685,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueLogPath parameter specifies the path of the queue log directory. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\QueueViewer. Setting the value of this parameter to $null disables queue logging. @@ -1703,7 +1703,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -QueueMaxIdleTime -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The QueueMaxIdleTime parameter specifies the period of time an empty delivery queue can exist before the queue is removed. The default value is 3 minutes. @@ -1725,7 +1725,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file that's shared by all Receive connectors in the Transport service on the server. Log files that are older than the specified value are automatically deleted. @@ -1749,7 +1749,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory that's shared by all Receive connectors in the Transport service on the server. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -1783,7 +1783,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file that's shared by all Receive connectors in the Transport on the server. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -1817,7 +1817,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReceiveProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReceiveProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for all Receive connectors in the Transport service on the server. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpReceive. @@ -1837,7 +1837,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RecipientValidationCacheEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RecipientValidationCacheEnabled parameter specifies whether the recipient addresses used by transport agents, such as the Recipient Filtering agent, are cached. The default value is $true on Edge Transport servers and $false for the Transport service on Mailbox servers. @@ -1855,7 +1855,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ReplayDirectoryPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ReplayDirectoryPath parameter specifies the path of the Replay directory. The Replay directory is used to resubmit exported messages and to receive messages from foreign gateway servers. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Replay. If the value of the ReplayDirectoryPath parameter is set to $null, the Replay directory is disabled. @@ -1873,7 +1873,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestBrokerLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1891,7 +1891,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestBrokerLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1909,7 +1909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestBrokerLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1927,7 +1927,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestBrokerLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1945,7 +1945,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RequestBrokerLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1963,7 +1963,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1981,7 +1981,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -1999,7 +1999,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2017,7 +2017,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2035,7 +2035,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResourceLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2053,7 +2053,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RootDropDirectoryPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RootDropDirectoryPath parameter specifies the top-level location of the Drop directory used by all Foreign connectors defined in the Transport service on a Mailbox server. The value of the RootDropDirectoryPath parameter might be a local path, or a Universal Naming Convention (UNC) path to a remote server. By default, the RootDropDirectoryPath parameter is blank. This indicates the value of RootDropDirectoryPath is the Exchange installation folder. The RootDropDirectoryPath parameter is used with the DropDirectory parameter in the Set-ForeignConnector cmdlet to specify the location for outgoing messages going to the address spaces defined on the Foreign connector. @@ -2071,7 +2071,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum routing table log age. Log files older than the specified value are deleted. The default value is 7 days. @@ -2093,7 +2093,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the routing table log directory. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. The default value is 50 MB. @@ -2123,7 +2123,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RoutingTableLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The RoutingTableLogPath parameter specifies the directory location where routing table log files should be stored. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\Routing. Setting the value of the RoutingTableLogPath parameter to $null disables routing table logging. @@ -2141,7 +2141,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxAge parameter specifies the maximum age of a protocol log file that's shared by all Send connectors in the Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. Log files that are older than the specified value are automatically deleted. @@ -2165,7 +2165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxDirectorySize parameter specifies the maximum size of the protocol log directory that's shared by all Send connectors in the Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. When the maximum directory size is reached, the server deletes the oldest log files first. @@ -2199,7 +2199,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogMaxFileSize parameter specifies the maximum size of a protocol log file that's shared by all Send connectors in the Transport service that have this server configured as a source server. When a log file reaches its maximum file size, a new log file is created. @@ -2233,7 +2233,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SendProtocolLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SendProtocolLogPath parameter specifies the location of the protocol log directory for all Send connectors in the Transport service on the server. The default location is %ExchangeInstallPath%TransportRoles\\Logs\\Hub\\ProtocolLog\\SmtpSend. @@ -2256,7 +2256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerStatisticsLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2013 CU6 or earlier. @@ -2280,7 +2280,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerStatisticsLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2013 CU6 or earlier. @@ -2312,7 +2312,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerStatisticsLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2013 CU6 or earlier. @@ -2344,7 +2344,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ServerStatisticsLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is functional only in Exchange Server 2013 CU6 or earlier. @@ -2364,7 +2364,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransientFailureRetryCount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransientFailureRetryCount parameter specifies the maximum number of immediate connection retries attempted when the server encounters a connection failure with a remote server. The default value is 6. The valid input range for this parameter is from 0 through 15. When the value of this parameter is set to 0, the server doesn't immediately attempt to retry an unsuccessful connection, and the next connection attempt is controlled by the OutboundConnectionFailureRetryInterval parameter. @@ -2382,7 +2382,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransientFailureRetryInterval -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TransientFailureRetryInterval parameter controls the connection interval between each connection attempt specified by the TransientFailureRetryCount parameter. For the Transport service on a Mailbox server, the default value of the TransientFailureRetryInterval parameter is 5 minutes. On an Edge Transport server, the default value is 10 minutes. @@ -2404,7 +2404,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportHttpLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2422,7 +2422,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportHttpLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2440,7 +2440,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportHttpLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2458,7 +2458,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportHttpLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2476,7 +2476,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportHttpLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2494,7 +2494,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportMaintenanceLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2512,7 +2512,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportMaintenanceLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2530,7 +2530,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportMaintenanceLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2548,7 +2548,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportMaintenanceLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2566,7 +2566,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportMaintenanceLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2584,7 +2584,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncAccountsPoisonAccountThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2602,7 +2602,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncAccountsPoisonDetectionEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2620,7 +2620,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncAccountsPoisonItemThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2638,7 +2638,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncAccountsSuccessivePoisonItemThreshold -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2656,7 +2656,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2674,7 +2674,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncExchangeEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2692,7 +2692,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncHubHealthLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2710,7 +2710,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncHubHealthLogFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2728,7 +2728,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncHubHealthLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2746,7 +2746,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncHubHealthLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2764,7 +2764,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncHubHealthLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2782,7 +2782,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncImapEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2800,7 +2800,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncLogEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncLogFilePath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2836,7 +2836,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncLogLoggingLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2854,7 +2854,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2872,7 +2872,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2890,7 +2890,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2908,7 +2908,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncMaxDownloadItemsPerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2926,7 +2926,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncMaxDownloadSizePerConnection -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2944,7 +2944,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncMaxDownloadSizePerItem -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2962,7 +2962,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncPopEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2980,7 +2980,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TransportSyncRemoteConnectionTimeout -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -2998,7 +2998,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UseDowngradedExchangeServerAuth -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The UseDowngradedExchangeServerAuth parameter specifies whether the Generic Security Services application programming interface (GSSAPI) authentication method is used on connections where Transport Layer Security (TLS) is disabled. @@ -3020,7 +3020,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -3038,7 +3038,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsLiveHotmailTransportSyncEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -3056,7 +3056,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WlmLogMaxAge -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -3074,7 +3074,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WlmLogMaxDirectorySize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -3092,7 +3092,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WlmLogMaxFileSize -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -3110,7 +3110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WlmLogPath -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-User.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-User.md index cbb748981c..262220b5ea 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-User.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-User.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Performing this procedure on a linked mailbox removes all permissions on the mai ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Identity parameter specifies the user that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AllowUMCallsFromNonUsers -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Arbitration -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssistantName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AssistantName parameter specifies the name of the user's assistant. @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AuthenticationPolicy -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The AuthenticationPolicy parameter specifies the authentication policy to apply to the user. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the policy. For example: @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CertificateSubject -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -City -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The City parameter specifies the user's city. @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Company -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Company parameter specifies the user's company. @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CountryOrRegion -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The CountryOrRegion parameter specifies the user's country or region. A valid value is a valid ISO 3166-1 two-letter country code (for example, AU for Australia) or the corresponding friendly name for the country (which might be different from the official ISO 3166 Maintenance Agency short name). @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CreateDTMFMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Department -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Department parameter specifies the user's department. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The DisplayName parameter specifies the display name of the user. The display name is visible in the Exchange admin center and in Active Directory. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Fax -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Fax parameter specifies the user's fax number. @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -FirstName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The FirstName parameter specifies the user's first name. @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GeoCoordinates -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The GeoCoordinates parameter specifies the user's location in latitude, longitude and (optionally) altitude coordinates. A valid value for this parameter uses one of the following formats: @@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HomePhone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The HomePhone parameter specifies the user's home telephone number. @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Initials -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Initials parameter specifies the user's middle initials. @@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LastName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The LastName parameter specifies the user's last name. @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedCredential -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedDomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -LinkedMasterAccount -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -835,7 +835,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Manager -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Manager parameter specifies the user's manager. @@ -853,7 +853,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MobilePhone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The MobilePhone parameter specifies the user's primary mobile phone number. @@ -873,7 +873,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Name parameter specifies the unique name of the user. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -891,7 +891,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Notes -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Notes parameters specifies additional information about the object. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Office -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Office parameter specifies the user's physical office name or number. @@ -927,7 +927,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtherFax -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OtherFax parameter specifies the user's alternative fax number. @@ -945,7 +945,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtherHomePhone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OtherHomePhone parameter specifies the user's alternative home telephone number. @@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OtherTelephone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The OtherTelephone parameter specifies the user's alternative telephone number. @@ -981,7 +981,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Pager -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Pager parameter specifies the user's pager number. @@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PermanentlyClearPreviousMailboxInfo -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online This parameter is functional only in the cloud-based service. @@ -1023,7 +1023,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Phone -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Phone parameter specifies the user's office telephone number. @@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhoneticDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PhoneticDisplayName parameter specifies an alternate spelling of the user's name that's used for text to speech in Unified Messaging (UM) environments. Typically, you use this parameter when the pronunciation and spelling of the user's name don't match. The maximum length is 256 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -1061,7 +1061,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PostalCode -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PostalCode parameter specifies the user's zip code or postal code. @@ -1079,7 +1079,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PostOfficeBox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PostOfficeBox parameter specifies the user's post office box number. @@ -1097,7 +1097,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PublicFolder -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The PublicFolder switch is required to modify public folder mailboxes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -1117,7 +1117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RemotePowerShellEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection **Note**: In cloud-based environments, this parameter is being deprecated, so use the EXOModuleEnabled parameter instead. @@ -1166,7 +1166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ResetPasswordOnNextLogon -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The ResetPasswordOnNextLogon parameter specifies whether the user must change their password the next time they log on. Valid values are: @@ -1187,7 +1187,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SamAccountName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1207,7 +1207,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SeniorityIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SeniorityIndex parameter specifies the order in which this user is displayed in a hierarchical address book. A user with a value of 2 is displayed higher in an address book than a user with a value of 1. @@ -1225,7 +1225,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SimpleDisplayName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The SimpleDisplayName parameter is used to display an alternative description of the object when only a limited set of characters is permitted. Valid characters are: @@ -1249,7 +1249,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SkipDualWrite -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1269,7 +1269,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StateOrProvince -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The StateOrProvince parameter specifies the user's state or province. @@ -1287,7 +1287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StreetAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The StreetAddress parameter specifies the user's physical address. @@ -1327,7 +1327,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TelephoneAssistant -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1347,7 +1347,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Title -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The Title parameter specifies the user's title. @@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMCallingLineIds -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1385,7 +1385,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UMDtmfMap -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1417,7 +1417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -UserPrincipalName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -1462,7 +1462,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WebPage -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WebPage parameter specifies the user's Web page. @@ -1480,7 +1480,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WhatIf switch doesn't work on this cmdlet. @@ -1498,7 +1498,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsEmailAddress -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online, Exchange Online Protection The WindowsEmailAddress parameter specifies the Windows email address for this recipient. This is a common Active Directory attribute that's present in all environments, including environments without Exchange. Using the WindowsEmailAddress parameter on a recipient has one of the following results: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-UserPhoto.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-UserPhoto.md index 52522938ff..b9c4c20062 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-UserPhoto.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-UserPhoto.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ This example deletes the preview photo that was uploaded in the previous example ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the identity of the user. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the user. For example: @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Cancel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Cancel switch deletes the current preview photo. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PictureData -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PictureData parameter specifies the photo file to upload to the user's account. @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PictureStream -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The PictureStream parameter specifies the photo to upload to the user's account. This parameter is used by client applications such as Outlook on the web when users add a photo. To upload a photo using PowerShell, use the PictureData parameter to specify the photo file. @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Preview -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Preview switch uploads a preview photo for the user account. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Save -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Save switch specifies the uploaded photo is saved as the user's photo. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GroupMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GroupMailbox switch is required to modify Microsoft 365 Groups. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -IgnoreDefaultScope -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The IgnoreDefaultScope switch tells the command to ignore the default recipient scope setting for the Exchange PowerShell session, and to use the entire forest as the scope. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -PhotoType -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md index f96a79084a..af15a221bb 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-WebServicesVirtualDirectory.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ This example enables MRSProxy on the EWS default website. MRSProxy is the servic ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the EWS virtual directory that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the virtual directory. For example: @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -BasicAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The BasicAuthentication parameter specifies whether Basic authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -CertificateAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The CertificateAuthentication parameter specifies whether certificate authentication is enabled. This parameter affects the `/ews/management/` virtual directory. It doesn't affect the `/ews/` virtual directory. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DigestAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DigestAuthentication parameter specifies whether Digest authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionFlags -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionFlags parameter specifies custom settings for Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionSPNList -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionSPNList parameter specifies a list of valid Service Principal Names (SPNs) if you're using Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExtendedProtectionTokenChecking parameter defines how you want to use Extended Protection for Authentication on the virtual directory. Extended Protection for Authentication isn't enabled by default. Valid values are: @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ExternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ExternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from outside the firewall. @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -GzipLevel -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The GzipLevel parameter sets the Gzip configuration for the Exchange Web Services virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalNLBBypassUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE **Note:** This parameter applies only to Exchange 2010. By default, Exchange 2013 or later already has the InternalNLBBypassUrl value configured on the backend Exchange Web Services (EWS) virtual directory on Mailbox servers. @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -InternalUrl -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The InternalURL parameter specifies the URL that's used to connect to the virtual directory from inside the firewall. @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MRSProxyEnabled -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MRSProxyEnabled parameter specifies whether to enable MRSProxy for the Exchange Web Services virtual directory on Exchange servers that have the Client Access server role installed. MRSProxy helps to proxy mailbox moves between Active Directory forests. The default value is $false. @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -OAuthAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The OAuthAuthentication parameter specifies whether OAuth authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WindowsAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WindowsAuthentication parameter specifies whether Integrated Windows authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WSSecurityAuthentication -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WSSecurityAuthentication parameter specifies whether WS-Security (Web Services Security) authentication is enabled on the virtual directory. Valid values are: diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md index 1cd18367dd..3091a8391f 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Set-X400AuthoritativeDomain.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ This example makes the following changes to an existing X.400 authoritative doma ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the X.400 authoritative domain that you want to modify. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the domain. For example: @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Name -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Name parameter specifies the unique name for the X.400 authoritative domain. The maximum length is 64 characters. If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in quotation marks ("). @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -X400DomainName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The X400DomainName parameter specifies the X.400 namespace that can only include the X.400 organizational components. Specifically, only the following attribute types are supported: @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -X400ExternalRelay -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The X400ExternalRelay parameter specifies whether this authoritative domain is an external relay domain. If you set the X400ExternalRelay parameter to $true, Exchange routes to the external address and doesn't treat resolution failures to this subdomain as errors. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-ComplianceSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-ComplianceSearch.md index 2d08dc0fc9..69a49182af 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-ComplianceSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-ComplianceSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This example starts the compliance search named Case 1234 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search that you want to start. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -RetryOnError -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The RetryOnError switch specifies whether to retry the search on any items that failed without re-running the entire search all over again. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf parameter doesn't work in the Microsoft Purview compliance portal. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index d2675e5692..fedd062276 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ This example starts the members of the DAG DAG1 in the Active Directory site Red ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG being started. @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveDirectorySite -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveDirectorySite parameter specifies whether to start all DAG members in the specified site. @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxServer parameter specifies whether to start a single DAG member. @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationOnly switch specifies whether to update the Active Directory properties with the start action, but doesn't perform a start of the DAG or any members. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-EdgeSynchronization.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-EdgeSynchronization.md index f3be145a64..942cf46484 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-EdgeSynchronization.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-EdgeSynchronization.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RemoteConnections-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example starts edge synchronization on the Mailbox server named Mailbox01. ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceFullSync -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceFullSync switch specifies whether to initiate a full edge synchronization. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ForceUpdateCookie -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ForceUpdateCookie switch specifies whether to force the Microsoft Exchange EdgeSync service to update the replication cookie even if it encounters an error. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Server -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Server parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -TargetServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The TargetServer parameter specifies an Edge Transport server to initiate edge synchronization with. If omitted, all Edge Transport servers are synchronized. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MailboxAssistant.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MailboxAssistant.md index cb4f85e871..1af287cc35 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MailboxAssistant.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MailboxAssistant.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RolesAndAccess-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example starts the `BigFunnelRetryFeederTimeBasedAssistant` assistant and l ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the user whose mailbox should be processed by the Mailbox Assistant. Valid values are: @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AssistantName -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The AssistantName parameter specifies the assistant that should process the mailbox. Valid values are: @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Parameters -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is reserved for internal Microsoft use. @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -SoftDeletedMailbox -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The SoftDeletedMailbox switch specifies that the mailbox to be processed by the assistant is a soft-deleted mailbox. @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MailboxSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MailboxSearch.md index a547ae884e..4da8c127b8 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MailboxSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MailboxSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This example starts the mailbox search ProjectContoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the search. The name is referenced when starting, stopping, or removing the search. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Force -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Force switch hides warning or confirmation messages. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Resume -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Resume switch resumes a stopped, failed, or partially succeeded search from the point it stopped. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -StatisticsStartIndex -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The StatisticsStartIndex parameter is used by the EAC to retrieve keyword statistics in a paged operation. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-ManagedFolderAssistant.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-ManagedFolderAssistant.md index 46ebde84f6..c3b0d8267e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-ManagedFolderAssistant.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-ManagedFolderAssistant.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ This example uses the Get-Mailbox command to retrieve all the mailboxes that res ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the mailbox to be processed. In cross-premises deployments, you can also specify a mail user who has a mailbox in the cloud. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the mailbox or mail user. For example: @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -AggMailboxCleanup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The AggMailboxCleanup switch specifies aggregate mailbox cleanup. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -HoldCleanup -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The HoldCleanup switch instructs the Managed Folder Assistant to clean up duplicate versions of items in the Recoverable Items folder that might have been created when a mailbox is on In-Place Hold, Litigation Hold, or has Single Item Recovery enabled. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MigrationBatch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MigrationBatch.md index 2057afd43e..50807eac36 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MigrationBatch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MigrationBatch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This example starts the migration batch SEM1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter identifies the migration batch that you want to start. Use the migration batch Name parameter as the value for this parameter. Use the Get-MigrationBatch cmdlet to identify the name of the migration batch. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Validate -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MigrationUser.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MigrationUser.md index 2a837896b8..59b9123568 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MigrationUser.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Start-MigrationUser.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ This example starts the migration of the user named laura@contoso.com ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the email address of the user that's being migrated. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-ComplianceSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-ComplianceSearch.md index 2d60f04091..50dc351ba7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-ComplianceSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-ComplianceSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ This example stops the active compliance search named Case 1234 ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Identity parameter specifies the compliance search that you want to stop. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Security & Compliance +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Security & Compliance The WhatIf switch doesn't work in Security & Compliance PowerShell. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md index 3731c78feb..fd68e66f9e 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ServerStatus-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This example stops the Mailbox server MBX3, which is currently offline, in the D ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the name of the DAG being stopped. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ActiveDirectorySite -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ActiveDirectorySite parameter specifies the Active Directory site containing the DAG members to stop (for example, stop all DAG members in a particular Active Directory site). @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -MailboxServer -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The MailboxServer parameter specifies a single DAG member to stop. If Datacenter Activation Coordination mode is enabled for the DAG and all DAG members are in the same Active Directory site, use the MailboxServer parameter to stop individual DAG members instead of the ActiveDirectorySite parameter when stopping failed DAG members. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -ConfigurationOnly -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The ConfigurationOnly switch updates the Active Directory properties with the stop action, but doesn't perform a stop of the DAG or any members. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-MailboxSearch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-MailboxSearch.md index ddfbcd46a5..3033128657 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-MailboxSearch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-MailboxSearch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ This example stops the mailbox search Project Contoso. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter specifies the name of the mailbox search. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-ManagedFolderAssistant.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-ManagedFolderAssistant.md index da5e553d14..24ece5e1b7 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-ManagedFolderAssistant.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-ManagedFolderAssistant.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.RecordsandEdge-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This example stops the Managed Folder Assistant on the servers ExchSrvr1 and Exc ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Identity parameter specifies the Exchange server where you want to run this command. You can use any value that uniquely identifies the server. For example: @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The DomainController parameter specifies the domain controller that's used by this cmdlet to read data from or write data to Active Directory. You identify the domain controller by its fully qualified domain name (FQDN). For example, dc01.contoso.com. @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2010, Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch. diff --git a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-MigrationBatch.md b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-MigrationBatch.md index 56da49cbe3..f4acf68ecd 100644 --- a/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-MigrationBatch.md +++ b/exchange/exchange-ps/ExchangePowerShell/Stop-MigrationBatch.md @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ --- -applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online author: chrisda external help file: Microsoft.Exchange.ProvisioningAndMigration-Help.xml Locale: en-US @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ This example stops the migration batch MigrationBatch1. ### -Identity -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Identity parameter identifies the name of the current migration batch. The value for this parameter is specified by the Name parameter of the New-MigrationBatch cmdlet. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -Confirm -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The Confirm switch specifies whether to show or hide the confirmation prompt. How this switch affects the cmdlet depends on if the cmdlet requires confirmation before proceeding. @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -DomainController -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019 +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE This parameter is available only in on-premises Exchange. @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Accept wildcard characters: False ### -WhatIf -> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Online +> Applicable: Exchange Server 2013, Exchange Server 2016, Exchange Server 2019, Exchange Server SE, Exchange Online The WhatIf switch simulates the actions of the command. You can use this switch to view the changes that would occur without actually applying those changes. You don't need to specify a value with this switch.